JP2020195838A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of enhancing a player's interest in a game.SOLUTION: The game machine includes: period setup means for setting up a first period as a period from establishment of a prescribed condition until ball passage detection means detects a ball; notification timing setup means for setting up notification timing for notifying of a specific performance mode on the basis of the first period set by the period setup means; performance notification means for notifying of a specific performance mode at the notification timing set up by the notification timing setup means; period specification means for specifying a passage period from the establishment of the prescribed condition until the ball passage notification means detects the ball; period discrimination means for discriminating the passage period specified by the period specification means from the first period set up by the period setup means; and period correction means for correcting the first period set up by the period setup means on the basis of the discrimination result by the period discrimination means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 1

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in order to inform the player of the flow status of the game ball in an easy-to-understand manner, an effect corresponding to the period in which the game ball flows down is executed. In this conventional game machine, since the flow status of the game ball can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner, it is possible to entertain the player with the game based on the notification content (effect content). As a result, the interest was improved.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2011-23516

However, further improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the gaming machine according to claim 1 includes a ball path through which the ball can pass, a ball passage detecting means for detecting that the ball has passed a specific position among the ball paths, and a ball passage detecting means. Based on the period setting means for setting the first period as the period from the establishment of the predetermined condition to the detection of the ball by the ball passage detecting means and the first period set for the period setting means, the specific effect The notification timing setting means for setting the notification timing for notifying the mode, the effect notification means for notifying the specific effect mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means, and the ball passing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Period determination for determining the period specifying means for specifying the passing period until the detecting means detects the ball, the passing period specified by the period specifying means, and the first period set by the period setting means. It has means and a period correction means for correcting the first period set in the period setting means based on the determination result by the period determination means.

The gaming machine according to claim 2 is the gaming machine according to claim 1, and the specific effect mode notified by the effect notification means suggests that the ball passes through the specific position.

The gaming machine according to claim 3 is a ball passing determining means for determining that a ball has passed a predetermined position on the upstream side of the specific position in the ball path in the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2. The predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined by the ball passage determining means that the ball has passed the predetermined position.

The gaming machine according to claim 4 is the gaming machine according to claim 3, wherein the ball path is a section between the first ball path provided with the specific position and the predetermined position and the specific position. It has a second ball path that branches off from the one ball path.

The gaming machine according to claim 5 is the first state in which a ball passing through the ball path is likely to pass through the first ball path in the gaming machine according to claim 4, and the second ball is more likely than the first state. A variable means capable of changing the path state of the ball path to a second state in which the path is easily passed, and a ball passing through the predetermined position based on the path state of the ball path variable by the variable means are described. The first ball has a path state determining means for determining whether or not the path state can pass through the first ball path, and the effect notification means is such that the ball that the path state determining means has passed through the predetermined position is the first ball. When it is determined that the route can pass through the route, the specific effect mode is notified.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 1, a predetermined condition is satisfied, that is, a ball path through which the ball can pass, a ball passage detecting means for detecting that the ball has passed a specific position in the ball path, and a ball passage detecting means. A notification for notifying a specific effect mode based on a period setting means that sets a first period as a period from when the ball passage detecting means detects a ball and the first period set in the period setting means. The notification timing setting means for setting the timing, the effect notification means for notifying the specific effect mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means, and the ball passage detecting means for detecting the ball after the predetermined condition is satisfied. A period specifying means for specifying a passing period until detection, a period determining means for discriminating between the passing period specified by the period specifying means and the first period set by the period setting means, and a period thereof. It has a period correction means for correcting the first period set in the period setting means based on the determination result by the determination means.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 2, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 1, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the specific effect mode notified by the effect notification means suggests that the sphere passes through the specific position.

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 3, in addition to the effect played by the gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, the following effects are exhibited. That is, it has a ball passage determining means for determining that the ball has passed a predetermined position on the upstream side of the specific position in the ball path, and the ball has passed through the predetermined position by the ball passing determining means. When it is determined that the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied.

As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the situation of the ball passing through the ball path, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 4, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 3, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the ball path has a first ball path provided with the specific position and a second ball path branching from the first ball path in a section between the predetermined position and the specific position. ..

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

According to the gaming machine according to claim 5, in addition to the effects played by the gaming machine according to claim 4, the following effects are exhibited. That is, the path state of the ball path is divided into a first state in which a ball passing through the ball path is more likely to pass through the first ball path and a second state in which the ball is more likely to pass through the second ball path than the first state. Based on the variable means that can change and the path state of the ball path that is variable by the variable means, it is determined whether the ball that has passed the predetermined position is in the path state that can pass through the first ball path. The effect notification means includes a path state determining means, and when the path state determining means determines that a sphere that has passed the predetermined position is in a path state capable of passing through the first ball path, the above-mentioned It notifies a specific production mode.

This has the effect of enhancing the effect of production.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is an enlarged front view of the lower right region (part III in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a case where an upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage device, and (b) is a state in which the first storage device is released and the movable valve is in an induced state (). It is a schematic diagram which shows the case which became the protruding state). (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device is in the released state and the movable valve is in the regulated state (buried state), and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the case where the first storage device is in the storage state. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the case where the second storage device is in the released state. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the storage valve solenoid when the first storage device is in the released state and the second storage device is in the storage state, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the storage valve solenoid when the first storage device is in the storage state. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation of the storage valve solenoid when the 2nd storage device is in the released state. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart which showed the relationship between the operation of the 2nd frame button (release button) and various devices. It is a timing chart which shows the point which sets the timing to operate the 2nd frame button (release button) in the timing effect (operation effect). (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and (b) is the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the display contents in the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of a special symbol. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of a jackpot confirmation display screen. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of setting the display position of the display pointer based on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance and the music information executed in the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content of the difficulty level selection screen which selects the difficulty level to be executed in the 1st round of a jackpot game. (A) is a schematic view showing a shielding state of the cover member, and FIG. 18B is a schematic view showing a permeation state of the cover member. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation / time saving table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the chance table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario table. It is a figure which showed the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of RAM in a main control unit. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the movable valve operation scenario schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the music information storage area schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the through gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the storage control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the storage valve operation processing which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the movable valve control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the movable valve state command processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the storage device-related processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit middle effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passage monitoring process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the lamp output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the timing effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot timing effect preset processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a normal timing effect executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the preset process. It is a flowchart which showed the timing effect common setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the timing effect correction process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the movable valve operation counter update processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is an enlarged front view of the lower right region (part III in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the modified example of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the first frame button and the second frame button in a plan view, and (b) is a schematic view showing an interlocking operation configuration of the first frame button and the second frame button. (A) is a schematic view showing a state in which the first frame button is pressed in the released state in which the interlocking means is buried, and (b) is a schematic view showing the state in which the first frame button is pressed in the interlocking state in which the interlocking means is protruding. It is a schematic diagram which showed the pressed state. It is a schematic diagram which showed the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modified example of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a player operates the frame button unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of the frame button unit. (A) is a schematic view showing a state in which the frame button unit is operated (pressed) in a state where the pressing operation of the second frame button is restricted among the frame button units, and (b) is a schematic view showing a state in which the frame button unit is operated (pressed). It is a schematic diagram which showed the state which operated (pressed) the frame button unit in the state which the pressing operation of the 2nd frame button was canceled. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is provided in the lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 is a front view showing the inside of the board unit 700, FIGS. 4 and 5 are schematic views showing the ball flow inside the board unit 700, and FIG. 6 is a storage valve solenoid provided in the board unit 700. FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing the operation of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, a first entry port 64, a second entry opening 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device 65, etc. can be attached and detached from the front side. It is attached to. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 19) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. A metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate have the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The unit 15 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. .. On the other hand, on the right side of the lower plate unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball launching unit 112a is driven. The touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by the change in the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A first frame button (effect button) 22a is provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15, and a second frame button (release button) 22b is provided at the upper part of the lower plate. The first frame button 22a is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later is changed, and the second frame button 22b is stored, for example, described later. It is operated by the player when the storage state of the devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is released. In this way, by arranging a plurality of frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) that can be operated by the player on the central portion and the left side of the pachinko machine 10, they are arranged on the right side of the pachinko machine 10. Even when the provided operation handle 51 is being operated (a state in which the player is operating the operation handle with his right hand), the frame button can be easily operated.

Further, in the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball pulling lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general ball entrance 63, and a number of balls. It is configured by assembling one ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general ball entry port 63, the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game is played. It is fixed from the front side of the board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out opening 66 and the winning opening (entry opening).

In the pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left side when viewed from the front of the game board 13) is formed as a left game area and the right side is a right game area, and a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the left game area (hereinafter, In the left-handed game (referred to as a left-handed game), a game in which a ball is inserted into a general entrance 63 or a first ball entrance 64 is performed, and a ball is launched aiming at a right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). ), The fired ball passes above the variable display device unit 80, and a game is performed aiming at the board unit 700 provided in the right game area. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the player is made to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state, thereby suppressing the game from becoming monotonous. A detailed description of each game state and the board unit 700 provided in the right game area will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 19) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a through gate (normal). When passing through the ball entrance) 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are three types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" to "big hit C". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game is based on the result of the jackpot game. Value (game value) is given to the player. The three types of "big hits A to C" are determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is a jackpot type to be obtained, and a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a lottery of the first special symbol) executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the ball goes to the second entrance 640. The lottery (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol lottery), which is executed when the ball is entered, is configured so that the ratio selected when a big hit is won is different.

When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and the lottery result is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is determined for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate (ordinary entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is opened. Be released. In the normal state, since the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol can be easily drawn.

Further, when a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the second symbol display device 83 starts variable display of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 30 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery is performed. The normal symbol showing the result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol. It is displayed by the display device 37 and also displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate (normal entrance) 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. The variable display is started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, three types of "big hit A" to "big hit C" are provided. When "Big hit A" and "Big hit C" are reached, the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16 rounds big hit). On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit B", it becomes a special game state (8 rounds big hit) in which the number of rounds is 8 rounds. In addition, when it becomes "big hit B" and "big hit C", it shifts to a high probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol) in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes high after the jackpot ends. In the gaming state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is also high, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, that is, it is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a to be operated is opened, and a state (time saving state) in which the ball can be easily entered into the second entry port 640 is also provided. The high-probability state and the time-saving state of this special symbol continue until the next jackpot is won. On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit A", only the above-mentioned time saving state is given after the big hit ends. In this case, the time saving state continues from the end of the jackpot until the change of the special symbol ends 100 times (until the 101st change starts).

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). In addition, in the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol high probability state), the winning probability of the normal symbol increases and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It refers to an easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time saving state", it is called the "normal symbol normal state" (normal symbol low probability state), which means that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than the normal state, that is, during the time saving. Indicates a state in which the probability of hitting is low.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the normal symbol time reduction period.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 8 rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol is shortened" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened", the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the electric accessory is released by hitting one ordinary symbol. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the privilege to be given after the end of the jackpot is determined depending on the type of the jackpot. A probabilistic state of a special symbol or a time saving state of a normal symbol may be given. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won, but the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is a predetermined number of times (similar to the time saving state of the normal symbol). For example, the probability change state of the special symbol continues only until it reaches 100 times), or the lottery that shifts (falls) from the probability change state of the special symbol to the normal state of the special symbol is performed every time the change of the special symbol is started. The probabilistic state of the special symbol may continue until it is executed and the lottery is won. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given during the probabilistic state of the special symbol, but the gaming state (so-called latent state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given even during the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Probability change state) may be provided.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of times is held up to 4 times for each entry port, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be set to be held until the total number of balls entered into the plurality of entrances reaches the upper limit (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot, an error display, and the like. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (special symbol according to the jackpots A to D). (1st symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general entry ports 63 are provided in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right can be displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a planer, a furoshiki, and a helmet that almost fills the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters the ball. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image. Further, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the types of special symbols (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in which the lottery is easily executed are configured differently depending on the gaming state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is easy to execute in the current gaming state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to execute in the current gaming state is executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed with respect to the small area Ds3 on the right. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice production will be performed by appearing.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and , If a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is being performed, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is It is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls with respect to the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed in the lower half (second reserved ball number symbol). The number of reserved balls symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Return to FIG. 2 and continue the explanation. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of ordinary symbols, which is performed when the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary entry port) 67, is being executed by a lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, the normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through either the left or right through gate (normal entry port) 67, the symbol “○” as the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed. A variable display is performed in which the "x" symbol is alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also on the second symbol holding lamp 84. It is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, but is 3 times or less, or 3 times or less, as in the case of the 1st ball entrance 64 and the 2nd ball entrance 640. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The first ball entry port 64 is when the ball is launched into the path on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed game is performed), and when the right-handed game is performed. It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball.

On the other hand, the board unit 700 is arranged below the right side area of the game board area. This board unit includes a through gate (normal entry port) 67, a second entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a specific general entry port 630, and a storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device). 771) is arranged (see FIG. 3). A cover member 710 is provided on a part of the board surface unit 700 so that the specific flow path (the flow path through which the ball stored in the storage device flows down) in the board surface unit 700 becomes difficult to see from the outside. It is configured.

Here, the board unit 700 arranged in the lower right region of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the lower right region of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 700 includes an inflow port 700a opened upward so that a ball flowing down the right game area of the game board 13 can flow in, and a ball flowing in from the inflow port 700a. Among them, a flow in which balls that have not entered each of the ball entry ports (specific general ball entry port 630, second ball entry port 640, specific winning opening 65a) provided in the board surface unit are discharged to the outside of the board surface unit 700. It is a box-shaped unit body having an outlet 700b.

In the board unit 700, a through gate (normal entry port) 67 is provided below the inflow port 700a, and most of the balls flowing into the board unit 700 from the inflow port 700a are through gates (normal entry balls). It is configured to pass through the mouth) 67. An electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is arranged below the through gate 67, and a ball flowing down the distribution flow path 700d formed on the left side of the electric accessory 640a enters the ball. A variable winning device 65 and a base unit 760 are arranged at possible positions. A specific general entry port 630 is arranged at a position where a ball flowing down the storage flow path 700e formed on the upper surface of the base unit 760 can enter. When a ball enters the specific general entrance 630, 15 prize balls, which are more than the general entrance, are paid out.

Next, various devices provided in the board unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, the first flow path 641b and the second flow path 642b are provided as flow paths for guiding the ball to the second entry port 640, in order to allow the ball to flow into the first flow path 641b. The first opening 641a and the second opening 642a for allowing the ball to flow into the second flow path 642b are in an open state in which the ball can be received, and in a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to receive than in the open state. An electric accessory 640a is provided so as to be variable.

Further, the electric accessory 640a is formed so that a sphere can flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a when it is closed, and the first opening 641a is formed on the upstream side of the flow path. It is configured to cover the second opening 642a on the downstream side. The electric accessory 640a is composed of a single plate-shaped member driven by a driving means (solenoid or the like) (not shown), and when the electric accessory is changed to an open state by the driving means, the first opening 641a and the second opening 641a and the second. When all of the opening 642a is in the open state and can be changed to the closed state, both the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a are in the closed state. Further, the upper surface flow path of the electric accessory 640a has a downward slope so that the lower left direction in the front view of the game board 13 is the downstream side, whereby the right side of the electric accessory 640a (from the viewpoint of FIG. 3). The second opening 642a is configured to be on the downstream side of the first opening 641a provided on the right side).

Next, the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 640a and the flow of the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 will be described by taking as an example a time-saving state of a normal symbol in which a ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640. In the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1 second (see FIG. 38), and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 75% in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Then, as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the operation of opening for 1 second → closing for 0.5 seconds → opening for 1 second is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a is a crank provided with a step in the substantially central portion so that the downstream side covering the second opening 642a is lower than the upstream side covering the first opening 641a. It is configured to have a shape, and the time for the ball to reach from the upstream portion covering the first opening 641a to the downstream portion covering the second opening 642a is about 0.6 seconds. With this configuration, the ball flows into the board unit 700, and when the ball reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it flows into the first opening 641a as it is. , Passes through the first flow path 641b and the combined flow path 641c, and enters the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when the ball reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a and the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a flows down toward the downstream side (second opening 642a). Then, when the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a (the position covering the second opening 642a) (that is, after flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, 0. After 6 seconds), the electric accessory 640a is executing the next opening operation, and the ball flows into the second opening 642a, passes through the second flow path 642b and the combined flow path 641c, and passes through the second entrance. Enter the ball at 640.

In this way, there are a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 641b, second flow path 642b) for guiding the ball to the second entry port 640, and each opening for allowing the ball to flow into the plurality of flow paths. Variable means (electric accessory 640a) that changes the portion (first opening 641a, second opening 642a) into an open state in which the ball can flow in and a closed state in which the inflow of the ball is more difficult than in the open state. ) Is provided, and the openings (first opening 641a, second opening 642a) for allowing the sphere to flow into the plurality of flow paths are on the upstream side and the downstream side of the flow path through which the sphere can flow. Since the variable means (electric accessory 640a) is in the closed state, the ball that could not flow into the upstream opening (first opening 641a) can be moved to the downstream opening (second opening). It is possible to inflow from the part 642a).

Further, the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down from the upstream position where the electric accessory 640a covers the first opening 641a to the downstream position where the electric accessory 640a covers the second opening 642a is the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Since it is designed to be longer than the closing interval period (0.5 seconds) executed during, the first opening is performed at the timing of the closing interval period even though the electric accessory 640a is in the opening operation. A ball that has reached the portion 641a and could not flow into the first opening 641a can be reliably flowed from the second opening 642a.

In addition, whether or not the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down from the upstream position covering the first opening 641a to the downstream position covering the second opening 642a opens the electric accessory 640a. Since it is designed to be longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (0.5 seconds during the time reduction) for which the lottery is performed, the first opening 641a is reached during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the first opening If the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is successful, the ball that could not flow into the portion 641a can be flowed from the second opening 642a. Therefore, in a gaming state in which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open (a time-saving state of a normal symbol), the player can efficiently enter the ball into the second entrance 640 simply by playing a right-handed game at all times. It is possible to let the player play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the balls flowing in from the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 are configured to flow down toward the electric accessory 640a, after aligning the flow of the balls, the electric accessory 640a It is possible to guide the ball toward the upstream side of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball flowing down the game board 13 falls directly to the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a and a ball does not enter the second entry port 640.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time required for rolling from the position covering the first opening 641a to the position covering the second opening 642a is the interval period (0.5 seconds) during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. ) And the fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to be about 0.6 seconds, so that it is not only during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a but also normal. A ball launched in a right-handed game during a change in the symbol (second symbol) can also be easily entered into the second entrance 640.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 10, the ball flowing in from the first opening 641a is preferentially entered into the second entry port 640 over the ball flowing in from the second opening 642a. It is configured as follows. To explain in detail, the ball flowing in from the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a merges and flows down from the first opening 641a with respect to the combined flow path 641c flowing down toward the second entry port 640. The first flow path 641b through which the ball flows down is communicated in the direct upward direction, and the second flow path 642b in which the ball flowing in from the second opening 642a flows down is communicated in the side surface direction. With this configuration, when a sphere flowing down the first flow path 641b and a sphere flowing down the second flow path 642b are generated at the same time, the first flow path 641b having a large kinetic energy (falling energy) can be generated. The ball that has flowed down will be preferentially guided to the second entry port 640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the spheres flowing down the first flow path 641b and the spheres flowing down the second flow path 642b from causing ball clogging in the combined flow path 641c. Further, the ball flowing in from the first opening 641a, in which more balls flow in than the second opening 642a, can be smoothly entered into the second entry port 640.

The second flow path 642b, which has a lower priority than the first flow path 641b, is long enough to retain a plurality of balls (three in the present embodiment) (35 mm in the present embodiment). It is configured so that even if the flow of the sphere is blocked by the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641b, the inflow of the sphere into the second opening 642a is not hindered.

Although the details will be described later, in this pachinko machine 10, the time saving state of the normal symbol is reset during the jackpot and the normal state is set, so that the electric accessory 640a frequently opens during the jackpot. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball does not reach the variable winning device 65 provided below the electric accessory 640a. In order to prevent the above situation, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed and a variable winning device 65 may be provided above the electric accessory 640a.

The variable winning device 65 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

Next, the base unit 760 arranged in the board unit 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the base unit 760 is arranged on the downstream side (outlet 700b side) of the board unit 700 so that the storage flow path 700e is formed above and the out flow path 700f is formed below. It is provided.

The base unit 760 is provided with a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 as storage devices for storing the balls flowing down the storage flow path 700e, and the storage device has a maximum of five balls. It is configured to be storable. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 9, but the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b provided on the pachinko machine 10. It is controlled to change from the storage state in which each ball is stored to the release state in which the ball storage state is released with a predetermined time difference, and 1 each time the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b. It is configured to let the balls flow down one by one.

Further, on the storage flow path 700e, a storage upper limit sensor S1 for detecting that the storage amount of the sphere has reached the upper limit and a storage detection sensor S2 for detecting the presence or absence of the sphere in the stored state are provided. It is provided. Since each of these sensors is formed by a non-contact detection type proximity sensor that replaces the existence information of the sphere to be detected by electromagnetic induction with an electric signal, the sensor is not damaged by the passage of the sphere.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and any configuration may be used as long as it can grasp the storage status of the sphere on the storage flow path 700e. For example, the capacitance type or ultrasonic type sensor for detecting the sphere may be used. , A photoelectric type, a magnetic type or the like proximity switch may be used, or a contact type detection type switch such as a limit switch may be provided. Further, in order to grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 700e, a sensor that detects spheres corresponding to each sphere storage position (position where spheres are stored shown in FIG. 3) is provided. A sensor may be provided so that the number of balls that have flowed into the storage flow path 700e and the number of balls that have flowed out of the storage flow path 700e can be counted, and the difference is used in the storage flow path 700e. You may want to know the number of stored spheres.

Further, the base unit 760 has a guidance position (protruding position) for guiding the ball flowing out from the storage flow path 700e to the specific general entry port 630 and a regulation position for restricting guidance to the specific general entry port 630. A variable movable valve 750 is provided at the (buried position), and is variably controlled based on a predetermined operation pattern (operation scenario). A detailed description of the movable control of the movable valve 750 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the board unit 700, where the cover member 710 is covered (see FIG. 2), the cover member 710 is illuminated from the back surface side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710) to the cover member 710. Transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiating, are provided. By irradiating the cover member 710 with light from the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the inside covered with the cover member 710 can be made visible to the player. Although the details will be described later, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled so as to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the release operation of the storage device while grasping the operating status of the movable valve 750 during the normal game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down in the vicinity of the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 becomes transparent, so that the player can visually recognize the situation in which the ball flows down in the vicinity of the movable valve 750. Can be done.

In the pachinko machine 10 having the board unit 700 configured in this way, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 becomes an induction state (closed state) capable of guiding the ball to the specific general entry port 630. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b that changes the storage state of the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) to the release state, the storage device (first storage device (first)) is operated. The balls stored in the storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) can be put into the specific general entry port 630. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game while timing the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns, and the movable valve 750 is in an induced state (closed state) among the operation contents. Most of the period is set as a period (0.1 second) in which only one ball can be guided. Therefore, accuracy is required for the timing at which the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general entry port 630, which is more ambitious for the player. Can be made to play a game.

In the present embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) are individually specified as general balls. Since it is configured so that it can flow down toward the mouth 630, the period during which only one ball can be guided (0.1 seconds) is continuous as the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the guided state (closed state). By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing, the second frame button (release button) 22b is stored in the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771). It is possible to put all the balls into the specific general entry port 630. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game in order to obtain more prize balls. The detailed contents (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 23.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operating status of the movable valve 750, the second frame button is in a state where the operating status of the movable valve 750 is grasped. (Release button) The act of operating 22b can be prevented. Further, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is provided with a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on the condition that a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down) is satisfied. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the vicinity of the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is switched to the transmission state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow state of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750.

In the present embodiment, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is irradiated with light (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmission state, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) that is always lit to the cover member 710 is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position. It may be configured so that the inside is visible only in the transparent state.

Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside is visible, and the surface thereof is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (for example). , Texture processing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes it difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, for decoration). The inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible when the lamp 227a is not lit). As a result, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall is provided to shield the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. It is advisable to provide. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized by the player even while the game is being played. Further, as in the first embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided with a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light, and the light emitting means is controlled to emit light. May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which it is visible (a state in which light is not irradiated).

Further, by providing a movable member for decoration on the cover member 710 whose inside is visible and controlling the operation of the movable member, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movement of the movable member for decoration is small). The state) and the state in which the inside of the cover member 710 is difficult to see (a state in which the movable member for decoration is often operated) may be switched.

The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, but in the present embodiment, the timing for releasing the second frame button (release button) 22b is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750, and the second frame button (release button) 22b is released. 3 The symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is configured to display the effect. As a result, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the player is given a privilege (a prize based on the entry into the specific general entry port 630). (Ball) can be given, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

Next, the flow of the ball launched into the right game area by the right-handed game in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, a board unit 700 is arranged in the right side area of the pachinko machine 10, and a right game area is played by a right-handed game due to the arrangement of nails provided above the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700. About 95% (about 95 out of 100 balls) of the balls launched into the machine are arranged so as to flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700. Of the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that did not flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 (about 5 out of 100 shots) were formed between the variable display device unit 80 and the board unit 700. The sphere flow path (see FIG. 2) is made to flow down toward the out port 66.

The flow of the sphere flowing into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. Nails Qa and Qb are provided immediately below the inflow port 700a so that the balls flowing into the inflow port can be distributed to the left and right at a ratio of about 1:14. The balls distributed to the right side of the nails Qa and Qb (about 90 balls out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game) pass through the through gate 67 and then pass through the upstream portion (first opening 641a) of the electric accessory 640a. The balls (about 5 out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game) that flow down to the covering position) and are distributed to the left side of the nails Qa and Qb pass through the first taxiway 700c and the electric accessory 640a. It flows down to the downstream part (second opening 642a) of. The nails Qa and Qb also serve as adjustable adjusting means, and can be adjusted to a desired ratio even if the ratio of distributing the balls to the left and right changes due to a collision of the balls or the like. As described above, the sphere that has flowed down to the upstream portion of the electric accessory 640a (the position that covers the first opening 641a) can flow into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a. Since it flows down on the 640a, it is easier to enter the second entrance 640 than the ball that has flowed down to the downstream portion (second opening 642a) of the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, by adjusting the nails Qa and Qb, which are the adjusting means, the rate at which the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entry port 640 can be adjusted.

The ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a flows into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened, and enters the second entrance 640. On the other hand, the spheres that did not flow into the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a flow down from the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a into the distribution flow path 700d. The distribution flow path 700d has a direction in which the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3) and a direction in which the ball flows down toward the base unit 760 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3). The nails Q1 to Q3 and the first adjusting member 701a for sorting are provided, and the balls flowing into the sorting flow path 700d (about 95 balls out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game) are at a ratio of 9: 1. It is configured to be divided into the lower right direction and the lower left direction.

Then, the balls are distributed in the direction of flowing down the distribution flow path 700d and flowing down toward the base unit 760 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3) (about 10 balls out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game). Of these, about 1/3 of the balls flow into the storage flow path 700e, and the remaining about 2/3 of the balls flow into the out flow path 700f.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured such that the balls launched by the right-handed game flow into the storage flow path 700e at a rate of about 1 in 30 balls. That is, since the number of prize balls paid out to the player when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630 is 15, the time saving state of the normal symbol in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be opened or the variable state. Even if a game in which a ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630 is performed in a normal game state that is not a jackpot game state in which the opening operation of the winning device 65 is executed, the ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630. Since the number of balls required to make a ball (about 30 balls) is larger than the number of prize balls (15 balls) paid out when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630, the number of balls held does not increase. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal game in which the ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630 in a state where the operation content of the movable valve 750 is illegally grasped or the movable valve 750 is broken in the normal game state. ..

In the present embodiment, since the frequency of balls flowing into the storage flow path 700e is suppressed by using the board surface configuration described above, the jackpot state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and the second entry are performed. In the normal game state other than the time-saving state (the time-saving state of the normal symbol) in which the ball easily enters the ball mouth 640, the number of balls held is not increased even if the right-handed game is performed, but the storage flow path 700e The frequency at which the ball flows into the ball may be increased so that a game in which the ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630 (a game in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated) may be facilitated.

Even in such a case, the movable valve 750 is covered with the cover member 710 as in the present embodiment, which makes it difficult to grasp the operating state of the movable valve 750, so that the number of balls held in the normal gaming state increases. Can be suppressed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that a ball flowing down the electric accessory 640a in the closed state can flow into the storage flow path 700e, so that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. In the easy time-saving state of the normal symbol, it becomes difficult for the ball to flow into the storage flow path 700e, and in the jackpot game state in which the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open, the ball easily flows into the storage flow path 700e. Therefore, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the specific general entrance 630 can be changed according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the ball flowing down the distribution flow path 700d is configured to be distributed to either the lower right direction in which the variable winning device 65 is arranged or the lower left direction in which the specific general entry port 630 is arranged. Therefore, even if the distribution ratio of the balls flowing down the distribution flow path 700d differs depending on the individual difference of the pachinko machine 10 and the installation situation, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an extremely disadvantageous game. Further, by making the specifications (arrangement) of the nails Q1 to Q3 and the first adjusting member 701a provided in the distribution flow path 700d different, the ball can be efficiently inserted into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10. Game specifications for playing balls and game specifications for which balls can easily enter the specific general entrance 630 during a jackpot game (that is, balls are easily stored in storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771)). Can be provided to the player, and the player can select the pachinko machine 10 to play the game based on his / her own skill.

Next, the operation and ball flow of the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) and the movable valve 750 provided in the base unit 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing a state in which five spheres, which is the upper limit number, are stored on the storage flow path 700e, and FIG. 4B is a first storage device. It is a figure which shows typically the case where the movable valve 750 is in the induction state (protruding state) in the released state of 770. FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the released state and the movable valve 750 is in the regulated state (buried state). FIG. 5B is a schematic view schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the storage state and the second storage device 771 is in the release state. FIG. 6 is a schematic view schematically showing the operating mechanism of the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 and the second storage valve 771a of the second storage device 771, and FIG. 6A is a schematic view showing the operation mechanism of the second storage valve 771a. 1 is a diagram showing the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b when the storage device 770 is in the released state and the second storage device 771 is in the storage state. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b when the first storage device 770 is in the storage state. It is a figure which shows the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b when the storage device 771 is released.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are provided so as to have an interval capable of storing one sphere between them, and the storage device (first storage device 770 and In the state of FIG. 4A in which the upper limit number (5) of balls is stored in the second storage device 771), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) stores one ball. The second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is in a state of storing four balls. In such a state, the new sphere that has flowed down toward the storage flow path 700e is changed in the flow direction by the sphere stored in the storage flow path 700e, and is provided below the base unit 760. It flows down toward the flow path 700f and flows out from the out flow path 700f to the outside of the board unit 700.

A first ball passage sensor S3 for detecting the passage of a ball is provided in a region where a ball flows down when the flow destination of the storage flow path 700e, that is, the first storage valve 770a is released. A second ball passage sensor S4 for detecting the passage of a ball is provided in a region downstream of the region where the first ball passage sensor S3 is provided. In the present embodiment, the first storage device 770 is released based on the detection results of the first ball passing sensor S3 and the second ball passing sensor S4 and the command indicating the entry of the ball into the specific general entry port 630. The period from when the ball passes to the specific area (specific general entry port 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4) is measurable, and the first storage device 770 is released based on the measurement result. The content of the effect (the start timing of the effect, the period of the effect, and the content of the effect) to be executed after the state is reached (after the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the ball) can be corrected.

Here, the ball flowing down the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 has a flow-down period of flowing down a specific section according to the installation state (tilt) of the pachinko machine 10, the outside air environment (temperature, humidity), and the dirt of the ball. different. Therefore, in the case of executing the effect for the flow of the ball, if a specific effect is executed based on a predetermined flow period, an error occurs between the result of the effect and the actual flow result of the ball. There was a problem that it would end up. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to correct the content of the effect on the flow of the ball.

As a result, the second frame button (for release) so that the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 is changed to the induction state (protruding state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general entry port 630. Button) It is possible to correct the notification timing of the effect of notifying the timing of operating 22b based on the actual flow period of the ball, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. ..

In addition to the effect used in the present embodiment, for example, the ball has passed a predetermined position (for example, the first ball passage sensor S3), so that the ball is in a specific position (for example, a specific general entry port). In the case of executing a fanning effect for a predetermined period to incite whether or not to reach 630), and then executing a result effect indicating the passing result of the ball after the fanning effect, the period of the fanning effect is set to the ball passing period actually required. It is possible to make corrections based on the above, and it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, in the case of executing an effect of satisfying the indicators set in multiple stages toward the final stage as a fanning effect, and executing an effect of whether or not the final stage has been reached as a result effect, a plurality of effects are performed. By satisfying each of the staged indicators and making the timing different, or by making the start timing of the fanning effect different, the result production will be executed even though the fanning effect is in the middle stage, or the fanning effect will be performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the result effect is waited for when the final stage of

In addition to the first ball passage sensor S3 or the second ball passage sensor S4 described above, the detection results of the storage upper limit sensor S1 and the storage detection sensor S2 are used in the board unit 700 (particularly, the storage flow path 700e). It may be configured to determine whether a ball jam or cheating is being performed.

The first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, which store balls on the storage flow path 700e, press the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) provided in the pachinko machine 10. By operating (pressing) and driving the storage valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19), the drive is controlled so that the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e flow down one by one. The details of the mechanism for operating the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a by driving the storage valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19) will be described later with reference to FIG. 6, and the first storage valve will be described later. Details of the drive control contents of the 770a and the second storage valve 771a will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, when the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) is operated in the state shown in FIG. 4A, the first storage valve 770a is first released, and the first storage valve 770a and The ball stored between the second storage valve 771a and the second storage valve 771a passes over the first storage valve 770a in the released state and flows down in the downstream direction (see FIG. 4B). Since the spheres stored in the storage flow path 700e are restricted from flowing down in the downstream direction by the second storage valve 771a in the storage state, only one sphere is stored from the storage flow path 700e. It will flow down in the downstream direction.

When the ball flows down from the storage flow path 700e while the movable valve 750 is protruding (induction state), the movable valve 750 and the second adjusting member are as shown in FIG. 4 (b). It flows down on 701b and enters the specific general entrance 630 (see FIG. 4B). On the other hand, when the movable valve 750 is buried (regulated state) and the ball flows down from the storage flow path 700e, it enters the specific general entry port 630 as shown in FIG. 5A. It flows out of the board unit 700 from the outlet 700b without making a ball.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the player can release the storage of the sphere by the storage device by operating (pressing) the operating means (second frame button (release button) 22b). , The player can determine the timing of releasing the storage of the ball by the storage device. In addition, the movable valve 750 is configured to variably operate in a protruding state (allowable state) and a buried state (regulated state) in a predetermined operation pattern. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (second frame button (release button) 22b), so that the player It is possible to enthusiastically operate the operating means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

When the player operates (presses) the second frame button (release button) 22b and the period in which the first storage valve 770a is in the release state elapses for a predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment), then the first The first storage valve 770a is closed and the second storage valve 771a is released (see FIG. 5B). In this state, the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e by the second storage valve 771a flows down to a position where it comes into contact with the first storage valve 770a. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, 0.5 seconds after the second storage valve 771a is released), the second storage valve 771a is closed, and the state shown in FIG. 4 (a). Move to.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, the balls (4) stored in the storage flow path 700e by the second storage valve 771a have flowed down to the state where they are stored by the first storage valve 770a. The second storage valve 771a is variable from the released state (buried state) to the closed state (protruding state). Here, in the present embodiment, since the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are provided at intervals (about 11 mm) corresponding to one ball, the second storage valve 771a is the first storage valve 771a. Of the four balls stored (blocked) by the valve 770a, the ball projects at a position between the most downstream ball and the second ball from the most downstream. Therefore, the protruding operation of the second storage valve 771a can be smoothly executed.

In the storage flow path 700e, the region where the ball is stored in the state where the second storage valve 771a protrudes (that is, the position from the position where the second storage valve 771a protrudes to the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e ) Is longer than the distance (about 47 mm) obtained by adding the thickness of the second storage valve 771a (left-right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 5 (b)) (about 3 mm) to four balls (about 44 mm). It is configured so that the distance is shorter than 5 pieces (about 55 mm) (50 mm in this embodiment).

With this configuration, when the second storage valve 771a protrudes, it is stored in the storage flow path 700e even if the ball recedes on the storage flow path 700e by the thickness of the second storage valve 771a. It is possible to prevent the ball from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e due to the projecting operation of the second storage valve 771a. Further, it is possible to prevent the sixth ball from being stored in the storage flow path 700e in the state where the second storage valve 771a is released (buried state). In order to prevent the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e due to the operation of each storage valve, it is downstream to the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e. A step may be provided so that the side is lowered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e due to the operation of each storage valve.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a storage valve solenoid 770b for electrically driving the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic view schematically showing a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction, and FIG. 6B is a schematic view showing a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. In this embodiment, a plurality of variable members (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) are variably operated by using one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). Specifically, the storage valve solenoid 770b is a two-way holding type self-holding solenoid.

This two-way holding type self-holding solenoid combines an open frame solenoid with a permanent magnet, attracts the plunger by momentarily energizing the coil, and holds the position after suction with the permanent magnet. It is a self-holding solenoid that does not require energization to maintain the state after suction. Coil is provided in each of the positive and negative directions around the permanent magnet, and by energizing each coil, the plunger is in the positive or negative direction. It is a solenoid that is configured to attract and hold the state after attraction using a permanent magnet. As a result, one solenoid is used to maintain the three states of the state in which the plunger is sucked in the positive direction, the state in which the plunger is sucked in the negative direction, and the initial state in which the plunger is not sucked in any of the positive and negative directions. Can be done.

Then, in a state where the plunger is sucked in the positive direction by the storage valve solenoid 770b (a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction), the first storage valve 770a is opened (as shown in FIG. 6A). In the state where the plunger is attracted in the negative direction (the state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction), the second storage valve 771a is opened (as shown in FIG. 6B). It is changed to the release) state. Further, in the state where the storage valve solenoid 770b is not turned on in either the positive or negative direction (off state), both the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are changed to the closed (non-released) state. It is configured to be.

That is, as shown in FIG. 6A, the first storage valve 770a and the storage valve solenoid 770b are combined by the first transmission means for transmitting the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b to the first storage valve 770a. There is. This first transmission means has three gears, and is assembled to the positive end portion of the plunger of the storage valve solenoid 770b. The end of the second storage valve 771a is assembled to the tip on the negative side of the plunger.

Here, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction, the gear provided in the first transmission means rotates according to the operation of the plunger sucked in the positive direction, and the rotation result of the gear is obtained. Based on this, the first storage valve 770a provided on the terminal side (the side connected to the first storage valve 770a) of the first transmission means is variably operated in the released (open) state, and the second storage valve 771a moves in the forward direction. According to the operation of the plunger sucked to the side, its tip protrudes onto the storage flow path 700e and is variably operated in a closed (non-released) state (see FIG. 6A).

On the other hand, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction, as shown in FIG. 6B, the first storage valve 770a is closed (non-released) based on the operation of the plunger protruding in the negative direction. The second storage valve 771a is variably operated in the released (opened) state. Although not shown, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are both closed (normal state) when the plunger of the storage valve solenoid 770b is not sucked in either the positive direction or the negative direction (normal state). It is variably operated so as to be in the non-release) state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variable members (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). Therefore, the space for installing the electric drive source can be reduced, and the space of the device can be saved. In addition, by saving space in the device, it is possible to install decorative members and devices related to the game using the vacant space, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, no matter what state the storage valve solenoid 770b is in, neither the first storage valve 770a nor the second storage valve 771a is in the open (released) state, so that the storage valve solenoid 770b is Even if a failure occurs and a malfunction occurs, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from continuously passing through the storage flow path 700e. Further, since it is configured to be variably operated by only one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b), when the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e are allowed to flow down one by one toward the specific general entry port 630. Since the variable operation control of the above is only executed for the storage valve solenoid 770b, the process of the variable operation control is compared with the case where the variable operation control is executed for a plurality of electric drive sources (solenoids, etc.). The load can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of variable members (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) are driven by one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b) depending on the moving direction of the moving body (plunger). Although a configuration for variable operation is used, other configurations may be used as long as a plurality of variable members are variably operated using one electric drive source. For example, stepping as an electric drive source. A motor may be used to variably operate a plurality of variable members at predetermined timings according to the rotation speed (number of steps) of the motor.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which a plurality of variable members (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). An electric drive source may be provided for each variable member. Further, in the present embodiment, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a have different configurations for variable operation, but the same variable operation configuration may be used as a matter of course. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable motion control is configured to execute the variable motion control in which the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e flow down one by one toward the specific general entry port 630, but other than that. The configuration may be used. For example, by continuously pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be changed to be released (opened) at the same time. Operation control may be executed. As a result, when a normal operation is performed on the second frame button (release button) 22b, variable operation control is executed for each storage valve so that one ball flows out from the storage flow path 700e. When a long press operation is performed on the second frame button (release button) 22b, variable operation control is executed so that at least two or more balls stored on the storage flow path 700e flow out. Therefore, it is possible to make the number or timing of the balls flowing out from the storage flow path 700e different depending on the operation content of the player with respect to the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player enthusiastically plays the game. Can be made.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation control of the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 and the flow of the opening / closing operation of the movable valve 750 when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. explain. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b and various devices.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated in the present embodiment, first, the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 is variably controlled to the release (open) state for 1 second. Then, the state shown in FIG. 4B described above is obtained. In this state, the ball stored between the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a flows down from the storage flow path 700e. Here, since it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball to be flowed down to reach the movable valve 750 when the first storage valve 770a is released (opened), the first storage valve 770a is used. Whether or not the ball is guided to the specific general entry port 630 is determined by the operating state of the movable valve about 0.5 seconds after the released (opened) state. In the operation example shown in FIG. 9, the second frame button (release button) 22b is first operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state. As shown in FIG. 9D, the operating state of the movable valve 750 after 5 seconds is in the open state (regulated state), so that the ball does not enter the specific general entry port 630 and is a board unit. It flows down from the outlet 700b of 700 to the outside of the board unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 9A, once the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, variable control for a total of 2 seconds is executed. While the variable control is being executed, the operation of the next second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted, so the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. When the variable control of each storage device is executed, an operation invalid period in which the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted is set for about 2 seconds from that time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the next variable control from being started while the variable control of each storage device is being executed.

When 1 second has passed since the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) was released (opened), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) was released (closed). (Fig. 9 (b)), and 0.5 seconds after that point, variable control is executed to change the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) to the released (open) state (FIG. 9). 9 (c)). Then, the release (open) state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is continued for 0.5 seconds from that point, and as shown in FIG. 5 (b) described above, the second storage device 771 ( A period is provided for the balls stored by the second storage valve 771a) to flow down to a position where they come into contact with the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 (FIG. 9 (c)).

That is, in the present embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, one ball is configured to flow down toward the movable valve 750, and further, the second frame button (release) is formed. Button) 22b is configured to execute the release operation of the storage device only once every two seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the ball cannot be inserted into the specific general entry port 630 unless the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed) at the right time, and the second frame button (release button) ( The operation accuracy of the release button) 22b is required. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a timing effect (operation effect) suggesting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed by the third symbol display device 81. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the timing effect (operation effect), it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general entry port 630. There is. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

In FIG. 9, at the timing when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state again, the operation timing is 0. Since the movable valve 750e is closed (guided) after 5 seconds, the ball that has flowed down toward the movable valve 750 by this operation is guided to the specific general entry port 630 by the movable valve 750 in the closed (guided) state. Will be done.

The movable valve 750 is constantly variably controlled according to a predetermined rule based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. As will be described later, the variable control content is defined by combining a plurality of operation scenarios (see FIG. 23A) having different operation (variable) patterns. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b so that the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750, which is variably controlled based on the operation scenario, is in the closed (guided) state. , The ball is guided to the specific general entry port 630.

Next, the timing effect (operation effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. In the present embodiment, the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) are directed toward the movable valve 750 based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. It is configured to flow down. Then, when the ball reaches the movable valve 750 when the movable valve 750 is in the open (regulated) state, the ball is restricted from entering the specific general entry port 630, and in the closed (guided) state. , It is configured to guide the ball to enter the specific general ball entry port 630.

The period during which the movable valve 750 is closed (guided) is set to a short period (for example, 0.1 second), and the player randomly operates the second frame button (release button) 22b. Even so, the ball stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is configured to be difficult to enter into the specific general entry port 630. Here, in the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is configured to be executed as an effect for notifying the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect content of this timing effect (operation effect), the player can efficiently enter the ball into the specific general entry port 630. Become.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a method of setting the timing for causing the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b in the above-mentioned timing effect (operation effect) will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a point at which the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is set in the timing effect (operation effect). As described above, the movable valve 750 is configured to be constantly variably controlled according to a predetermined rule, and the storage flow path is based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. The ball flowing down from the 700e (see FIG. 3) toward the movable valve 750 is configured to reach the movable valve 750 after a flow-down period of about 0.5 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the variable control content of the movable valve 750 is read in advance, a point at which the movable valve 750 is closed (guided) is specified (FIG. 10A), and the ball flow period (0.5 seconds) from that point. The point obtained by subtracting the By setting the ball entry possible timing in this way and executing the effect of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the timing, the player can perform the second frame button (release button) according to the executed effect. The ball can be entered into the specific general entry port 630 simply by operating the release button) 22b. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that can give an advantageous privilege (prize ball) to the player, and the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

Further, as described above, the ball entry possibility timing set as the ball entry possibility timing to the specific general ball entry port is 0.5 seconds before the timing when the movable valve 750 is in the induction state. Here, since most of the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state is 0.1 seconds, the period during which the ball entry possible timing is set is longer than the operation of the corresponding movable valve 750 is started. It will be the previous period. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the timing effect executed based on the ball entry possible timing is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the movable valve 750 is operated based on a plurality of operation scenarios, the intervals at which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state are various. Therefore, even if the operation of the movable valve 750 executed before the operation of the movable valve 750 referred to when setting the ball entry possible timing matches the ball entry possible timing, even if it matches. It is not possible to grasp the operating status of the movable valve 750 based on this. Therefore, it is difficult to notice that the timing effect executed based on the ball entry possible timing is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated and the first storage device 770 is in the release (open) state, specifically, the first When the storage device 770 is released (opened) and the first ball passage sensor S3 detects a ball flowing out of the storage flow path 700e, the transmission lamp 227b is configured to light up. That is, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing when the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630, the ball flowing out from the storage flow path 700e is the first ball. The inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible at the timing of passing through the passage sensor S3 (timing 0.1 seconds after the operation of the second frame button 22b). Here, since most of the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the guided state is 0.1 seconds, the timing at which the inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible is the movable state for which the ball entry possible timing is set. It is a period before the operation of the valve 750 is started. As a result, the operating status of the movable valve 750 is not grasped based on the timing at which the inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 17 described later, a display pointer prompting the third symbol display device 81 to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b as a timing effect (operation effect). By moving and displaying and operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing when the display pointer reaches a specific position, the above-mentioned ball entry enable timing and the second frame button (release button) 22b An effect that matches the operation timing of is executed. Next, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) used in the present embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described. 11 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIGS. b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the operation status for the operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b) are shown. The display content of the third symbol display device 81, which changes based on the operation of the operating means, will be described with reference to the schematic diagram shown.

As shown in FIG. 11, the third symbol display device 81 displays a round number display unit 714 that displays the current number of rounds in the upper left of the screen, and the sub-display area Ds2 suggests the number of balls acquired during the jackpot. The acquisition display is executed, and in the sub-display area Ds3, "Aim to the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit that guides the game method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for suggesting the number of balls acquired based on the ball winning in the specific winning opening 65a is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening 65a. The acquired number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, then is moved and displayed toward the sub-display area Ds2, and finally, the sub-display area is displayed. It is added as an acquisition display of Ds2.

In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) will be started from the next round and a guidance display for notifying the game nature of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. .. Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed. In this effect area, a left button display mode 715 with "left" corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b and "middle" corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a. The middle button display mode 716 with "" is displayed, and the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 on which the display pointer 719 (see FIG. 11B) is displayed are provided corresponding to the respective button display modes. ..

The sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 are areas in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left, as will be described later in FIG. 11B, and the display pointer 719 indicates an operation timing. By operating the operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a or second frame button (release button) 22b) at a timing that matches the bar display unit 717, which is a success effect (FIG. 11 (b) described later). ) Is executed. Further, when the operating means is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display unit 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 12B described later) is executed.

The timing at which the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display unit 717 in the sub-display area Ds4 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is the above-mentioned ball entry enable timing with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, while the advance notice effect is being executed, the characters “waiting” are scrolled and displayed from right to left in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5.

As described above, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the present embodiment, an effect of causing the player to operate the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. To. With this configuration, the number of times the player is required to operate the button can be increased and the effect of the effect is enhanced, as compared with the case where the effect of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11B, the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5, and the second frame button (for release) is displayed at the timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display unit 717. When the button) 22b is operated, the characters "good" are displayed in the center of the screen as the result display mode 720, and the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b indicates the display mode of the left button display mode 715. It is displayed by making it variable. In this case, as a timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at the timing when the ball can be entered, so that the ball flowing down from the storage device based on the operation is the specific general entry port. It will enter 630.

In the state shown in FIG. 12A, the first frame button (effect) is displayed at the timing when the display pointer 719c displayed in the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a matches the bar display unit 717. The prize ball obtained by operating the first frame button (directing button) 22a at this timing in the state where the button) 22a is operated and the ball enters the specific general entry port 630. The specific acquisition number display mode 721 indicating the number is displayed, and the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 22a is displayed by changing the display mode of the right button display mode 716.

The state shown in FIG. 12B is a state in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719h does not match the bar display unit 717 in the timing effect (operation effect). , The character "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is displayed by changing the display mode of the left button display mode 715. To. In this case, as the timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at a timing different from the timing at which the ball can enter, so that the ball flowing down from the storage device is specified based on the operation. The ball does not enter the general entrance 630.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of the special symbol will be described. The same elements as those in FIG. 8B described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, the same effect display as during the jackpot is executed. Regarding the display of the timing effect (operation effect), the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as during the jackpot, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 13A, the display mode of “start” is scrolled and displayed in order to notify the player of the timing at which the timing effect (operation effect) is started. Then, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 13B, the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 in the sub-display area Ds2. The acquisition display (“15”) indicating the privilege (prize ball) given to the player is executed, and the display pointer 719 (719k to 719p) is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4 or Ds5.

In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is changing, the display pointer scrolls in the sub-display area Ds4 (in the case of FIG. 14, the display pointer 719q). By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing when ~ 719t) matches the bar display unit 717, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the second frame button (release button) 22b for releasing the storage state of the storage device can be used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the display content of the jackpot confirmation display screen for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbol has won the jackpot will be described. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot confirmation display screen displayed when a jackpot with a jackpot type of “big hit A” is won, and FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot confirmation display screen with a jackpot type of “big hit”. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot confirmation display screen displayed when the jackpot of "C" is won.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the operation pattern of the movable valve 750, an advantageous period in which an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an operation pattern (operation) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous period. A disadvantageous period during which the scenario) is executed is set (see FIG. 23 (a) described later), and the movable valve 750 is configured to execute a plurality of operation patterns (operation scenarios) in a predetermined order. (See FIG. 23 (b) described later). Further, the operation pattern (operation scenario) of the movable valve 750 to be executed in the future can be discriminated based on the operation status of the movable valve 750.

In the present embodiment configured as described above, the period during which the jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed on the jackpot confirmation display screen for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbol has been won. It is possible to determine whether the movable valve 750 is variably operated in an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and notify the determination result on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can grasp that the movable valve 750 is executed in the operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed, and during the jackpot game. You can make the game enthusiastic.

In an example of the jackpot confirmation display screen shown in FIG. 15A, a jackpot whose jackpot type is "big hit A" is won, that is, a "big hit" indicating that a 16-round jackpot is won in which a probability change state is not given after the jackpot game is completed. , And the character "chance" is displayed as a movable valve advantageous period notification mode 721 that notifies that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game. ..

Further, in an example of the jackpot confirmation display screen shown in FIG. 15B, a jackpot whose jackpot type is "big hit C" is won, that is, a 16-round jackpot that is given a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed, and , The character "super" indicating that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game is displayed.

In this way, in addition to the mode of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, various patterns are notified by notifying the mode of notifying the operating status of the movable valve 750 during the big hit on the big hit confirmation display screen. It is possible to display the jackpot confirmation display mode of.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, a method of setting an effect mode in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 schematically shows the content of setting the display position of the display pointer based on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 and the music information executed in the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the present embodiment, information indicating the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 described above with reference to FIG. 10, music information used for timing effect (operation effect), and timing effect The display position of the display pointer 719 (see FIG. 11B) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is determined based on the difficulty setting information for setting the difficulty level of the (operation effect).

In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs can be used in the timing effect (operation effect), and a place where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) is predetermined for each song. This is to operate the operation means at the timing that matches the rhythm of each song in the timing effect (operation effect), and by configuring in this way, the display pointer can be entered at the specific general entry port 630. Even if 719 is set, the operation means can be operated according to the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing effect (operation effect), and the timing effect (operation effect) can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be executed.

The number and intervals at which the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) are different between the music A shown in FIG. 16A and the music B shown in FIG. 16B, so that the display pointer 719 can be displayed. The place to set will also be different. Further, in the present embodiment, the difficulty level of the timing effect can be set, and when a high difficulty level is selected, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated in the timing effect (operation effect). The display pointer to be operated The display pointer to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b instead of being set so that the display position of the display pointer 719 matches the timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific general entry port 630 increases. The effect mode is set so that the second frame button (release button) 22b is difficult to operate in a state where the 719 matches the bar display unit 717 (see FIG. 11B). On the other hand, when the low difficulty level is selected, the display position of the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is set to the specific general entry port 630 as compared with the case where the high difficulty level is selected. A state in which the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b matches the bar display unit 717 (see FIG. 11B) instead of being set to match the timing at which the ball can be entered less frequently. The effect mode is set so that the second frame button (release button) 22b can be easily operated.

Specifically, when a low difficulty level is selected in the music A, as shown in FIG. 16A, among the display pointers 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b, the specific general entry ball The number of times that matches the timing at which the ball can enter the mouth 630 is set to two, and five display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a are set to be displayed.

On the other hand, when a high difficulty level is selected in the music B, as shown in FIG. 16B, among the display pointers 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b, the specific general entry port 630 is used. The number of times that matches the timing at which the ball can be entered is set to 5, and further, eight display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a are set to be displayed.

Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, when a high difficulty level is selected, as compared with the case where a low difficulty level is selected as the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed as the timing effect (operation effect). , A display mode that makes it difficult to take timing is set.

In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her own skill, and by making the privilege to be given different according to the difficulty level, for various players. Therefore, the timing effect (operation effect) can be enthusiastically executed.

In addition, the above-mentioned contents show both the selection of the music and the selection of the difficulty level in the timing production (operation production) executed in the present embodiment, but only the music without changing the difficulty level. When selecting, since the intervals between the parts where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) are different between the music A and the music B, the player who wants to enjoy the timing effect (operation effect) at intervals is the music. A player who wants to select A and enjoy timing effect (operation effect) at short intervals can select music B. This makes it possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and causes various players to enthusiastically execute the timing effect (operation effect). Can be done.

Further, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed at short intervals, the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e can be digested (outflowed) in a short period of time, so that the timing effect (operation effect) can be performed at long intervals. It is possible to make it easier to store a new ball in the storage flow path 700e than when the operation effect) is executed (that is, the new ball collides with the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e and the new ball It is possible to suppress the situation where the water does not flow into the storage flow path 700e). As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the specific general entry port 630 by the timing effect (operation effect).

In the present embodiment, among the display pointers 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b set during the timing effect (operation effect), the timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific general entry port 630. Although the upper limit of the number of times that matches with is set to 5, a larger number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. With this configuration, in addition to the balls (maximum 5 balls) stored in the storage flow path 700e when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, they are newly stored during the timing effect (operation effect). It is possible to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing when the ball that has flowed into the flow path 700e can enter the specific general entry port 630. Therefore, the player can be made to actively play the game so that more balls flow into the storage flow path 700e.

In this embodiment, the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) at different intervals depending on the music, and the player selects the music to display the display pointer, which is executed in the timing effect (operation effect). A configuration is used in which the display interval is narrowed or widened, but as another configuration, a selection means for selecting the display interval of the display pointer 719 executed by the player in the timing effect (operation effect) is provided. , A setting means for setting the display location of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selection means may be provided, or the same music can be played by changing the playback speed of the music. It may be used to provide a setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and enthusiastically for various players. Timing effect (operation effect) can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of songs (music information) having different locations (intervals) at which the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) are stored, but the display pointer set for each song (music information) is stored. The displayable portion of 719 may be configured to be associated with the movable valve closing timing of each scenario type of the movable valve 750. As a result, the operating status of the movable valve 750 (that is, the scenario type to be executed) during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is determined, the scenario type is specified based on the determination result, and the specified scenario is specified. By executing the music corresponding to the type as a timing effect (operation effect), it is easy to match the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 with the position where the music display pointer 719 can be displayed. be able to. In this case, by setting the timing at which the scenario type of the movable valve 750 is switched as the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect), the display location of the display pointer 719 displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) can be set more easily. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the contents of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level to be executed in the first round of the jackpot game. Among the elements displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in FIG. 11A described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 17, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, "ROUND1" is displayed on the round display unit 714, and a notification display is displayed in the center of the screen to notify that the difficulty level selection effect is being executed. Then, a guidance display is executed to guide how to select the difficulty level. In this guidance display, a button display 721 indicating selection using the first frame button (effect button) 22a is displayed.

Then, at the bottom of the screen, an arrow 722 indicating the currently selected difficulty level is moved and displayed every 2 seconds to a position indicating a low difficulty level and a high difficulty level, and the corresponding difficulty levels are displayed in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5. The demo pointer 723 showing the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed when the degree is selected is scrolled and displayed.

Here, the demo pointers 723 when the low difficulty level displayed in the sub-display area Ds4 is selected, and the demo pointers 723a to 723d when the high difficulty level displayed in the sub-display area Ds5 is selected are games. A display mode that is difficult for a person to operate at a specific timing is set. Specifically, the demo pointer 723a displays an obstruction display indicated by a star around the display pointer 719, the demo pointer 723b is a reduced display of the display pointer 719, and the demo pointer 723c is a display pointer. An asymmetric display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the center position of the 719 is displayed, and the demo pointer 723d is displayed at a position where the obstruction display for making the display pointer 719 difficult to see is overlapped with the display pointer 719.

In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her own skill, and by making the privilege to be given different according to the difficulty level, for various players. Therefore, the timing effect (operation effect) can be enthusiastically executed. In addition, the number of times (the number of successes) that the player operates the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at an appropriate timing in the timing effect (operation effect) is accumulated, and the number of successes increases. Based on this, the display mode of the display pointer 719 executed when the difficulty level is high may be changed to the display pointer 719 executed when the difficulty level is low. In addition, when a low-difficulty timing effect (operation effect) is executed, a display pointer 719 that matches the entry timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 according to the number of successes. May be configured to increase the frequency with which is displayed. As a result, the player can be more motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, when the cumulative number of successful operations of operating the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at an appropriate timing in the timing effect (operation effect) exceeds a predetermined number, the player is notified. It may be possible to select a timing effect (operation effect) of a super-difficulty level, which is more difficult and has a large privilege to be obtained. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with a selectable effect (super-difficulty effect) only when a predetermined effect condition (the number of successes becomes a predetermined number of times) is satisfied. You can play the game more enthusiastically.

In the present embodiment, the player who is executed in the timing effect (operation effect) is different in the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the operation content (number of successes). For example, in an operation effect (for example, a mini-game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change) that is executed other than the timing effect (operation effect), the operation history of the player operating the first frame button 22a. The timing effect (operation effect) may be configured to be different based on (number of operations, operation content, operation result). As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game for various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. Further, the operation result is not limited to the operation result for the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) by the player, for example, the timekeeping period measured by the timekeeping means (RTC) or the player plays the game. It may be configured to switch the production mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the game period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the content of the transmission effect for changing the cover member 710 provided on the board unit 700 (see FIG. 2) from a shielding state in which the inside is difficult to see to a transparent state in which the inside can be seen. explain. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram showing a shielding state, and FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram showing a transmission state. The same elements as those in FIG. 4 described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 18A, the cover member 710 is attached so as to cover the entire downstream side (downstream side from the first storage valve 770a) of the board unit 700, and covers all but the storage flow path 700e side. It is attached so that the inside of the member 710 cannot be looked into. Then, even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the cover member 710 from the storage flow path 700e side, the movable valve 750 is provided below the extension direction of the storage flow path 700e, so that the movable state of the movable valve 750 is visually recognized. It is configured so that it cannot be done. Further, since the first storage valve 770a is located at the protruding position, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 from the storage flow path 700e side. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the cover member 710 from grasping the movable state of the movable valve 750 in a shielded state in which the inside is difficult to see.

In the cover member 710 configured in this way, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on the condition that a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down) is satisfied, and FIG. 18B ), The half mirror is configured to switch to a transparent state where the inside can be seen. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow state of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750.

In the present embodiment, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is irradiated with light (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmission state, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) that is always lit to the cover member 710 is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position. It may be configured so that the inside is visible only in the transparent state.

Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside is visible, and the surface thereof is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (for example). , Texture processing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes it difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, for decoration). The inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible when the lamp 227a is not lit). As a result, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall is provided to shield the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. It is advisable to provide. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized by the player even while the game is being played. Further, as in the first embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided with a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light, and the light emitting means is controlled to emit light. May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which it is visible (a state in which light is not irradiated).

Further, by providing a movable member for decoration on the cover member 710 whose inside is visible and controlling the operation of the movable member, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movable member for decoration is the movable valve 750). It may be possible to switch between a state in which the cover member 710 is movable at a position not overlapping with the cover member 710 and a state in which the inside of the cover member 710 is difficult to see (a state in which the decorative movable member is movable at the overlapping position so as to cover the movable valve 750). ..

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18A, the cover member 710 is configured to cover the entire downstream side of the board unit 700, so that the movable valve 750 is in a shielded state when the cover member 710 is in a shielding state. It was configured to surely prevent the movable state of the movable valve from being visually recognized, but it is not limited to this, and any configuration that has the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 in the posture in which the normal game is performed. Just do it. For example, the cover member 710 may be configured to cover only the movable valve 750. As a result, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 can be constructed at low cost.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 7, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 19) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 7, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 7, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. Used to set the initial value of the first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the random number counter C1 per first. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the winning of the second ball opening 640. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage 203b is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four reserved balls are provided in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, respectively, and a total of up to eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is changed to the special symbol. When the game ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the game ball wins in the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Various settings and control processes are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is inserted into the first entrance 64. Alternatively, when the second ball opening 640 is won, if the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening (starting port) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball opening. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 pieces in this embodiment) are not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is less than four (for example). It may be (3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, the configuration may not provide an upper limit value.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 24. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot specified in 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "1 to 4". If it is within the range of "1 to 4", it is determined that it is a big hit.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/300". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "1 to 4" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 300 in this way, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/75".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20B). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 20 (b).

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol on which the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in the probabilistic state of a special symbol, a jackpot is likely to occur, so the range of random values corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Table is selected, "completely out of reach" is easily selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that "out of reach" is difficult to be selected. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64. A table for low probability is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "out of reach" is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 21 and 22), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is a main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 21B and 22). In this fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of fluctuation pattern selection tables commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and for each of them, the fluctuation pattern selection table is set according to the result of the hit / fail judgment. Is set. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal map execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 20) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the second. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in this second hit random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are five random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-9". ing. Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 5, the probability of hitting a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol is "5". / 240 ".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 200, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2". .. As described above, in the present embodiment, the random value for hitting the normal symbol is significantly different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, so that the hit probability is significantly different. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol hits are also different between the low probability time and the high probability time of the normal symbol. .. For this reason, the ease of entering the second ball opening 640 differs greatly between the low-probability state of the normal symbol and the high-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the low-probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, The player can be made to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64.

When the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67, the second symbol display device 83 executes the variable display of the normal symbol for 1 second, and the acquired second random number is obtained. If the value of the counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" lights up as the stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time, the second entrance 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the game playability is not impaired.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), the counter returns to 0. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern in which the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the entire range) and the fluctuation time is 3 seconds is selected.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description continues. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 42) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c already described above, the first random number selection table 202b, the variation pattern selection table 202d, the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, and the like, At least a movable valve operation scenario table 202f is provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 20B, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2. The value is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 20 (b), "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". Is stipulated. This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit A", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 89", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is a big hit with 8 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 counter values are "big hit B", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). This "big hit B" is set to 8 rounds, which is a smaller number of rounds than "big hit A", but since a probabilistic state is given after the big hit ends, in terms of the number of balls to be obtained by one big hit. Although it is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "Big hit A", the probability change state continues until the next jackpot is won, so the player acquires it from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state. In terms of possible payouts (expected payouts), it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit A".

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit C" is associated and defined. This "big hit C" is a big hit with 16 rounds, like "big hit A". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are counter values that become "big hit C", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit C" has a larger number of rounds than the "big hit B", and a probabilistic state is given after the big hit ends. Therefore, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit A" and "big hit B".

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "big hit A" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. However, "big hit B" is associated with the range of "50 to 59", and "big hit C" is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "60 to 99". Is stipulated. That is, the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol have the same ratio of benefits (normal symbol in a time-saving state or a probable change state) given after the jackpot ends (1: 1 ratio), but the number of rounds is 16. It is stipulated that the percentage of round jackpots given is higher for the second special symbol.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit and the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit is the most advantageous for the player, "Big hit C". Is configured to be easy to select. Therefore, once the consecutive villa mode (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) is set, the ball is entered into the second entrance 640 by right-handed, and the lottery of the second special symbol is drawn. It becomes easy to repeat the state where is easy to execute and the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game for one purpose of shifting to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. As described above, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d is a normal table 202d1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the normal mode, a probability variation state, and a time saving state of the normal symbol (hereinafter, hereinafter, After the jackpot of "Big hit A", which is a jackpot type in which the probability variation / time saving table 202d2 for determining the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state) and the time saving state of 100 times are given after the jackpot ends, the special symbol changes. At least the chance table 202d3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the 90th to 110th times is included.

First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b). FIG. 21B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 21 (b), the normal table 202d1 has a random number value (variation type counter value) for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and stop type of special symbol. The counter value of CS1) is specified.

In the present embodiment, it is stipulated that a common fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and specifically, it is complete as a stop type. When the deviation is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the short deviation (5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the long deviation (10) is associated with the range of "99 to 198". The fluctuation pattern of (seconds) is associated. In addition, when a special symbol is drawn out and the out-of-reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the variable type counter CS1. Various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with the range of "160 to 198". In addition, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the super reach is associated with the range of "51 to 179". Various types (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 22A, details of the probability variation / time saving table 202d2 included in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. As described above, the probability change / time saving table 202d2 is a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in the probability change state and the time saving state.

In this probability change / time saving table 202d2, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same fluctuation type counter CS1 value. It is configured to be. Specifically, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed and the stop type is determined to be completely missed, a short miss (5 seconds) is associated with the range where the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 190". , "191 to 198" is associated with a long deviation (10 seconds). In this way, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the special symbol is drawn out, and when the stop type is determined to be completely out, the ratio of the short out is higher than in the normal mode (normal state). .. As a result, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in a probabilistic state or a slightly shorter time state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode (normal state).

In addition, when a special symbol is drawn out and the reach is determined to be out of reach as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. Are associated with each other. In addition, in the case of a small hit, which is a kind of loss, in the lottery of the first special symbol, various super reach (60 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. ) Is associated.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the super reach is associated with the range of "51 to 179". Various types (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198".

In this way, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state in which the probability change / time saving table 202d2 is set, unlike the normal mode (normal state), the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is easily selected as the selected fluctuation pattern. Further, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is easier to win the jackpot (for example, jackpot C) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol, is easily executed. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently executed by launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting. That is, when it becomes a big hit, it becomes an advantageous state in which a probabilistic state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that it will be a big hit.

Next, the details of the chance table 202d3 included in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 22B. As described above, the chance table 202d3 is a period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (90 to 110 times after the end of the jackpot) after the end of the jackpot executed when the jackpot type is "big hit A". It is a table in which the fluctuation pattern (variation time) inside is specified. That is, in the "big hit A" in which the time saving state (the period until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times) is given after the big hit ends, the final stage of the time saving state (90 to 100 times after the big hit ends) and the time saving state change to the normal state. It is a table used in the early stage (101 to 110 times after the end of the big hit) after the game state shifts.

Specifically, when complete deviation is determined as the stop type, a variation pattern of short deviation (5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and "99 to". The range of "150" is associated with the variation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds), and the range of "151 to 198" is associated with the variation pattern of out of chance (50 seconds). In addition, when a special symbol is drawn out and the out-of-reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 150" as the value of the variable type counter CS1. Various chance reach (50 seconds) are associated with the range of "151 to 198". In addition, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 10" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the chance reach is in the range of "11 to 179". Various types (50 seconds) are associated, and various special reach types (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". That is, in the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referred to, when the jackpot is won, the rate at which the chance fluctuation is selected is set to be the highest. As a result, by executing the fluctuation display based on the chance fluctuation, the player can have an expectation for a big hit and an expectation for the ball to enter the specific general entrance 630.

As described above, in the chance table 202d3, the special variation type (chance variation type) having a variation time of 50 seconds can be selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol and the selection result of the stop type. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60, but when the sphere is stored in the storage flow path 700e with this chance variation type selected, the second frame button (release) Button) An operation effect suggesting the operation timing of 22b is executed. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the operation timing suggested in this operation effect, the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e enters the specific general entry port 630. It becomes possible to do.

With this configuration, a ball stored in the storage flow path 700e (storage device) during a game state (probability change state or time saving state) capable of providing a right-handed game advantageous to the player is usually generated. The release operation can be performed efficiently in the state. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected by using the chance table 202d3 even during the period during which the right-handed game is executed (the final stage of the time-saving game). As a result, even in a state where the number of time reductions remains low and the expectation of winning a big hit during a right-handed game is low, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general entrance 630. , The player can be enthusiastically played until the end of the time saving state.

Further, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol, the result of the lottery this time is notified by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b as an operation effect. With this configuration, the effect of suggesting (notifying) the lottery result of the special symbol is executed by using the operation means (second frame button (release button) 22b) for releasing the storage state of the storage device. It is possible to provide a game that gives the player unexpectedness.

In the present embodiment, the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referred to is set so as to extend from the end of the time saving state to the beginning of the normal state, but the period is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined period of the time saving state (for example, , 20 to 10 times remaining in a short time), or when the number of lottery of special symbols exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 600 times) without winning a big hit, a variation pattern is set using the chance table 202d3. In addition, the chance variation type is associated with the predetermined value of the variation type counter CS1 in each variation pattern selection table used according to the gaming state without providing the chance table 202d3 as in the present embodiment. It may be specified as.

Next, the detailed contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e. The movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which an operation scenario used for operation control of the movable valve 750 is stored for each scenario type, and information stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e is stored. The movable valve 750 is operated in the order of scenario setting set at the time of power supply start-up processing.

Specifically, in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, operation scenarios 1 to 5 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario of 31.5 seconds, in which "opening 2 seconds → closing 0.1 seconds (1 set) x 15 times" is set as the scenario content. That is, the movable valve 750 is movable so that the period during which the flowing ball can be guided to the specific general entry port 630 (the period during which the movable valve 750 is closed) is 0.1 seconds out of 2.1 seconds. This is a working scenario. This "closing 0.1 second" is a period during which the ball is guided to the specific general entry port 630 when the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the right time, and is a variable operation for closing the movable valve 750. Even if the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated after the player visually recognizes the ball, it is set as a period during which the ball reaches the movable valve 750. As a result, it is possible to suppress the action of the player operating the second frame button (release button) 22b while visually recognizing the operating status of the movable valve 750.

The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario of 30.6 seconds in which "opening 5 seconds → closing 0.1 seconds (1 set) x 6 times" is set as the scenario content. This operation scenario 2 is set for a longer period in which the movable valve 750 is in the open state (open) as compared with the above-mentioned operation scenario 1, and is an operation scenario that is more disadvantageous to the player than the operation scenario 1. Further, since the period in which the movable valve 750 is closed (closed) is the same in the operation scenario 1 and the operation scenario 2, even if the player grasps the period in which the movable valve 750 is closed, the following It is possible to make it difficult to predict when the movable valve 750 closes.

In the operation scenario 3, "opening 4 seconds → ((closing 0.1 seconds → opening 0.2 seconds) × 3) (1 set) × 6 times" is set as the scenario content, and the operation is performed for 29.4 seconds. This is a scenario. In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-mentioned operation scenario 1 and operation scenario 2, the period (0.1 seconds) in which the movable valve 750 is closed (closed) is a short period (0.9 seconds) a plurality of times (0.9 seconds). This is an operation scenario that is set (3 times), and is an operation scenario that makes it easy to guide the ball to the specific general entry port 630.

The operation scenario 4 is an operation scenario of 31.5 seconds, in which "opening 3 seconds → closing 0.5 seconds (1 set) x 9 times" is set as the scenario content. In this operation scenario 4, the period for maintaining the closed state (closed) of the movable valve 750 is set longer (0.5 seconds) than in the operation scenarios 1 to 3 described above. This makes it possible to widely set the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b for guiding the ball to the specific general entry port 630.

In this way, by storing the predetermined operation contents of the movable valve 750 separately according to the operation period that is advantageous to the player and the operation period that is disadvantageous to the player, the operation is currently executed (or is performed). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the operation of the movable valve 750 (which will be executed in the future) is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. In the movable valve operation scenario table 202f, setting order information for operating the movable valve 750 is given to each scenario type defined in a predetermined order. In the MPU of the main control device 110, when the operation control of the movable valve 750 is executed, the information corresponding to the contents specified in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f is read from the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e and is movable. The valve 750 is movable.

In this movable valve operation scenario table 202f, when the operation based on the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order "END" is completed, the loop processing is executed so that the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order "1" is executed. .. In this embodiment, the movable valve operation scenario table 202f shows that the setting order is stored in advance, but other configurations may be used, for example, a plurality of predetermined scenario types. A means for determining any of the above as the operation start timing of the movable valve 750 is provided, the setting order "1" is set for the scenario type determined at the operation start timing, and thereafter, the setting order is given in ascending order. May be good. As a result, it is possible to make the operation scenario that is first executed different when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the operation of the movable valve 750.

In addition, a plurality of operation scenarios defined in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f in a predetermined order are configured to be read in a loop, and the operation scenario to be read first (that is, the setting order "1" is set. By making the part of the movable valve 750 different, it is possible to make the first action scenario executed when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the operation of the movable valve 750. And, when viewed over a long period of time, the variable operation of the movable valve 750 can be provided fairly. In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation process of the movable valve 750 from becoming complicated.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 25, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, release flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, other memory area 203z Have at least.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reserved area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning prize to the second ball entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area) and. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. They are added one by one (see S404 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 34).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 34, S405 in FIG. 36). reference). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased by the influence of noise and the like, and the main control device. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls held in 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. They are added one by one (see S410 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 34). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 39). ).

The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability change state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is “big hit B” or “big hit C” (see S1113 in FIG. 43). Further, the probability variation flag 203g becomes a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to off when the start of the big hit is set (see S219 in FIG. 34). In the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability change flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power off occurs. If this happens, it is configured to back up the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. At the end of the big hit game in which the big hit type is "big hit A", the time saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 (see S1112 in FIG. 43). That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state of 100 times is given.

The operation scenario storage area 203i is an area for reading and storing an operation scenario from the movable valve operation scenario table 202f when the operation control of the movable valve 750 (see S1009 in FIG. 46) is started. The operation control of the movable valve 750 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

The operation counter 203j is a counter used when executing operation control of the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771). Every time the storage valve operation process (see S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed, 1 is added (S1302), and the operation control based on the value of the counter is executed.

The release flag 203k is a flag for determining that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated, and if it is on, the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If it is off, it means that the second frame button (release button) 22b is not operated. This release flag 203k is set to ON when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 44) (S1202: Yes in FIG. 44). When it is set to on, the storage valve operation process (S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed, and when the storage valve operation process (S1206 in FIG. 45) is completed, it is set to off (see S1309 in FIG. 45).

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag set to be ON in the winning process (see S1010 in FIG. 47) executed to determine whether or not the ball has normally won the specific general ball entry port 630 (see S1010 in FIG. 47). (See S1504 in FIG. 47), which is used to start counting the remaining ball timer, which will be described later.

The remaining ball timer 203n is counted in order to specify a normal range in the winning process (see S1010 in FIG. 47) executed to determine whether or not the ball has normally won the specific general ball entry port 630. It is a timer. Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (value corresponding to 1 second), if the ball does not enter the specific general entry port 630, an error command is set.

The movable valve initial setting flag 203p is a flag set to be turned on in order to start the operation control of the movable valve 750, and the operation setting of the movable valve is set in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 41). It is set to on when doing so (see S914 in FIG. 41).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description continues. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric combination. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an object, a storage valve solenoid 770b for driving the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, and a movable valve 750 are projected (allowed) or buried (regulated). A movable valve solenoid 751 for the purpose is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 7, 122) circuit 253 and a storage valve of the storage device provided in the power supply device 115. The second frame button (release button) 22b that is operated when releasing is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to various switches 208, signals output from the second frame button (release button) 22b, and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 7,122) Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device 227 (decorative lamp 227a, transmission lamp 227b, other lamp 227c, etc.), and fluctuation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display effect (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a first frame button (effect button) 22a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the first frame button (effect button) 22a, and when the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 22a, the third symbol display device 81 The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the stage displayed by or change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 27. FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 26A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a movable valve operation scenario 222b, a music information storage area 222c, and a ball entry timing setting table 222d.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) ) Is used to determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The movable valve operation scenario 222b is provided so that the operation status of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side as well, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area in which information stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e and the movable valve operation scenario table 202f is stored.

Here, the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), in the movable valve operation scenario 222b, the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t, which will be described later, is associated with the same information as the movable valve operation scenario stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done. Furthermore, scenario groups are set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types. As a result, based on the movable valve state command output from the main control device 110 side, the operating status of the movable valve (current operating status and future operating status) can be grasped on the voice lamp control device side as well. Further, the scenario group set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types is used to determine whether or not the operation status of the movable valve is an operation status advantageous to the player.

The music information storage area 222c is an area in which music information used for the operation effect is stored, and is referred to when setting the display position of the effect pointer for the music used for the operation effect.

Here, the contents of the music information storage area 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the music information storage area 222c. As shown in FIG. 28, in the music information storage area 222c, music data 222c1 and range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data) set for each range type in which the range of music data 222c1 is divided by a predetermined threshold value. 222c3) and is stored.

The music data 222c1 is information (scale, tempo, etc.) related to the music executed (reproduced) by the operation effect, and the range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3) is set based on this information. Has been done.

The range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3) is information set by dividing the music data 222c1 into a plurality of range (range 1 (high range) and range 2 (low range)). In this information, a position corresponding to the tempo of the music executed in the operation effect (the position where the note is written in the scale of the music data 222c1) is set as the effect pointer displayable area. In this way, by setting the displayable area of the effect pointer used in the operation effect in advance for the music data, when the display position of the effect pointer is changed for the operation effect, it is executed in the operation effect. The production pointer can be displayed at a timing that does not cause discomfort corresponding to the (played) music.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, in the music executed (reproduced) by the operation effect, since the number of notes recorded is different between the range 1 and the range 2, the range 2 data is more than the range 1 data 222c2. A large area where the effect pointer can be displayed is set in 222c3. In other words, the range 1 data 222c2 has a wider interval in which the displayable area of the effect pointer can be set than the range 2 data. In this way, by making it possible to set the effect pointer displayable area for each range of the music executed (played) by the operation effect, it is possible to execute different operation effects using the same music. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required to provide the player with various operation effects.

Further, in the operation effect, when the configuration in which the player can select the interval for operating the operation means (first frame button 22a or second frame button 22b) is used, the range corresponding to the operation interval selected by the player is used. It is possible to execute the operation effect desired by the player only by executing the operation effect using the type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3).

In this way, when a plurality of range type data is created from one music data and an operation effect corresponding to the selected range type data of each range type data is executed, the selected range type data is used. It is preferable that the corresponding sound is output when the operating means is operated. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the player's operation and the operation effect when executing the operation effect with different range types for one song. The effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of sound range type data (sound range 1 data 222c2, sound range 2 data 222c3) are stored for one music data 222c1 in the music information storage area 222c, but other than that. In addition, for example, type data may be set for each of a plurality of instruments used for one piece of music data 222c1, or type data may be set for each of a plurality of different tempos.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (b). FIG. 26B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. Flag 223f, effect counter 223g, round number cumulative counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, ball passing flag 223n, release operation flag 223p. , Release state flag 223q, effect temporary storage area 223r, movable valve state storage area 223s, movable valve operation counter 223t, movable valve initial flag 223u, closing timing storage area 223v, timing effect setting flag 223w. , The effect execution flag 223x, the pressing period information storage area 223y, the difficulty level storage area 223aa, the difficulty level selection flag 223ab, the ball passage information storage area 223ac, the ball entry timing storage area 223ad, and the other memory area 223z. And at least are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. More specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 50) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol (special symbol 1). Corresponds to the number of reserved balls for variable production based on the lottery of special symbol 2).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. The command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203d is used from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2211 in FIG. 50). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. , The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c after storage, a display hold ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while making it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

When the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f of the main control device 110 is increased or decreased, the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball counter 223d is increased or decreased according to the content of the received command. It is a counter to be used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol managed by the main control device 110 side with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113 side. is there. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Regarding the detailed contents when the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the case where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol described above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used. Since the same is true, the description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223e is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 55). When the variation start flag 223e is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2710 in FIG. 55). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 value each time the main process (see FIG. 49) is executed. .. The effect counter 223 g has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when the effect pattern is determined by referring to the plurality of counter values in one loop processing, the counter values are different from each other. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that the bias of the set effect pattern can be suppressed. It should be noted that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the acquired value, the other selection refers to the tens digit of the acquired value, and the other selection refers to one of the acquired values. The ones digit of the obtained value may be referred to by multiplying the value obtained by multiplying the digit of the digit by three and the value obtained by multiplying the tens digit by five. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and is updated to a value corresponding to the round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 (when the round number command is received. In S2504) of FIG. 53, the value of the counter is reset to 0 in the jackpot ending effect processing (S2513 in FIG. 53). In the voice lamp control device 113, a display round number command is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223h (S2611, S2614 in FIG. 54).

The probability change state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol. When the probability change state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The probability change state flag 223i is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. Depending on the state of the probability change state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the present is the probability change state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. To determine if.

The time saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the normal symbol. When the time saving state counter 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that it is in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. The time saving state counter 223j is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current time saving state is the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining that a sphere is stored in the storage flow path 700e, and is set based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2 provided in the storage flow path 700e. Is done. When the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the spheres are stored in the storage flow path 700e, and when it is off, it indicates that the spheres are not stored in the storage flow path 700e. This storage state flag 223k is set to on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57) that the storage detection sensor S2 is detecting a sphere (see S2853 in FIG. 57), and storage detection is performed. It is set to off when the sensor S2 determines that the ball is not detected (S2855 in FIG. 57). Then, in the variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55), when the variation pattern of the chance pattern is acquired (S2704: Yes in FIG. 55), it is referred to (S2705 in FIG. 55). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON (S2705: Yes in FIG. 55), an effect of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 13) is executed.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 700e has reached the upper limit number (five in this embodiment), and is set in the storage flow path 700e. Settings are made based on the detection result of the provided storage upper limit sensor S1. When the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of spheres is stored in the storage flow path 700e, and when it is off, the upper limit number of spheres is not stored in the storage flow path 700e. Show that. This storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57) that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is detecting a sphere (see S2858 in FIG. 57), and the storage upper limit is set. It is set to off when the sensor S1 determines that the ball is not detected (S2862 in FIG. 57). Then, in the jackpot middle effect processing (see S2504 in FIG. 54), when a predetermined round (7 or 15 round in this embodiment) is entered (S2605: yes in FIG. 54), it is referred to (S2606 in FIG. 54). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2606: Yes in FIG. 54), an effect of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 11) is executed.

The ball passing flag 223n is a flag for determining that the ball has passed a predetermined area (the area where the first ball passing sensor S3 is provided) in the board unit 700. When the ball passing flag 223n is on, it indicates that the ball has passed the predetermined region, and when it is off, the ball has not passed through the predetermined region (for example, a predetermined period after the ball has passed through the predetermined region (for example). 1 second) has passed). The ball passage flag 223n is set to ON when the first ball passage sensor S3 (see FIG. 3) detects the passage of a ball in the ball passage monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56) (S2804 in FIG. 56). Similarly, in the ball passage monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56), when the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 within a predetermined period after the ball passage flag 223n is set to ON (SS2806 in FIG. 56: Yes), it is set to off when the second ball passing sensor S4 detects a ball (S2807: Yes in FIG. 56) or when a predetermined period has elapsed (S2808: Yes in FIG. 56). S2813).

The release operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If the release operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated, and if it is off, the second frame button (release button) 22b has not been operated. Is shown. This release operation flag 223p is set to ON when a release operation command is received (see S2218 in FIG. 50) in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 50) (see S2219 in FIG. 50). (See S2217 in FIG. 52), when a command indicating a closed (non-released) state is received (S2404: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to off (see S2406 in FIG. 52).

The release state flag 223q is a flag for determining whether or not the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) are in the open (release) state. When the release state flag 223q is on, it indicates that the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is in the open (release) state, and when it is off, the storage device (first storage device). 770, the second storage device 771) is in a closed (non-released) state. This release state flag 223q is a storage device-related process (see S2217 in FIG. 52) that is executed when a storage device-related command is received (S2216: Yes in FIG. 50) in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 50). When an open state command (storage state command corresponding to the release state) is received in (S2401: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to ON (see S2402 in FIG. 52), and a closed state command (storage corresponding to the non-release state) is set. When a status command) is received (S2404: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to off (see S2405 in FIG. 52). When this release state flag 223q is set to ON, the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56) is executed, and the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) flow down. The situation is monitored.

The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the set effect contents until the effect is executed. For example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot is described. The content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored during the period from the set timing (7th or 15th round) to the timing (8th or 16th round) when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the jackpot. .. When it is determined in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) that the effect set this time is the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot, the effect temporary storage area 223r is determined (FIG. 62). S3210: Yes), the set effect mode is memorized (see S3214 in FIG. 62), and the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the jackpot medium effect process (see S2504 in FIG. 54) (8 or 16 rounds). ) Is executed (S2609: Yes in FIG. 54), it is read out (S2611 in FIG. 54).

The movable valve state storage area 223s is an area in which information for grasping the operating status of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) is stored on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is a value of the movable valve operation counter 223t described later. The operating status of the movable valve 750 is updated at any time in response to the above. In the movable valve state storage area 223s, when the movable valve state information including the initial information is received in the movable valve state command processing (see S2215 in FIG. 51) (S2302: Yes in FIG. 51), the movable valve operation scenario 222b Information is stored (see S2303 in FIG. 51), and the operating state of the movable valve 750 is updated based on the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t. It is determined whether the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s matches the content of the movable valve state command each time the movable valve state command is received from the main control device 110 (S2309 in FIG. 51). .. Further, the movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area based on the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s (see S2306 in FIG. 51).

The movable valve operation counter 223t is a counter used for grasping the operating status of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is a movable valve operation stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s. It is for updating the scenario information. The movable valve operation counter 223t is set to "1" when the movable valve operation scenario is set to the movable valve state storage area 223s (see S2303 in FIG. 51) in the movable valve state command processing (see S2215 in FIG. 51). A value is set (S2304 in FIG. 51), and the value of the counter is changed each time the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112 in FIG. 64) executed in the main process (see FIG. 49) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. "1" is added (S3403 in FIG. 64). When the counter value has reached the upper limit, the counter value is set to "1" again (S3404 in FIG. 64). In this way, by updating the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t in the process (main process) executed periodically (1 ms), the operation status of the movable valve 750 is appropriately managed on the voice lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

The movable valve initial flag 223u is a flag for determining that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on, and is a state in which a movable valve operation scenario is initially set in the movable valve state storage area 223s. It is used to determine whether or not. If the movable valve initial flag 223u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not immediately after the power is turned on. The movable valve initial flag 223u is set to ON in the start-up process (see FIG. 48) of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2013 in FIG. 48), and is referred to in the movable valve state command process (see FIG. 51) (see FIG. 51 S2301), the movable valve operation scenario is set to the movable valve state storage area 223s and then turned off (S2305 in FIG. 51). Further, if the movable valve state command received from the main controller 110 does not include the initial information even though the movable valve initial flag 223u is set to ON, an error command is set (FIG. 51). (See S2307).

The closing timing storage area 223v is an area for storing the closing timing of the movable valve 750, and the timing at which the movable valve 750 is closed (that is, the ball is closed) based on the information set in the movable valve state storage area 223s. The timing of entering the ball into the specific general entry port 630) is stored. In the movable valve state command processing (see S2215 in FIG. 51), the closing timing storage area 223v receives the movable valve state command including the initial information from the main control device 110 (S2302: Yes in FIG. 51), and the movable valve state. When a movable valve operation scenario is set in the storage area 223s, the closing timing of the movable valve is calculated based on the movable valve operation scenario, and the calculated closing timing is stored (S2306 in FIG. 51). The closing timing stored in the closing timing storage area 223v is referred to when setting the effect pointer in the timing effect (operation effect).

The timing effect setting flag 223w is a flag for determining whether to execute the timing effect (operation effect) for executing the effect of causing the player to operate the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). If it is on, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if it is off, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied. In the present embodiment, a specific fluctuation pattern (chance fluctuation type) is selected as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), and the sphere is stored in the storage flow path 700e, or A state in which a predetermined round (8R, 16R) during the jackpot game is started is set.

The timing effect setting flag 223w is obtained in the variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55), and the acquired variation pattern is a chance pattern (variation pattern indicating the chance variation type) (S2704: Yes in FIG. 55), and the storage state. When it is determined that the flag 223k is on (S2705: Yes in FIG. 55), it is set to on. Further, in the hit-related processing (S2221 in FIG. 53), when an interval command indicating the end of 7 or 15 rounds is received (S2507: Yes in FIG. 53) and it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (FIG. 53). S2508: Yes) is set to on.

Then, when the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON, the timing effect (operation effect) is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60) (see S3102 to S3105 in FIG. 60). Then, when the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is to be executed during the special symbol variation, after setting the display timing effect command in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62). (See S3211 in FIG. 62), when it is set to off (S3213 in FIG. 62) and the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is executed during the jackpot game, the jackpot medium effect process (FIG. In (see S2504 of FIG. 54), the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2609: Yes in FIG. 54), and after the display effect round command is set (see S2611 in FIG. 54), it is turned off. It is set (S2613 in FIG. 54).

The effect executing flag 223x is a flag for determining whether or not the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect execution flag 223x is referred to when it is determined whether the operation for the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is an operation based on the timing effect (operation effect). This effect execution flag 223x is set to on (see S3212 in FIG. 62) after setting the display timing effect command (see S3211 in FIG. 62) in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62). ). Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing (see S2504 in FIG. 54), a round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2609: Yes in FIG. 54), and after the display effect round command is set (FIG. 54). Is set to on (see S261612 in FIG. 54). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) is completed, it is set to off.

The pressing period information storage area 223y is an operation means (first frame button 22a or second frame) set to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer, hit pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). This is an area for storing the operation timing of the button 22b). In the pressing period information storage area 223y, the successful pressing period is set in correspondence with the set display pointers (effect pointer, hit pointer) in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) (FIG. 62). See S3209). The successful pressing period set here is the successful pressing period when the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is pressed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59). (See S3005 and S3006 in FIG. 59).

The difficulty level storage area 223aa is an area for storing the difficulty level information of the timing effect (operation effect) selected by the player. In this difficulty level storage area 223aa, the difficulty level information selected in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59) is stored (see S3012 in FIG. 59). The information stored in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is referred to when setting the effect mode of the corresponding timing effect (S3133 in FIG. 61 (a)), and is cleared when the corresponding timing effect (operation effect) ends. To.

The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether or not the effect of selecting the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed (whether the timing is such that the difficulty level can be selected), and whether it is on or not. If it is, it indicates that the timing is such that the difficulty level can be selected, and if it is off, it indicates that the timing is not such that the difficulty level can be selected. The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operating means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is an operation based on the effect of selecting the difficulty level. This difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON when it is determined that the first round has started (S2602: Yes in FIG. 54) in the jackpot medium effect processing (see S2504 in FIG. 54), and the first round ends. It is set to off when it is determined that the problem has occurred (S2602: No in FIG. 54).

The ball passage information storage area 223ac is an area for storing information indicating the passage period until the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e passes through the specific general entry port 630 or the outlet 700b of the board unit 700. Is. The position where the pointer (effect pointer) is displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is corrected based on the information indicating the passage period stored in the ball passage information storage area 223ac. In the ball passage information storage area 223ac, information indicating the passage period calculated in the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56) is stored (S2812 in FIG. 56), and the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63). (See S3301 in FIG. 63). The ball passage information storage area 223ac is configured to be capable of storing a plurality of information indicating the passage period (for example, for 1000 times). Therefore, it is possible to correct the timing effect (operation effect) by using the passing period calculated a plurality of times. Therefore, for example, the effect content is corrected based on the occurrence of a sphere that has unexpectedly moved. It is possible to set an appropriate timing effect (operation effect) without any problem.

In the present embodiment, the ball passage information storage area 223ac is provided in the RAM 223. For example, the ball passage information storage area 223ac is provided in a recording medium capable of holding information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. You may.

The ball entry timing storage area 223ad stores the ball entry timing set in the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63) based on the passage period calculated in the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56). It is an area to do. Based on the ball entry timing stored in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad, the effect mode (effect pointer) of the timing effect (operation effect) is set.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 65) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry are entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 65).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. A right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 11A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as a rear image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without the number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a timing counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. It has at least 233i, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, will be opened. It is a production, and the round production is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol, which is composed of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. May be specified as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the back type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 31). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 31).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31, in the example of FIG. 31). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 65) (see S5005 in FIG. 65). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S6605 in FIG. 76 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 67 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 67B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 67B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 67 (b) see S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 73 to 75) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 76 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 76 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later, which describes the instruction content of image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 67 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S6205 in FIG. 73) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 32) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 32, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 67 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6207 in FIG. 73). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6713 in FIG. 77). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6714 in FIG. 77). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 78).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 67 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S6802 of FIG. 78).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 47. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (300 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 300, 99, 239, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, respectively. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold counts N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and extracts the extracted values from the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , The hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process shifts to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 35. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot is A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If the jackpot is C, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the green LED is turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set (S217) based on the jackpot type, and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). In addition, the opening scenario specifically shows the setting of the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls win), and in the 12th round, It is shown that the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) according to the jackpot type. When the processing of S218 is completed, the probability variation flag 203g is set to off (S219). Next, the time saving and medium counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out of order (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S222), and the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0). If it is determined (S222: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S222: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S223). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0 (S224), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S224: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0 (S224: Yes), the process proceeds to S221.

In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302), and if it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the value for high probability. Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the same judgment value as a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 is used. It may be a different random value. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of judgment values to be big hits, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that are big hits may be different. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "200" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). , A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of three types of special symbols (big hit). It is determined what type of jackpot is among A, jackpot B, and jackpot C).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

The fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disappearance", and "disengagement" as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. Various types of "normal reach", various types of "outside super reach", and various types of "outside chance reach" are stipulated. In addition, various types of "shared normal reach", various "shared super reach", various "shared chance reach", and various "shared special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether it is out of reach or out of reach is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 42). Will be sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. , This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set. , RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each of the processes of S407 to S412, the same process as that of each of the processes of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The only difference between the processes of S407 to S412 is that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball opening 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each process of S407 to S412 is completed, the look-ahead process is executed (S413), and the main process is completed.

Next, the look-ahead process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 36).

In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (S501), and any of the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening 640. If there is no new prize (S501: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), whether or not the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the probability change state of the special symbol. If the determination is made (S502) and the special symbol is in a probabilistic state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process shifts to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for the low probability time (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Move to. In the process of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the determination results of the jackpot, is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the second acquired by the process of S607. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c2 in FIG. 20 (c)).

In the processing of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607. And, based on the second hit random number table for the low probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c1 in FIG. 20 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: Yes), the electric combination attached to the second entrance 640. The opening period of the object 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times the object is opened is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the opening period thereof is set to 0.2 seconds. The number of times of opening is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S611: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 1 second (S618), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 1 second", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S618 or the process of S619 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Judgment (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S614 or the process of S615 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S910 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S910 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1017 in FIG. 42, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are set to be closed (S913). That is, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage device (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) is always closed (that is, the ball is in the storage flow path 700e (see FIG. 3)). It is set so that it cannot pass through). As a result, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage devices (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) can always be in a constant state, and the specific general entry port 630 can be used. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter. Therefore, it is possible to optimize the gaming state after the RAM 203 is initialized, and it is possible to prevent the act of initializing the RAM 203 and illegally storing the balls in the specific general entrance 630.

After finishing the process of S912, the operation of the movable valve 750 is set next (S914). In the process of S914, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p for starting the operation control of the movable valve 750 is set to ON. By setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON, the operation control of the movable valve 750 can be performed in the movable valve control process (see S1009 in FIG. 42) of the main process (see FIG. 42) of the main control device 110 described later. To be started. In the present embodiment, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to on in the start-up process S914. For example, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to on every time the start-up process is executed. It may be configured so that the timing is different.

With this configuration, the timing at which the operation control of the movable valve is started can be changed each time the start-up process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operating status of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed period from when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, when a configuration is used in which the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to be on is different in this way, for example, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to on at the same timing. It is good to do so.

As a method of differently setting the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON as described above, for example, a delay timer for delaying the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON is provided, and the start-up process is delayed. The process of executing the timer may be performed. Then, as the delay period set in the delay timer, the values of various counters provided in the main control device 110 are used, the information stored in the storage area updated at any time is used, or the delay period is drawn by lottery. A lottery means for determining may be provided. When the process of S914 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S915.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S915. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S915, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power recovery is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S915). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state, the number of times of the normal symbol is shortened, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203h and the state of the probability change flag 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the recognition of the game state can be matched between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed even though the special symbol is in the low probability state, or conversely, the player is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) from being displayed when the player strikes right-handed. That is, it is possible to match the gaming state with the effect to be executed.

When the process of S915 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 to allow the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various effects (S916). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S917), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the RAM 203 is not initialized, the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, so that detailed description is omitted, but the storage device (first storage valve). For the 770a, the second storage valve 771a), and the movable valve 750, continuous operation control is executed from the state before the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is temporarily turned off due to noise or the like, the game can be continuously executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

When the start-up process is executed, the following control different from the present embodiment is performed as the setting of the operation control for the storage device (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) and the movable valve 750. You may do it. First, the startup process is executed to determine whether or not the RAM 203 has been initialized, and if it is determined that the RAM 203 has not been initialized, whether or not the power has been turned off normally. To determine. Thereby, it is specified whether the state when the start-up process is executed is the initialization state, the normal power-on state, or the abnormal power-on state.

Then, in the abnormal power-on state, since it is a temporary power interruption state (instantaneous power state) due to noise or the like, the data backed up in the RAM 203 is used to continue the operation from the state before the power is turned off. Execute control processing. Next, in the case of the normal power-on state, the same process as that executed when the RAM 203 described above is initialized in the present embodiment is executed. Finally, in the initialized state, the storage devices (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) can pass through the closed state (that is, the storage flow path 700e (see FIG. 3)). The movable valve 750 is set to be in a non-existent state), and the movable valve 750 is set at a specific timing (for example, a delay period of 0 seconds) and at a specific location (for example, a location stored at the beginning) of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. It is advisable to execute the process so that the operation control is started from.

As a result, in the abnormal power-on state, the game can be continuously executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and in the normal power-on state, the movable valve of the movable valve is executed every time the start-up process is executed. The timing at which the operation control is started can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operating status of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed period from when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, in the initialized state, the movable valve 750 is controlled by a specific operation content, so that it can be easily set when it is desired to operate the movable valve 750 with the same content for a plurality of pachinko machines 10. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 34) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 43) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are set according to the opening scenario set by the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 34) for each round of the jackpot state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) ends, the first symbol display device 37 The executed variation display is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped at the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 35). Display (light up display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 38). Lighting display).

After executing the process of S1007, the storage control process is executed (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, but a process for setting the opening and closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is executed.

When the process of S1008 is completed, the movable valve control process is executed (S1009). The movable valve control process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, but the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed or closed based on the setting state of the movable valve initial setting flag 203p. Execute the process to control the release state. Next, when the process of S1009 is completed, the winning process is executed (S1010). The winning process (S1010) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

When the processing of S1010 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1012). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1012: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1012: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process is executed. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (300, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1011 if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1015 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1016). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1017), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1011 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1010, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the specific winning opening 65a It is a process for opening or closing.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 34) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1103: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S1103 that the special symbol is being hit (S1103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) are used. ) If the above prizes are won, it is judged that the closing conditions have been met.

If it is determined in the process of S1107 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is closed (S1108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds or all 8 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1110 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1111), and if it is jackpot A (S1111: Yes), the time is shortened to the normal symbol after the jackpot A is completed. In order to make the transition, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to 100 (S1112), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1111, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot is B or C) (S1111: No), the special symbol is in a high probability state after the jackpot B or C ends. In order to make the transition, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S1113), and this process ends.

Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a. As described above with reference to FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, a plurality of spheres (upper limit 5) stored in the storage flow path 700e are operated on the second frame button (release button) 22b. The operations of the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 and the second storage valve 771a of the second storage device 771 are controlled so as to flow down one by one. With this configuration, the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e can flow down in accordance with the timing of the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b performed by the player. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the second frame button (release button) 22b. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are different from each other by driving one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). It has a configuration in which it is opened (released) and closed (non-released) at a timing (predetermined timing). With such a configuration, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where an electric drive source is provided for each storage valve, and cost reduction and space saving of the device can be achieved.

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is on (S1201), and when it is determined that the release flag 203s is not on (that is, it is off) (S1201: No), the first storage valve Since it means that the 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are set to be able to store balls), the second frame button (release) is then set. It is determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the button) 22b (S1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing detection signal is detected.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1202: No), the first In order to keep the storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a in the closed state, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the push (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b is detected (that is, the push detection signal is detected) (S1202: Yes), the release button operation command is set (S1203). ). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set, the release flag 203k is set to ON (S1204), and the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are opened. A storage state command corresponding to the open state (release state) of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set in order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the state has been reached (S1205). This process ends.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the mode is set so that the characters "gate is open" are displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are in the open state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is ON (S1201: Yes), the storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is executed. (S1206). The details of the storage valve operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45. When the process of S1206 is completed, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is off (S1207), and if it is determined that the release flag 203k is not off (that is, it is on) (S1207: No), the present process is ended. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1207, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is on (S1207: Yes), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed (first storage device 770 and second). Since the storage device 771 is set to a state in which balls can be stored), the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a have been closed. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set (S1208), and this process is terminated.

The storage state mand set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear side type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63A, the mode is set so that the characters "When the button is pressed, the gate is opened!" Are displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be set to the open state by pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b.

By executing this storage control process, opening or closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be set according to the operation status of the second frame button (release button) 22b. As a result, by storing the ball in the upper part of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a at an arbitrary timing of the player, the ball enters the out port, and the first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770 and the first. 2 It is possible to switch the state in which the ball that has flowed into (entered) into the storage device 771 flows down toward the specific general entry port 630.

Here, the storage valve operation process (S1206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this storage valve operation process (S1206). This storage valve operation process (S1206) is executed in the storage control process (see FIG. 44), and is a process for setting the operation of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a.

In the storage valve operation process, first, the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to be turned on in the positive direction (S1301), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1302). Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303). If it is determined in the process of S1303 that the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to off (S1304), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 250 (S1303: No), then it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305). If it is determined in the process of S1305 that the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to ON in the negative direction (S1306), and this process ends.

In the process of S1305, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 375 (S1305: No), then it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 (S1307). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 in the process of S1307 (S1307: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to off (S1306). Then, the release flag 203k is set to off (S1309), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1310), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 500 (S1307: No), this process is also terminated.

Next, the movable valve control process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this movable valve control process (S1009). This movable valve control process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the movable valve 750.

In the movable valve control process, first, it is determined whether or not the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is on (S1201), and when it is determined that the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is on (S1201: Yes), it is movable. The operation scenario is stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i based on the valve operation scenario table 202f (S1402). When the processing of S1403 is completed, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to off (S1403), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is not on (that is, it is off) (S1201: No), the processes of S1402 and S1403 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, the operation information of the operation scenario is acquired from the operation scenario storage area 203i (S1404), and based on the acquired operation information, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new scenario type (S1405). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the new scenario type (S1405: Yes), the movable valve state command indicating the start of the new scenario type is set (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1407. This movable valve state command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 42). The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the movable valve state command as it is to the display control device 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that it is not the start timing of the new scenario type (S1405: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1407. In the process of S1407, it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the movable valve 750 based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404 (S1407). In the process of S1407, if it is determined that the closing timing of the movable valve 750 is (S1407: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is set to ON (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409.

On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that the closing timing of the movable valve 750 is not (S1407: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1409. In the process of S1409, it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the movable valve 750 based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404 (S1409). In the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is the opening timing of the movable valve 750 (S1409: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is set to off (S1410), and the process proceeds to the process of S1411.

On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the movable valve 750 (S1409: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1411. In the process of S1411, the operation counter 203j is added by 1, and this process is terminated.

Next, the winning process (S1010) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1010). This winning process (S1010) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the release flag 203k is on (S1502). When it is determined that the release flag 203k is on (S1502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first ball passage sensor S3 has detected the passage of the game ball (S1503). When it is determined that the first ball passage sensor S3 has detected the passage of the game ball (S1503: Yes), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), and in the process of S1503, the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the game ball. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (S1503: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1501 that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1505.

When it is determined in S1501 that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501: Yes), and when the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON in S1504, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve Since it means the release period (opening period) of 771a, the release period (opening period) of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is updated by adding 1 to the remaining ball timer 203n for timing (S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after the update is the upper limit value (that is, whether one second has elapsed since the release of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set) (S1506). ), When it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached (1 second has not passed) (S1506: No), it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific general entry port 630 (S1507), and the specification is made. When it is determined that no game ball has entered the general entry port 630 (S1507: No), this process ends.

In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific general entry port 630 (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1508. On the other hand, in the process of S1506, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), an error command is set (S1510), and the process proceeds to the process of S1508. The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying characters of a winning number mismatch error) is set, and an error signal output is set for the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific general entrance 630 from illegally winning a game ball.

In the process of S1508, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1508), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to the initial value 0 (S1509). After that, this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 63. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2120 (see FIG. 49) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 49, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 49), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2120. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2120 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2120 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to SS2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2120 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2120, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2120 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 49). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2120 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the operation is started after the power failure of S2120 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2012) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2008 via the processes of S2004 to S2006 This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability change state flag 223i is updated (S2011) according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110, interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. By updating the probability change state flag 223i based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect according to the game state.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2009 is that when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2101 this time was executed (S2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2113, the variation display setting process of S2114, the ball passage monitoring process of S2115, and the storage state monitoring process of S2116 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay. Further, since the processing of S2115 is executed in a short cycle, the setting related to the passing counter can be performed without delay based on the first ball passing sensor S3 and the second ball passing sensor S4, and the processing of S2116 can be performed in a short cycle. By executing the settings, the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m can be set without delay based on the storage state.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2116 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the first frame button 22a operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is pressed, and the input of the first frame button 22a is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case. In this process, when the operation of the first frame button 22a by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the first frame button 22a is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S2110 is completed, the timing effect setting processing is performed (S2111). Details of this timing effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63.

When the processing of S2111 is completed, the movable valve operation counter update processing is executed (S2112). This movable valve operation counter update process is a process for updating the movable valve operation counter based on the movable valve operation scenario. Details of this movable valve operation counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the movable valve operation counter update process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, the variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the process proceeds to S2115. In the process of S2115, the ball passage monitoring process is executed (S2115). In the ball passage monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this ball passage monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the process proceeds to S2116. In the process of S2116, the storage state monitoring process is executed (S2116). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2117). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2117 (S2117: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2119), and the power-off process is executed (S2120). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2121), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2117 (S2117: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2118), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2118: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2118: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for.

In the command determination process (FIG. 50, S2113), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is executed. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main control device 110 is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each pattern.

When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S2201 (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the special symbol for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol). When stored in a format and notified to the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. It is used (when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If it is determined that a stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) has been received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the received command type is set to on. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to on, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to on. Next, the stop type (any of complete loss, reach loss, small hit, and big hit A to C) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and this process ends. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. Then, it is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2207). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this process is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is matched with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 (starting winning), so that the starting winning is won. Each time there is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c is set by the process of S2210, and the special symbol 1 of the main control device 110 is reserved. The values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e can be adjusted respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Alternatively, even if the value deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e, if the hold ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Further, in the process of S2209, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2212). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S2212 (S2212: Yes), the winning information command receiving processing is executed (S2213). In this winning information command reception process (S2213), various flags to be referred to and various counters are set in order to set various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, the special symbol executed before the change of the pending special symbol starts (that is, before the change of the target special symbol). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be given, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether the movable valve state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the movable valve state command has been received (S2214: Yes), the movable valve state command process is executed (S2215), and this process ends.

Here, the movable valve state command processing (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the movable valve state command process (S2215). This movable valve state command process (S2215) is a process executed in order for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the operating status (opening and closing status) of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores the movable valve operation scenario 222b including the same information as the operation information (operation scenario) for the main control device 110 to operate the movable valve 750. By synchronizing the progress of the operation information with the operation control of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the future operation status of the movable valve 750. As a result, the effect based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve can be set and executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side. By executing the effect based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve, it is possible to suggest the timing for the player to operate (press) the second frame button 22b.

When the movable valve state command process (S2215) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the movable valve initial flag 223u is on (S2301). When it is determined that the movable valve initial flag 223u is on (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the movable valve state command received this time includes the initial information (S2302). That is, the movable valve state command received while the movable valve initial flag 223u, which is set to be on when the power is turned on, is set to on, is executed in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether the movable valve state command includes the initial information indicating that the operation control of the movable valve 750 set in the operation setting of the movable valve to be performed (see S914 in FIG. 41) is started. In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the movable valve state command received this time includes the initial information (S2302: Yes), the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2303). ), The value of the movable valve operation counter 223t is set to 1 (S2304), and the movable valve initial flag 223u is set to off (S2305).

Then, the timing at which the movable valve 750 is closed is acquired based on the movable valve operation scenario set in the movable valve state storage area 223s and the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t. The acquired movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area 223v (S2306), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 has the same information as the information of the operation scenario used when the main control device 110 controls the operation of the movable valve 750, and the main control device 110 has the movable valve. When the operation control of the 750 is started, the information (initial information) indicating the start is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first information, the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 It is configured to grasp the operating status of the movable valve 750 by using the same information as the information. The initial information set in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 41) includes the start timing of the movable valve 750 and the type of operation scenario used. As other information, for example, when a configuration in which the operation start timing of the movable valve 750 is different (delayed) is used, it is actually movable after the start-up process (see FIG. 41) of the main control device 110 is executed. The initial information may include period information indicating the period until the valve 750 starts operating (that is, the delay period).

Further, when starting the operation of the movable valve 750 and using a configuration in which the start points of the operation scenarios are different, it is preferable to include the information indicating the start points set this time in the initial information. Further, as the initial information, period scenario information indicating operation scenario information for a predetermined period after the operation of the movable valve 750 is started may be included. As a result, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the initial information, the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b can be set in the movable valve state storage area 223s based on the period scenario information for a predetermined period. It is possible to easily synchronize with the operating status of the movable valve 750.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2302 that the information received this time does not include the initial information (S2302: No), the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 41) and the start-up of the voice lamp control device 113. It is determined that the timing at which the process (see FIG. 48) is executed is different, an error command is set (S2307), and this process is terminated. If an error command is set here, the third symbol display device 81 is notified that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is to be turned on again based on the set error command. Then, by turning on the power again, the start-up process of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is executed again, and the normal state can be restored. If the error command is set even if the power is turned on again and again, it is determined that the rise timing of the main control device 110 and the rise timing of the voice lamp control device 113 are not normal timings. It may be configured to change the setting contents of the error command.

In the process of S2301, when it is determined that the movable valve initial flag 223u is not on (off) (S2301: No), the operating status of the current movable valve 750, which is updated by the voice lamp control device 113 at any time. Is read from the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2308), and is compared with the movable valve state command received this time to determine whether the contents match (S2309). Here, if it is determined that the contents match (S2309: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the contents do not match (S2309: No), an error command indicating that the contents do not match is set (S2307), and this process ends.

Here, if the information indicating the operating status of the movable valve does not match the movable valve status command received from the main control device 110 and the operating status of the movable valve status storage area 223s of the voice lamp control device 113, they must match. A storage means capable of storing the determined number of times may be provided, and an error command may be set when the number of times stored in the storage means is stored a predetermined number of times, specifically, a predetermined number of times are continuously stored. As a result, it is possible to suppress the case where the discrimination result in which the contents do not match due to the suddenly generated noise is only obtained as an error.

In the present embodiment, the operation scenario used when the operation control of the movable valve 750 by the main control device 110 is configured by combining a plurality of scenario types for a predetermined period (about 30 seconds), and the scenario type. Is configured to send a movable valve status command at the timing of switching to a new scenario type. As a result, the total number of commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition to that, when the voice lamp control device 113 is in a state where there is a possibility of executing an effect based on the operating state of the movable valve 750, that is, when the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern. , The movable valve state command is output when the chance table 202d3 is referred to, when the variation type for chance is actually selected from the chance table 202d3, or when the jackpot is started. As a result, the total number of commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort can be suppressed.

Return to FIG. 50 and continue the description. In the process of S2214, when it is determined that the movable valve state command has not been received (S2214: No), it is determined whether or not the storage device-related command has been received (S2216). If it is determined in S2216 that the storage device-related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the storage device-related process is executed (S2217), and this process ends.

Here, the storage device-related processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the storage device-related processing (S2217). This storage device-related process (S2217) is an operation of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) executed based on the player operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. This is a process for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the contents.

When the storage device-related process (S2217) is executed, first, the storage device-related command received this time is in the open (release) state of the storage device (the state in which the ball can flow down the storage flow path 700e (see FIG. 3)). It is determined whether the command indicates (S2401). In the process of S2401, when it is determined that the command indicates the open state (S2401: Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to ON (S2402), the display release command is set (S2403), and this process is performed. finish. The display release command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the storage device is released, a dedicated effect is executed. As this special effect, for example, the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a suggestion mode suggesting a privilege (15 prize balls) given to the player when the ball enters the specific general entrance 630. When the ball enters the specific general entry port 630, the suggestion mode is changed to the definite mode, and when the ball does not enter the specific general entry port 630, the suggestion mode is changed. The effect of disappearing is executed.

In the process of S2401, if it is determined that the storage device-related command received this time is not a command indicating the open state (S2401: No), it is determined whether the storage device-related command received this time is a command indicating the closed state. (S2404), if the command indicates a closed state (S2404; Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to off (S2405), the release operation flag 223p is set to off (S2406), and the display is not released. A command is set (S2407), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the non-release state in which the sphere is stored in the storage flow path 700e and the release state in which the sphere can flow down are first set. The storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are variably controlled by operating (see FIG. 9). Since this operation control is a control that changes the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a in a preset order, after receiving a command indicating a release (open) state in which the ball can flow down, The period until the command indicating the non-release (closed) state in which the sphere is stored is received is constant (1 second). Therefore, in the storage device-related processing (S2217), a measuring means for measuring the period after receiving the command indicating the open (release) state is provided, and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses by the measuring means. However, it may be configured to set an error command when a command indicating a closed (non-released) state is not received. As a result, it is possible to immediately determine that the status grasp of the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 is not normal.

Return to FIG. 50 and continue the description. In the process of S2216, when it is determined that the storage device-related command has not been received (S2216: No), then it is determined whether or not the release operation command has been received (S2218). If it is determined that the release operation command has been received in the process of S2218 (S2218: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and this process ends. This release operation command is a command output when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the release operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received (S2220).

If it is determined that the hit-related command has been received in the process of S2220 (S2220: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2221), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this hit-related process (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. On the other hand, in the process of S2220, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2220: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2222), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S2222, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114, for example, a ball entry command set based on the ball entering each entry port provided in the game board 13. Is received, a process of accumulating the number of balls entered for each type of entry port into which the ball has entered is executed.

Next, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process (S2221). This hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2113 of FIG. 560) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the main control. This is a process executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110.

When the hit-related process (S2221) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then the display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2503). If it is determined that the round number command has been received in the processing of S2503 (S2503: Yes), the round number accumulation counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot medium effect processing is executed (S2503). S2505), this process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the jackpot medium effect processing (S2505). In this jackpot medium effect processing (S2505), as an effect to be executed during the jackpot, in addition to the jackpot game effect for blessing the big hit, an operation effect (release button) 22b for the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b. The production mode of the timing effect) and the difficulty level selection effect that allows the player to select the difficulty level of the operation effect (timing effect) is set, and each effect is executed.

When the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is on. When it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is not on (off) (S2601: No), then it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the round number command indicating the first round of the jackpot. (S2602). If it is determined in the process of S2602 that the command is the number of rounds indicating the first round (S2602: Yes), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S2603), and this process is terminated. By setting the difficulty level selection flag 223ab to ON here, it is based on the operation signals of the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) operated while the first round of the jackpot is being executed. The process of selecting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed by the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107 in FIG. 59) described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2602, if it is determined that the command is not the number of rounds command indicating the first round (S2602: No), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to off (S2604), and then the number of rounds received this time. It is determined whether the command is the 7th round or the 15th round of the jackpot (S2605). In the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the 7th round or the 15th round (S2605: Yes), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2606), and the storage upper limit flag 223m. When it is determined that is on (S2606: Yes), the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, so the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to on (S2607), and the notice round command for display is set. Is set (S2608), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the number of rounds command received this time is not the 7th or 15th round of the jackpot (S2605: No), or in the processing of S2606, the storage upper limit flag 223m is not turned on. If it is determined (S2606: No), the timing effect (operation effect) is not in an executable state, so the process proceeds to S2609 without setting the timing effect setting flag 223w to ON.

In the processing of S2609, it is determined whether the number of rounds command received this time is the 8th or 16th round of the jackpot (S2609), and if it is determined to be the 8th or 16th round (S2609: Yes). , It is determined whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is on (S2610). That is, in the round (7th or 15th round) immediately before the 8th or 16th round received this time, whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (timing effect (operation effect) can be executed). Whether the above conditions are met) is determined. In the process of S2610, when the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2610: Yes), next, the timing effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and the display effect round command is set (S2611). ). Then, the effect executing flag 223x is set to on (S2612), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to off (S2613), and this process is terminated. The timing effect information to be read in the process of S2611 is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60) described later based on the timing effect setting flag 223w being set to ON. Yes, the detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

In the processing of S2609, when it is determined that the number of rounds command received this time is not the 8th or 16th round of the jackpot (S2609: No), or in the processing of S2610, the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON. If it is determined that the command is not set (off), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2614), and this process ends.

The various display round number commands set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and are included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the various display round number commands, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the current number of rounds is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Other configurations may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current number of rounds in the number of rounds command, it is possible to eliminate the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, an effect of selecting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot in the first round (first round) is executed. (See FIG. 17). Further, a condition (storage flow path) in which the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed at the time of the round (7 or 15 rounds) before the round (8 or 16 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed. It is determined whether the upper limit amount of spheres is stored in 700e (see FIG. 3), and if the condition is satisfied, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the next round. (See FIG. 11A). Then, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 11B).

In this way, since the advance notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the player is made to operate the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). It is possible to inform in advance that the production will be executed. In addition, in the round in which the notice effect is executed, it is determined that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the notice effect is executed only when the condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the advance notice effect is executed.

Further, since it is set as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) that the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage flow path 700e, the effect used as the timing effect (operation effect) is the storage ball. Can be fixed to an effect using 5 pieces, and the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced. The condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not limited to this, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls may be stored, or the balls may be stored in the storage flow path 700e. The timing effect (operation effect) may be executed regardless of whether or not the is stored. Further, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 700e may be determined, and the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) may be changed based on the determination result. Specifically, the number of times to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b that changes the storage flow path 700e to the release state corresponds to the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 700e. It may be changed, or the number of operations of a specific timing effect (operation effect), that is, the second frame button (release button) 22b is fixed regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 700e. It may be configured to execute the timing effect (operation effect).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) can be selected for the player, the player can adjust the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill. Can be set, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the advance notice effect is executed when the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied. That is, although it is suggested to the player based on the execution of the advance notice effect that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, other configurations may be used. For example, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 700e and the number of stored balls required to execute the timing effect (operation effect) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and are displayed to the player. , It is advisable to perform an effect of encouraging the storage of balls in the storage flow path 700e. As a result, the player will play a game in which the ball is stored in the storage flow path 700e in addition to the game in which the ball is won in the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to store the ball in the storage flow path 700e, even when the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot is closed (interval state), the ball is continuously launched, so that the game is operated. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds provided as a jackpot is 8 rounds and a jackpot (big hit type is "big hit B"), and 16 rounds of jackpots (big hit types are "big hit A" and "big hit C"). It is provided. That is, in the case of an 8-round jackpot, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed up to once during the jackpot game, and in the case of a 16-round jackpot, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the jackpot game. The maximum number of times is set to 2. As a result, it is possible to make the benefits to be given different depending on the jackpot type, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example, the storage flow path 700e. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls have been stored in the game, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. As a result, the player can more actively perform the game of storing the ball in the storage flow path 700e.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a round number command (S2503: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from the main control device 110 when each round in the jackpot is completed. If it is determined that an interval command has been received in the processing of S2506 (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the calculated result is the 7th or 15th round. It is determined whether or not it indicates the end (S2507).

In the process of S2507, if it is determined that the interval command received this time is an interval command indicating the end of the 7th or 15th round (S2507: Yes), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2508). If it is determined that it is on (S2508: Yes), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to on (S2509), the corresponding display interval command is set (S2509), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 54, in the round (7th or 15th round) in which the advance notice effect is executed, whether or not the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied. The process of determining and setting the timing effect setting flag 223w to ON is performed, but in addition to that, even at the timing when the round (7th or 15th round) before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is completed. It is determined again whether or not the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the timing effect setting flag 223w can be set to be on based on the determination result.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied until just before the start of the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed. It is possible to increase the opportunity to provide the timing effect (operation effect) to the player. In this case, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed without the advance notice effect being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected timing effect (operation effect) to the player who was disappointed because the advance notice effect was not executed.

Although the details are not shown, regarding the processes of S2507 to S2509, if the timing effect setting flag 223w is already set to ON in the jackpot medium effect process (see S2504 in FIG. 54), that process Is configured to be skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending command has been received (S2511). In the process of S2511, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2511: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2512), the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is cleared (S2513), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S2511, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2511: No), this process is also terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the variation display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2114). This variation display setting process (S2114) is one process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is performed on the first special symbol based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (complete loss, reach loss, jackpot), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. S2114), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S2709. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each process of S2702 to S2708 for the purpose is executed.

More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern (S2704). ). In the process of S2704, when a variation pattern command in which "chance off" or "chance reach" is determined as the variation type of the variation pattern is received in the special symbol variation start process of the main controller 110 (see S213 in FIG. 35). In addition, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern. In the process of S2704, when it is determined that the acquired fluctuation pattern is a chance pattern (S2704: Yes), then it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2705), and it is determined that it is ON. In this case (S2705: Yes), it is assumed that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to on (S2706).

In the present embodiment, it is established that the spheres are stored in the storage flow path 700e when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation type of the fluctuation pattern that can execute the chance effect (operation effect) is received as described above. As a condition, the chance effect (operation effect) is executed, but the chance effect (operation effect) may be executed without determining the presence or absence of the sphere on the storage flow path 700e. As a result, when a ball flows into the storage flow path 700e during the chance production, the ball can be easily entered into the specific general entry port 630.

Then, the display variation pattern command is set (S2707), and then 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c). Then, based on the subtracted value, the data in the winning information storage area included in the command storage area is shifted (S2709), and the process shifts to the processing of S2709. On the other hand, in the processing of S2704, the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is the chance pattern. When it is determined that it is not (S2704: No), or when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (off) in the processing of S2705 (S2705: No), that is, the current variation display setting If it is determined in the process (S2114) that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied, the process of S2706 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2707.

In the process of S2709, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2709). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2709: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2709: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2710), and then the command determination process (FIG. 50). In the process of S2206 of (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2711), and the acquired stop type is set (S2712). Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the set stop type (S2713), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the ball passage monitoring process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this ball passage monitoring process (S2115). This ball passage monitoring process (S2115) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a storage flow path 700e in the board unit 700 (see FIG. 3). This is a process for monitoring the passage of a ball that has flowed down (see FIG. 3).

In the ball passage monitoring process (S2115), first, it is determined whether the release state flag 223q is on (S2801). Here, when it is determined that the release state flag 223q is not on (off), the storage flow path 700e is not in the release (open) state in which the ball can flow down, and this process is terminated. In the process of S2801, when it is determined that the release state flag 223q is on (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball passage flag 223n is on (S2802). In the process of S2802, if it is determined that the ball passing flag 223n is off (S2802: No), then whether the ball has passed through the first ball passing sensor S3 based on the detection result of the first ball passing sensor S3. Is determined (S2803). In the process of S2803, when it is determined that the ball has passed (S2803: Yes), the ball pass flag 223n is set to ON (S2804), the pass counter 223ae is set to "1" (S2805), and the process of S2806. Move to.

That is, in the above-mentioned processing of S2801 to S2805, the release state flag 223q is set to ON, and the period is when the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the flow (passage) of the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e. The process of starting the measurement of is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2802, when it is determined that the ball passage flag 223n is on (S2802: Yes), the period measurement has already started, so the processes of S2803 to S2805 are skipped. Move to S2806. Further, in the process of S2803, when it is determined that the first ball passage sensor S3 has not detected the passage of the ball (S2803), it is immediately after the storage flow path 700e is changed to the released state, and the ball is still in the released state. Since the first ball passage sensor S3 has not been reached, this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S2806, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the specific general entry port 630 (S2806). In the process of S2806, when it is determined that there is no ball entering the specific general entry port 630 (S2806: No), then it is determined whether the second ball passage sensor S4 has detected the passage of the ball (S2806: No). In S2807), if the passage of the ball is not detected (S2807: No), it is determined whether the value of the passage counter 223ae has reached the upper limit (value corresponding to 1 second) (S2808). If it is determined in the process of S2808 that the upper limit has not been reached (S2808: No), 1 is added to the value of the pass counter 223ae (S2809), and this process ends. In this way, when the value of the passage counter 223ae is set to "1" in the processing of S2805, the ball enters the specific general entry port 630, or the passage of the ball is detected by the second ball passage sensor S4, or , The value of the pass counter 223ae is added by "1" every time this process is executed (every 1 ms) until the value of the pass counter 223ae reaches the upper limit (addition to the value indicating 1 second).

On the other hand, in the process of S2806, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific general entry port 630 (S2806: Yes), the passage period of the ball (the ball is the first) based on the value of the current passage counter 223ae. The period from passing through the 1-ball passage sensor S3 to entering the specific general entry port 630) is calculated (S2811), and the information indicating the calculated passage period is set in the ball passage information storage area 223ac (S2812). ), The process proceeds to S2813. Further, in the process of S2807, even when the second ball passing sensor S4 detects the passing of the ball (S2812: Yes), the passing period of the ball (the ball is the first ball passing sensor) based on the value of the current passing counter 223ae. The period from passing through S3 to passing through the second ball passing sensor S4) is calculated (S2811), the process of S2812 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2813.

In the process of S2808, when it is determined that the value of the passage counter 223ae is the upper limit value (value indicating 1 second) (S2808: Yes), a predetermined period after the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the ball. Since the ball did not enter the specific general entry port 630 during (1 second) and did not pass through the second ball passage sensor S4, there is a possibility of ball clogging, so an error command Is set (S2810), and the process proceeds to S2813.

In the processing of S2813, since the processing for the ball detected by the first ball passing sensor S3 is completed, the ball passing flag 223n is set to off (S2813), and the value of the passing counter 223ae is reset (S2814). , End this process.

In the present embodiment, in this ball passage monitoring process (S2115), a process of correcting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed based on the period information indicating the ball pass period stored in the ball pass information storage area 223ac. Will be done. Specifically, the player is given a second timing effect (operation effect) based on the period until the ball flowing down the storage flow path 700e passes through the specific general entry port 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4. A correction process for changing the display timing of the effect pointer, which suggests the timing for operating the frame button (release button) 22b, is executed. The detailed contents of this correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but by correcting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the passing period of the sphere, the timing effect (operation effect) can be used. It is possible to deeply relate the performance mode to be executed and the actual ball flow situation, and it is possible to provide a production that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In the present embodiment, the reference period required for the ball passing through the first ball passing sensor S3 to enter the specific general entry port 630 and the ball passing through the first ball passing sensor S3 are specified general. The mounting position of the second ball passing sensor S4 is determined so that the reference period required for entering the ball into the ball entry port 630 is the same. As a result, using both the passing period calculated when the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 and the passing period calculated when the ball passes through the second ball passing sensor S4, It is possible to determine whether or not the timing effect needs to be corrected.

The method for measuring the passage period is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and the passage period is, for example, based on the case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated). The passage period may be measured only when the ball enters the specific general entry port 630. Further, the arrangement position of the second ball passing sensor S4 is not limited to this embodiment, and the second ball passing sensor S4 is located at a position where the passing period is different from the passing period of the ball entering the specific general entry port 630. May be arranged.

Next, the storage condition monitoring process (S2116) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this storage state monitoring process (S2116). This storage state monitoring process (S2116) is one process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a storage flow path 700e in the board unit 700 (see FIG. 3). (See FIG. 3) This is a process for determining that a sphere is stored on the sphere.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, as storage devices capable of storing balls on the game board 13, a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 are provided, and a maximum of five storage devices are provided. The ball is configured to be able to be stored. Each storage device is provided with a first storage valve 770a and a second storage valve 771a, respectively, and the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are second frame buttons (release buttons) that can be operated by the player. Based on the operation (pressing) being executed for 22b, the operation is controlled so that the stored balls flow down one by one. Further, in the present embodiment, the storage detection sensor S2 capable of detecting the presence of the first ball stored when the second storage valve 771a is closed, and the upper limit number of balls (5) in the storage flow path 700e. The storage upper limit sensor S1 capable of detecting that the spheres are stored is provided so that the storage status of the spheres on the storage flow path 700e can be discriminated.

In this storage state monitoring process (S2116), first, it is determined whether the storage detection sensor S2 is on (S2851). When it was determined that the storage detection sensor S2 was on in the processing of S2851 (S2851: Yes), it was determined whether the storage state flag 223k was on (S2852), and it was determined that the storage state flag 223k was not on. In the case (S2852: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on in the processing of S2852 (S2852: Yes), the processing of S2853 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S2856.

Further, in the process of S2851 when it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 is off (S2851: No), then it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2854), and it is determined that it is on. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S2855), and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is off in the processing of S2854 (S2854: No), the processing of S2855 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S2856. In this way, the setting of the storage state flag 223k is configured to be updated at any time based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2.

In the process of S2856, it is determined whether the storage upper limit sensor S1 is on (S2856). In the process of S2856, when it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is on, that is, when it is determined that the upper limit amount of spheres is stored in the storage flow path 700e (S2856: Yes), the storage upper limit flag It is determined whether 223m is set to on (S2857), and if the storage upper limit flag 223m is off (S2857: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is set to on (S2858), and storage When it is determined that the state flag 223k is on (S2858: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on (S2859), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2858, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is off (S2858: No), the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects the ball even though the storage detection sensor S2 does not detect the ball. Since it is in the detected state, an error command is set (S2860), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2857, if the storage upper limit flag 223 m is on (S2857: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the process of S2856, when it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is off (S2856: No), then it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2861), and it is not on (off). If it is determined (S2861: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing is on in S2861 (S2861: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2862), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2116) in the present embodiment, the storage status of the spheres on the storage flow path 700e and the presence or absence of abnormalities in the sphere storage are determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage) are determined. Since the upper limit flag (223 m) and the error command can be set, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the storage state of the storage flow path 700e.

Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this lamp output process (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. It is a process for. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, as the lamp display device 227, a decorative lamp 227a used for an effect or the like provided throughout the pachinko machine 10, and a board unit 700 (FIG. 3). With respect to the cover member 710 provided so as to cover a part of (see), a transmission lamp 227b and other lamps 227c are provided to make the inside of the cover member 710 visible to the player. Has been done.

When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current time is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, a predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) timed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. If it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds in the process of S2901 (S2901: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command is set (S2904), and the process proceeds to the process of S2905.

Here, in the present embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided in order to prevent the player from visually recognizing the operating state of the movable valve 750 in the normal gaming state. As described above, the cover member 710 is configured to change from a shielded state in which the inside is difficult to see to a transmitted state in which the inside can be seen by irradiating a predetermined light (light of a transmission lamp) from the back surface. There is. Then, during a predetermined period (a predetermined period after the start-up process is executed) after the power is turned on to the game machine, the transmission lamp is lit regardless of the game state. As a result, the inside of the board unit 700 covered with the cover member 710 can be easily visually recognized immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, that is, at the timing when the clerk inspects the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the current state is not within the predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) ( S2901: No), then it is determined whether the first ball passage sensor S3 has detected the passage of the ball (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the first ball passing sensor S3 detects the passage of a ball (S2902: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command is issued so that the player can visually recognize the ball passing through the first ball passing sensor S3. Set (S2904) and proceed to the process of S2905. The transmission lamp lighting command in this case is set so that the transmission lamp 227b is lit for a sufficient time (for example, 0.7 seconds) for the ball to pass through the area covered by the cover member 710. However, for example, it is configured to turn off the transmission lamp 227b on the condition that the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4 detects the passage of the ball. You may. As a result, the period during which the cover member 710 is in the transparent state can be suppressed to the minimum necessary, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the operating state of the movable valve 750.

Here, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to visually recognize the area (the area where the specific general entry port 630 and the movable valve 750 are provided) in which the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e can flow down in the board unit 700. It is covered with a cover member 710 so as to (see FIG. 2). This makes it possible to prevent the player from seeing the operating status of the movable valve 750, but when the ball passes through the area covered by the cover member 710, the player can grasp the whereabouts of the ball. However, there was a risk of giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined by detecting the sphere by the first sphere passage sensor S3 that the sphere passes through the region covered by the cover member 710, and the cover member 710 is changed to the transmission state. With this configuration, the player can be made sure to grasp the passing (flowing) situation of the ball, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, in the normal state (the state in which the transmission lamp is not lit), the cover member, which is in a state where the inside cannot be seen, is changed to a transparent state in which the inside can be seen, so that the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to give a change and make it easier for the player to notice that the ball passes through the portion covered by the cover member 710.

In the process of S2902, if the first ball passage sensor S3 does not detect the passage of the ball (S2902: No), then it is determined whether or not the specific effect is being executed (S2903). If it is determined in the process of S2903 that the specific effect is being executed (S2903: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command is set based on the effect mode of the specific effect (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905. Here, the specific effect determined in the process of S2903 is a case where the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2114 in FIG. 55) is a specific effect. While the effect is being executed, the effect mode using the transmission lamp lighting command is executed. As a result, the cover member 710 can be changed to the transparent state only when a specific condition is satisfied in the variable effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to provide playability in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated by oneself. In addition, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the player who has played the game in which the special symbol lottery is executed may be given a privilege (a privilege to allow the cover member 710 to pass through) that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed. For example, the specific effect is being executed (the specific effect is set). ), It is determined whether or not the ball is stored in the storage flow path 700e, and the effect of turning on the transmission lamp 227b only when it is determined that the ball is stored is executed, and the ball is not stored. If it is determined that, instead of the transmissive lamp 227b, the effect of lighting the decorative lamp 227a provided near the cover member 710 may be executed. With this configuration, the cover member 710 is unnecessarily changed to a transparent state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily visually recognizing the operating state of the movable valve 750.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of turning on the transmission lamp 227b when the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2114 in FIG. 55) is a specific effect. However, in addition to that, for example, since the end of the previous jackpot, the number of lottery (variation counts) of special symbols has exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 500 times) without winning the jackpot. The cover member 710 may be in the transmissive state on the condition that the cover member 710 is in the transmissive state, or the cover member 710 may be in the transmissive state while the predetermined period is clocked by the real-time clock (RTC). Lighting control may be executed. Further, when the cover member 710 is configured to be transparent for a long period of time (a period in which the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) or a timed period is a long period (for example, 10 minutes)). A guide display for guiding the game of launching the ball toward the storage flow path 700e may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the game that is advantageous to the player.

Returning to FIG. 58, the description will be continued. In the process of S2903, when it is determined that the specific effect is not executed (S2903: No), or after the process of S2904 is completed, a decorative lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state). (S2905), and this process is terminated. The decorative lamp lighting command is set in various ways according to the fluctuation pattern to be executed, the current game state, and the like.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (2107), the input of whether or not the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored is monitored. Then, it is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when an operation on the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is used. Various flags are set based on the settings and the operation details.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is the pressing success period, and the determination result is obtained. Frame buttons (1st frame button 22a, 2nd frame) during the period for setting display commands for displaying effects (successful effects, unsuccessful effects) based on the above, and selecting the difficulty level of timing effects (operation effects). Based on the operation of the button 22b), a process of setting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). Then, in the process of S3001, when it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the release operation flag 223p is on (S3002). If it is determined in the process of S3002 that the release operation flag 223p is on (S3002: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to off (S3003), and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, when it is determined that the release operation flag is off (S3002: No), it is then determined whether the second frame button 22a is operated (pressed) (S3004).

If it is determined in the process of S3004 that the second frame button 22a has not been operated (pressed) (S3004: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second frame button 22a has been operated (pressed) in the process of S3004 (S3004: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the first frame button (effect button) 22a is configured to output an operation signal based on the operation to the voice lamp control device 113. The second frame button (release button) 22b is configured to output an operation signal based on the operation to the main control device 110. The timing effect (operation effect) in which the effect mode is set by the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the operation on the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b described above. It is configured so that the effect mode (effect result) can be changed.

Therefore, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) of FIG. 59, the process (S3004) of determining whether or not the first frame button (effect button) 22a is operated (pressed) and the process (S3004) are released from the main control device 110. A process (S3002) for determining whether or not an operation (press) is performed on the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed based on the setting content of the release operation flag 223p that is set to be turned on when an operation command is received. To. As a result, the operation contents for a plurality of operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) for which operation signals are output to different control means (main control device 110, voice lamp control device 113) are aggregated. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly set the effect mode corresponding to the operation of each operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, prior to the process of determining the operation for the first frame button 22a (S3004), the process of determining the setting content of the release operation flag 223p indicating the operation status for the second frame button 22b (S3002). Is configured to be executed. This is because when both frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) are operated at the same time, the effect is executed based on the operation for the second frame button 22b. That is, in the present embodiment, the second frame button (release button) 22b changes the state of the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) from the closed (non-release) state to the open (release) state. Since it is an operation means provided for making it variable and a privilege can be given to the player by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the first frame button provided only for the production The effect on the game is significantly different from that of the (effect button) 22a. Therefore, in the timing effect (operation effect), the presence / absence of the operation on the second frame button (release button) 22b, which may affect the result of the game, is determined rather than the presence / absence determination of the first frame button (effect button) 22a. Raising priority. With this configuration, the effect is executed by using both the operation for the operation means that can affect the result of the game and the operation for the operation means for the effect that does not affect the result of the game ( In the timing effect (operation effect), it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the game.

Returning to FIG. 59, the description will be continued. In the process of S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the button type in which the pressing is detected is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y (S3005). That is, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the release operation flag 223p is on and the process shifts to the process of S3005, the press period information corresponding to the second frame button 22b is read from the press period information storage area 223y and S3004. When it is determined that the pressing of the first frame button 22a is detected and the process shifts to the processing of S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the first frame button 22a is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y.

Then, when the processing of S3005 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current frame button operation was performed during the successful pressing period based on the pressing period information read by the processing of S3005 (S3006). If it is determined that the pressing success period is not in progress (S3006: No), a display failure effect command is set (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3011. Here, when the display failure effect command is set, "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720 as shown in FIG. 11B.

On the other hand, in the process of S3006, when it is determined that the pressing success period is in progress (S3006: Yes), it is determined whether the operation determined in this process is the second frame button (release button) 22b. (S3008). If it is determined that the operation is the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b in the process of S3008 (S3008: Yes), the display release button success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to the process of S3011. .. Further, in the process of S3008, when it is determined that the operation is not the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b but the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 22a (S3008: No), the display effect The button success effect command is set (S3010), and the process proceeds to S3011.

Here, when the display release button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. 10B, "good" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the second frame button 22b is schematically displayed. The left button display 715 shown is changed to the pressed state mode. Further, when the display effect button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. 11A, “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the first frame button 22a is schematically shown. The middle button display 716 is changed to the pressed state mode. Further, in the timing effect (operation effect) of this time, when the ball has entered the specific general entry port 630, the specific entry display mode 721 indicating that fact is the ball to the specific general entry port 630. It is displayed in an aspect (“15” indicating the number of prize balls) indicating the privilege given to the player by entering the ball.

Returning to FIG. 59, the description will be continued. In the process of S3011, it is determined whether the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S3011). In the process of S3011, if the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is off (S3011: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3011, if the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is on (S3011: Yes), it is determined whether the first frame button 22a is pressed (S3012), and if it is pressed (S3012: Yes). Next, the difficulty level information indicating the selected difficulty level is set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa (S3013), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to off (S3014), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S3012 that the first frame button 22a is not pressed (S3012: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the timing effect setting process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timing effect setting process (S2111). This timing effect setting process (S2111) is a process for setting the content of the timing effect (operation effect) to be executed.

When the timing effect setting process (S2111) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the timing effect setting flag 223w is on (S3101). In the processing of S3101, when it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is on (S3101: Yes), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is on (S3102), and it is determined that the jackpot is on. (S3102: Yes) executes the jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) for setting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot, and shifts to the process of S3105. The jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 61 (a).

On the other hand, in the processing of S3102, when it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S3102: No), the normal timing effect preset processing for setting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the variable display of the special symbol (S3104) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S3105. The normal timing effect preset processing (S3104) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 61 (b).

In the process of S3105, the timing effect common setting process that is commonly executed regardless of the timing effect (operation effect) executed at any timing (big hit, normal middle) is executed (S3105), and then this process is performed. To finish. The timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 62.

Further, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is off (S3101: No), the timing effect correction process (S3106) for correcting the ball entry timing in the timing effect (operation effect) is performed. Execute, and then end this process. A detailed description of this timing effect correction process (S3106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Here, the jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) will be described with reference to FIG. 61A. FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103). This jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) is a frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) in the timing effect (operation effect) to be executed based on the difficulty level set during the jackpot. It sets the sound (sound effect) output during operation.

When the jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) is executed, first, the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is read (S3131), and the pointer setting condition corresponding to the read difficulty level is acquired. (S3132). Specifically, from the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa, the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b and the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630. The number of matches, the number of operations of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the display mode information of the effect pointer corresponding to the difficulty level are acquired.

After finishing the process of S3132, it is next determined whether the read difficulty level information is low difficulty level (S3133). In the process of S3133, when it is determined that the difficulty level information is low (S3133: No), the range 1 data 222c2 indicating the low difficulty level is read out from the music information storage area 222c (S3134), and corresponds to the range 1. A voice command is set (S3135), and this process ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 1 indicates the high range of the music information, the high sound sound (sound effect) is set so as to correspond to the high range.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3133, when it is determined that the difficulty level information is high difficulty (S3133: No), the sound range 2 data 222c3 indicating the high difficulty is read out from the music information storage area 222c (S3136), and the sound range 2 is set. The corresponding voice command is set (S3137), and this process ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 2 indicates the low range of the music information, the low sound (sound effect) is set so as to correspond to the low range.

Next, the normal timing effect preset processing (S3104) will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (b). FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal timing effect preset processing (S3104). In this normal timing effect preset processing (S3104), when the lottery result of the target special symbol is a hit, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated during the successful pressing period. The setting is made so that the lottery result is notified.

When the normal timing effect preset processing (S3104) is executed, first, a low-difficulty pointer setting condition is acquired (S3151), and then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation of the special symbol this time is a hit fluctuation (S3104). S3152). When it is determined in the processing of S3152 that the hit is fluctuating (S3152: Yes), the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3153), and the number of pointers to be displayed is set from the pointer setting conditions acquired in the processing of S3151. Is subtracted by 1 (S3154), and this process ends.

Next, the timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timing effect common setting process (S3105). The timing effect common setting process (S3105) includes the above-mentioned jackpot timing effect preset process (see S3103 in FIG. 61 (a)) or the normal timing effect preset process (see S3104 in FIG. 61 (b)). ) And the pointer setting condition of the timing effect (operation effect) set by) and the operation status of the movable valve 750, the process of determining the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed.

When the timing effect common setting process (S3105) is executed, first. Based on the current movable state (movable state) of the movable valve 750 stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the closing timing information up to 30 seconds later is read out from the closing timing storage area 223v (S3201). Then, the ball entry timing information stored in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad is read out, and the ball entry possible timing information obtained by subtracting the ball entry timing information from the closing timing is calculated (S3202).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a timing in which the pointer setting condition of the timing effect (operation effect) of this time and the ball entry possibility timing information calculated in the process of S3202 match (S3203). Specifically, a place where the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition and the ball entry possible timing information match is set in the pointer setting condition. Determine if there is a match for the number of matches. In this case, since the ball entry possible timing information is calculated based on the closing timing of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled according to a predetermined rule, the music executed in the timing effect (operation effect). While shifting the start timing of the above within a predetermined period (up to 10 seconds), it is determined whether or not there is a matching timing (see FIG. 16).

When it is determined that there is a matching timing in the processing of S3203 (S3203: Yes), the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect) is set based on the matching timing (S3204), while in the processing of S3203, If it is determined that there is no matching timing (S3203: No), a special pointer display position is set in addition to the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition. A match timing is created (S3205). After that, the effect start timing is set based on the created match timing (S3204).

After finishing the process of S3204, it is next determined whether or not the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3206). In the process of S3206, when it is determined that the hit pointer setting flag 223af is on (S3206: Yes), that is, the current timing effect (operation effect) is executed based on the winning special symbol variation effect. If this is the case, the second frame button (release button) is applied to the non-matching point where the pointer setting condition of the current timing effect (operation effect) and the ball-entry possible timing information calculated in the processing of S3202 do not match. One display pointer for operating 22b is set (S3207), the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to off (S3208), and the process proceeds to S3209. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit pointer setting flag 223af is off in the processing of S3206 (S3206: No), the processing of S3207 and S3208 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3209.

With this configuration, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the non-matching point that does not match the ball entry possible timing information. It is possible to set a display pointer for this. As a result, even if the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the specific general entry port 630 is used. When the ball does not enter, the player can be expected that the lottery result of the changing special symbol will be a big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when using such a configuration, when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer set at the non-matching point described above, the second frame button (release button) 22b is used. 3 The symbol display device 81 may be configured to notify the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b can be used as a means for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display pointer is set to the above-mentioned non-matching points only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, but in other cases, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit. Even if this is not the case, it may be configured to set a non-matching point.

In the process of S3209, the display pointers for the number of matches set in the pointer setting conditions are set (S3209), and the set display pointers (the display pointer set in the process of S3207 and the display pointer set in the process of S3209) are set. The successful pressing period is determined in correspondence with the display pointer), and the pressing period information storage area 223y is set (S3210). After finishing the processing of S3210, next, it is determined whether or not the current is a big hit (S3211), and if it is determined that the current is a big hit (S3211: Yes), various contents set in this processing are temporarily produced. It is stored in the storage area 223r (S3215), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3211, if it is determined that the current is not a big hit (S3211: No), a display timing effect command is set based on various contents set in this process (S3212), and the effect is being executed. The flag 223x is set to on (S3213), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to off (S3214), and this process is terminated.

Next, the timing effect correction process (S3106) will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timing effect correction process (S3106). In this timing effect correction process (S3106), a process for correcting the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entry port 630 set in the timing effect (operation effect) is executed based on the actual ball passing period. .. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball entry timing (normal) in which the ball passing period is set to 0.5 seconds and the ball entry timing (early) in which the ball passing period is set to 0.4 seconds are used. And, one of the ball entry timing (late) in which the ball passing period is set to 0.6 seconds is selected, and the ball entry timing storage area 223ad can be set. Then, based on the ball entry timing information set in this process, the passing period of the ball corresponding to the ball entry timing information set in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad is subtracted from the closing timing information of the movable valve 750. Then, the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 is set.

When the timing effect correction process (S3106) is executed, first, the passage period set in the ball passage information storage area 223ac is read (S3301), the read passage period is analyzed, and the passage period (short) and the passage are passed. The number of information for the period (normal) and the transit period (long) are calculated respectively (S3302). After that, it is determined whether the calculated number of transit period information is equal to or greater than the number of transit period (long) information (S3303). In the processing of S3303, if it is determined that the number of information in the transit period (long) is less than the number of information in the transit period (short) (S3303: No), then the calculated number of transit period information is the transit period (normal). It is determined whether or not the number of information of the above is equal to or greater than the number of information of the passing period (short) (S3304). If it is determined in the process of S3304 that the number of information in the passing period (normal) is equal to or greater than the number of information in the passing period (short) (S3304: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3304, when it is determined that the number of information in the passing period (short) is larger (S3304: No), it is determined whether the currently set ball entry timing information is the ball entry timing (late). Determine (S3305). In the process of S3305, if it is determined that the ball entry timing is not (late) (S3305: No), the timing (early) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630, and the entry timing is stored. It is set in the area (S3306), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, when it is determined that the ball entry timing (late) is (S3305: Yes), the timing (normal) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630, and the ball enters. Set in the timing storage area (S3310), and then end this process.

Further, in the processing of S3303, if it is determined that the number of information in the transit period (long) is equal to or greater than the number of information in the transit period (short) (S3303: Yes), then the calculated number of transit period information is the transit period. It is determined whether the number of (normal) information is equal to or greater than the number of information during the transit period (long) (S3307). If it is determined in the process of S3307 that the number of information in the passing period (normal) is equal to or greater than the number of information in the passing period (long) (S3307: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3307, if it is determined that the number of information in the passing period (normal) is less than the number of information in the passing period (long) (S3307: No), then the currently set ball entry timing information is input. It is determined whether the timing is (early) (S3308). In the processing of S3308, if it is determined that the ball entry timing is not (early) (S3308: No), the timing (late) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630, and the entry timing is stored. Set in the area (S3309). On the other hand, in the process of S3308, when it is determined that the ball entry timing (early) is reached (S3305: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3310 described above, and then the main process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball passes through a predetermined section (the section from the first ball passing sensor S3 to the specific general entry port 630 or the section until passing through the second ball passing sensor S4). By changing the ball entry timing period subtracted from the closing timing of the movable valve 750 based on the passing period information obtained by measuring the period required for the ball, the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entry port 630 is corrected. Although it is configured, other configurations may be used. For example, in the case where the storage device is released or in the timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing. This may be set as a start condition, and the period from the setting of the start condition to the passage through the specific general entry port 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4 may be measured. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

In addition, even if the correction process is performed so that the display pointer is displayed at an appropriate timing by changing the degree of progress of the effect executed based on the passing period information instead of changing the ball entry timing period. good.

Next, the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112). In this movable valve operation counter update process (S2112), a process for updating the movable valve operation counter 223t for updating the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 is executed.

When the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the movable valve operation scenario is set (S3401). If it is determined that there is no setting in the process of S3401 (S3401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a setting (S3401: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the movable valve operation counter is the upper limit value (S3402). Here, the value of the movable valve operation counter is a value required to execute the 24 operation scenarios set in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f, and the value of the counter corresponding to 732 seconds is set as the upper limit value. Has been done.

If it is determined in the process of S3402 that it is not the upper limit value (S3402: No), 1 is added to the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t (S3403), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, when it is determined that the upper limit value is reached (S3402: Yes), the value of the movable valve operation counter is set to 1 (S3404), and this process is terminated. As a result, the operating status of the movable valve 750 can be grasped at any time on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 65, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after designating the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S5102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S5103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S5001 in FIG. 65) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S5001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 66, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S5102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S5101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S5102 and S5102, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S5103 to S5105 may be executed without performing the processes S5101 and S5102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 65. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S5004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 76 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 76 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command determination process (FIG. 67) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B). 67 (b) S5308) and the simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 67 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and the fluctuation is simple. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S5005, the interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a). FIG. 67A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 67B is a flowchart showing this V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 32) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 67B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S5302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S5303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S5302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72.

In the display setting process (S5303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), which are determined in the task process (S5304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, front / rear out reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the missed, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S5309) is executed to shift to the process of S5304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S5302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 68, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S5403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S5403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S5405) will be described with reference to FIG. 69A. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S5501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S5501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S5503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S5504), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S5505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5506), the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S5502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S5504, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S5406). If there is a display variable type command (S5406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S5407), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (b). FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S5601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S5602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. Is set to (S5603), and this process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S5603, and the stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S5601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S5602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in fact, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S5408), and the display is displayed. If there is an opening command for (S5408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. 70A. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S5701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5703). S5704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5705), the opening command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701 The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S5702. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether the operation had stopped.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 15 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , The transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to be completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects (15 rounds) are performed in the third symbol display device 81. ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S5408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S5410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S5410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S5411), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. 70 (b). FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5702).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S5412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S5413), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S5413) will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5903). S5904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S5412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S5414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S5415), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S5415) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (a). FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S6503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S6001). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back image corresponding to other back image types is turned on. The determination flag is set to off (S6002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S6001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S6002. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S6002 is used. , The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S5414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S5416), and there is an error command. If (S5416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S5417), and the process returns to S5401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S5417) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S6101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S6102). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S6101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S6102 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S6102, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S5416 (S5416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S5418), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

In the processing of S5401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes). ), The processing of S5402 to S5418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S5401 to S5418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S5401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 69 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 69 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 69A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S5501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S5303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 73, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S6202 to S6204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S6202), S6203 to S6204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S6204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S6301).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Various parameters are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 73. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S6205.

In S6205, the pointer update process is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S6403), and if it is a demo display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), and this process is completed and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S6403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S6406). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 73 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S6209).

As a result, if the finalized display flag is on (S6209: Yes), the finalized display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the finalized display. It is set (S6210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S5304), from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215. , The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S6209: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S6216). Then, if the demo display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S6217), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S6216, if the demo display flag is on (S6216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to be displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S5305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 (b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S6501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S6601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6601: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6602). In the process of S6602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S6602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6603. Further, as a result of the processing of S6601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6603.

In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6603: No), the non-resident image data is not transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S6603 (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 67 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 67 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 73 to 77) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) (see S6601: No in FIG. 76 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the display setting process (S5303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S6702), and if it is the transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

Further, in the process of S6702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S6702: No), the processes of S6703 and S6704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6705. In the process of S6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

In the process of S6706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S6706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6707. Further, as a result of the processing of S6705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6707.

In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S6703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S6713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6709). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S6709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S6709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S6710), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image indicated by the rear image discrimination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). The start address is acquired (S6712), and the process proceeds to S6713.

In the process of S6713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6713). The discrimination in the process of S6713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S6713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6713 (S6713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S6714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 32 (S6801). That is, in the processing of S6801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S5304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As various drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S6802 (S6803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 67B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 is in the guided state (closed state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general entry port 630. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b that changes the storage state of the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) to the release state, the storage device (first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) The ball stored in the second storage device 771) can be put into the specific general entry port 630. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game while timing the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns, and most of the operation contents during the period when the movable valve 750 is in the induced state (closed state). However, it is set as a period (0.1 seconds) in which only one ball can be guided. Therefore, accuracy is required for the timing at which the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general entry port 630, which is more ambitious for the player. Can be made to play a game.

In the present embodiment, by operating the operating means (second frame button (release button) 22b), the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) are stored one by one. Since it is configured so that it can flow down toward the specific general entry port 630, only one ball can be guided (0.1 seconds) as the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induction state (closed state). ) Are continuously set, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing, the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be used. It is possible to allow all the stored balls to enter the specific general entry port 630. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game in order to obtain more prize balls.

A plurality of balls may be discharged from the storage device in response to the operation of the operating means, and the number of balls discharged from the storage device may be changed based on the operation content of the player for the operating means. You may do so. As a result, a wider variety of games can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the board unit 700, the cover member 710 is placed on the portion covered by the cover member 710 (see FIG. 2) from the back surface side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710) to the cover member 710. The transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiating the light, are provided. By irradiating the cover member 710 with light from the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the inside covered with the cover member 710 can be made visible to the player. Although the details will be described later, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled so as to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the release operation of the storage device while grasping the operating status of the movable valve 750 during the normal game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down in the vicinity of the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 becomes transparent, so that the player can visually recognize the situation in which the ball flows down in the vicinity of the movable valve 750. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operating status of the movable valve 750, the second frame button is in a state where the operating status of the movable valve 750 is grasped. (Release button) The act of operating 22b can be prevented. Further, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is provided with a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on the condition that a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down) is satisfied. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the vicinity of the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is switched to the transmission state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow state of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750.

In the present embodiment, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is irradiated with light (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmission state, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) that is always lit to the cover member 710 is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position. It may be configured so that the inside is visible only in the transparent state.

Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside is visible, and the surface thereof is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (for example). , Texture processing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes it difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, for decoration). The inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible when the lamp 227a is not lit). As a result, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall is provided to shield the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. It is advisable to provide. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized by the player even while the game is being played. Further, as in the first embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided with a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light, and the light emitting means is controlled to emit light. May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which it is visible (a state in which light is not irradiated).

Further, by providing a movable member for decoration on the cover member 710 whose inside is visible and controlling the operation of the movable member, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movement of the movable member for decoration is small). The state) and the state in which the inside of the cover member 710 is difficult to see (a state in which the movable member for decoration is often operated) may be switched.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for operating the operating means (second frame button (release button) 22b) is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is set. It is configured to display the effect. As a result, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the player is given a privilege (a prize based on the entry into the specific general entry port 630). (Ball) can be given, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned effect (timing effect) is configured to be executed during the jackpot game or when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, but the above-mentioned effect is described when other predetermined conditions are satisfied. The effect (timing effect) may be configured to be executed. For example, when it is determined that the upper limit amount of spheres is stored in the storage flow path 700e, or when it is specified by a timing means (RTC or the like). Specific conditions (for example, a mission) in a production (so-called mini-game, etc.) for operating the production button (first frame button) 22a executed during a special symbol change or a jackpot game when the time is measured. It may be configured so that a predetermined condition is satisfied when "clearing, etc." is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) at various timings, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, when a predetermined winning command (a command output when a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640) is received from the main control device 110, the winning command corresponds to the winning command. The timing effect (operation effect) may be executed by using the period of the effect (so-called look-ahead effect) that is executed until the change of the special symbol is started.

In the present embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, one ball is configured to flow down toward the movable valve 750, and further, the second frame button (release button) is configured to flow down. ) 22b is configured to execute the release operation of the storage device only once every two seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the ball cannot be inserted into the specific general entry port 630 unless the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed) at the right time, and the second frame button (release button) ( The operation accuracy of the release button) 22b is required. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a timing effect (operation effect) suggesting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed by the third symbol display device 81. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the timing effect (operation effect), it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general entry port 630. There is. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

In the timing effect (operation effect) in the present embodiment, an effect of causing the player to operate the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. With this configuration, the number of times the player is required to operate the button can be increased and the effect of the effect is enhanced, as compared with the case where the effect of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is changing, at the timing when the display pointer scrolling in the sub display area Ds4 matches the bar display unit 717. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, as shown in FIG. 14, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds2. With this configuration, the second frame button (release button) 22b for releasing the storage state of the storage device can be used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol.

In addition, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to notify the lottery result of the special symbol, the ball flowing out of the storage device enters the specific general entry port 630 based on the operation. Difficult timing is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily given a privilege (a prize ball for entering the ball into the specific general entrance 630). In addition, when setting such a timing, it is advisable to give a notification suggesting that if the ball does not enter the specific general entry port 630, it is a big hit. As a result, the player is given a privilege regardless of whether the leaked ball enters the specific general entrance 630 or not, so that the player can be provided with a sense of security.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs can be used in the timing effect (operation effect), and a place where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) is predetermined for each song. This is to operate the operation means at the timing that matches the rhythm of each song in the timing effect (operation effect), and by configuring in this way, the display pointer can be entered at the specific general entry port 630. Even if 719 is set, the operation means can be operated according to the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing effect (operation effect), and the timing effect (operation effect) can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be executed.

In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect), the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is set from a position where a display pointer preset for each song can be displayed (set). Although it is configured to be selected, the above-described configuration may be used in the operation effect in which only the first frame button (effect button) 22a is operated. As a result, various effects can be executed as operation effects for operating the first frame button (effect button) 22a.

In the present embodiment, on the jackpot confirmation display screen for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbol has won the jackpot, the movable valve 750 is executed during the jackpot game based on the jackpot. It is possible to determine whether or not the variable operation is performed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and notify the determination result on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can grasp that the movable valve 750 is executed in the operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed, and during the jackpot game. You can make the game enthusiastic.

In the present embodiment, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill, and the privilege to be given is different according to the difficulty level, so that various players can use it. On the other hand, the timing effect (operation effect) can be enthusiastically executed.

In addition, the above-mentioned contents show both the selection of the music and the selection of the difficulty level in the timing production (operation production) executed in the present embodiment, but only the music without changing the difficulty level. When selecting, since the intervals between the parts where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) are different between the music A and the music B, the player who wants to enjoy the timing effect (operation effect) at intervals is the music. A player who wants to select A and enjoy timing effect (operation effect) at short intervals can select music B. This makes it possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and causes various players to enthusiastically execute the timing effect (operation effect). Can be done.

In this embodiment, the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) at different intervals depending on the music, and the player selects the music to display the display pointer, which is executed in the timing effect (operation effect). A configuration is used in which the display interval is narrowed or widened, but as another configuration, a selection means for selecting the display interval of the display pointer 719 executed by the player in the timing effect (operation effect) is provided. , A setting means for setting the display location of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selection means may be provided, or the same music can be played by changing the playback speed of the music. It may be used to provide a setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and enthusiastically for various players. Timing effect (operation effect) can be executed.

In the present embodiment, in order for the voice lamp control device 113 to be able to grasp the operating status of the movable valve 750, the movable valve operation scenario 222b is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the information of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is stored. By updating as needed, the current operating status and future operating contents of the movable valve 750 were grasped, and the timing at which the ball could enter the specific general entry port 630 was set. Based on the information in the movable valve operation scenario 222b, an execution scenario for executing the movable operation of the decorative movable member and the output of the decorative lamp, voice (sound effect), etc. is generated, and based on the generated execution scenario. Therefore, the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 may be indirectly set. Further, in this case, it is preferable to execute the movable operation of the decorative movable member, the output of the decorative lamp, the sound (sound effect), etc., which is executed based on the execution scenario, in a place where it is difficult for the player to grasp.

In the first embodiment, two storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) are provided in the storage flow path 700e, a maximum of five balls are stored, and the operation of the second frame button 22b is performed. The storage device was changed to the released (open) state based on the above, and the sphere was configured to flow out from the storage flow path 700e, but other configurations may be used, for example, as shown in FIG. 79. As described above, a plurality of storage channels 700e and 700g may be provided. Here, with reference to FIG. 79, a modified example of the configuration in which the ball is stored on the game board 13 will be described. In this modification, the same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 79 is a partial front view of the game board 13 showing a modified example of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79, in this modification, the second storage flow path 700g is provided above the storage flow path 700e and the storage flow path 700e is provided in the first embodiment described above. A point where the second storage valve 771a was provided in the storage flow path 700 g, and a second storage upper limit sensor S5 and a second storage detection sensor S6 for detecting a sphere stored in the storage flow path 700 g are provided. It differs in that. Further, although detailed description will be omitted, in the above-described first embodiment, the operation of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is controlled by using one storage valve solenoid 770b. The difference is that each storage valve is individually provided with a storage valve solenoid, and a release button is provided corresponding to each storage device (storage valve) (see, for example, FIG. 87 described later).

The second storage flow path 700g newly provided in this modification is formed so that the ball is less likely to flow in than the storage flow path 700e, and the ball that collides with the first adjusting member 701a and bounces off. It is formed so that it can flow in. Specifically, it is a sphere that flows down the distribution flow path 700d, and is formed so that about one sphere flows into 30 of the spheres that are distributed in the lower right direction (direction of the storage flow path 700e). There is. By adjusting the angle and position of the adjusting member 701a, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the spheres flowing into the second storage flow path 700g.

As shown in FIG. 79, in this modified example, five spheres can be stored in the storage flow path 700e, five spheres can be stored in the second storage flow path 700g, and a total of ten spheres can be stored. There is. Further, the ball flowing into the second storage flow path 700g, which is harder to flow in than the storage flow path 700e, flows down toward the specific general entry port 630 without being affected by the variable operation of the movable valve 750. As such, the exit is provided so as to face the specific general entrance 630. As a result, when the ball is stored in the flow path (the second storage flow path 700 g) where it is difficult to store the ball, the player is surely privileged (the ball has entered the specific general entry port 630). Based prize ball) can be given. Therefore, since the player always plays the game while expecting the ball to flow into the second storage flow path 700 g, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Here, the flow of the game when the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 87 is used in this modification will be described. First, the pachinko machine 10 of FIG. 87 will be described. FIG. 87 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of release buttons for releasing the storage device. In this pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) of the first embodiment described above is provided with a third frame button (second release button) 22c, and the first storage device 770 is released (opened). ) The control contents are different so that the control is executed based on the operation of the second frame button 22b and the release (opening) control of the second storage device 771 is executed based on the operation of the third frame button 22c. Is different. Other elements are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a second frame button (release button) 22b on the left side of the lower plate unit 15, and a third frame button (for second release) on the right side of the lower plate unit 15. Button) 22c is provided. Since the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are arranged on the lower plate unit 15 with an interval of about 20 cm, the player Is difficult to operate with one hand at the same time. Further, between the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c, the first frame button (effect button) 22a is inserted into the second frame button (release). The button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are arranged so as to block the straight line connecting the button surfaces, and the player can simultaneously use the second frame button (for release) with one hand. It is more difficult to operate the button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c.

Further, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed), the control for changing the storage state of the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state is controlled. When executed and the third frame button (second release button) 22c is operated (pressed), the storage state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is changed to the release (open) state. It is configured to perform control.

As a result, the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at a desired timing, so that the storage according to the operation content of the player The release control of the device can be executed, and the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

Further, since it is difficult for the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at the same time with one hand, the game is played. (That is, while operating the operation handle 51 with one hand), the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are operated at the same time, and a plurality of frames are operated. Processing load due to simultaneous execution of release control of the storage device (for example, movable valve movable control using an electric drive source), or due to simultaneous drive of an electric drive source (for example, solenoid, motor, etc.) It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in power consumption. When the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at the same time using both hands, the operation handle 51 is not operated. Since it is in the state, even if the release control of the plurality of storage devices is executed at the same time, the game control for the operation of the operation handle 51 (for example, the launch control using the electric drive source) is not executed. It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in power consumption due to the processing load of the entire pachinko machine 10 or the simultaneous drive of an electric drive source (for example, a solenoid, a motor, etc.).

That is, by using this configuration, the release control for the two storage devices (first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) and the game control for the operation on the operation handle 51 (for example, launch control) are simultaneously performed. It is possible to suppress the damage, and the processing load (control processing using an electric drive source) and the power consumption (power used to drive the electric drive source) in the pachinko machine 10 temporarily increase. It is possible to suppress the storage.

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. In the modified example of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 79 (configuration provided with the storage flow path 700e and the second storage flow path 700g), the configuration of FIG. 87 described above (second frame button (release button)). When the 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are provided), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is used based on the operation for the second frame button 22b. ) Is in the open (release) state, the ball flows out from the storage flow path 700e, and the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is in the open (release) state based on the operation for the third frame button 22c. , The ball will flow out from the storage flow path 700 g.

As shown in FIG. 79, the ball flow path is formed so that the balls flowing out from the storage flow path 700e and the second storage flow path 700g can enter the specific general entry port 630. A ball flow path is formed above the entry port 630 so that the ball flowing out from the storage flow path 700e and the ball flowing out from the second storage flow path 700g merge. As a result, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 depending on the flow condition of the ball flowing out from each storage flow path (storage flow path 700e, second storage flow path 700g). Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to the movement of the ball.

Further, according to the configuration shown in FIG. 87, since the second frame button 22b and the third frame button 22c are arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate at the same time with one hand, the ball is above the specific general entry port 630. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball cannot enter the specific general entry port 630 due to collision with each other.

The second storage upper limit sensor S5 and the second storage detection sensor S6 are provided in the second storage flow path 700 g, and when the second storage upper limit sensor S5 detects a sphere, that is, the second storage flow path. When it is detected that the upper limit amount of balls is stored in 700 g, even if the game (right-handed game) is executed in this state, the balls cannot be stored in the second storage flow path 700 g any more. , Notification prompting the player to operate the third frame button 22c (for example, display prompting the player to press the third frame button 22c on the third symbol display device 81, third frame button on the voice output device 226 A voice output urging the user to press the 22c and a voice output urging the third frame button 22c to be pressed by causing the third frame button 22c (or its surroundings) to emit light are executed. As a result, the game is continued with the storage amount of the balls in the second storage flow path 700 g, which makes it easy for the outflowing balls to enter the specific general entry port 630, to be a disadvantageous game for the player. It is possible to suppress what is done.

In the configuration of this modification, the contents described in the above description of the first embodiment may be appropriately combined, and for example, based on one operation for the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. The operation of the first storage valve 770a or the second storage valve 771a may be controlled so that only one ball flows out, or the operation of the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c may be performed once. Based on this, all stored balls may be controlled to flow out. Further, the number of balls to be discharged and the outflow timing of the balls may be different based on the operation content (for example, normal pressing or long pressing) of the operation for the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. As a result, the operating means (second frame button 22b, third frame button) operated by the player to drain the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) from the storage device. The operation timing and operation contents of 22c) can be diversified, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In this modified example, the second storage flow path 700 g is configured so that the stored balls flow out to a location facing the specific general entry port 630, which is advantageous for the player. A passage (second storage flow path 700 g) and a storage flow path (first storage flow path 700e) that are more disadvantageous than the passage are provided, but one storage flow path and the other storage flow path are provided. It suffices that the advantageous and disadvantageous settings are set, and the advantageous storage flow path is configured so that the sphere is less likely to flow in than the disadvantageous storage flow path.

For example, a second movable valve is provided between the ball outlet of the second storage flow path 700 g and the specific general entry port 630, and the second movable valve makes the ball more than the movable valve 750. It may be configured so that the rate of being in an inducible state is high. Further, the upper limit of the number of balls stored in each storage flow path may be configured to be different for each storage flow path.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. In the above-described first embodiment, the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b are separately configured as the operation means that can be operated by the player. Further, as a timing effect (operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operation means, a display pointer is set for each operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b). It was configured to execute an effect display that scrolls and moves.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the first frame button is used instead of the operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b) in the first embodiment. A (effect button) 1122a and a second frame button (release button) 1122b are provided. Then, in conjunction with the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 1122a, an interlocking means for pressing the second frame button (release button) 1122b is provided, and the interlocking means is used as the first frame button (1st frame button). The interlocking state in which the second frame button (release button) 1122b is operated based on the operation of the effect button) 1122a, and the second frame button (release button) based on the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 1122a. ) A variable control means for changing the 1122b to a non-operating release state is provided.

As a result, the player executes the timing effect (operation effect) of operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a, and the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 1122a. The second frame button (release button) 1122b can be operated just by executing the operation. Therefore, the storage device can be released without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122a are replaced with the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b. The point is that the frame button 1122b is provided. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. As shown in FIG. 80, a first frame button 1122a and a second frame button 1122b are provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the configurations of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic view of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b in a plan view, and FIG. 81 (b) shows an interlocking operation configuration of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

As shown in FIG. 81A, the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are configured to be connectable via the interlocking means 1125. Further, the second frame button 1122b is configured to be one size smaller than the first frame button 1122a, and a regulation wall 1123 is provided around the second frame button 1122b. As a result, when the player tries to operate the first frame button 1122a at an unintended timing, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the second frame button 1122b and accidentally pressing the button 1122b.

Next, the detailed configuration of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). The first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b can be operated with a return means (for example, an elastic member using a spring member, a rubber member, or the like) for returning the pressed button to a normal position. A light emitting means or the like for notifying that the period is long is provided, but the above-mentioned returning means and the light emitting means or the like employ a commonly used known technique, and the illustration and details thereof are shown. Description will be omitted.

A detection switch S22a for detecting the pressing operation is provided below the first frame button 1122a, and a detection switch S22b for detecting the pressing operation is provided below the second frame button 1122b. Has been done. As a result, it is detected that each frame button is operated (pressed). Further, an interlocking means 1125 capable of engaging with both frame buttons is provided between the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, and when the interlocking means 1125 is projected to the engaging position. The second frame button 1122b is pressed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a. Since the interlocking means 1125 is configured not to be pressed by the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b, the first frame button 1122a may be pressed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b. Absent.

Next, the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which the first frame button 1122a is pressed in the released state in which the interlocking means 1125 is buried, and FIG. 82 (b) is an interlocking with the interlocking means 1125 protruding. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state which pressed the 1st frame button 1122a in the state.

As shown in FIG. 82A, while the interlocking means 1125 is in the released state, the first frame button 1122a and the interlocking means 1125 are not engaged, so that the first frame button 1122a is pressed. The interlocking means 1125 does not move in conjunction with it. Therefore, the second frame button 1122b is not pressed. On the other hand, while the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocking state, as shown in FIG. 82B, the first frame button 1122a and the interlocking means 1125 are engaged with each other, so that the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a is performed. The interlocking means 1125 moves downward in conjunction with. Then, the second frame button 1122b engaged with the interlocking means 1125 also moves downward, and it is detected that the pressing operation is performed by the detection switch S22b.

Further, the regulation wall 1123 provided around the second frame button 1122b is located around the second frame button 1122b even when the second frame button 1122b shown in FIG. 82 (b) is pressed. , Protruding on the inner side of the lower plate unit 15. As a result, the return operation for returning the second frame button 1122b from the pressed position (position shown in FIG. 82 (b)) to the normal position (position shown in FIG. 82 (a)) can be smoothed. In addition, when the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a is performed in conjunction with the pressing operation, the pressing operation in the one-sided gripping state can be smoothed.

In the present embodiment, each frame button (first frame button 1122a, second frame button 1122b) is operated by the player from an initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) that is not operated by the player. Although the moving distance to the detected detection position (see FIG. 82B) is configured to be the same, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59) of the first embodiment described above will be described. As described above, since the processing based on the operation of the second frame button 1122b is preferentially executed (see S3002 in FIG. 59), the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocking state, and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button When the 1122b and the 1122b are pressed at the same time, the effect based on the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b is executed. Therefore, since the effect based on the operation of the operation means (second frame button 1122b) different from the operation means (first frame button 1122a) operated by the player is executed, the player is provided with an unexpected effect. can do.

In the present embodiment, when the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are simultaneously pressed by the control process, the effect based on the second frame button 1122b is executed. However, other configurations may be used, for example, rather than the distance for moving the first frame button 1122a from the initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82 (b)). It is preferable that the distance for moving the two-frame button 1122b from the initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82 (b)) is shorter. As a result, when the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocking state and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are pressed at the same time, the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b is detected first. The effect based on the two-frame button 1122b can be preferentially executed.

Next, the control content for variably controlling the interlocking means 1125 in the second embodiment will be described. The interlocking means 1125 operates variably between an interlocking state (protruding state) in which each frame button (first frame button 1122a and second frame button 1122b) is engaged and a disengaging state (buried state) in which the engagement is released. The second frame button (release button) 22b set in the pressing period information storage area 223y of the first embodiment described above is set to be in an interlocking state corresponding to the successful pressing period. To. As a result, in the timing effect (operation effect) of the first embodiment described above, the operation of pressing the second frame button (release button) 1122b at the same timing as the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. Can be made to.

It should be noted that the interlocking means may be configured to be variable to the interlocking state at a timing other than the above-mentioned timing, and for example, the player may be configured to be able to set the state of the interlocking means. As a result, can the period in which the player sets the interlocking means in the interlocking state and the display period of the display pointer indicating the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 1122b in the timing effect (operation effect) be matched? Depending on whether or not the game is played, the result of the game will be affected, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) using the first frame button (effect button) 1122a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect). The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the second embodiment, the middle button display mode 716 for prompting the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 1122a and the timing for operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a are set. A sub-display area Ds5 for displaying the suggested display pointer is displayed. That is, in the first embodiment, the display pointer 719 is displayed for each of the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b, and each frame button is displayed to the player. Although it was designed to be operated, in reality, only the display pointer corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing corresponding to the bar display unit 717, and a privilege advantageous to the player is given. Therefore, there is a problem that the player who understands the mechanism does not enthusiastically participate in the game.

On the other hand, according to the timing effect (operation effect) of the second embodiment, the player executes only the effect of operating the first frame button 1122a, and a plurality of display pointers 719 displayed in the effect. Of these, the timing at which one of the display pointers 719 matches the bar display unit 717 is matched with the ball entry possible timing, and when the display pointer 719 passes near the bar display unit 717, the interlocking means 1125 is brought into the interlocking state. By operating the first frame button 1122a at the timing when the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display unit 717, the second frame button 1122b is operated at the timing when the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630. Can be pressed. As a result, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) without grasping which of the display pointers 719 that is scroll-moved and displayed suggests the ball entry possible timing. Therefore, it is possible to operate the first frame button (effect button) 1122a in a state of matching the bar display unit 717 for all of the display pointers 719 that are scrolled and displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). The player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the interlocking means 1125 for engaging the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, and the interlocking means 1125 are the first frame button 1122a and the first frame button 1122a. A variable control means that can be changed between an interlocking state in which the two-frame button 1122b is engaged and a disengaged state in which the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are disengaged is provided, and the interlocking means 1125 is interlocked. By using a configuration in which when the player operates the first frame button 1122a while the state is changed, the second frame button 1122b is pressed in conjunction with the operation (pressing operation), the game is played. Although it is possible to operate the second frame button 1122b without giving a sense of discomfort to the person, another configuration having the same effect as that of the second embodiment may be used.

For example, by configuring the interlocking means 1125 with a magnetic material and putting the interlocking means 1125 into an excited state, a plurality of operating means (first frame button 1122a and second frame button 1122b) are in an interlocking state in which they operate in conjunction with each other. By demagnetizing the interlocking means 1125, a plurality of operating means (first frame button 1122a and second frame button 1122b) may be configured to be in a disengaged state in which they do not operate in interlocking with each other. 2. A means capable of switching between the interlocking state and the releasing state using a structure different from that of the second embodiment may be used. Further, although the second embodiment described above uses a configuration in which two operating means can be interlocked, a configuration in which three or more operating means can be interlocked may be used, or among the three or more operating means. It may be configured to be controllable so that the combination of the plurality of operating means in the interlocking state is different. As a result, it is possible to execute various combinations of operation effects based on the operations performed by the player on the operation means, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game (effect).

Further, for example, as a modification of the second embodiment, the frame button unit 1022 as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 may be provided. The frame button unit 1022 is a unit structure including a second frame button 1022b which is a release button so as to surround the first frame button 1022a which is an effect button.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example, the frame button unit 1022 is provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15. In this way, by forming a plurality of frame buttons (first frame button 1022a, second frame button 1022b) into a unit configuration and arranging them in one place, the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively used. Can be done.

Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85A is a schematic view showing a state in which the player operates the frame button unit 1022, and FIG. 85B is a schematic view showing the configuration of the frame button unit 1022. FIG. 86A is a schematic view showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated (pressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 10222b of the frame button unit 1022 is restricted, and FIG. ) Is a schematic view showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated (pressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b of the frame button unit 1022 is released.

First, as shown in FIG. 85A, in the frame button unit 1022 of the second embodiment, when the player presses the frame button unit 1022, the player's hand touches the first frame button 1022a and the second frame button 1022b. The first frame button 1022a is formed in a circular shape having a diameter of 5 cm so as to abut on both of the above, and the second frame button 1022b is formed in an annular shape having a diameter of 7 cm in which the first frame button 1022a is contained therein. There is. That is, the frame button unit 1022 has a circular unit structure having a diameter of 7 cm as a whole.

Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the frame button unit 1022 is provided so as to project toward the front surface side (upper side from the viewpoint of FIG. 85 (b)) of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the lower plate unit 15. Further, among the frame button units 1022, the first frame button 1022a is configured to protrude toward the front surface side (upper side from the viewpoint of FIG. 85B) of the pachinko machine 10 than the second frame button 1022b. .. With this configuration, the first frame button 1022a can be operated (pressed) even when the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted.

Then, in the pressing direction of the first frame button 1022a (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85B), a detection switch S22a for detecting that the first frame button 1022a is pressed is provided, and the second frame In the pressing direction of the button 1022b (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85B), a detection switch S22b for detecting that the second frame button 1022b is pressed is provided. Further, a regulating member 1023a is provided as a regulating means for regulating the pressing operation in which the second frame button 1022b located in the non-pressing state (normal state) moves to the pressed state (pressed state), and is electrically operated. By the operation of the solenoid 1023 which is a target drive source, it is variably configured to be a regulated position that regulates the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b and a release position that does not regulate the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b.

FIG. 85B shows a state in which the regulating member 1023a is located at the regulated position, and the regulating member 1023a regulates the movement of the second frame button 1022b from the normal state to the pressed state. .. The restricting member 1023a is made of a material that can change elasticity (for example, rubber), and when the restricting member 1023a is located at the restricted position, compared with a state where the restricting member 1023a is located at the release position. The detection switch S22b is configured so that the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b cannot be detected unless the pressing operation is performed with a strong force. With this configuration, the second frame button 1022b can always be pressed, but the pressing force required for the pressing operation can be changed according to the state (depending on the state of the regulating member 1023a). Is possible. Further, regarding the pressing force required for pressing each frame button, the second frame button 1022b, the first frame button 1022a, and the regulating member 1023a are in the regulated position when the regulating member 1023a is located at the release position. The pressing force required for the pressing operation is increased in the order of the second frame button 1022b in the positioned state. As a result, when the second frame button 1022b is in the regulated state, only the first frame button 1022a is easily pressed, and when the second frame button 1022b is in the released state, it is based on the pressing operation on the first frame button 1022a. The second frame button 1022b can be easily pressed.

In this modification, the configuration in which the second frame button 1022b can be constantly pressed is used, but other configurations may be used, for example, a material that does not elastically change the regulating member 1023a (for example, metal or metal). It is made of a high-hardness resin (polycarbonate) or the like), and the second frame button 1022b may not be pressed when the regulation member 1023a is located at the regulation position.

Further, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the distance (first frame button pressing stroke) from the pressing of the first frame button 1022a to the detection by the detection switch S22a is the second frame button. It is configured to be longer than the distance (second frame button pressing stroke) until 1022b is pressed and detected by the detection switch S22b. As a result, even if the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted, the pressing operation of the first frame button 1022a can be executed without any discomfort.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) and the second storage device (second storage valve 771a) are used as storage means for storing the spheres in the storage flow path 700e. The variable operation of the storage means was controlled so that one ball would flow out (flow down) each time the second frame button 22b was operated, but the storage for storing the balls in the storage flow path 700e was provided. As a means, only the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) may be provided.

In this case, when the second frame button 22b is normally operated (normally pressed), the storage device is opened (released) for a period (for example, 0.2 seconds) of about one ball flowing out. When controlled and the second frame button 22b is pressed and held for a long time, the open (release) state may be continued until all the balls stored in the storage means flow out. Here, as a method for determining that the second frame button 22b is long-pressed, the first pressing operation executes the same process as the normal pressing, and the opening period of the first storage device 770 based on the normal pressing is set. The operation status of the second frame button 22b may be determined again at the end timing, and if the second frame button 22b is continuously pressed at that time, it may be determined as a long press operation. As a result, when it is determined that the continuous pressing for a predetermined period is executed, the first storage responds quickly to the operation of the second frame button 22b as compared with the case where the opening operation of the first storage device 770 is executed. The device 770 can be opened.

Further, by using such a configuration, in the timing effect (operation effect), in order to allow all the balls stored in the first storage device 770 to enter the specific general entry port, the second frame button 22b A player who wants to select the action of normally operating the ball and at least one of the balls stored in the first storage device 770 to enter the specific general ball entrance can select the long press operation. It becomes possible, and it is possible to execute a directing game according to the skill of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an operation pattern of the movable valve 750, an operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 23A) that changes to a plurality of induction states in a short period of time is provided. Therefore, when the long press operation is selected at the timing when the movable valve 750 executes the operation scenario 3, many balls can be entered into the specific general entry port.

When the frame button 22b on which the long press operation can be executed is provided in this way, a notification effect suggesting the timing at which the operation scenario 3 is executed may be executed. As a result, the player can make a selection while guessing the normal operation or the long press operation based on the content of the notification effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, when the frame button 22b is pressed and held for a long time, the first storage device 770 is controlled to be opened and closed at specific intervals instead of continuously opening (releasing) the first storage device 770. May be good. In this case, a specific interval may be set based on the operation scenario (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750. As a result, when the first ball that has flowed out based on the long press operation enters the specific general ball entry means, the remaining balls can also be discharged at a timing that facilitates entry.

In each of the above-described embodiments, storage using a storage valve that is variably operated between a storage state and a release state by an electric drive source as a configuration for storing the sphere in the storage flow path 700e or the storage flow path 700g. Although the device is provided, other configurations may be used, for example, a configuration in which spheres are stored by magnetic force may be used. In this case, a variable member that changes the storage position that brings the magnetic material with magnetic force closer to the sphere and the release position that moves it away from the sphere is used, or a member that generates magnetic force by energizing (so-called electromagnet) is used for storage. The state and the release state may be variably controlled.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the ball flowing out from the storage means (storage device) can be changed to a guidance state in which the ball can be guided to a specific entry means (specific general entry port 630) and a difficult state in which guidance is difficult. As a result, a movable valve 750 that can be variably operated between a protruding position and a buried (retracted) position in a predetermined variable pattern (operation scenario) is provided, but a sphere that has flowed out of a storage means (storage device) is specified. Any other configuration may be used as long as it can be varied between a guided state that can be guided to the ball means and a difficult state that is difficult to guide. For example, a rotating body having a plurality of openings for guiding the ball. When the ball enters a predetermined opening among the plurality of openings, the ball is guided to the specific general entry port 630, and when the ball enters the other openings, the specific general A rotating body configured so that the ball is not guided to the entry port 630 may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, a frame button that determines that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. It may be used, and it is possible to determine that the operating means is configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not by the main control device 110 but by the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above-described embodiments, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 and do not enter the variable winning device 65 and the second entry port 640 are for storage. It is configured to flow into the flow path 700e, and one out of about 30 balls launched by the right-handed game is configured to flow into the storage flow path 700e, but was launched by the right-handed game. The ratio of the balls flowing into the storage flow path 700e may be appropriately determined, and the configuration of the right side region of the game board may be appropriately changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement of each configuration in the board unit 700 may be different from that of each of the above-described embodiments so that the ratio of flowing into the storage flow path 700e is high.

Next, another example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in another example. The game board 13 in this alternative example and the game board 13 used in each of the above embodiments are different in the arrangement relationship of each configuration in the board surface unit 700 provided in the right side area of the game board, and other elements are different. It is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the game board 13 of the present alternative example, the nails provided above the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 are arranged to the right as in the game board 13 shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 described above. About 95% of the balls launched into the right game area by the game (about 95 out of 100 balls) flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700, and about 93% of the balls launched into the inflow port (launched by the right-handed game). (Approximately 90% of the balls) pass through the through gate 67 and then flow down toward the variable winning device 65.

Then, when the variable winning device 65 is in the open state (open state), the ball flowing down toward the variable winning device 65 enters the variable winning device 65, and the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state (closed state). In the case of, it passes through the variable winning device 65 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is closed flows down on the electric accessory 640a in the closed state and flows into the distribution flow path 700d (see FIG. 3). As for the spheres that have flowed into the distribution flow path 700d, adjustment members (nails and the like) are arranged so that one sphere of about nine spheres flows into the storage flow path 700e. That is, in the configuration of the game board 13 in this alternative example, one ball out of about 10 balls launched into the right game area by the right-handed game flows into the storage flow path 700e (that is, in the board unit 700). By launching a ball number (10 balls) smaller than the prize ball number (15 balls) of the specific general entry port 630 (see FIG. 3) provided in the above, the balls flow into the storage flow path 700e). It is configured.

According to the game board 13 configured in this way, the ball hit right during the jackpot game can be efficiently entered into the variable winning device 65, and further, the variable winning device 65 is closed during the jackpot game. Since the ball that has passed without entering the variable winning device 65 at the timing (during the interval between rounds) can be efficiently flowed into the storage flow path 700e, the jackpot game is performed advantageously for the player. be able to.

However, when the game board 13 configured in this way is used, by launching a ball toward the right side area of the game board during a normal game, the ball is stored as compared with the structure of the game board 13 shown in FIG. Since the ball easily flows into the flow path 700e, there is a possibility that the ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630 during the normal game.

On the other hand, in this alternative example, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the cover member 710 is provided so that the movable state of the movable valve 750 is difficult to see from the outside. Even if the balls flow into the storage flow path 700e during the game, the storage devices (first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770) so that the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e enter the specific general entry port 630. 2 It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the timing of releasing the storage device 771). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of acquiring a large number of balls by executing the game of inserting the ball into the specific general ball entrance 630 during the normal game.

Further, as described above in each of the above embodiments, since the movable valve 750 is configured to move in various motion patterns, a game in which a ball is inserted into a specific general entrance 630 during a normal game is performed. It is possible to further suppress the act of executing and acquiring a large number of balls.

In addition, when the game board 13 configured as in this alternative example is used, the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e is a specific general entry ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied even during a normal game. The timing (timing of operating the frame button 22) for releasing the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) may be notified so that the ball enters the mouth 630. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is missed a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) in a row, or when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed from the start of the game, or when the first 3 When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern executed by the symbol display device 81, or when the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a means (for example, a real-time clock) capable of determining the current time, the current time is predetermined. It is preferable that the timing notification for notifying the player of the above-mentioned timing is executed when the time (for example, noon) is reached.

As a result, it is possible to provide a player who has not won the jackpot of the special symbol with a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, so that the player can play the game without winning the hit. It is possible to prevent getting bored. Further, the timing notification continuation period from the execution of the above-mentioned timing notification to the end may be set to always be a fixed time, or a different time may be set each time. Further, as the end condition of the timing notification, not only the passage of time but also, for example, a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls have entered the specific general entry port 630 during the period during which the timing notification is being executed. It may be a condition. With this configuration, it is possible to facilitate the ball from entering the specific general ball entry port 630 during the period when the timing notification is executed.

When such timing notification is executed, the game that is advantageous to the player is the right-handed game, so that the right-handed game is guided to the sub-display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. "Aim to the right" is displayed as a guidance display. This guidance display is set to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 from a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds before) before the timing notification is actually executed. This is a preparation notification for the purpose of storing the sphere in the storage flow path 700e before the timing notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the spheres are not stored in the storage flow path 700e in the state where the timing notification is executed.

Further, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned preparation notification is based on the determination result of the determination means (storage upper limit sensor S1, storage detection sensor S2) for determining the presence or absence of the sphere stored on the storage flow path 700e. It is good to decide. Specifically, when the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects the ball, it is preferable to set so that the preparation notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily executing the right-handed game by executing the preparation notification in a state where the ball cannot newly flow into the storage flow path 700e. it can. The period during which this preparation notification is executed may be appropriately set. For example, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 700e or a new inflow into the storage flow path 700e (storable) The length of the preparation notification period may be variably configured based on the number of balls. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball is not stored in the storage flow path 700e in the state where the timing notification is executed, and the right-handed game is unnecessarily executed for the player. It is possible to prevent it from being caused.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration of this alternative example shown in FIG. 88, the configuration of the game board 13 in which balls easily flow into the storage flow path 700e, specifically, By launching a ball with a smaller number (for example, 10 balls) than the number of balls paid out when the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 (for example, 15 balls), the ball is placed in the storage flow path 700e. Even if a configuration that allows inflow is used, since the cover member 710 is provided to make it difficult to visually recognize the operating status of the movable valve 750 from the outside, the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e are placed in the specific general entry port 630. It is possible to make it difficult to release the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) at the timing of entering the ball.

Further, in this alternative example, a ball is launched into the storage flow path 700e by launching a ball number (10 balls) smaller than the number of prize balls (15 balls) paid out when the ball enters the specific general entry port 630. Since the ball can flow in, the ball is stored in the storage flow path 700e during the normal game (that is, the variable winning device 65 is not in the open state and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be in the open state). Even if the above-mentioned timing notification is executed, the ball is stored in the storage flow path 700e, and then the ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630, the game is advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a game in which the number of balls to be paid out is larger than the number of balls to be launched).

As a result, it is possible to provide a player who has not won the jackpot of the special symbol with a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, so that the player can play the game without winning the hit. It is possible to prevent getting bored.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Suggests the timing of releasing the storage device)
A game area where a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine A1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. It is structured so that it is easy to do. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine A1, a storage means in which a plurality of the variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means are stored, and a variable pattern of 1 from the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that it has a variable pattern setting means for setting.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the variable means is set and changed by one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns, so that the variable pattern is stored in the player and the first state is set. By easily targeting the timing, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that is excessively advantageous to the player.

Here, as the storage means in which a plurality of variable patterns are stored, a plurality of types of variable patterns in which a first period in which the variable means is in the first state and a second period in which the variable means is in the second state are stored are stored. It is a means to be. In this variable pattern, the minimum unit for changing the variable means may be one variable pattern, and when the same operation is performed a plurality of times in the first period and the second period, the operation may be performed a plurality of times. The operation may be one variable pattern. In the former case described above, since one variable pattern is set for one operation of the variable means, the operation of the variable means is set in detail, and the timing at which the variable means becomes the first state for the player. Can be difficult to grasp. Further, in the latter case described above, since the execution period of one variable pattern can be lengthened, the frequency of setting the variable pattern can be suppressed.

The game machine A3 is characterized in that the variable pattern setting means repeatedly sets the variable pattern in a predetermined order after the power is turned on.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the variable patterns after the power is turned on are repeatedly set in a predetermined order, so that the variable pattern of 1 is biasedly selected, which is advantageous. It has the effect of suppressing problems with biased disadvantages.

Here, after the power is turned on means after the power is turned on to the game machine and the variable operation of the variable means is executed, and the variable patterns of the variable means are set in a predetermined order. By doing so, the above-mentioned effect is produced.

In addition, a process is added to the game machine A3 to change the period from when the power is turned on to the game machine until the execution of the variable operation of the variable means is started, and the variable pattern of 1 is biasedly selected. The variable operation executed after a predetermined time after the power is turned on may be different while suppressing the trouble. That is, by making the period from when the power is turned on until the execution of the variable operation is started is different (delayed) by, for example, 3 seconds, the variable operation is executed after a predetermined time after the power is turned on for 3 seconds. It can be shifted (delayed). As a result, it is possible to measure the elapsed time since the power is turned on and prevent the variable means from being grasped when the variable means is in the first state based on the measurement result. In this case, as a method of differentiating the variable operation executed after a predetermined time after the power is turned on, in the process executed after the power is turned on, the timing to start the control for the variable operation is determined by lottery or determined in advance. A method of executing the start timings in order can be considered.

Further, when the setting order storage means in which the order for setting the variable pattern of the variable means is predetermined is provided and the variable pattern is set so as to repeatedly execute the order stored in the setting order storage means. May provide a variable pattern determining means for determining which variable pattern stored in the setting order storage means is set as the first variable pattern to be executed when the variable operation of the variable means is started. As a result, it is possible to make the variable operation executed after a predetermined time after the power is turned on differently while suppressing the problem that the variable pattern of 1 is biasedly selected.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player, and the mode of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized by having a suggestion effect mode setting means for setting based on a variable pattern executed by the variable control means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the mode of the suggestion effect is set based on the variable pattern in which the variable means is changed, so that the variable can be easily executed. There is an effect that the execution of the suggestion effect can be set according to the pattern.

When using the configuration of the game machine A4, it is preferable that the player does not predict the timing at which the variable means is located in the first state. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a shielding member (blind member) for making it difficult to visually recognize the variable operation of the variable means. As a result, the player can be made to grasp the timing when the variable means becomes the first state based on the suggested effect to be executed instead of directly looking at the variable means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the configuration of the game machine A2 is provided, it can be difficult for the player to predict the timing when the variable means will be in the first state. Therefore, the player should pay attention to the suggestion effect to be executed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

The game machine A5 is characterized in that, in the game machine A4, the mode of the suggestion effect set by the suggestion effect mode setting means is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A4, the mode of the suggestion effect is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns, so that the suggestion effect is advantageous to the player even if the variable pattern is switched. Has the effect of being easy to perform.

In addition, as a suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means, an effect of displaying a moving body on the display screen of the third symbol display device and matching the timing of the moving body at a specific position with the operation timing, or an effect It is conceivable that the timing at which the voice executed as a voice becomes a predetermined voice is matched with the operation timing. In this case, it is preferable to use a pre-effect that makes the player know that the operation timing is approaching. Specifically, it is preferable to use an effect of moving and displaying a moving body on a straight line at a constant speed toward a specific position, or an effect using a voice that counts down a number toward a specific number (for example, 0). As a result, the timing of operating the operating means can be grasped to some extent in advance, so that the operating means can be appropriately operated even when the operating timing is set only for a short period of time.

On the other hand, in order to make it difficult to operate the operation means at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player, it is preferable to execute an inhibition effect different from the above-mentioned prior effect. As this inhibition effect, it is conceivable to execute the pre-effect at different timings. This makes it difficult for the operating means to be operated at an operating timing that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine A4 or A5 has a discriminating means for discriminating the content of the variable pattern executed by the variable control means, and the suggestion effect executing means has a start timing based on the content discriminated by the discriminating means. The gaming machine A6, characterized in that the suggestion effect is started.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine A4 or A5, the suggestion effect is started at the start timing based on the variable content of the variable pattern that is actually being performed, so that the suggestion effect is started according to the progress of the variable pattern. It has the effect of being able to perform suggestive effects.

Here, as the content of the variable pattern, content information indicating whether or not the variable pattern is a variable pattern advantageous to the player, content information indicating a period during which the variable means is actually in the first state, and variable Content information or the like indicating the remaining period until the pattern is switched can be considered.

In the game machine A6, the variable means has a period determining means for determining a period in which the first state is obtained, and the suggestion effect executing means performs the suggestion effect at a timing based on the determination result of the period determination means. A game machine A7 characterized in that it is to be started.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the suggestion effect is started at the timing based on the result of determining the period of the first state, so that when the operation means is operated, the storage means There is an effect that the suggestion effect can be easily executed at the timing when the ball flowing out from the above can be moved to the variable means during the period when the ball flows out from the first state.

In any of the game machines A3 to A7, the operation timing of the operation means suggested by the suggestion effect is at least one ball that has flowed out of the storage means when the operation means is operated based on the operation timing. A8 is a gaming machine A8 characterized in that is set so as to be movable up to the variable means that has been changed to the first state.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A3 to A7, by operating the operation means at the timing based on the suggestion effect, the game ball can be easily entered into the specific ball entry means. , There is an effect that the interest of operating the operating means can be further improved.

In any of the game machines A2 to A8, a timing specifying means for specifying the timing at which the variable means changes to the first state based on the variable pattern stored in the storage means, and an outflow from the storage means. The operating means is a period setting means for setting a period until the sphere reaches the variable means, and a timing obtained by subtracting a period set by the period setting means from the timing specified by the timing specifying means. The gaming machine A9 is characterized by having an operation timing setting means set as the operation timing of the above, and a suggestion effect execution means for executing an effect suggesting the operation timing set by the operation timing setting means.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A8, the timing of changing to the first state is specified, and the ball flowing out from the storage means reaches the variable means from the specified timing. Since the value obtained by subtracting the period until the operation timing and the operation timing are set and the effect suggesting the operation timing is executed, the accuracy of the effect suggesting the operation timing can be improved, and the player enthusiastically participates in the effect. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In the game machine A9, a measuring means for measuring a period until the ball flowing out of the storage means reaches the variable means, a measuring period measured by the measuring means, and a period set by the period setting means. The gaming machine A10 is characterized by having a period determining means for discriminating the above-mentioned period and a period correcting means for correcting the setting contents of the period setting means based on the discriminating result of the period determining means.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, the period until the ball actually arrives can be measured, and the set period can be corrected based on the measurement result, so that the accuracy of the suggestion effect can be improved. There is an effect that it can be further enhanced and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the production.

In any of the game machines A4 to A10, an entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determination means for executing determination when a ball enters the entry means, and a determination means thereof. It has an effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means based on the determination result by the determination means.

According to the game machine A11, since the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result of the determination means for determining whether or not the privilege game is executed, the player is identified as a game aiming at the privilege game. It is possible to associate the ball-entry means with a game in which the ball is inserted, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play.

Here, as a condition for executing the suggestion effect, for example, a case where the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result in which the privilege game is executed, or a determination result in which the privilege game is not executed (so-called off) is predetermined. It may be the case that the number of times is continuous.

Further, the timing at which the suggestion effect is executed may be a period before the discrimination result of the discrimination means is notified to the player, a timing at which the discrimination result is notified, or the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. In the case of, the privilege game to be executed after the determination result is notified may be in progress. If the suggestion effect is executed during the privilege game, it is possible for the player to simultaneously perform the privilege game and the game in which the ball is inserted into the specific ball entry means, which is more advantageous to the player. A gaming state can be provided.

<Feature B group> (Perform a production using the release operation)
A game area where a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. B1.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine B1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. It is structured so that it is easy to do. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine B1, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a ball enters the ball entry means, and a discrimination result by the discrimination means. The effect executing means for executing the effect for suggesting the above, and the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game based on the determination result by the determination means being the specific determination result. B2 is a game machine B2 for executing a specific effect suggesting that it is the operation timing of the operation means when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the operation is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied as an effect for suggesting the determination result of the determination means for determining whether or not the privilege game is executed. Since the specific effect suggesting the operation timing of the means is executed, it is possible to give the player a privileged game or a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

The game machine B1 or B2 has a storage determination means for determining that the storage means is storing a ball, and the storage determination means determines that the storage means is storing a ball. A game machine B3 characterized in that it is at least one of the conditions for satisfying a predetermined condition.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, at least when it is determined by the storage determination means that the ball is stored in the storage means, the specific effect is executed, which is suggested by the specific effect. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball does not flow out from the storage means even though the operation means is operated at the operation timing to be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, when the effect executing means is executing the effect for suggesting the specific determination result, the effect for suggesting a determination result different from the specific determination result is performed. The gaming machine B4, characterized in that it is easier to execute the specific effect than when it is being executed.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result in which the privilege game is executed, the discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result is used. Since the specific effect is more likely to be executed than in a certain case, it is possible to easily give the player both the privilege game and the specific effect at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In any of the game machines B2 to B4, the operation timing suggested by the specific effect executed by the effect executing means is at least one ball that has flowed out of the storage means when the operation is executed at the operation timing. The gaming machine B5 is set so as to be movable up to the variable means that has been changed to the second state.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B4, the operation timing at which at least one ball discharged from the storage means reaches the variable means changed to the second state is determined by the specific effect. Therefore, when the ball stored in the storage means is discharged from the storage means while the effect suggesting the discrimination result of the discrimination means is being executed, the ball enters the specific ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the storage.

In any of the game machines B2 to B5, the effect executing means notifies information based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means based on the operation of the operating means during the period during which the specific effect is being executed. A game machine B6 characterized in that it executes a notification effect.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B5, information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means is provided based on the operation of the operation means during the period when the specific effect is being executed. Since the notification effect for notifying is executed, the player can pay attention to the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the action of causing the balls stored in the storage means to flow out from the storage means.

In the game machines B2 to B6, during the period when the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, the advantage suggestion effect execution means for executing the advantage suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player is provided. A game machine B7 characterized by having.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machines B2 to B6, the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player is suggested by the advantage suggestion effect during the period when the privilege game is executed. The game value during game execution can be increased, and the player's motivation to play can be increased.

<Feature C group> (Make it difficult to see the operation of the movable valve)
A ball-entry means capable of entering a ball, a first state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball-entry means, and a second state in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball-entry means than the first state. A predetermined condition is satisfied with a variable means that can be changed, and a switching means that can switch at least a part of the variable means between a difficult state in which it is difficult to see from the outside and an easy state in which it is easier to see than the difficult state. In this case, the gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a switching control means for switching from the difficult state to the easy state by the switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable means that can be changed between a permissible position that allows a game ball launched on a game board to enter a specific area and a regulated position that is regulated is provided, and the variable means. When the ball passes through the variable means in the allowable position, the ball passes through a specific area, and there is a case where a privilege is given to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-083161).

In such a conventional game machine, whether or not the ball enters a specific area is determined by the timing at which the game ball launched on the game board reaches the movable means, so that the player can see the game ball. It was possible to entertain at what timing the variable means was reached. However, since it is configured so that the player can grasp the operating state of the movable means, there is a problem that the game ball is brought to the variable means at the timing when the movable means becomes the allowable position. there were. In addition, since the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, the player's early detection that the launched game ball does not enter the specific entrance is reduced, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. There was a problem that it would end up.

According to the game machine C1, the variable is variable between a first state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means and a second state in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball entry means than the first state. Since at least a part of the variable state of the means can be switched between a difficult state where it is difficult to see from the outside and an easy state where it is easier to see than the difficult state by the switching means, the state of the variable means is not grasped by the player. You can set the state and the state to be grasped. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be suppressed from being lowered by the player's early detection that the launched game ball does not enter the specific entrance. ..

In the game machine C1, the switching means includes a shielding member arranged on the front side of the variable means, and an irradiation means capable of irradiating the shielding member with light of a specific color from the back side. However, the shielding means is configured to be in the difficult state when not irradiated by the irradiation means, and to be changed to the easy state by being irradiated by the irradiation means. Characteristic gaming machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, it is possible to switch between a difficult state and an easy state by irradiating light by the irradiation means, so that there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed. ..

In the game machine C1, the switching means has a movable member movable between a front side position of the variable means and a retracted position retracted from the front side of the variable means, and the switching control means moves the movable member. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it switches to the difficult state by moving it to the front side position and switches to the easy state by moving the movable member to the retracted position.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, it is possible to switch between the difficult state and the easy state by moving the movable member, so that the switching means can be easily designed. is there.

In the game machine C1, the switching means is a shielding member arranged on the front side of the variable means, an irradiation means capable of irradiating the shielding member with light, and the shielding member by the irradiation means. The shielding means has a variable means for changing the incident angle of the light emitted to the light, and the shielding means can be changed to the easy state by setting the incident angle of the light to the first angle by the variable means. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is configured as such.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the shielding member can be changed to an easy state only by changing each of the incidents of light on the shielding member, so that the switching means can be easily designed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine C4, the variable means is a movable means for moving the shielding member, and by moving the shielding member by the movable means, the incident angle of the light is set to the first angle. A game machine C5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, by moving the shielding member, each incident of light is set to the first angle, so that the shielding member can be easily moved without moving the irradiation means. Since it can be changed, there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, a ball detecting means capable of detecting a ball flowing down toward the variable means is provided, and when the ball detecting means detects a ball, the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine C6 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C5, when it is detected that the ball flows down toward the variable means, a predetermined condition is satisfied. It has the effect of suppressing the situation where the flow cannot be seen.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, an entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determination means for executing determination when a ball enters the entry means, and a determination means thereof. An effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting a discrimination result by the discrimination means, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and the discrimination means. When the measurement means has a measuring means for measuring the number of times of discrimination, and the measuring means continuously measures the number of times of discrimination in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result, the number of discriminations is measured. The gaming machine C7, characterized in that the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C6, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result for a predetermined number of times in a row, the shielding member may be in an easy state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being in an extremely disadvantageous state.

In any of the game machines C2 to C7, the second irradiation means that irradiates light different from the irradiation means, and the irradiation means or the second irradiation means based on the establishment of the first condition. It has an irradiation control means for executing irradiation control and a second condition establishment determination means for determining the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition based on the establishment of the first condition. The irradiation control means executes the irradiation control on the irradiation means when the second condition is satisfied, and causes the second irradiation means when the second condition is not satisfied. On the other hand, the gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the irradiation control is executed.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C7, when the first condition for executing the irradiation control is satisfied, it is based on the determination result of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. Since the target for executing the irradiation control is different, the irradiation control by the second irradiation means is executed even when the shielding member is not made easy, so that the effect of the light irradiation is reduced. It has the effect of being able to suppress.

By arranging the irradiation means and the second irradiation means in the vicinity thereof, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect of irradiating the light. Further, when the configuration of the game machine C8 is used, the content of the irradiation control by the irradiation control means is made the same, and the switching control for switching only the output destination for executing the control to the irradiation means and the second irradiation means can be executed. It is good to do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load of the irradiation control means and suppress the decrease in the effect of the effect.

<Feature D group> (Rhythm game is set so that the operation means is operated at a specific timing)
A game area where the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. D1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine D1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific entering means. It is easily constructed. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine D1, of the effect executing means capable of executing the operation effect whose effect mode is changed according to the operation on the operation means and the operation effect executed by the effect execution means, the operation is performed within a specific period. An effect mode variable means that changes the effect mode to a specific effect mode when the means is operated, and a specific timing setting means that sets a specific timing based on the state of the variable means that is variable by the variable control means. A gaming machine characterized by having an operation effect setting means for setting the specific period in the operation effect based on the specific timing set by the specific timing setting means when a specific condition is satisfied. D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the effect execution means executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed according to the operation corresponding to the operation means, and the operation means is performed during the operation effect. Since the specific period in which the effect mode is changed to the specific effect mode based on the operation can be set by the specific timing set based on the state of the variable means, the operation effect and the state of the variable means can be set. It becomes possible to associate. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

In the game machine D2, the specific timing is a timing at which at least one ball flowing out of the storage means can be moved to the variable means variable to the first state when the operating means is operated. The game machine D3 characterized in that it is set in.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the timing at which at least one ball flowing out of the storage means can be moved to the variable means changed to the first state when the operating means is operated is a specific timing. Therefore, by operating the operation means so as to change the effect mode to the specific effect mode in the operation effect, it is possible to facilitate the ball stored in the storage means to enter the specific ball entry means. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically participated in the operation production and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced.

In the game machine D2 or D3, an operation determining means for determining whether or not the operating means has been operated within the specific period, a storage means for storing information updated based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and a storage means thereof. The gaming machine D4 is characterized by having a frequency variable means for varying the frequency of establishment of a specific condition based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2 or D3, the frequency of establishment of the specific condition is changed according to whether or not the operation means is operated within the specific period in the operation effect, so that the player Can be enthusiastically participated in the operation production. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the operation effect can be enhanced.

In this case, it is desirable to increase the frequency of establishment of the specific conditions as the number of times the operation means is operated within the specific period set during the operation effect increases. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to enthusiastically operate the operation means within a specific period, and there is an effect that the effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced.

In any of the game machines D2 to D4, a second operating means different from the operating means is provided, and the operating effect executed by the effect executing means depends on the operation on the operating means or the second operating means. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the effect mode is variable.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the operation means that can be operated can be increased by the operation effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines D2 to D5, the operation effect executed by the effect executing means sets the specific period based on the predetermined music, and corresponds to the progress of the predetermined music. The specific period settable area storage means in which a plurality of specific period settable areas in which the specific period can be set are stored, and the plurality of specific period settable areas stored in the specific period settable area storage means. It has a matching portion determining means for determining a portion that matches the specific timing, and a specific period setting means for setting the specific period of the operation effect at the portion determined to match by the matching location determining means. A game machine D6 characterized by.

According to the game machine D6, in the operation effect in which the specific period is set based on the music, the specific period of the operation effect is set in the place where the specific period settable area corresponding to the progress of the music and the specific timing match. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operation means at a specific timing by using a specific period corresponding to the music used for the operation effect, and there is an effect that the effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced.

<Characteristic E group> (Correct the operation effect based on the ball flow situation)
A ball path through which the ball can pass, a ball passage detecting means for detecting that the ball has passed a specific position among the ball paths, and the ball passing detecting means for detecting the ball after a predetermined condition is satisfied. A period setting means for setting a first period as a period until the first period is set, a notification timing setting means for setting a notification timing for notifying a specific effect mode based on the first period set in the period setting means, and a notification timing setting means thereof. The effect notification means for notifying the specific effect mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means, and the period specifying the passage period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the ball passage detection means detects the ball. The period is based on the means, the period determining means for discriminating the passing period specified by the period specifying means, and the first period set by the period setting means, and the discriminating result by the period discriminating means. The gaming machine E1 having a period correction means for correcting the first period set in the setting means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, in order to notify the player of the flow state of the game ball in an easy-to-understand manner, there is one that executes an effect corresponding to the period in which the game ball flows down. A variable means that can be changed between an allowable position that allows a game ball launched on a production game board for a predetermined period at a specific timing to enter a specific entry port and a regulated position that is regulated is provided. When the ball passes through the variable means in the allowable position, the ball enters the specific entry port, and a privilege is given to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-23516).

In such a conventional game machine, whether or not the ball enters the specific entry port is determined by the timing at which the game ball launched on the game board reaches the movable means. It was possible to entertain at what timing the game ball reached the movable means. However, since it is configured so that the player can grasp the operating state of the movable means, there is a problem that the game ball is brought to the variable means at the timing when the movable means becomes the allowable position. there were. In addition, since the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, the player's early detection that the launched game ball does not enter the specific entrance is reduced, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. There was a problem that it would end up.

According to the game machine E1, the first period referred to when the notification timing for notifying the specific effect mode is set can be corrected based on the passing period during which the ball actually passes, so that the ball passes through. It is possible to easily match the situation with the execution status of the specific effect mode. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of production.

Here, when the configuration of the game machine E1 is used for a game machine in which an effect for suggesting whether or not the ball passes a specific ball path is executed as a specific effect mode, the passage status of the ball It is possible to suppress a problem that the notification timing of the specific effect mode is deviated and the effect of suggesting that the ball passes the specific ball path is executed after the ball has passed the specific ball path. Can be done.

The game machine E2 is characterized in that, in the game machine E1, the specific effect mode notified by the effect notification means suggests that the ball passes through the specific position.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the timing at which the effect suggesting that the ball passes a specific position is notified can be corrected according to the period during which the ball actually passes. , There is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

The game machine E1 or E2 has a ball passage determining means for determining that a ball has passed a predetermined position on the upstream side of the specific position in the ball path, and the ball passing determining means determines the predetermined position. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the ball has passed.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, a preset notification timing is set based on the period from when the ball passes a predetermined position to when the ball passes a specific position in the ball path. Since the correction can be made based on the actual passing period of the ball, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine E3, the case where the ball has passed the predetermined position is shown as the trigger for the establishment of the predetermined condition, but as a method for determining that the ball has passed, the passage of the ball is actually detected by a detecting means (for example, proximity). In addition to the method of detecting with a sensor), for example, a method of detecting that the regulating member that regulates the flow of the ball toward a predetermined position is changed from the regulated position to the release position that releases the regulation can be considered. In this case, even if the regulating member is changed to the release position, the ball does not always flow down to the predetermined position immediately. Therefore, for example, the ball can flow down to the predetermined position on the upstream side of the regulating member. It is preferable to use a method of providing a retaining means for retaining the ball and determining that the regulating member has changed to the release position in a state where the ball is retained in the retaining means. Even if such a method is used, it can be indirectly determined that the ball has passed the predetermined position, and the same effect as that of the game machine E3 can be obtained.

In the game machine E3, the ball path has a first ball path provided with the specific position and a second ball path branching from the first ball path in a section between the predetermined position and the specific position. A game machine E4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine E3, a ball that has passed the predetermined position may pass through the second ball path without passing through the specific position. Therefore, the player can determine which ball path the ball actually passes through. It has the effect of being able to entertain and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine E4, the ball path is divided into a first state in which a ball passing through the ball path is more likely to pass through the first ball path and a second state in which the ball is more likely to pass through the second ball path than the first state. Based on the variable means capable of changing the path state of the ball and the path state of the ball path variable by the variable means, is the path state in which the ball passing through the predetermined position can pass through the first ball path? When the effect notification means determines that a ball that has passed the predetermined position is in a path state capable of passing through the first ball path. In addition, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it notifies the specific effect mode.

According to the game machine E5, when the ball is in a state where it can pass through a specific position, the specific effect mode is notified. Therefore, when the specific effect mode is notified, the ball passes through the specific position to the player. There is an effect that you can expect it and you can enhance the production effect.

Further, in this case, if the predetermined first period and the period actually spent for the ball to actually pass from the predetermined position to the specific position are different, the specific effect mode is notified even though the specific effect mode is notified. There is a problem that the ball does not pass through the first ball path frequently, but according to the game machine E5, it is based on the period required for the ball to actually pass from a predetermined position to a specific position. Since the first period can be corrected, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific effect mode can be increased and the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines E3 to E5, the second ball passage detecting means for detecting that the ball has passed the second specific position in the second ball path and the ball passing through the predetermined position. It has a second period specifying means for specifying a second passing period from to being detected by the second ball passing detecting means, and the period determining means includes a previous passing period, the second passing period, and the above. A game machine E6 characterized in that it distinguishes from the first period.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machines E3 to E5, the period required to pass through the second ball passage can be used to correct the first period, so that the first ball passage can be corrected. Compared with the case where the first period is corrected based only on the ball, the information for correcting the first period can be increased, and the correction accuracy can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific effect mode can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the configuration of the game machine E6, it is preferable to provide the second specific position at a position that requires the same period as the period required for the ball to pass from the predetermined position to the specific position. As a result, the information on the transit period specified by the period specifying means and the information on the second transit period specified by the second period specifying means can be collected without being separated, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Further, in the game machine E6, the period determining means uses the passing period and the second passing period, but it may be configured to use only the second passing period.

<Feature F group> (Allows multiple operating means to be operated by the same operation)
The first operating means that can be operated by the player, the first discriminating means that determines that the first operating means has been operated, and the second operating means that is different from the first operating means that can be operated by the player. An effect of executing a predetermined effect based on the operation means, the second discriminating means for discriminating that the operation has been performed on the second operating means, and the discriminating result by the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means. In a gaming machine having an executing means, an interlocking means for causing the second operating means to variably operate in conjunction with a variable operation of the first operating means, and the interlocking means are provided to the first operating means. The variable control means has an interlocking state in which the second operation means is interlocked and a variable control means for changing the connection state to a release state, and the variable control means causes the interlocking means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine F1 characterized in that it is variable to the interlocking state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a plurality of operating means that can be operated by a player are provided, and an operation effect is executed based on the operation of each operating means. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-55481).

In such a conventional game machine, since the operation effect is executed by the player operating the operation means corresponding to the effect among the plurality of operation means, the player can perform the operation effect. Of these, it is necessary to select and operate the corresponding operating means, and there is a problem that the motivation to operate the operating means is reduced. In addition, by operating one of the plurality of operating means, an effect corresponding to the operation of one operating means is executed, so that an unexpected effect can be provided to the player. There was a problem that it could not be done.

According to the game machine F1, when the player operates the first operating means, either an effect based on the determination result of the first determination means or an effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the same effect as when a plurality of operating means are operated only by operating one operating means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to operate the operating means. is there.

Further, when the first operating means is operated, it is possible to execute an effect based on the determination result of the second determination means, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and the effect of the effect. It has the effect of being able to increase.

In the game machine F1, when the first operating means is operated in a state where the interlocking means is changed to the interlocking state by the variable control means, the effect executing means is discriminated by the second discriminating means. The gaming machine F2, characterized in that the predetermined effect is executed based on the result.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, by changing the interlocking means to the interlocking state, when the first operating means is operated, an effect based on the discriminating result of the second discriminating means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine F2, the first operating means and the second operating means are configured to be movable from the first position to the second position, and the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means are It is for determining that the first operating means or the second operating means corresponding to each has moved to the second position, and the first operating means is moved from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the distance for moving the second operating means from the first position to the second position is shorter than the distance to be moved.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the second operating means has a shorter distance until it is determined that the operation has been performed than the first operating means. In the interlocking state, when the first operating means is operated, it is possible to reliably execute the effect based on the discrimination result of the second discriminating means. Therefore, there is an effect that an unexpected effect can be executed with a simple configuration.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the interlocking means is provided inside the game machine which is difficult to see from the outside.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, since the interlocking means is provided at a position where it is difficult to see from the outside, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state of the interlocking means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, a game area in which the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the ball that has entered, and a player based on the ball entering the game. The storage means is changed from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the specific ball entry means to which the advantageous privilege is given and the operation on the second operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means and the storage control means, and the specified ball that has flowed out. The gaming machine F5 is characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the ball entering means.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 to F4, when the first operating means is operated, the storage control means may change from the storage state to the release state, so that the player On the other hand, there is an effect that an unexpected game can be provided and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine F5, a timing setting means for setting an operation timing of the second operation means in which a ball flowing out of the storage means easily enters the specific ball entry means, and an operation timing set by the timing setting means. The gaming machine F6 is characterized by having an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect for operating the first operation means based on the above.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of the game machine F5, it is possible to make the ball enter the specific ball entry means by operating the first operation means according to the operation effect of operating the first operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically participate in the operation production.

In the game machine F6, the operation effect is an effect in which the operation timing for operating the first operation means is notified a plurality of times, and at least one of the operation timings notified a plurality of times is the timing setting means. The gaming machine F7, which is characterized by the operation timing set by.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of the game machine F6, one of a plurality of operation timing notifications executed during the operation effect is a second operation means that makes it easy to enter the specific ball entry means. Since it is possible to suggest the operation timing, the first operation means can be operated for all of the plurality of operation timings executed during the operation effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic G group> (Pre-read and notify the state in which the movable valve is advantageous)
A game area where a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. G1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine G1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. It is structured so that it is easy to do. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine G1, the variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means includes at least a first period in which the variable means is likely to be in the first state and the variable means rather than the first period. Has a second period in which it is difficult to be in the first state, and a period determining means for determining the timing at which the first period is set as variable control of the variable means by the variable control means, and a period determining means thereof. The gaming machine G2 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the timing at which the first period is set is determined.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, the execution of the specific effect causes the player to understand that the first period in which the variable means is likely to be in the first state is set. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game enthusiastically.

The game machine G2 has an advantageous suggestion effect executing means for executing an advantageous suggestion effect suggesting an operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the specific effect executing means is The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed during the period from the establishment of the predetermined condition to the execution of the advantageous suggestion effect.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, it is possible to notify the player that the advantageous suggestion effect of this time may be executed during the first period, so that the player can be notified. It has the effect of being able to play games enthusiastically.

In the game machine G3, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect when the first period is set within the period in which the advantageous suggestion effect is executed. Machine G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, it is possible to notify the player that the advantageous suggestion effect of this time will be executed during the first period, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the game machines G2 to G4, the storage means has a storage determination means for determining that the ball is stored, and the specific effect executing means has at least the storage means for the ball by the storage determination means. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed when it is determined that the above-mentioned is stored.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G2 to G4, the specific effect is executed only when the ball is stored in the storage means, so that the player positively operates the operation means. Can be operated. In addition, since it is prohibited to execute the specific effect when the ball is not stored in the storage means, the specific effect is executed unnecessarily, and the player can grasp the variable pattern of the variable member. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In any of the game machines G2 to G5, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determination means for executing discrimination when a ball enters the ball entry means, and a discrimination means thereof. It has an effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. The game machine G6 is characterized in that, as the specific effect, the specific effect executing means executes a specific fusion effect that also notifies that the determination result is the specific determination result by the determination means.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G2 to G5, it is possible to execute an effect that combines the fact that the privilege game is executed and the fact that the first period is set, which is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify that a different gaming state is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while having a sense of expectation.

In any of the game machines G2 to G6, the specific effect executing means changes the notification mode for notifying the operation timing of the operation means, which is suggested during the advantageous suggestion effect, to the specific notification mode. A game machine G7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G2 to G6, it is possible to notify the player that the first period is set depending on the notification mode during the advantageous suggestion effect, so that the effect effect. Has the effect of being able to increase.

<Characteristic H group> (The difficulty level of the release suggestion effect can be selected)
A game area where a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. H1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine H1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific entering means. It is easily constructed. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine H1, the advantageous suggestion effect executing means for executing the advantageous suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player based on the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means. , A selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect execution means, and an effect of setting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means. A game machine H2 having an aspect setting means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantageous suggestion effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of production.

In the game machine H2, the advantageous suggestion effect executed by the advantageous suggestion effect executing means can suggest the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player a plurality of times, and the effect mode setting means Based on the effect mode selected by the selection means, the suggestion number setting means for setting the suggestion number of the advantageous suggestion effect, and the suggestion number of suggestion set by the suggestion number setting means, the advantageous suggestion effect The gaming machine H3, which comprises a suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H2, the number of suggestions and the suggestion mode of the advantageous suggestion effect are set based on the effect mode selected by the selection means, so that the player is ambitious. Has the effect of being able to select the selection means.

In the game machine H3, when the suggested number of times is set by the suggested number of times setting means, the suggested mode set by the suggested mode setting means can be visually recognized by the player. Also, the gaming machine H4 is characterized in that a second aspect, which is more difficult to see than the first aspect, is easily set.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H3, when a production mode in which a large number of suggested times is set is selected by the selection means, the operation means is operated at the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player. The second aspect, which is difficult to operate, will be set. As a result, does the player select an effect mode corresponding to the number of suggestions less than a predetermined number of times, and execute an advantageous suggestion effect in which the first mode is likely to be set? It is possible to select an effect mode corresponding to a predetermined number of times or more of suggestion times, and to select whether to execute an advantageous suggestion effect in which the second mode is likely to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select an advantageous suggestion effect according to his / her skill and can enthusiastically participate in the effect.

In the game machine H3 or H4, when the suggested number of times is set by the suggested number of times setting means, the suggestion mode setting means is more than when the suggested number of times less than the predetermined number of times is set. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that a short interval is easily set as an interval in which the suggestion mode is set.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H3 or H4, when a selection means selects an effect mode in which a large number of suggestions is set, an effect mode in which a suggestion number less than a predetermined number is set. Since it is easier to set a short interval as the interval for setting the suggestion mode than when is selected, the player can select an advantageous suggestion effect according to his / her skill and enthusiastically participate in the effect. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines H3 to H5, the operation content discriminating means for discriminating the operation content of the operation means and the operation content discriminated by the operation content discriminating means while the advantageous suggestion effect is being executed are The gaming machine H6 is characterized by having an effect mode variable means for changing the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect to a special effect mode that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H3 to H5, the production mode of the advantage suggestion effect is a special effect mode that is advantageous to the player, based on the operation content for the operation means during the advantage suggestion effect. Since it can be changed to, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means.

In the game machine H6, the operation content determination means determines the number of operations in which the operation means is operated at the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player, and the operation content determination means determines the number of operations. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that, when the number of operations reaches the predetermined number of times, the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect is changed to the special effect mode by the effect mode variable means.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6, it is possible to change the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect to a special effect mode advantageous to the player based on the number of times the operating means is operated at an appropriate timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to operate the operation means more enthusiastically.

<Feature I group> (Valve operation monitoring on the sub side)
A game area where a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. I1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235). In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine I1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific entering means. It is easily constructed. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

The game machine I1 has a main control means for executing game control and a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is said to be said. The slave control means includes a storage control means, the variable control means, and a variable control information generation means for generating variable control information for notifying the slave control means of the control content of the variable control means. , A display means for executing a predetermined effect, a variable information storage means for storing variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled, and the above-mentioned output from the main control means. Based on the variable control information, the variable control situation specifying means for specifying the variable control status of the variable means and the variable control situation specifying means for specifying the variable control status by using the variable information stored in the variable information storage means are specified. It is characterized by having an effect setting means for setting an effect to be displayed on the display means based on a variable control situation, and an effect executing means for executing the effect set by the effect setting means. Game machine I2 to play.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the slave control means is output from the main control means when the effect based on the variable state of the variable means variably controlled by the main control means is executed. Since the effect is executed based on the variable control information and the variable information stored in the variable information storage means of the slave control means, there is an effect that the control load of the main control means can be reduced. ..

In the game machine I2, the variable control information generating means includes, at least, start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means in the variable control information first generated after the power is turned on to the game machine. A game machine I3 characterized by.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the variable control information generated first after the power of the game machine is turned on includes the start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the accuracy of specifying the variable control status by the slave control means can be improved.

In the game machine I3, the main control means has an operation start period setting means capable of setting a different period as an operation start period from when the power is turned on to the game machine to when the variable operation of the variable means is started. A game machine I4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I3, it is possible to make the period from when the power is turned on to the game machine until the variable operation of the variable means is started. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from easily grasping the variable movement of.

In the game machines I2 to I4, the main control means is a storage means in which a plurality of the variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means are stored, and when the power is turned on to the game machine. The variable control means has an initial variable pattern setting means for setting a variable pattern to be executed first from the plurality of variable patterns, and the variable control means previously stores the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means. The variable control information generation means is repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, and at least the initial variable pattern setting means is set to the variable control information that is first generated after the power is turned on to the game machine. The gaming machine I5, which includes the initial variable pattern setting information.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I4, even if the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, the game machine can be used. Since the variable pattern to be executed first can be set from a plurality of variable patterns when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable operation of the variable means. It has the effect of being able to do it. Further, since the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the processing load of the variable control can be reduced.

<Characteristic J group> (The operation interval can be selected by the player in the operation effect of operating the operation means a predetermined number of times).
A game area where the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. J1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine J1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific entering means. It is easily constructed. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine J1, the advantageous suggestion effect executing means for executing the advantageous suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player based on the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means. , A selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect execution means, and an effect of setting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means. A game machine J2 having an aspect setting means.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantageous suggestion effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. This has the effect of enhancing the production effect.

In the game machine J2, the advantageous suggestion effect executed by the advantageous suggestion effect executing means notifies the operation timing of the operation means at predetermined intervals, and serves as a notification interval in which the operation timing of the operation means is notified. , The first interval and the second interval which is shorter than the first interval can be set, and the selection means is at least the first as the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect. The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the first effect mode corresponding to the interval and the second effect mode corresponding to the second interval can be selected.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J2, the following effects are played. That is, the length of the notification interval in which the operation timing of the operation means is notified can be changed by selecting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect by the selection means. As a result, the player can select an effect mode corresponding to the operation interval according to his / her skill, and thus can actively participate in the effect using the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

The game machine J3 has a display means for displaying the advantageous suggestion effect and a selection display control means for displaying a plurality of the effect modes selectable by the selection means on the display means as a selection screen. The game machine J4 is characterized in that the display control means causes the display means to display the notification interval corresponding to the plurality of selectable effect modes.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J3, the following effects are played. That is, one effect mode can be selected by the selection means after grasping the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified from the plurality of effect modes displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can easily select an effect mode in which the operation timing is notified at the intended notification interval, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game and enhance the interest of the game. is there.

The game machine J4 is characterized in that the selection display control means displays the number of times information indicating the number of times the operation timing of the operation means is notified corresponding to the plurality of production modes. J5.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J4, the following effects are played. That is, from the plurality of effect modes displayed on the display means, one effect mode can be selected by the selection means after grasping the number of times the operation means should be operated. As a result, when the number of operations is small, the notification interval for notifying the operation timing of the operation means is shortened, and when the number of operations is large, the notification interval for notifying the operation timing of the operation means is lengthened. It is possible to make it easier to select a suitable production mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z1 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z2 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z3 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "

10 Pachinko machine (game machine)
13 Dribbling board (ball path)
114 Display control device (effect notification means)
630 Specified general entrance (ball passage detection means)
750 movable valve (variable means)
S2115 Period specifying means S3106 Period correction means S3202 Period setting means S3209 Notification timing setting means S3303 Period determination means S3304 Period determination means S3307 Period determination means

The present invention relates to a gaming machine represented by a pachinko machine.

In some game machines such as pachinko machines, a game ball launched on a game board enters a specific area to give a privilege to the player.

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2006-95235

However, further improvement of interest is required.

The present invention has been made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.

In order to achieve this object, the game machine according to claim 1 has a first method so as not to allow the game area in which the game ball can flow down and the game ball flowing down in the game area to flow down to a specific flow path at a predetermined timing. Means and games that can be changed into a first state that can be positioned at a position and a second state that allows the game ball located at the first position to flow out to the specific flow path. A specific ball entry means that gives a privilege to the player based on the ball entering, an operation means that the player can operate, and a first condition that is established based on the operation to the operation means. Based on the fact that the second condition that can be satisfied in relation to the establishment is satisfied, the control means that changes the means from the first state to the second state, and the control means cause the means to be in the first state. The third state in which the game ball flowing down the specific flow path is easily entered into the specific ball entry means by being changed from the third state to the second state, and the specific ball entry means rather than the third state. A variable means that can be changed to a fourth state in which it is difficult to enter the ball, a variable control means that variably controls the variable means from a predetermined operation start timing according to a variable pattern in which a variable timing is defined in advance, and a variable control means thereof. Suggestion effect for showing that the variable means is changed to the third state by the control means can be executed before a specific period when the variable means is changed to the third state. An effect executing means, a first detecting means capable of detecting a game ball flowing into the specific flow path, and a second detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball flowing down the specific flow path has entered the specific ball entering means. 2 The detection means, the third detection means capable of detecting that the game ball flowing down the specific flow path has passed through the discharge region without entering the specific entry means, and the game by the first detection means. It has a second detection means or a notification means for notifying that the game ball has not been detected by the third detection means from the detection of the ball to the elapse of a predetermined period .

According to the game machine according to claim 1 , the game area in which the game ball can flow down and the game ball flowing down in the game area are positioned at the first position so as not to flow down into the specific flow path at a predetermined timing. A variable means and a game ball enter into a first state in which the game ball is capable of being used and a second state in which the game ball located at the first position can be discharged to the specific flow path. In connection with the establishment of the specific ball-entry means that gives the player an advantageous privilege based on the above, the operation means that the player can operate, and the first condition that is satisfied based on the operation on the operation means. Based on the fact that the second condition that can be satisfied is satisfied, the control means that changes the means from the first state to the second state, and the control means causes the means to move from the first state to the second state. The game ball that flows down the specific flow path by being changed to the third state in which it is easy to enter the specific ball entry means and the third state in which the game ball flows into the specific entry means rather than the third state. The variable means that can be changed to a difficult fourth state, the variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a variable pattern in which the variable timing is defined in advance from a predetermined operation start timing, and the variable control means. Suggestion effect execution means that can execute the suggestion effect for showing that the means is changed to the third state before a specific timing in which the variable means is changed to the third state, and A first detecting means capable of detecting a game ball flowing into the specific flow path, a second detecting means capable of detecting that a game ball flowing down the specific flow path has entered the specific ball entering means, and a second detecting means. The game ball is detected by the third detection means capable of detecting that the game ball flowing down the specific flow path has passed through the discharge region without entering the specific ball entry means, and the first detection means. It has a notification means for notifying that the game ball has not been detected by the second detection means or the third detection means by the time the predetermined period elapses .

This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine in 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of a pachinko machine. It is an enlarged front view of the lower right region (part III in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in 1st Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view schematically showing a case where an upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage device, and (b) is a state in which the first storage device is released and the movable valve is in an induced state (). It is a schematic diagram which shows the case which became the protruding state). (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device is in the released state and the movable valve is in the regulated state (buried state), and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the case where the first storage device is in the storage state. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the case where the second storage device is in the released state. (A) is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the storage valve solenoid when the first storage device is in the released state and the second storage device is in the storage state, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing the operation of the storage valve solenoid when the first storage device is in the storage state. It is a schematic diagram which showed the operation of the storage valve solenoid when the 2nd storage device is in the released state. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. (A) is a diagram schematically showing the area division setting and the effective line setting of the display screen, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen. It is a timing chart which showed the relationship between the operation of the 2nd frame button (release button) and various devices. It is a timing chart which shows the point which sets the timing to operate the 2nd frame button (release button) in the timing effect (operation effect). (A) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and (b) is the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in. (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). (A) and (b) are schematic diagrams showing an example of the display contents in the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content in the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of a special symbol. (A) and (b) are schematic views showing an example of a jackpot confirmation display screen. It is a schematic diagram schematically showing the content of setting the display position of the display pointer based on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entrance and the music information executed in the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the display content of the difficulty level selection screen which selects the difficulty level to be executed in the 1st round of a jackpot game. (A) is a schematic view showing a shielding state of the cover member, and FIG. 18B is a schematic view showing a permeation state of the cover member. It is a block diagram which showed the electric structure of a pachinko machine. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the main control device, and (b) schematically shows the correspondence between the first hit type counter C2 and the jackpot type in the special symbol. It is a schematic diagram, and (c) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the correspondence relationship between the second hit random number counter C4 and the hit in the ordinary symbol. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the configuration of the variation pattern selection table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the normal table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the probability variation / time saving table, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the chance table. (A) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area, and (b) is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario table. It is a figure which showed the outline of various counters. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of RAM in a main control unit. (A) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the ROM in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a block diagram showing the electrical configuration of the RAM in the voice lamp control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the movable valve operation scenario schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows the content of the music information storage area schematically. It is a block diagram which showed the electrical structure of a display control device. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the display data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the transfer data table schematically. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of a drawing list schematically. It is a flowchart which showed the timer interrupt process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the special symbol variation start processing executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the look-ahead process which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the normal symbol variation processing executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the through gate passing process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the NMI interrupt process executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the jackpot control process executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the storage control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the storage valve operation processing which is executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the movable valve control processing executed by MPU in the main control device. It is a flowchart which showed the winning process executed by MPU in a main control unit. It is a flowchart which showed the start-up process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the movable valve state command processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the storage device-related processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the hit-related processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the big hit middle effect processing executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the variation display setting process which is executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the ball passage monitoring process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the storage state monitoring process which is executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the lamp output processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the frame button input monitoring / effect processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the timing effect setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the jackpot timing effect preset processing executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device, and (b) is a normal timing effect executed by the MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the preset process. It is a flowchart which showed the timing effect common setting process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the timing effect correction process executed by MPU in the voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the movable valve operation counter update processing executed by MPU in a voice lamp control device. It is a flowchart which showed the main process executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the boot process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the V interrupt process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the command determination process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. (A) is a flowchart showing the opening command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the round number command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. .. It is a flowchart which showed the ending command processing executed by MPU in the display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the rear image change command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the error command processing executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the display setting process executed by MPU in the display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the warning image setting process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is a flowchart which showed the pointer update process executed by MPU in a display control device. (A) is a flowchart showing the transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device, and (b) is a flowchart showing the resident image transfer setting process executed by the MPU in the display control device. is there. It is a flowchart which showed the normal image transfer setting process executed by MPU in a display control apparatus. It is a flowchart which showed the drawing process which is executed by MPU in a display control device. It is an enlarged front view of the lower right region (part III in FIG. 2) of the game board 13 in the modified example of 1st Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic view of the first frame button and the second frame button in a plan view, and (b) is a schematic view showing an interlocking operation configuration of the first frame button and the second frame button. (A) is a schematic view showing a state in which the first frame button is pressed in the released state in which the interlocking means is buried, and (b) is a schematic view showing the state in which the first frame button is pressed in the interlocking state in which the interlocking means is protruding. It is a schematic diagram which showed the pressed state. It is a schematic diagram which showed the display content of the timing effect (operation effect) in 2nd Embodiment. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in the modified example of 2nd Embodiment. (A) is a schematic diagram showing a state in which a player operates the frame button unit, and (b) is a schematic diagram showing a configuration of the frame button unit. (A) is a schematic view showing a state in which the frame button unit is operated (pressed) in a state where the pressing operation of the second frame button is restricted among the frame button units, and (b) is a schematic view showing a state in which the frame button unit is operated (pressed). It is a schematic diagram which showed the state which operated (pressed) the frame button unit in the state which the pressing operation of the 2nd frame button was canceled. It is a front view of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of the pachinko machine in another example of each embodiment.

<First Embodiment>
Hereinafter, the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the accompanying drawings. FIG. 1 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 according to the first embodiment, FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 3 is provided in the lower right region of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10. 4 is a front view showing the inside of the board unit 700, FIGS. 4 and 5 are schematic views showing the ball flow inside the board unit 700, and FIG. 6 is a storage valve solenoid provided in the board unit 700. FIG. 7 is a schematic view showing the operation of the pachinko machine 10, and FIG. 7 is a rear view of the pachinko machine 10.

As shown in FIG. 1, the pachinko machine 10 has an outer frame 11 in which an outer shell is formed by a wooden frame combined in a substantially rectangular shape, and an outer frame 11 formed in substantially the same outer shape as the outer frame 11. It is provided with an inner frame 12 that is supported so as to be openable and closable. Metal hinges 18 are attached to the outer frame 11 at two upper and lower positions on the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) in order to support the inner frame 12, and the side on which the hinge 18 is provided is used as an opening / closing axis. The frame 12 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface.

On the inner frame 12, a game board 13 (see FIG. 2) having a large number of nails, a first entry port 64, a second entry opening 640, a through gate 67, a variable winning device 65, etc. can be attached and detached from the front side. It is attached to. A ball game is performed by a ball flowing down the front surface of the game board 13. The inner frame 12 includes a ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 19) that launches a ball into the front region of the game board 13 and a launch that guides the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a to the front region of the game board 13. Rails (not shown) etc. are attached.

On the front side of the inner frame 12, a front frame 14 that covers the upper side of the front surface and a lower plate unit 15 that covers the lower side thereof are provided. A metal hinge 19 is attached to the left side of the front view (see FIG. 1) to support the front frame 14 and the lower plate unit 15, and the front frame 14 and the lower plate have the side on which the hinge 19 is provided as an opening / closing axis. The unit 15 is supported so as to be openable and closable toward the front side of the front surface. The lock of the inner frame 12 and the lock of the front frame 14 are released by inserting a dedicated key into the keyhole 21 of the cylinder lock 20 and performing a predetermined operation.

The front frame 14 is formed by assembling decorative resin parts, electric parts, and the like, and a window portion 14c having a substantially elliptical opening is provided at a substantially central portion thereof. A glass unit 16 having two plate glasses is arranged on the back surface side of the front frame 14, and the front surface of the game board 13 can be visually recognized on the front side of the pachinko machine 10 via the glass unit 16.

On the front frame 14, an upper plate 17 for storing balls is formed in a substantially box shape with the upper surface open so as to project forward, and prize balls, rented balls, and the like are discharged to the upper plate 17. The bottom surface of the upper plate 17 is formed so as to be inclined downward to the right side in front view (see FIG. 1), and the ball thrown into the upper plate 17 is guided to the ball launching unit 112a by the inclination.

The front frame 14 is provided with light emitting means such as various lamps around the front frame 14 (for example, a corner portion). These light emitting means change and control the light emitting mode by lighting or blinking according to a change in the game state at the time of a big hit or a predetermined reach, and play a role of enhancing the effect of the effect during the game. Illuminations 29 to 33 having a light emitting means such as an LED are provided on the peripheral edge of the window 14c. In the pachinko machine 10, these illumination units 29 to 33 function as effect lamps such as jackpot lamps, and each illumination unit 29 to 33 lights up by lighting or blinking the built-in LED at the time of jackpot or reach production. Or, it blinks to notify that the jackpot is in progress or that the reach is one step before the jackpot. Further, in the upper left portion of the front frame 14 when viewed from the front (see FIG. 1), a light emitting means such as an LED is built in, and a display lamp 34 capable of displaying when the prize ball is being paid out and when an error occurs is provided.

Further, on the lower side of the illuminated portion 32 on the right side, a small window 35 is formed by attaching a transparent resin from the back surface side so that the back surface side of the front frame 14 can be visually recognized, and a sticking space K1 on the front surface of the game board 13 (FIG. The certificate stamp or the like attached to (see 2) is visible from the front of the pachinko machine 10. Further, in the pachinko machine 10, in order to bring out more glitter, a plating member 36 made of ABS resin having chrome plating is attached to a region around the illuminated portions 29 to 33.

A ball lending operation unit 40 is arranged below the window unit 14c. The ball lending operation unit 40 is provided with a frequency display unit 41, a ball lending button 42, and a return button 43. When the ball lending operation unit 40 is operated with bills, cards, etc. inserted into the card unit (ball lending unit) (not shown) arranged on the side of the pachinko machine 10, the ball is operated according to the operation. Lending is done. Specifically, the frequency display unit 41 is an area in which balance information such as a card is displayed, and the built-in LED lights up and the balance is displayed as numerical value as balance information. The ball lending button 42 is operated to obtain a lending ball based on the information recorded on the card or the like (recording medium), and the lending ball is supplied to the upper plate 17 as long as the remaining amount is present on the card or the like. Will be done. The return button 43 is operated when requesting the return of the card or the like inserted in the card unit. A pachinko machine in which balls are lent directly to the upper plate 17 from a ball lending device or the like without using a card unit, a so-called cash machine, does not require a ball lending operation unit 40. In this case, the ball lending operation unit 40 is not required. A decorative sticker or the like may be added to the installation portion of the above to make the component configuration common. It is possible to standardize pachinko machines and cash machines that use card units.

In the lower plate unit 15 located on the lower side of the upper plate 17, a lower plate 50 for storing balls that could not be stored in the upper plate 17 is formed on the left side thereof in a substantially box shape with an open upper surface. .. On the other hand, on the right side of the lower plate unit 15, an operation handle 51 operated by a player to drive the ball into the front surface of the game board 13 is arranged, and inside the operation handle 51, the ball launching unit 112a is driven. The touch sensor 51a for permitting the operation, the push button type stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball during the pressing operation, and the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51 are detected by the change in the electric resistance. It has a built-in variable resistor (not shown). When the operation handle 51 is rotated clockwise by the player, the touch sensor 51a is turned on and the resistance value of the variable resistor changes according to the operation amount, depending on the rotation operation amount of the operation handle 51. The ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the resistance value of the variable resistor that changes, and the ball is driven into the front surface of the game board 13 with a flying amount corresponding to the operation of the player. Further, when the operation handle 51 is not operated by the player, the touch sensor 51a and the stop switch 51b are turned off.

In the present embodiment, the configuration is not limited to the above, but the configuration is such that the main control device 110 and other control devices detect the game ball launched by the ball launching unit 112a, and the solenoid of the ball launching unit 112a. May be configured to detect that has fired a game ball. Further, the number of detected game balls may be counted and stored until a process such as RAM clear is executed.

A first frame button (effect button) 22a is provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15, and a second frame button (release button) 22b is provided at the upper part of the lower plate. The first frame button 22a is operated by the player, for example, when the effect or background displayed on the third symbol display device 81 described later is changed, and the second frame button 22b is stored, for example, described later. It is operated by the player when the storage state of the devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is released. In this way, by arranging a plurality of frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) that can be operated by the player on the central portion and the left side of the pachinko machine 10, they are arranged on the right side of the pachinko machine 10. Even when the provided operation handle 51 is being operated (a state in which the player is operating the operation handle with his right hand), the frame button can be easily operated.

Further, in the lower part of the front surface of the lower plate 50, a ball pulling lever 52 for operating when the balls stored in the lower plate 50 are discharged downward is provided. The ball pulling lever 52 is always urged to the right, and by sliding it to the left against the urging, the bottom opening formed on the bottom surface of the lower plate 50 is opened. The ball naturally falls from the bottom opening and is discharged. The operation of the ball removing lever 52 is usually performed with a box (generally referred to as a "dollar box") for receiving the balls discharged from the lower plate 50 placed below the lower plate 50.

As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 13 has a wooden base plate 60 cut into a substantially square shape in the front view, a large number of nails and windmills for ball guidance, rails 61, 62, a general ball entrance 63, and a number of balls. It is configured by assembling one ball entry port 64, a second ball entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a variable display device unit 80, and the like, and a peripheral portion thereof is attached to the back surface side of the inner frame 12. The general ball entry port 63, the first ball entry port 64, the second ball entry port 640, the variable winning device 65, and the variable display device unit 80 are arranged in the through holes formed in the base plate 60 by router processing, and the game is played. It is fixed from the front side of the board 13 with wood screws or the like. Further, the front central portion of the game board 13 can be visually recognized from the front side of the inner frame 12 through the window portion 14c (see FIG. 1) of the front frame 14. Hereinafter, the configuration of the game board 13 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. 2.

An outer rail 62 formed by bending a strip-shaped metal plate into a substantially arc shape is planted on the front surface of the game board 13, and a strip-shaped metal plate is placed inside the outer rail 62 like the outer rail 62. The arc-shaped inner rail 61 formed in 1 is planted. The inner rail 61 and the outer rail 62 surround the outer periphery of the front surface of the game board 13, and the game board 13 and the glass unit 16 (see FIG. 1) surround the front and back so that the front surface of the game board 13 is surrounded by a ball. A game area in which the game is played is formed by the behavior of. The game area is a substantially circular area (a starting port or the like is arranged and the launched ball is arranged) formed on the front surface of the game board 13 by being divided by two rails 61 and 62 and an arc member 70. The area where it flows down). Further, the game area includes all areas in which the game ball that has passed through the return ball prevention member 68 flows down before passing through the out opening 66 and the winning opening (entry opening).

In the pachinko machine 10, the left side of the variable display device unit 80 (the left side when viewed from the front of the game board 13) is formed as a left game area and the right side is a right game area, and a game in which a ball is launched aiming at the left game area (hereinafter, In the left-handed game (referred to as a left-handed game), a game in which a ball is inserted into a general entrance 63 or a first ball entrance 64 is performed, and a ball is launched aiming at a right game area (hereinafter referred to as a right-handed game). ), The fired ball passes above the variable display device unit 80, and a game is performed aiming at the board unit 700 provided in the right game area. In the pachinko machine 10 configured in this way, the player is made to play a game (left-handed game or right-handed game) according to the game state, thereby suppressing the game from becoming monotonous. A detailed description of each game state and the board unit 700 provided in the right game area will be described later.

Returning to FIG. 2, the description of the game board 13 will be continued. The two rails 61 and 62 are provided to guide the ball launched from the ball launching unit 112a (see FIG. 19) to the upper part of the game board 13. A return ball prevention member 68 is attached to the tip portion of the inner rail 61 (upper left portion in FIG. 2) to prevent the ball once guided to the upper part of the game board 13 from returning to the ball guide passage. Will be done. A return rubber 69 is attached to the tip of the outer rail 62 (upper right part in FIG. 2) at a position corresponding to the maximum flight portion of the ball, and the ball launched with a predetermined momentum hits the return rubber 69 and has momentum. Is dampened and bounced back toward the center. Further, a resin arc member 70 formed by providing an arc connecting the rails on the inner surface side is used as a base between the lower right tip of the inner rail 61 and the upper right tip of the outer rail 62. It is fixed by driving it into the plate 60.

In this pachinko machine 10, when a ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640, a special symbol (first symbol) is drawn, and the ball is a through gate (normal). When passing through the ball entrance) 67, a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed. In the special symbol lottery performed for entering the ball into the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is a big hit, and it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. If so, the jackpot type is also determined. When the jackpot of the special symbol is reached, the pachinko machine 10 shifts to the special gaming state, and the special winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed, or until 10 balls are won. ) It is released, and the opening is repeated the number of times (number of rounds) according to the jackpot type. As a result, a large number of balls are won in the specific winning opening 65a, so that a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal case. There are three types of jackpots for special symbols, "big hit A" to "big hit C". After the end of the special game state, as added value after the end of the jackpot, the game is based on the result of the jackpot game. Value (game value) is given to the player. The three types of "big hits A to C" are determined when a big hit is obtained in a lottery executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640. It is a jackpot type to be obtained, and a lottery (hereinafter referred to as a lottery of the first special symbol) executed when the ball enters the first entrance 64 and the ball goes to the second entrance 640. The lottery (hereinafter referred to as the second special symbol lottery), which is executed when the ball is entered, is configured so that the ratio selected when a big hit is won is different.

When the lottery of the special symbol (first symbol) is performed, the variable display of the special symbol is started on the first symbol display device 37, and the lottery result is obtained after a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds to 90 seconds) has elapsed. The special symbol indicating is stopped and displayed. If a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the variable display is being performed on the first symbol display device 37, the number of entry times is determined for each type of entry opening. Each is held up to four times, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. When the variable display is completed in the first symbol display device 37, if the number of reserved balls for the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 remains, the next special symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. , The variable display according to the lottery is started.

On the other hand, in the lottery of the ordinary symbol performed for the passage of the ball at the through gate (ordinary entrance) 67, it is determined whether or not the ordinary symbol is a hit. When it hits a normal symbol, the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is changed to the open position for a predetermined time (for example, 0.2 seconds or 1 second), so that the second entrance 640 is opened. Be released. In the normal state, since the electric accessory 640a is arranged at the closed position, the second entrance 640 is closed. Therefore, when the ball hits the normal symbol, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640, and as a result, the special symbol can be easily drawn.

Further, when a lottery for a normal symbol (second symbol) is performed, the second symbol display device 83 starts variable display of the normal symbol, and after a predetermined time (for example, 1 second or 30 seconds) has elapsed, the lottery is performed. The normal symbol showing the result is stopped and displayed. If a ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 while the variable display is being performed on the second symbol display device 83, the number of passages is suspended up to four times, and the number of reserved balls is the first symbol. It is displayed by the display device 37 and also displayed by the second symbol hold lamp 84. When the variable display is completed in the second symbol display device 83, if the number of reserved balls for the through gate (normal entrance) 67 remains, the next normal symbol lottery is performed and the lottery is performed. The variable display is started.

As described above, as the jackpot type of the special symbol, three types of "big hit A" to "big hit C" are provided. When "Big hit A" and "Big hit C" are reached, the number of rounds is 16 rounds in a special gaming state (16 rounds big hit). On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit B", it becomes a special game state (8 rounds big hit) in which the number of rounds is 8 rounds. In addition, when it becomes "big hit B" and "big hit C", it shifts to a high probability state (during the probability change of the special symbol) in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol becomes high after the jackpot ends. In the gaming state in which the high probability state of the special symbol is given, the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is also high, and the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is shortened, that is, it is attached to the second entrance 640. The electric accessory 640a to be operated is opened, and a state (time saving state) in which the ball can be easily entered into the second entry port 640 is also provided. The high-probability state and the time-saving state of this special symbol continue until the next jackpot is won. On the other hand, when it becomes "big hit A", only the above-mentioned time saving state is given after the big hit ends. In this case, the time saving state continues from the end of the jackpot until the change of the special symbol ends 100 times (until the 101st change starts).

Here, the "high probability state of the special symbol" means a state in which the jackpot probability of the special symbol is increased, that is, a so-called "high probability state of the special symbol" (probability change state of the special symbol), in other words, a special gaming state. It is a state of the game in which it is easy to shift to (big hit). On the other hand, the case where it is not the "high probability state of the special symbol" is called the "low probability state of the special symbol", which means that the jackpot probability is lower than the probability variation state of the special symbol, that is, the jackpot probability of the special symbol is normal. Indicates a state (normal state of a special symbol). In addition, in the "normal symbol time saving state" (normal symbol high probability state), the winning probability of the normal symbol increases and the fluctuation time of the second special symbol becomes shorter, and the lottery of the second special symbol is executed. It refers to an easy game state. On the other hand, when it is not the "normal symbol time saving state", it is called the "normal symbol normal state" (normal symbol low probability state), which means that the normal symbol hit probability is higher than the normal state, that is, during the time saving. Indicates a state in which the probability of hitting is low.

Hereinafter, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol after the end of the jackpot of the special symbol is referred to as the probability variation period of the special symbol. Further, the period during which the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal symbol time reduction state after the end of the special symbol jackpot is referred to as the normal symbol time reduction period.

As described above, in the jackpot of the special symbol in the present embodiment, the number of rounds at the time of jackpot is different depending on the type of jackpot. On the other hand, the number of rounds may be the same for all jackpot types (for example, all 8 rounds). Further, for example, the period during which the "normal symbol is shortened" may be changed according to the type of jackpot. In addition, instead of changing the period during which the "normal symbol time is shortened", the time for opening the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 or the electric accessory is released by hitting one ordinary symbol. The number of times may be changed. Further, in the present embodiment, the privilege to be given after the end of the jackpot is determined depending on the type of the jackpot. A probabilistic state of a special symbol or a time saving state of a normal symbol may be given. Further, in the present embodiment, the probability variation state of the special symbol is configured to continue until the next jackpot is won, but the number of special symbol fluctuations after the end of the jackpot is a predetermined number of times (similar to the time saving state of the normal symbol). For example, the probability change state of the special symbol continues only until it reaches 100 times), or the lottery that shifts (falls) from the probability change state of the special symbol to the normal state of the special symbol is performed every time the change of the special symbol is started. The probabilistic state of the special symbol may continue until it is executed and the lottery is won. Further, in the present embodiment, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given during the probabilistic state of the special symbol, but the gaming state (so-called latent state) in which the time saving state of the normal symbol is not given even during the probabilistic state of the special symbol. Probability change state) may be provided.

A first symbol provided with a plurality of light emitting diodes (hereinafter, abbreviated as "LED") 37a and a 7-segment display 37b, which are light emitting means, on the upper right side of the game area (upper right side in FIG. 2). A display device 37 is arranged. The first symbol display device 37 displays according to each control performed by the main control device 110, which will be described later, and mainly displays the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10. The plurality of LEDs 37a display or fluctuate by indicating whether or not a lottery of special symbols performed in association with entering the first ball opening 64 (starting winning) is being executed by the lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end, a special symbol (first symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the special symbol is shown by a lighting state, or a ball entered in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Of these, the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) whose fluctuation has not been executed, is indicated by the lighting state.

When a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 while the special symbol (first symbol) is variablely displayed on the first symbol display device 37, the entry is made. The number of times is held up to 4 times for each entry port, and the number of held balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37 and also by the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to a maximum of four times, but the maximum number of times of holding is limited to four times. It may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, it may be set to be held until the total number of balls entered into the plurality of entrances reaches the upper limit (for example, 8 times).

The 7-segment display 37b displays the number of rounds during the jackpot, an error display, and the like. The LED 37a is configured so that the emission colors (for example, red, green, and blue) of each LED are different, and depending on the combination of the emission colors, various gaming states (high probability state of a special symbol) of the pachinko machine 10 are used with a small number of LEDs. Or, it is possible to display (such as during the time reduction of ordinary symbols). Further, the LED 37a not only indicates whether or not the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot as a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, and if it is a jackpot, the jackpot type (special symbol according to the jackpots A to D). (1st symbol) is shown.

Further, in the game area, a plurality of general entry ports 63 are provided in which a predetermined number (for example, 5) of balls are paid out as prize balls when the balls enter. Further, a variable display device unit 80 is arranged in the central portion of the game area. The variable display device unit 80 is provided with a third symbol display device 81 composed of a liquid crystal display (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “display device”) and a second symbol display device 83 composed of LEDs. .. In the variable display device unit 80, a center frame 86 is arranged so as to surround the outer periphery of the third symbol display device 81.

The third symbol display device 81 performs a decorative display according to the display of the first symbol display device 37. For example, when a ball enters the first ball entry port 64 or the second ball entry port 640 (starting prize), the first symbol display device 37 displays the variation of the special symbol (first symbol) as a trigger. Will be executed. Further, in the third symbol display device 81, the variation display of the third symbol corresponding to the variation display of the special symbol is performed in synchronization with the variation display of the special symbol.

The third symbol display device 81 is composed of an 8-inch size liquid crystal display, and by controlling the display contents by the display control device 114 described later, for example, three symbol rows of left, middle, and right can be displayed. Is displayed. Each symbol row is composed of a plurality of symbols, and these symbols are vertically scrolled for each symbol row so that the third symbol is variably displayed on the display screen of the third symbol display device 81. In the present embodiment, the game state displayed by the control of the main control device 110 is displayed on the first symbol display device 37, whereas the third symbol display device 81 displays the first symbol display device 37. A decorative display is made accordingly. In addition, instead of the display device, for example, a reel or the like may be used to configure the third symbol display device 81. Further, a plurality of liquid crystal displays may be provided as the third symbol display device 81, or the third symbol display device 81 may be configured to be movable. Here, the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a drawing for explaining a display screen of the third symbol display device 81, and FIG. 8A is a diagram schematically showing an area division setting and an effective line setting of the display screen. FIG. 8B is a diagram illustrating an actual display screen.

The third symbol is composed of 10 types of main symbols with numbers from "0" to "9". Each main symbol is composed of a rear symbol consisting of a wooden box with numbers from "0" to "9", of which the main symbols with odd numbers (1, 3, 5, 7, 9) are , A large number is added to almost the front of the wooden box. On the other hand, the main design with even numbers (0, 2, 4, 6, 8) has an attached design that imitates a character such as a planer, a furoshiki, and a helmet that almost fills the front of the wooden box. Even numbers are added to the lower right side of the attached symbol so that they are small in green and displayed on the front side of the attached symbol.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the lottery result of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 (see FIG. 11) described later is a big hit, a variable display in which the same main symbols are aligned is performed. , It is configured so that a big hit occurs after the fluctuation display is finished. On the other hand, if the lottery result of the special symbol is out of order, a variable display is performed in which the same main symbol is not aligned.

As shown in FIG. 8A, the display screen of the third symbol display device 81 is roughly divided into upper and lower halves, and the lower two-thirds are the main display area Dm for variable display of the third symbol, and the rest. The upper 1/3 of is a sub-display area Ds for displaying the advance notice effect, the character, the number of reserved balls, and the like.

The main display area Dm is divided into three display areas Dm1 to Dm3 on the left, middle, and right, and three symbol columns Z1, Z2, and Z3 are displayed in the three display areas Dm1 to Dm3, respectively. In each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, the above-mentioned third symbols are displayed in a specified order. That is, the main symbols are arranged in the ascending or descending order of the numbers in the symbol rows Z1 to Z3, and the symbol rows Z1 to Z3 are scrolled from top to bottom with periodicity to perform variable display. In particular, in the left symbol row Z1, the numbers of the main symbols are arranged so as to appear in descending order, and in the middle symbol row Z2 and the right symbol row Z3, the numbers of the main symbols appear in ascending order.

Further, in the main display area Dm, the third symbol is displayed in the upper, middle, and lower three rows for each of the symbol rows Z1 to Z3. The middle part of this main display area Dm is set as the effective line L1, and the third symbol is stopped on the effective line L1 in the order of the left symbol row Z1 → the right symbol row Z3 → the middle symbol row Z2 in each game. Is displayed. This stop display state is held for at least 1 second. By displaying the stopped 3rd symbol for a certain period of time (1 second or more) in this way, whether or not the player is a combination of the 3rd symbols corresponding to the jackpot (the lottery result of the special symbol is a jackpot). It is possible to prevent overlooking (whether or not there is). Further, if a combination of jackpot symbols (in the present embodiment, a combination of the same main symbols) is aligned on the effective line L1 when the third symbol is stopped, a jackpot moving image (opening effect) is displayed as a jackpot.

Further, if the combination of the third symbols displayed as stopped is a combination corresponding to the detachment and there is a reserved ball, the variable display corresponding to the lottery based on the reserved ball is started after the stop display for 1 second. .. If there are a plurality of reserved balls, the lottery is executed based on the reserved balls corresponding to the oldest incoming balls in time.

On the other hand, when the third symbol of the combination corresponding to the deviation of the special symbol is stopped and displayed for 1 second in the state where the holding ball does not exist, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues thereafter. This state continues until a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses or a new ball enters either the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. Then, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed since the third symbol was stopped and displayed, a demo effect indicating that the game has not been executed is displayed. It is rare that the player does not enter the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640 even though the player has continuously fired the ball for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds). In most cases, the state in which the third symbol is stopped and displayed continues for a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) because the player has quit the game and the pachinko machine 10 has not played the game at all. to cause. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) has elapsed from the stop display of the third symbol, it is determined that the player is not playing the game, and the demonstration effect is started. To do. Thereby, the player who is going to select the pachinko machine 10 to start the game can easily determine whether or not the game is being performed based on the presence or absence of the display of the demonstration effect. On the other hand, if a new ball enters the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640 before the predetermined time (for example, 15 seconds) elapses, the new ball enters the ball. The variable display of the third symbol is executed.

The sub-display area Ds is provided horizontally above the main display area Dm, and is further divided into three small areas Ds1 to Ds3 in the left-right direction. Of these, the small area Ds1 displays the number of reserved balls, which is the number of balls (reserved balls) that have not been changed among the balls that have been entered into the first entry port 64 and the second entry opening 640. The small areas Ds2 and Ds3 are areas for displaying the advance notice effect image. Further, the third symbol is displayed in the small area Ds3. Although the details will be described later, in the pachinko machine 10, the types of special symbols (either the first special symbol or the second special symbol) in which the lottery is easily executed are configured differently depending on the gaming state. In the main display area Dm, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is easy to execute in the current gaming state is executed. On the other hand, in the small area Ds3, a variable display is displayed when a lottery of a special symbol that is difficult to execute in the current gaming state is executed.

On the actual display screen, as shown in FIG. 8B, a total of nine main symbols of the third symbol are displayed in the main display area Dm. In the sub-display area Ds, a total of three main symbols of the third symbol different from the main symbol displayed in the main display area Dm are displayed with respect to the small area Ds3 on the right. In the central small area Ds2, a predetermined character 710 (a boy with a headband in this embodiment) usually performs a predetermined action, and sometimes a special action different from the predetermined action or another character performs a predetermined action. A notice production will be performed by appearing.

On the other hand, when the ball enters the first ball entry port 64 while the variable display based on the lottery of the first special symbol is being performed on the third symbol display device 81 (first symbol display device 37), and , If a ball enters the second entrance 640 while the variable display based on the lottery of the second special symbol is being performed, the number of times the ball is entered is held up to 4 times, and the number of reserved balls is It is shown by the first symbol display device 37, and is also shown in the small area Ds1 of the sub-display area Ds. Specifically, the symbol (first reserved ball number symbol) displayed in the upper half of the small area Ds1 indicates the number of reserved balls with respect to the first entrance 64, and the symbol displayed in the lower half (second reserved ball number symbol). The number of reserved balls symbol) indicates the number of reserved balls for the second entrance 640. FIG. 8 illustrates a case where four first reserved symbols are displayed while zero second reserved symbols are displayed (all the second reserved symbols are blank).

In the present embodiment, the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry port 640 are each held up to four times, but the maximum number of reserved balls is four times. The number of times is not limited, and may be set to 3 times or less, or 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, instead of displaying the number of reserved balls symbol in the small area Ds1, the number of reserved balls is different by a number in a part of the third symbol display device 81, or the area divided into four is different by the number of reserved balls. (For example, a color or a lighting pattern) may be displayed. Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the number of reserved balls may not be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, the variable display device unit 80 may be provided with four hold lamps indicating the number of hold balls for the maximum number of hold balls, and the number of hold balls may be displayed according to the number of hold lamps in the lit state.

Return to FIG. 2 and continue the explanation. The second symbol display device 83 displays a variable display by indicating whether or not a lottery of ordinary symbols, which is performed when the ball passes through the through gate (ordinary entry port) 67, is being executed by a lighting state. As a stop symbol after the end of the fluctuation, the normal symbol (second symbol) corresponding to the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is shown by the lighting state.

More specifically, in the second symbol display device 83, each time the ball passes through either the left or right through gate (normal entry port) 67, the symbol “○” as the normal symbol (second symbol) is displayed. A variable display is performed in which the "x" symbol is alternately lit. In the pachinko machine 10, when the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is stopped at a predetermined symbol (the symbol “○” in the present embodiment), the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is used for a predetermined time. It is configured to be in an operating state (opened), and as a result, the ball can easily enter the second entrance 640. The number of times the ball has passed through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 is held up to 4 times, and the number of held balls is displayed by the above-mentioned first symbol display device 37 and also on the second symbol holding lamp 84. It is lit and displayed. Four second symbol holding lamps 84 are provided for the maximum number of holding lamps, and are symmetrically arranged below the third symbol display device 81.

The variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is performed by switching the lighting and non-lighting of a plurality of lamps in the second symbol display device 83 as in the present embodiment, and the first symbol display device 37. And a part of the third symbol display device 81 may be used. Similarly, the second symbol holding lamp 84 may be turned on by a part of the third symbol display device 81. Further, the maximum number of reserved balls is not limited to 4 times, but is 3 times or less, or 3 times or less, as in the case of the 1st ball entrance 64 and the 2nd ball entrance 640. It may be set to 5 times or more (for example, 8 times). Further, since the number of reserved balls is indicated by the first symbol display device 37, the lighting display may not be performed by the second symbol hold lamp 84.

Below the variable display device unit 80, a first ball entry port 64 into which a ball can enter is arranged. When a ball enters the first entry port 64, the first entry opening switch (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the game board 13 is turned on, and the first entry opening switch is turned on. A special symbol is drawn by the main control device 110, and the display according to the lottery result is indicated by the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37. In addition, the first entry slot 64 is also one of the winning openings in which three balls are paid out as prize balls when a ball enters. The first ball entry port 64 is when the ball is launched into the path on the left side of the front view with respect to the variable display device unit 80 (so-called left-handed game is performed), and when the right-handed game is performed. It is configured to make it easier to enter the ball.

On the other hand, the board unit 700 is arranged below the right side area of the game board area. This board unit includes a through gate (normal entry port) 67, a second entry port 640, a variable winning device 65, a specific general entry port 630, and a storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device). 771) is arranged (see FIG. 3). A cover member 710 is provided on a part of the board surface unit 700 so that the specific flow path (the flow path through which the ball stored in the storage device flows down) in the board surface unit 700 becomes difficult to see from the outside. It is configured.

Here, the board unit 700 arranged in the lower right region of the game board 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 3 is an enlarged front view of the lower right region of the game board 13. As shown in FIG. 3, the board unit 700 includes an inflow port 700a opened upward so that a ball flowing down the right game area of the game board 13 can flow in, and a ball flowing in from the inflow port 700a. Among them, a flow in which balls that have not entered each of the ball entry ports (specific general ball entry port 630, second ball entry port 640, specific winning opening 65a) provided in the board surface unit are discharged to the outside of the board surface unit 700. It is a box-shaped unit body having an outlet 700b.

In the board unit 700, a through gate (normal entry port) 67 is provided below the inflow port 700a, and most of the balls flowing into the board unit 700 from the inflow port 700a are through gates (normal entry balls). It is configured to pass through the mouth) 67. An electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is arranged below the through gate 67, and a ball flowing down the distribution flow path 700d formed on the left side of the electric accessory 640a enters the ball. A variable winning device 65 and a base unit 760 are arranged at possible positions. A specific general entry port 630 is arranged at a position where a ball flowing down the storage flow path 700e formed on the upper surface of the base unit 760 can enter. When a ball enters the specific general entrance 630, 15 prize balls, which are more than the general entrance, are paid out.

Next, various devices provided in the board unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. In the pachinko machine 10, the first flow path 641b and the second flow path 642b are provided as flow paths for guiding the ball to the second entry port 640, in order to allow the ball to flow into the first flow path 641b. The first opening 641a and the second opening 642a for allowing the ball to flow into the second flow path 642b are in an open state in which the ball can be received, and in a closed state in which the ball is more difficult to receive than in the open state. An electric accessory 640a is provided so as to be variable.

Further, the electric accessory 640a is formed so that a sphere can flow down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a when it is closed, and the first opening 641a is formed on the upstream side of the flow path. It is configured to cover the second opening 642a on the downstream side. The electric accessory 640a is composed of a single plate-shaped member driven by a driving means (solenoid or the like) (not shown), and when the electric accessory is changed to an open state by the driving means, the first opening 641a and the second opening 641a and the second. When all of the opening 642a is in the open state and can be changed to the closed state, both the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a are in the closed state. Further, the upper surface flow path of the electric accessory 640a has a downward slope so that the lower left direction in the front view of the game board 13 is the downstream side, whereby the right side of the electric accessory 640a (from the viewpoint of FIG. 3). The second opening 642a is configured to be on the downstream side of the first opening 641a provided on the right side).

Next, the opening / closing operation of the electric accessory 640a and the flow of the ball entering the second ball entry port 640 will be described by taking as an example a time-saving state of a normal symbol in which a ball easily enters the second ball entry port 640. In the pachinko machine 10, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol is set to 1 second (see FIG. 38), and the hit probability of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to 75% in the time saving state of the normal symbol. Then, as the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a in the time saving state of the normal symbol, the operation of opening for 1 second → closing for 0.5 seconds → opening for 1 second is executed.

Further, as shown in FIG. 3, the electric accessory 640a is a crank provided with a step in the substantially central portion so that the downstream side covering the second opening 642a is lower than the upstream side covering the first opening 641a. It is configured to have a shape, and the time for the ball to reach from the upstream portion covering the first opening 641a to the downstream portion covering the second opening 642a is about 0.6 seconds. With this configuration, the ball flows into the board unit 700, and when the ball reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a, when the electric accessory 640a is in the open state, it flows into the first opening 641a as it is. , Passes through the first flow path 641b and the combined flow path 641c, and enters the second entry port 640. On the other hand, when the ball reaches the upstream side of the electric accessory 640a and the electric accessory 640a is in the closed state, the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a flows down toward the downstream side (second opening 642a). Then, when the ball flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a reaches the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a (the position covering the second opening 642a) (that is, after flowing down the upper surface of the electric accessory 640a, 0. After 6 seconds), the electric accessory 640a is executing the next opening operation, and the ball flows into the second opening 642a, passes through the second flow path 642b and the combined flow path 641c, and passes through the second entrance. Enter the ball at 640.

In this way, there are a plurality of flow paths (first flow path 641b, second flow path 642b) for guiding the ball to the second entry port 640, and each opening for allowing the ball to flow into the plurality of flow paths. Variable means (electric accessory 640a) that changes the portion (first opening 641a, second opening 642a) into an open state in which the ball can flow in and a closed state in which the inflow of the ball is more difficult than in the open state. ) Is provided, and the openings (first opening 641a, second opening 642a) for allowing the sphere to flow into the plurality of flow paths are on the upstream side and the downstream side of the flow path through which the sphere can flow. Since the variable means (electric accessory 640a) is in the closed state, the ball that could not flow into the upstream opening (first opening 641a) can be moved to the downstream opening (second opening). It is possible to inflow from the part 642a).

Further, the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down from the upstream position where the electric accessory 640a covers the first opening 641a to the downstream position where the electric accessory 640a covers the second opening 642a is the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. Since it is designed to be longer than the closing interval period (0.5 seconds) executed during, the first opening is performed at the timing of the closing interval period even though the electric accessory 640a is in the opening operation. A ball that has reached the portion 641a and could not flow into the first opening 641a can be reliably flowed from the second opening 642a.

In addition, whether or not the period (0.6 seconds) required for the ball to flow down from the upstream position covering the first opening 641a to the downstream position covering the second opening 642a opens the electric accessory 640a. Since it is designed to be longer than the fluctuation time of the normal symbol (0.5 seconds during the time reduction) for which the lottery is performed, the first opening 641a is reached during the fluctuation of the normal symbol, and the first opening If the lottery result of the ordinary symbol is successful, the ball that could not flow into the portion 641a can be flowed from the second opening 642a. Therefore, in a gaming state in which the electric accessory 640a is easy to open (a time-saving state of a normal symbol), the player can efficiently enter the ball into the second entrance 640 simply by playing a right-handed game at all times. It is possible to let the player play the game with peace of mind.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, since the balls flowing in from the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 are configured to flow down toward the electric accessory 640a, after aligning the flow of the balls, the electric accessory 640a It is possible to guide the ball toward the upstream side of the ball. Therefore, it is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball flowing down the game board 13 falls directly to the downstream side of the electric accessory 640a and a ball does not enter the second entry port 640.

Further, in the present embodiment, the time required for rolling from the position covering the first opening 641a to the position covering the second opening 642a is the interval period (0.5 seconds) during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a. ) And the fluctuation time (0.5 seconds) of the normal symbol (second symbol) is set to be about 0.6 seconds, so that it is not only during the opening operation of the electric accessory 640a but also normal. A ball launched in a right-handed game during a change in the symbol (second symbol) can also be easily entered into the second entrance 640.

In addition, as shown in FIG. 3, in the pachinko machine 10, the ball flowing in from the first opening 641a is preferentially entered into the second entry port 640 over the ball flowing in from the second opening 642a. It is configured as follows. To explain in detail, the ball flowing in from the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a merges and flows down from the first opening 641a with respect to the combined flow path 641c flowing down toward the second entry port 640. The first flow path 641b through which the ball flows down is communicated in the direct upward direction, and the second flow path 642b in which the ball flowing in from the second opening 642a flows down is communicated in the side surface direction. With this configuration, when a sphere flowing down the first flow path 641b and a sphere flowing down the second flow path 642b are generated at the same time, the first flow path 641b having a large kinetic energy (falling energy) can be generated. The ball that has flowed down will be preferentially guided to the second entry port 640. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the spheres flowing down the first flow path 641b and the spheres flowing down the second flow path 642b from causing ball clogging in the combined flow path 641c. Further, the ball flowing in from the first opening 641a, in which more balls flow in than the second opening 642a, can be smoothly entered into the second entry port 640.

The second flow path 642b, which has a lower priority than the first flow path 641b, is long enough to retain a plurality of balls (three in the present embodiment) (35 mm in the present embodiment). It is configured so that even if the flow of the sphere is blocked by the sphere flowing down the first flow path 641b, the inflow of the sphere into the second opening 642a is not hindered.

Although the details will be described later, in this pachinko machine 10, the time saving state of the normal symbol is reset during the jackpot and the normal state is set, so that the electric accessory 640a frequently opens during the jackpot. It is possible to prevent a situation in which the ball does not reach the variable winning device 65 provided below the electric accessory 640a. In order to prevent the above situation, the configuration of the game board 13 may be changed and a variable winning device 65 may be provided above the electric accessory 640a.

The variable winning device 65 is provided with a horizontally long rectangular specific winning opening (large opening opening) 65a in a substantially central portion thereof. In the pachinko machine 10, when the lottery of the special symbol performed by the main control device 110 becomes a big hit, the LED 37a of the first symbol display device 37 is turned on so as to be the stop symbol of the big hit after a predetermined time (variation time) has elapsed. At the same time, the stop symbol of the third symbol corresponding to the jackpot is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 to indicate the occurrence of the jackpot. After that, the gaming state shifts to the special gaming state in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state. As this special game state, the specific winning opening 65a, which is normally closed, is opened for a predetermined time (for example, until 30 seconds have passed or until 10 balls are won).

Next, the base unit 760 arranged in the board unit 700 will be described. As shown in FIG. 3, the base unit 760 is arranged on the downstream side (outlet 700b side) of the board unit 700 so that the storage flow path 700e is formed above and the out flow path 700f is formed below. It is provided.

The base unit 760 is provided with a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 as storage devices for storing the balls flowing down the storage flow path 700e, and the storage device has a maximum of five balls. It is configured to be storable. Details will be described later with reference to FIG. 9, but the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b provided on the pachinko machine 10. It is controlled to change from the storage state in which each ball is stored to the release state in which the ball storage state is released with a predetermined time difference, and 1 each time the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b. It is configured to let the balls flow down one by one.

Further, on the storage flow path 700e, a storage upper limit sensor S1 for detecting that the storage amount of the sphere has reached the upper limit and a storage detection sensor S2 for detecting the presence or absence of the sphere in the stored state are provided. It is provided. Since each of these sensors is formed by a non-contact detection type proximity sensor that replaces the existence information of the sphere to be detected by electromagnetic induction with an electric signal, the sensor is not damaged by the passage of the sphere.

The configuration is not limited to the configuration of the present embodiment, and any configuration may be used as long as it can grasp the storage status of the sphere on the storage flow path 700e. For example, the capacitance type or ultrasonic type sensor for detecting the sphere may be used. , A photoelectric type, a magnetic type or the like proximity switch may be used, or a contact type detection type switch such as a limit switch may be provided. Further, in order to grasp the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 700e, a sensor that detects spheres corresponding to each sphere storage position (position where spheres are stored shown in FIG. 3) is provided. A sensor may be provided so that the number of balls that have flowed into the storage flow path 700e and the number of balls that have flowed out of the storage flow path 700e can be counted, and the difference is used in the storage flow path 700e. You may want to know the number of stored spheres.

Further, the base unit 760 has a guidance position (protruding position) for guiding the ball flowing out from the storage flow path 700e to the specific general entry port 630 and a regulation position for restricting guidance to the specific general entry port 630. A variable movable valve 750 is provided at the (buried position), and is variably controlled based on a predetermined operation pattern (operation scenario). A detailed description of the movable control of the movable valve 750 will be described later with reference to FIG.

In the board unit 700, where the cover member 710 is covered (see FIG. 2), the cover member 710 is illuminated from the back surface side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710) to the cover member 710. Transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiating, are provided. By irradiating the cover member 710 with light from the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the inside covered with the cover member 710 can be made visible to the player. Although the details will be described later, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled so as to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the release operation of the storage device while grasping the operating status of the movable valve 750 during the normal game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down in the vicinity of the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 becomes transparent, so that the player can visually recognize the situation in which the ball flows down in the vicinity of the movable valve 750. Can be done.

In the pachinko machine 10 having the board unit 700 configured in this way, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 becomes an induction state (closed state) capable of guiding the ball to the specific general entry port 630. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b that changes the storage state of the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) to the release state, the storage device (first storage device (first)) is operated. The balls stored in the storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) can be put into the specific general entry port 630. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game while timing the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

Further, as will be described in detail later, in the present embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns, and the movable valve 750 is in an induced state (closed state) among the operation contents. Most of the period is set as a period (0.1 second) in which only one ball can be guided. Therefore, accuracy is required for the timing at which the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general entry port 630, which is more ambitious for the player. Can be made to play a game.

In the present embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) are individually specified as general balls. Since it is configured so that it can flow down toward the mouth 630, the period during which only one ball can be guided (0.1 seconds) is continuous as the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the guided state (closed state). By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing, the second frame button (release button) 22b is stored in the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771). It is possible to put all the balls into the specific general entry port 630. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game in order to obtain more prize balls. The detailed contents (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750 will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 23.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operating status of the movable valve 750, the second frame button is in a state where the operating status of the movable valve 750 is grasped. (Release button) The act of operating 22b can be prevented. Further, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is provided with a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on the condition that a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down) is satisfied. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the vicinity of the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is switched to the transmission state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow state of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750.

In the present embodiment, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is irradiated with light (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmission state, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) that is always lit to the cover member 710 is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position. It may be configured so that the inside is visible only in the transparent state.

Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside is visible, and the surface thereof is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (for example). , Texture processing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes it difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, for decoration). The inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible when the lamp 227a is not lit). As a result, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall is provided to shield the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. It is advisable to provide. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized by the player even while the game is being played. Further, as in the first embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided with a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light, and the light emitting means is controlled to emit light. May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which it is visible (a state in which light is not irradiated).

Further, by providing a movable member for decoration on the cover member 710 whose inside is visible and controlling the operation of the movable member, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movement of the movable member for decoration is small). The state) and the state in which the inside of the cover member 710 is difficult to see (a state in which the movable member for decoration is often operated) may be switched.

The details will be described later with reference to FIGS. 9 and 10, but in the present embodiment, the timing for releasing the second frame button (release button) 22b is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750, and the second frame button (release button) 22b is released. 3 The symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is configured to display the effect. As a result, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the player is given a privilege (a prize based on the entry into the specific general entry port 630). (Ball) can be given, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

Next, the flow of the ball launched into the right game area by the right-handed game in the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIGS. 2 and 3.

As shown in FIG. 2, a board unit 700 is arranged in the right side area of the pachinko machine 10, and a right game area is played by a right-handed game due to the arrangement of nails provided above the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700. About 95% (about 95 out of 100 balls) of the balls launched into the machine are arranged so as to flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700. Of the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that did not flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 (about 5 out of 100 shots) were formed between the variable display device unit 80 and the board unit 700. The sphere flow path (see FIG. 2) is made to flow down toward the out port 66.

The flow of the sphere flowing into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 will be described with reference to FIG. Nails Qa and Qb are provided immediately below the inflow port 700a so that the balls flowing into the inflow port can be distributed to the left and right at a ratio of about 1:14. The balls distributed to the right side of the nails Qa and Qb (about 90 balls out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game) pass through the through gate 67 and then pass through the upstream portion (first opening 641a) of the electric accessory 640a. The balls (about 5 out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game) that flow down to the covering position) and are distributed to the left side of the nails Qa and Qb pass through the first taxiway 700c and the electric accessory 640a. It flows down to the downstream part (second opening 642a) of. The nails Qa and Qb also serve as adjustable adjusting means, and can be adjusted to a desired ratio even if the ratio of distributing the balls to the left and right changes due to a collision of the balls or the like. As described above, the sphere that has flowed down to the upstream portion of the electric accessory 640a (the position that covers the first opening 641a) can flow into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a. Since it flows down on the 640a, it is easier to enter the second entrance 640 than the ball that has flowed down to the downstream portion (second opening 642a) of the electric accessory 640a. Therefore, by adjusting the nails Qa and Qb, which are the adjusting means, the rate at which the ball launched by the right-handed game enters the second entry port 640 can be adjusted.

The ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a flows into the first opening 641a or the second opening 642a at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is opened, and enters the second entrance 640. On the other hand, the spheres that did not flow into the first opening 641a and the second opening 642a flow down from the downstream end of the electric accessory 640a into the distribution flow path 700d. The distribution flow path 700d has a direction in which the ball flows down toward the variable winning device 65 (lower right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3) and a direction in which the ball flows down toward the base unit 760 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3). The nails Q1 to Q3 and the first adjusting member 701a for sorting are provided, and the balls flowing into the sorting flow path 700d (about 95 balls out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game) are at a ratio of 9: 1. It is configured to be divided into the lower right direction and the lower left direction.

Then, the balls are distributed in the direction of flowing down the distribution flow path 700d and flowing down toward the base unit 760 (lower left direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 3) (about 10 balls out of 100 balls launched by the right-handed game). Of these, about 1/3 of the balls flow into the storage flow path 700e, and the remaining about 2/3 of the balls flow into the out flow path 700f.

As described above, the pachinko machine 10 in the present embodiment is configured such that the balls launched by the right-handed game flow into the storage flow path 700e at a rate of about 1 in 30 balls. That is, since the number of prize balls paid out to the player when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630 is 15, the time saving state of the normal symbol in which the electric accessory 640a is likely to be opened or the variable state. Even if a game in which a ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630 is performed in a normal game state that is not a jackpot game state in which the opening operation of the winning device 65 is executed, the ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630. Since the number of balls required to make a ball (about 30 balls) is larger than the number of prize balls (15 balls) paid out when a ball enters the specific general entrance 630, the number of balls held does not increase. .. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an illegal game in which the ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630 in a state where the operation content of the movable valve 750 is illegally grasped or the movable valve 750 is broken in the normal game state. ..

In the present embodiment, since the frequency of balls flowing into the storage flow path 700e is suppressed by using the board surface configuration described above, the jackpot state in which the variable winning device 65 is opened and the second entry are performed. In the normal game state other than the time-saving state (the time-saving state of the normal symbol) in which the ball easily enters the ball mouth 640, the number of balls held is not increased even if the right-handed game is performed, but the storage flow path 700e The frequency at which the ball flows into the ball may be increased so that a game in which the ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630 (a game in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated) may be facilitated.

Even in such a case, the movable valve 750 is covered with the cover member 710 as in the present embodiment, which makes it difficult to grasp the operating state of the movable valve 750, so that the number of balls held in the normal gaming state increases. Can be suppressed.

In addition, the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured so that a ball flowing down the electric accessory 640a in the closed state can flow into the storage flow path 700e, so that the electric accessory 640a is in the open state. In the easy time-saving state of the normal symbol, it becomes difficult for the ball to flow into the storage flow path 700e, and in the jackpot game state in which the electric accessory 640a is difficult to open, the ball easily flows into the storage flow path 700e. Therefore, the degree of expectation of the ball entering the specific general entrance 630 can be changed according to the game state, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, the ball flowing down the distribution flow path 700d is configured to be distributed to either the lower right direction in which the variable winning device 65 is arranged or the lower left direction in which the specific general entry port 630 is arranged. Therefore, even if the distribution ratio of the balls flowing down the distribution flow path 700d differs depending on the individual difference of the pachinko machine 10 and the installation situation, it is possible to prevent the player from playing an extremely disadvantageous game. Further, by making the specifications (arrangement) of the nails Q1 to Q3 and the first adjusting member 701a provided in the distribution flow path 700d different, the ball can be efficiently inserted into the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot game of the pachinko machine 10. Game specifications for playing balls and game specifications for which balls can easily enter the specific general entrance 630 during a jackpot game (that is, balls are easily stored in storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771)). Can be provided to the player, and the player can select the pachinko machine 10 to play the game based on his / her own skill.

Next, the operation and ball flow of the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) and the movable valve 750 provided in the base unit 760 will be described with reference to FIGS. 4 to 6. FIG. 4A is a diagram schematically showing a state in which five spheres, which is the upper limit number, are stored on the storage flow path 700e, and FIG. 4B is a first storage device. It is a figure which shows typically the case where the movable valve 750 is in the induction state (protruding state) in the released state of 770. FIG. 5A is a diagram schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the released state and the movable valve 750 is in the regulated state (buried state). FIG. 5B is a schematic view schematically showing a case where the first storage device 770 is in the storage state and the second storage device 771 is in the release state. FIG. 6 is a schematic view schematically showing the operating mechanism of the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 and the second storage valve 771a of the second storage device 771, and FIG. 6A is a schematic view showing the operation mechanism of the second storage valve 771a. 1 is a diagram showing the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b when the storage device 770 is in the released state and the second storage device 771 is in the storage state. FIG. 6B is a diagram showing the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b when the first storage device 770 is in the storage state. It is a figure which shows the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b when the storage device 771 is released.

As shown in FIG. 4A, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are provided so as to have an interval capable of storing one sphere between them, and the storage device (first storage device 770 and In the state of FIG. 4A in which the upper limit number (5) of balls is stored in the second storage device 771), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) stores one ball. The second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is in a state of storing four balls. In such a state, the new sphere that has flowed down toward the storage flow path 700e is changed in the flow direction by the sphere stored in the storage flow path 700e, and is provided below the base unit 760. It flows down toward the flow path 700f and flows out from the out flow path 700f to the outside of the board unit 700.

A first ball passage sensor S3 for detecting the passage of a ball is provided in a region where a ball flows down when the flow destination of the storage flow path 700e, that is, the first storage valve 770a is released. A second ball passage sensor S4 for detecting the passage of a ball is provided in a region downstream of the region where the first ball passage sensor S3 is provided. In the present embodiment, the first storage device 770 is released based on the detection results of the first ball passing sensor S3 and the second ball passing sensor S4 and the command indicating the entry of the ball into the specific general entry port 630. The period from when the ball passes to the specific area (specific general entry port 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4) is measurable, and the first storage device 770 is released based on the measurement result. The content of the effect (the start timing of the effect, the period of the effect, and the content of the effect) to be executed after the state is reached (after the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the ball) can be corrected.

Here, the ball flowing down the gaming area of the pachinko machine 10 has a flow-down period of flowing down a specific section according to the installation state (tilt) of the pachinko machine 10, the outside air environment (temperature, humidity), and the dirt of the ball. different. Therefore, in the case of executing the effect for the flow of the ball, if a specific effect is executed based on a predetermined flow period, an error occurs between the result of the effect and the actual flow result of the ball. There was a problem that it would end up. On the other hand, in the present embodiment, as described above, it is possible to correct the content of the effect on the flow of the ball.

As a result, the second frame button (for release) so that the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 is changed to the induction state (protruding state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general entry port 630. Button) It is possible to correct the notification timing of the effect of notifying the timing of operating 22b based on the actual flow period of the ball, and it is possible to suppress the execution of the effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort. ..

In addition to the effect used in the present embodiment, for example, the ball has passed a predetermined position (for example, the first ball passage sensor S3), so that the ball is in a specific position (for example, a specific general entry port). In the case of executing a fanning effect for a predetermined period to incite whether or not to reach 630), and then executing a result effect indicating the passing result of the ball after the fanning effect, the period of the fanning effect is set to the ball passing period actually required. It is possible to make corrections based on the above, and it is possible to suppress the execution of an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort.

Specifically, in the case of executing an effect of satisfying the indicators set in multiple stages toward the final stage as a fanning effect, and executing an effect of whether or not the final stage has been reached as a result effect, a plurality of effects are performed. By satisfying each of the staged indicators and making the timing different, or by making the start timing of the fanning effect different, the result production will be executed even though the fanning effect is in the middle stage, or the fanning effect will be performed. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the execution of the result effect is waited for when the final stage of

In addition to the first ball passage sensor S3 or the second ball passage sensor S4 described above, the detection results of the storage upper limit sensor S1 and the storage detection sensor S2 are used in the board unit 700 (particularly, the storage flow path 700e). It may be configured to determine whether a ball jam or cheating is being performed.

The first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, which store balls on the storage flow path 700e, press the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) provided in the pachinko machine 10. By operating (pressing) and driving the storage valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19), the drive is controlled so that the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e flow down one by one. The details of the mechanism for operating the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a by driving the storage valve solenoid 770b (see FIG. 19) will be described later with reference to FIG. 6, and the first storage valve will be described later. Details of the drive control contents of the 770a and the second storage valve 771a will be described later with reference to FIG.

Here, when the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 1) is operated in the state shown in FIG. 4A, the first storage valve 770a is first released, and the first storage valve 770a and The ball stored between the second storage valve 771a and the second storage valve 771a passes over the first storage valve 770a in the released state and flows down in the downstream direction (see FIG. 4B). Since the spheres stored in the storage flow path 700e are restricted from flowing down in the downstream direction by the second storage valve 771a in the storage state, only one sphere is stored from the storage flow path 700e. It will flow down in the downstream direction.

When the ball flows down from the storage flow path 700e while the movable valve 750 is protruding (induction state), the movable valve 750 and the second adjusting member are as shown in FIG. 4 (b). It flows down on 701b and enters the specific general entrance 630 (see FIG. 4B). On the other hand, when the movable valve 750 is buried (regulated state) and the ball flows down from the storage flow path 700e, it enters the specific general entry port 630 as shown in FIG. 5A. It flows out of the board unit 700 from the outlet 700b without making a ball.

As described above, the present embodiment is configured so that the player can release the storage of the sphere by the storage device by operating (pressing) the operating means (second frame button (release button) 22b). , The player can determine the timing of releasing the storage of the ball by the storage device. In addition, the movable valve 750 is configured to variably operate in a protruding state (allowable state) and a buried state (regulated state) in a predetermined operation pattern. Therefore, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 based on the timing at which the player operates the operating means (second frame button (release button) 22b), so that the player It is possible to enthusiastically operate the operating means, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

When the player operates (presses) the second frame button (release button) 22b and the period in which the first storage valve 770a is in the release state elapses for a predetermined time (1 second in the present embodiment), then the first The first storage valve 770a is closed and the second storage valve 771a is released (see FIG. 5B). In this state, the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e by the second storage valve 771a flows down to a position where it comes into contact with the first storage valve 770a. Then, after a lapse of a predetermined period (in the present embodiment, 0.5 seconds after the second storage valve 771a is released), the second storage valve 771a is closed, and the state shown in FIG. 4 (a). Move to.

That is, in the state shown in FIG. 5B, the balls (4) stored in the storage flow path 700e by the second storage valve 771a have flowed down to the state where they are stored by the first storage valve 770a. The second storage valve 771a is variable from the released state (buried state) to the closed state (protruding state). Here, in the present embodiment, since the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are provided at intervals (about 11 mm) corresponding to one ball, the second storage valve 771a is the first storage valve 771a. Of the four balls stored (blocked) by the valve 770a, the ball projects at a position between the most downstream ball and the second ball from the most downstream. Therefore, the protruding operation of the second storage valve 771a can be smoothly executed.

In the storage flow path 700e, the region where the ball is stored in the state where the second storage valve 771a protrudes (that is, the position from the position where the second storage valve 771a protrudes to the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e ) Is longer than the distance (about 47 mm) obtained by adding the thickness of the second storage valve 771a (left-right direction from the viewpoint of FIG. 5 (b)) (about 3 mm) to four balls (about 44 mm). It is configured so that the distance is shorter than 5 pieces (about 55 mm) (50 mm in this embodiment).

With this configuration, when the second storage valve 771a protrudes, it is stored in the storage flow path 700e even if the ball recedes on the storage flow path 700e by the thickness of the second storage valve 771a. It is possible to prevent the ball from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e due to the projecting operation of the second storage valve 771a. Further, it is possible to prevent the sixth ball from being stored in the storage flow path 700e in the state where the second storage valve 771a is released (buried state). In order to prevent the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e due to the operation of each storage valve, it is downstream to the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e. A step may be provided so that the side is lowered. As a result, it is possible to prevent the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e from overflowing from the upstream end of the storage flow path 700e due to the operation of each storage valve.

Next, with reference to FIG. 6, a storage valve solenoid 770b for electrically driving the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a will be described. FIG. 6A is a schematic view schematically showing a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction, and FIG. 6B is a schematic view showing a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction. It is a schematic diagram shown in the above. In this embodiment, a plurality of variable members (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) are variably operated by using one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). Specifically, the storage valve solenoid 770b is a two-way holding type self-holding solenoid.

This two-way holding type self-holding solenoid combines an open frame solenoid with a permanent magnet, attracts the plunger by momentarily energizing the coil, and holds the position after suction with the permanent magnet. It is a self-holding solenoid that does not require energization to maintain the state after suction. Coil is provided in each of the positive and negative directions around the permanent magnet, and by energizing each coil, the plunger is in the positive or negative direction. It is a solenoid that is configured to attract and hold the state after attraction using a permanent magnet. As a result, one solenoid is used to maintain the three states of the state in which the plunger is sucked in the positive direction, the state in which the plunger is sucked in the negative direction, and the initial state in which the plunger is not sucked in any of the positive and negative directions. Can be done.

Then, in a state where the plunger is sucked in the positive direction by the storage valve solenoid 770b (a state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction), the first storage valve 770a is opened (as shown in FIG. 6A). In the state where the plunger is attracted in the negative direction (the state in which the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction), the second storage valve 771a is opened (as shown in FIG. 6B). It is changed to the release) state. Further, in the state where the storage valve solenoid 770b is not turned on in either the positive or negative direction (off state), both the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are changed to the closed (non-released) state. It is configured to be.

That is, as shown in FIG. 6A, the first storage valve 770a and the storage valve solenoid 770b are combined by the first transmission means for transmitting the operation of the storage valve solenoid 770b to the first storage valve 770a. There is. This first transmission means has three gears, and is assembled to the positive end portion of the plunger of the storage valve solenoid 770b. The end of the second storage valve 771a is assembled to the tip on the negative side of the plunger.

Here, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the positive direction, the gear provided in the first transmission means rotates according to the operation of the plunger sucked in the positive direction, and the rotation result of the gear is obtained. Based on this, the first storage valve 770a provided on the terminal side (the side connected to the first storage valve 770a) of the first transmission means is variably operated in the released (open) state, and the second storage valve 771a moves in the forward direction. According to the operation of the plunger sucked to the side, its tip protrudes onto the storage flow path 700e and is variably operated in a closed (non-released) state (see FIG. 6A).

On the other hand, when the storage valve solenoid 770b is turned on in the negative direction, as shown in FIG. 6B, the first storage valve 770a is closed (non-released) based on the operation of the plunger protruding in the negative direction. The second storage valve 771a is variably operated in the released (opened) state. Although not shown, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are both closed (normal state) when the plunger of the storage valve solenoid 770b is not sucked in either the positive direction or the negative direction (normal state). It is variably operated so as to be in the non-release) state.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of variable members (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). Therefore, the space for installing the electric drive source can be reduced, and the space of the device can be saved. In addition, by saving space in the device, it is possible to install decorative members and devices related to the game using the vacant space, and it is possible to enhance the effect of the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, no matter what state the storage valve solenoid 770b is in, neither the first storage valve 770a nor the second storage valve 771a is in the open (released) state, so that the storage valve solenoid 770b is Even if a failure occurs and a malfunction occurs, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from continuously passing through the storage flow path 700e. Further, since it is configured to be variably operated by only one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b), when the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e are allowed to flow down one by one toward the specific general entry port 630. Since the variable operation control of the above is only executed for the storage valve solenoid 770b, the process of the variable operation control is compared with the case where the variable operation control is executed for a plurality of electric drive sources (solenoids, etc.). The load can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of variable members (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) are driven by one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b) depending on the moving direction of the moving body (plunger). Although a configuration for variable operation is used, other configurations may be used as long as a plurality of variable members are variably operated using one electric drive source. For example, stepping as an electric drive source. A motor may be used to variably operate a plurality of variable members at predetermined timings according to the rotation speed (number of steps) of the motor.

Further, in the present embodiment, a configuration is used in which a plurality of variable members (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) are variably operated by only one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). An electric drive source may be provided for each variable member. Further, in the present embodiment, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a have different configurations for variable operation, but the same variable operation configuration may be used as a matter of course. In addition, in the present embodiment, the variable motion control is configured to execute the variable motion control in which the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e flow down one by one toward the specific general entry port 630, but other than that. The configuration may be used. For example, by continuously pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b for a predetermined period (for example, 1 second), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be changed to be released (opened) at the same time. Operation control may be executed. As a result, when a normal operation is performed on the second frame button (release button) 22b, variable operation control is executed for each storage valve so that one ball flows out from the storage flow path 700e. When a long press operation is performed on the second frame button (release button) 22b, variable operation control is executed so that at least two or more balls stored on the storage flow path 700e flow out. Therefore, it is possible to make the number or timing of the balls flowing out from the storage flow path 700e different depending on the operation content of the player with respect to the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player enthusiastically plays the game. Can be made.

Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the operation control of the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 and the flow of the opening / closing operation of the movable valve 750 when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. explain. FIG. 6 is a timing chart showing the relationship between the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b and various devices.

As shown in FIG. 9, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated in the present embodiment, first, the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 is variably controlled to the release (open) state for 1 second. Then, the state shown in FIG. 4B described above is obtained. In this state, the ball stored between the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a flows down from the storage flow path 700e. Here, since it takes about 0.5 seconds for the ball to be flowed down to reach the movable valve 750 when the first storage valve 770a is released (opened), the first storage valve 770a is used. Whether or not the ball is guided to the specific general entry port 630 is determined by the operating state of the movable valve about 0.5 seconds after the released (opened) state. In the operation example shown in FIG. 9, the second frame button (release button) 22b is first operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state. As shown in FIG. 9D, the operating state of the movable valve 750 after 5 seconds is in the open state (regulated state), so that the ball does not enter the specific general entry port 630 and is a board unit. It flows down from the outlet 700b of 700 to the outside of the board unit 700.

As shown in FIG. 9A, once the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated, as shown in FIGS. 9B and 9C, variable control for a total of 2 seconds is executed. While the variable control is being executed, the operation of the next second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted, so the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. When the variable control of each storage device is executed, an operation invalid period in which the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not accepted is set for about 2 seconds from that time. As a result, it is possible to prevent the next variable control from being started while the variable control of each storage device is being executed.

When 1 second has passed since the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) was released (opened), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) was released (closed). (Fig. 9 (b)), and 0.5 seconds after that point, variable control is executed to change the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) to the released (open) state (FIG. 9). 9 (c)). Then, the release (open) state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is continued for 0.5 seconds from that point, and as shown in FIG. 5 (b) described above, the second storage device 771 ( A period is provided for the balls stored by the second storage valve 771a) to flow down to a position where they come into contact with the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 (FIG. 9 (c)).

That is, in the present embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, one ball is configured to flow down toward the movable valve 750, and further, the second frame button (release) is formed. Button) 22b is configured to execute the release operation of the storage device only once every two seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the ball cannot be inserted into the specific general entry port 630 unless the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed) at the right time, and the second frame button (release button) ( The operation accuracy of the release button) 22b is required. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a timing effect (operation effect) suggesting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed by the third symbol display device 81. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the timing effect (operation effect), it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general entry port 630. There is. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

In FIG. 9, at the timing when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to change the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state again, the operation timing is 0. Since the movable valve 750e is closed (guided) after 5 seconds, the ball that has flowed down toward the movable valve 750 by this operation is guided to the specific general entry port 630 by the movable valve 750 in the closed (guided) state. Will be done.

The movable valve 750 is constantly variably controlled according to a predetermined rule based on the power being turned on to the pachinko machine 10. As will be described later, the variable control content is defined by combining a plurality of operation scenarios (see FIG. 23A) having different operation (variable) patterns. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b so that the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750, which is variably controlled based on the operation scenario, is in the closed (guided) state. , The ball is guided to the specific general entry port 630.

Next, the timing effect (operation effect) executed by the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 to 17. In the present embodiment, the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) are directed toward the movable valve 750 based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. It is configured to flow down. Then, when the ball reaches the movable valve 750 when the movable valve 750 is in the open (regulated) state, the ball is restricted from entering the specific general entry port 630, and in the closed (guided) state. , It is configured to guide the ball to enter the specific general ball entry port 630.

The period during which the movable valve 750 is closed (guided) is set to a short period (for example, 0.1 second), and the player randomly operates the second frame button (release button) 22b. Even so, the ball stored in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is configured to be difficult to enter into the specific general entry port 630. Here, in the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is configured to be executed as an effect for notifying the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect content of this timing effect (operation effect), the player can efficiently enter the ball into the specific general entry port 630. Become.

Here, with reference to FIG. 10, a method of setting the timing for causing the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b in the above-mentioned timing effect (operation effect) will be described. FIG. 10 is a timing chart showing a point at which the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is set in the timing effect (operation effect). As described above, the movable valve 750 is configured to be constantly variably controlled according to a predetermined rule, and the storage flow path is based on the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b. The ball flowing down from the 700e (see FIG. 3) toward the movable valve 750 is configured to reach the movable valve 750 after a flow-down period of about 0.5 seconds.

In the present embodiment, the variable control content of the movable valve 750 is read in advance, a point at which the movable valve 750 is closed (guided) is specified (FIG. 10A), and the ball flow period (0.5 seconds) from that point. The point obtained by subtracting the By setting the ball entry possible timing in this way and executing the effect of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the timing, the player can perform the second frame button (release button) according to the executed effect. The ball can be entered into the specific general entry port 630 simply by operating the release button) 22b. Therefore, it is possible to execute an effect that can give an advantageous privilege (prize ball) to the player, and the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

Further, as described above, the ball entry possibility timing set as the ball entry possibility timing to the specific general ball entry port is 0.5 seconds before the timing when the movable valve 750 is in the induction state. Here, since most of the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state is 0.1 seconds, the period during which the ball entry possible timing is set is longer than the operation of the corresponding movable valve 750 is started. It will be the previous period. As a result, it is possible to make it difficult to notice that the timing effect executed based on the ball entry possible timing is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the movable valve 750 is operated based on a plurality of operation scenarios, the intervals at which the movable valve 750 is in the induced state are various. Therefore, even if the operation of the movable valve 750 executed before the operation of the movable valve 750 referred to when setting the ball entry possible timing matches the ball entry possible timing, even if it matches. It is not possible to grasp the operating status of the movable valve 750 based on this. Therefore, it is difficult to notice that the timing effect executed based on the ball entry possible timing is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750.

In addition, although details will be described later, in the present embodiment, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated and the first storage device 770 is in the release (open) state, specifically, the first When the storage device 770 is released (opened) and the first ball passage sensor S3 detects a ball flowing out of the storage flow path 700e, the transmission lamp 227b is configured to light up. That is, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing when the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630, the ball flowing out from the storage flow path 700e is the first ball. The inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible at the timing of passing through the passage sensor S3 (timing 0.1 seconds after the operation of the second frame button 22b). Here, since most of the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the guided state is 0.1 seconds, the timing at which the inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible is the movable state for which the ball entry possible timing is set. It is a period before the operation of the valve 750 is started. As a result, the operating status of the movable valve 750 is not grasped based on the timing at which the inside of the cover member 710 becomes visible.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 11 to 17 described later, a display pointer prompting the third symbol display device 81 to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b as a timing effect (operation effect). By moving and displaying and operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing when the display pointer reaches a specific position, the above-mentioned ball entry enable timing and the second frame button (release button) 22b An effect that matches the operation timing of is executed. Next, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) used in the present embodiment will be described.

First, with reference to FIGS. 11 and 12, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot will be described. 11 (a) is a schematic view showing an example of the display contents during the advance notice effect executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, and FIGS. b) is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents during the timing effect (operation effect). In each drawing, a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the third symbol display device 81 and the operation status for the operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b) are shown. The display content of the third symbol display device 81, which changes based on the operation of the operating means, will be described with reference to the schematic diagram shown.

As shown in FIG. 11, the third symbol display device 81 displays a round number display unit 714 that displays the current number of rounds in the upper left of the screen, and the sub-display area Ds2 suggests the number of balls acquired during the jackpot. The acquisition display is executed, and in the sub-display area Ds3, "Aim to the right" is displayed on the guidance display unit that guides the game method. Then, the acquired number display mode 718 for suggesting the number of balls acquired based on the ball winning in the specific winning opening 65a is displayed as "15" indicating the number of winning balls in the specific winning opening 65a. The acquired number display mode 718 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the winning of the ball to the specific winning opening 65a, then is moved and displayed toward the sub-display area Ds2, and finally, the sub-display area is displayed. It is added as an acquisition display of Ds2.

In the center of the screen, a notice display for notifying the player that the timing effect (operation effect) will be started from the next round and a guidance display for notifying the game nature of the timing effect (operation effect) are executed. .. Then, on the lower side of the screen, an effect area used in the timing effect (operation effect) is displayed. In this effect area, a left button display mode 715 with "left" corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b and "middle" corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a. The middle button display mode 716 with "" is displayed, and the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 on which the display pointer 719 (see FIG. 11B) is displayed are provided corresponding to the respective button display modes. ..

The sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5 are areas in which a plurality of display pointers 719 are scrolled and displayed from right to left, as will be described later in FIG. 11B, and the display pointer 719 indicates an operation timing. By operating the operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a or second frame button (release button) 22b) at a timing that matches the bar display unit 717, which is a success effect (FIG. 11 (b) described later). ) Is executed. Further, when the operating means is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719 does not match the bar display unit 717, a failure effect (see FIG. 12B described later) is executed.

The timing at which the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display unit 717 in the sub-display area Ds4 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is the above-mentioned ball entry enable timing with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 11A, while the advance notice effect is being executed, the characters “waiting” are scrolled and displayed from right to left in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5.

As described above, in the timing effect (operation effect) in the present embodiment, an effect of causing the player to operate the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. To. With this configuration, the number of times the player is required to operate the button can be increased and the effect of the effect is enhanced, as compared with the case where the effect of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. Can be done.

Next, with reference to FIG. 11B, the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) during the jackpot will be described. When the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the display pointer 719 is scrolled and displayed in the sub display areas Ds4 and Ds5, and the second frame button (for release) is displayed at the timing when the display pointer 719a matches the bar display unit 717. When the button) 22b is operated, the characters "good" are displayed in the center of the screen as the result display mode 720, and the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b indicates the display mode of the left button display mode 715. It is displayed by making it variable. In this case, as a timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at the timing when the ball can be entered, so that the ball flowing down from the storage device based on the operation is the specific general entry port. It will enter 630.

In the state shown in FIG. 12A, the first frame button (effect) is displayed at the timing when the display pointer 719c displayed in the sub-display area Ds5 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a matches the bar display unit 717. The prize ball obtained by operating the first frame button (directing button) 22a at this timing in the state where the button) 22a is operated and the ball enters the specific general entry port 630. The specific acquisition number display mode 721 indicating the number is displayed, and the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 22a is displayed by changing the display mode of the right button display mode 716.

The state shown in FIG. 12B is a state in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at a timing when the display pointer 719h does not match the bar display unit 717 in the timing effect (operation effect). , The character "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720 in the center of the screen, and the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b is displayed by changing the display mode of the left button display mode 715. To. In this case, as the timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button 22b for releasing the storage device is operated at a timing different from the timing at which the ball can enter, so that the ball flowing down from the storage device is specified based on the operation. The ball does not enter the general entrance 630.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14, the contents of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the variable display of the special symbol will be described. The same elements as those in FIG. 8B described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 13A, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, the same effect display as during the jackpot is executed. Regarding the display of the timing effect (operation effect), the same reference numerals are given to the same elements as during the jackpot, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

In FIG. 13A, the display mode of “start” is scrolled and displayed in order to notify the player of the timing at which the timing effect (operation effect) is started. Then, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the variable display of the special symbol, as shown in FIG. 13B, the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 in the sub-display area Ds2. The acquisition display (“15”) indicating the privilege (prize ball) given to the player is executed, and the display pointer 719 (719k to 719p) is scrolled and displayed in the sub display area Ds4 or Ds5.

In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is changing, the display pointer scrolls in the sub-display area Ds4 (in the case of FIG. 14, the display pointer 719q). By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing when ~ 719t) matches the bar display unit 717, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds2 as shown in FIG. It is configured as follows. With this configuration, the second frame button (release button) 22b for releasing the storage state of the storage device can be used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol.

Next, with reference to FIG. 15, the display content of the jackpot confirmation display screen for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbol has won the jackpot will be described. FIG. 15A is a schematic diagram showing an example of a jackpot confirmation display screen displayed when a jackpot with a jackpot type of “big hit A” is won, and FIG. 15B is a schematic diagram showing a jackpot confirmation display screen with a jackpot type of “big hit”. It is a schematic diagram which showed an example of the jackpot confirmation display screen displayed when the jackpot of "C" is won.

Here, in the present embodiment, as the operation pattern of the movable valve 750, an advantageous period in which an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player is executed, and an operation pattern (operation) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the advantageous period. A disadvantageous period during which the scenario) is executed is set (see FIG. 23 (a) described later), and the movable valve 750 is configured to execute a plurality of operation patterns (operation scenarios) in a predetermined order. (See FIG. 23 (b) described later). Further, the operation pattern (operation scenario) of the movable valve 750 to be executed in the future can be discriminated based on the operation status of the movable valve 750.

In the present embodiment configured as described above, the period during which the jackpot game based on the jackpot is executed on the jackpot confirmation display screen for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbol has been won. It is possible to determine whether the movable valve 750 is variably operated in an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and notify the determination result on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can grasp that the movable valve 750 is executed in the operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed, and during the jackpot game. You can make the game enthusiastic.

In an example of the jackpot confirmation display screen shown in FIG. 15A, a jackpot whose jackpot type is "big hit A" is won, that is, a "big hit" indicating that a 16-round jackpot is won in which a probability change state is not given after the jackpot game is completed. , And the character "chance" is displayed as a movable valve advantageous period notification mode 721 that notifies that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game. ..

Further, in an example of the jackpot confirmation display screen shown in FIG. 15B, a jackpot whose jackpot type is "big hit C" is won, that is, a 16-round jackpot that is given a probability change state after the jackpot game is completed, and , The character "super" indicating that the movable valve 750 is executed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game is displayed.

In this way, in addition to the mode of notifying that the lottery result of the special symbol is a big hit, various patterns are notified by notifying the mode of notifying the operating status of the movable valve 750 during the big hit on the big hit confirmation display screen. It is possible to display the jackpot confirmation display mode of.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17, a method of setting an effect mode in the timing effect (operation effect) executed in the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 16 schematically shows the content of setting the display position of the display pointer based on the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 and the music information executed in the timing effect (operation effect). It is a schematic diagram.

As shown in FIG. 16, in the present embodiment, information indicating the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 described above with reference to FIG. 10, music information used for timing effect (operation effect), and timing effect The display position of the display pointer 719 (see FIG. 11B) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is determined based on the difficulty setting information for setting the difficulty level of the (operation effect).

In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs can be used in the timing effect (operation effect), and a place where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) is predetermined for each song. This is to operate the operation means at the timing that matches the rhythm of each song in the timing effect (operation effect), and by configuring in this way, the display pointer can be entered at the specific general entry port 630. Even if 719 is set, the operation means can be operated according to the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing effect (operation effect), and the timing effect (operation effect) can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be executed.

The number and intervals at which the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) are different between the music A shown in FIG. 16A and the music B shown in FIG. 16B, so that the display pointer 719 can be displayed. The place to set will also be different. Further, in the present embodiment, the difficulty level of the timing effect can be set, and when a high difficulty level is selected, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated in the timing effect (operation effect). The display pointer to be operated The display pointer to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b instead of being set so that the display position of the display pointer 719 matches the timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific general entry port 630 increases. The effect mode is set so that the second frame button (release button) 22b is difficult to operate in a state where the 719 matches the bar display unit 717 (see FIG. 11B). On the other hand, when the low difficulty level is selected, the display position of the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is set to the specific general entry port 630 as compared with the case where the high difficulty level is selected. A state in which the display pointer 719 for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b matches the bar display unit 717 (see FIG. 11B) instead of being set to match the timing at which the ball can be entered less frequently. The effect mode is set so that the second frame button (release button) 22b can be easily operated.

Specifically, when a low difficulty level is selected in the music A, as shown in FIG. 16A, among the display pointers 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b, the specific general entry ball The number of times that matches the timing at which the ball can enter the mouth 630 is set to two, and five display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a are set to be displayed.

On the other hand, when a high difficulty level is selected in the music B, as shown in FIG. 16B, among the display pointers 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b, the specific general entry port 630 is used. The number of times that matches the timing at which the ball can be entered is set to 5, and further, eight display pointers 719 corresponding to the first frame button (effect button) 22a are set to be displayed.

Further, as will be described later with reference to FIG. 17, when a high difficulty level is selected, as compared with the case where a low difficulty level is selected as the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed as the timing effect (operation effect). , A display mode that makes it difficult to take timing is set.

In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her own skill, and by making the privilege to be given different according to the difficulty level, for various players. Therefore, the timing effect (operation effect) can be enthusiastically executed.

In addition, the above-mentioned contents show both the selection of the music and the selection of the difficulty level in the timing production (operation production) executed in the present embodiment, but only the music without changing the difficulty level. When selecting, since the intervals between the parts where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) are different between the music A and the music B, the player who wants to enjoy the timing effect (operation effect) at intervals is the music. A player who wants to select A and enjoy timing effect (operation effect) at short intervals can select music B. This makes it possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and causes various players to enthusiastically execute the timing effect (operation effect). Can be done.

Further, when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed at short intervals, the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e can be digested (outflowed) in a short period of time, so that the timing effect (operation effect) can be performed at long intervals. It is possible to make it easier to store a new ball in the storage flow path 700e than when the operation effect) is executed (that is, the new ball collides with the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e and the new ball It is possible to suppress the situation where the water does not flow into the storage flow path 700e). As a result, it is possible to increase the chances of the ball entering the specific general entry port 630 by the timing effect (operation effect).

In the present embodiment, among the display pointers 719 corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b set during the timing effect (operation effect), the timing at which the ball can be entered into the specific general entry port 630. Although the upper limit of the number of times that matches with is set to 5, a larger number of times (for example, 8 times) may be set. With this configuration, in addition to the balls (maximum 5 balls) stored in the storage flow path 700e when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, they are newly stored during the timing effect (operation effect). It is possible to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b at the timing when the ball that has flowed into the flow path 700e can enter the specific general entry port 630. Therefore, the player can be made to actively play the game so that more balls flow into the storage flow path 700e.

In this embodiment, the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) at different intervals depending on the music, and the player selects the music to display the display pointer, which is executed in the timing effect (operation effect). A configuration is used in which the display interval is narrowed or widened, but as another configuration, a selection means for selecting the display interval of the display pointer 719 executed by the player in the timing effect (operation effect) is provided. , A setting means for setting the display location of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selection means may be provided, or the same music can be played by changing the playback speed of the music. It may be used to provide a setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and enthusiastically for various players. Timing effect (operation effect) can be executed.

Further, in the present embodiment, a plurality of songs (music information) having different locations (intervals) at which the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) are stored, but the display pointer set for each song (music information) is stored. The displayable portion of 719 may be configured to be associated with the movable valve closing timing of each scenario type of the movable valve 750. As a result, the operating status of the movable valve 750 (that is, the scenario type to be executed) during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is determined, the scenario type is specified based on the determination result, and the specified scenario is specified. By executing the music corresponding to the type as a timing effect (operation effect), it is easy to match the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 with the position where the music display pointer 719 can be displayed. be able to. In this case, by setting the timing at which the scenario type of the movable valve 750 is switched as the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect), the display location of the display pointer 719 displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) can be set more easily. can do.

Next, with reference to FIG. 17, the contents of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) will be described. FIG. 17 is a schematic diagram showing an example of the display contents of the difficulty level selection screen for selecting the difficulty level to be executed in the first round of the jackpot game. Among the elements displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the same elements as those in FIG. 11A described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 17, when the first round of the jackpot game is started, "ROUND1" is displayed on the round display unit 714, and a notification display is displayed in the center of the screen to notify that the difficulty level selection effect is being executed. Then, a guidance display is executed to guide how to select the difficulty level. In this guidance display, a button display 721 indicating selection using the first frame button (effect button) 22a is displayed.

Then, at the bottom of the screen, an arrow 722 indicating the currently selected difficulty level is moved and displayed every 2 seconds to a position indicating a low difficulty level and a high difficulty level, and the corresponding difficulty levels are displayed in the sub-display areas Ds4 and Ds5. The demo pointer 723 showing the display mode of the display pointer 719 displayed when the degree is selected is scrolled and displayed.

Here, the demo pointers 723 when the low difficulty level displayed in the sub-display area Ds4 is selected, and the demo pointers 723a to 723d when the high difficulty level displayed in the sub-display area Ds5 is selected are games. A display mode that is difficult for a person to operate at a specific timing is set. Specifically, the demo pointer 723a displays an obstruction display indicated by a star around the display pointer 719, the demo pointer 723b is a reduced display of the display pointer 719, and the demo pointer 723c is a display pointer. An asymmetric display mode in which it is difficult to grasp the center position of the 719 is displayed, and the demo pointer 723d is displayed at a position where the obstruction display for making the display pointer 719 difficult to see is overlapped with the display pointer 719.

In this way, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her own skill, and by making the privilege to be given different according to the difficulty level, for various players. Therefore, the timing effect (operation effect) can be enthusiastically executed. In addition, the number of times (the number of successes) that the player operates the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at an appropriate timing in the timing effect (operation effect) is accumulated, and the number of successes increases. Based on this, the display mode of the display pointer 719 executed when the difficulty level is high may be changed to the display pointer 719 executed when the difficulty level is low. In addition, when a low-difficulty timing effect (operation effect) is executed, a display pointer 719 that matches the entry timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 according to the number of successes. May be configured to increase the frequency with which is displayed. As a result, the player can be more motivated to participate in the game.

In addition, when the cumulative number of successful operations of operating the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) at an appropriate timing in the timing effect (operation effect) exceeds a predetermined number, the player is notified. It may be possible to select a timing effect (operation effect) of a super-difficulty level, which is more difficult and has a large privilege to be obtained. As a result, it is possible to provide a player with a selectable effect (super-difficulty effect) only when a predetermined effect condition (the number of successes becomes a predetermined number of times) is satisfied. You can play the game more enthusiastically.

In the present embodiment, the player who is executed in the timing effect (operation effect) is different in the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the operation content (number of successes). For example, in an operation effect (for example, a mini-game effect during a jackpot game or a reach effect during a special symbol change) that is executed other than the timing effect (operation effect), the operation history of the player operating the first frame button 22a. The timing effect (operation effect) may be configured to be different based on (number of operations, operation content, operation result). As a result, it is possible to enthusiastically play the game for various operation effects executed by the pachinko machine 10, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage. Further, the operation result is not limited to the operation result for the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) by the player, for example, the timekeeping period measured by the timekeeping means (RTC) or the player plays the game. It may be configured to switch the production mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the game period.

Next, with reference to FIG. 18, the content of the transmission effect for changing the cover member 710 provided on the board unit 700 (see FIG. 2) from a shielding state in which the inside is difficult to see to a transparent state in which the inside can be seen. explain. FIG. 18A is a schematic diagram showing a shielding state, and FIG. 18B is a schematic diagram showing a transmission state. The same elements as those in FIG. 4 described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted. As shown in FIG. 18A, the cover member 710 is attached so as to cover the entire downstream side (downstream side from the first storage valve 770a) of the board unit 700, and covers all but the storage flow path 700e side. It is attached so that the inside of the member 710 cannot be looked into. Then, even if an attempt is made to look into the inside of the cover member 710 from the storage flow path 700e side, the movable valve 750 is provided below the extension direction of the storage flow path 700e, so that the movable state of the movable valve 750 is visually recognized. It is configured so that it cannot be done. Further, since the first storage valve 770a is located at the protruding position, it becomes more difficult to visually recognize the inside of the cover member 710 from the storage flow path 700e side. With this configuration, it is possible to prevent the cover member 710 from grasping the movable state of the movable valve 750 in a shielded state in which the inside is difficult to see.

In the cover member 710 configured in this way, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are turned on based on the condition that a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down) is satisfied, and FIG. 18B ), The half mirror is configured to switch to a transparent state where the inside can be seen. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow state of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750.

In the present embodiment, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is irradiated with light (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmission state, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) that is always lit to the cover member 710 is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position. It may be configured so that the inside is visible only in the transparent state.

Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside is visible, and the surface thereof is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (for example). , Texture processing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes it difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, for decoration). The inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible when the lamp 227a is not lit). As a result, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall is provided to shield the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. It is advisable to provide. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized by the player even while the game is being played. Further, as in the first embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided with a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light, and the light emitting means is controlled to emit light. May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which it is visible (a state in which light is not irradiated).

Further, by providing a movable member for decoration on the cover member 710 whose inside is visible and controlling the operation of the movable member, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movable member for decoration is the movable valve 750). It may be possible to switch between a state in which the cover member 710 is movable at a position not overlapping with the cover member 710 and a state in which the inside of the cover member 710 is difficult to see (a state in which the decorative movable member is movable at the overlapping position so as to cover the movable valve 750). ..

Further, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 18A, the cover member 710 is configured to cover the entire downstream side of the board unit 700, so that the movable valve 750 is in a shielded state when the cover member 710 is in a shielding state. It was configured to surely prevent the movable state of the movable valve from being visually recognized, but it is not limited to this, and any configuration that has the effect of making it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 in the posture in which the normal game is performed. Just do it. For example, the cover member 710 may be configured to cover only the movable valve 750. As a result, a configuration that makes it difficult to visually recognize the movable state of the movable valve 750 can be constructed at low cost.

The explanation will be continued by returning to FIG. Attachment spaces K1 and K2 for attaching certificate stamps, identification labels, etc. are provided at the left and right corners on the lower side of the game board 13, and the certificate stamps, etc. attached to the attachment space K1 are the front frame 14. It can be visually recognized through the small window 35 (see FIG. 1).

Further, the game board 13 is provided with an out port 66. Balls that do not win in any of the winning openings are guided to a ball discharge path (not shown) through the out opening 66. A large number of nails are planted on the game board 13 in order to appropriately disperse and adjust the falling direction of the ball, and various members (accessories) such as a windmill are arranged.

As shown in FIG. 7, the control board units 90 and 91 and the back pack unit 94 are mainly provided on the back side of the pachinko machine 10. The control board unit 90 is unitized by mounting a main board (main control device 110), a voice lamp control board (voice lamp control device 113), and a display control board (display control device 114). The control board unit 91 is unitized by mounting a payout control board (payout control device 111), a launch control board (launch control device 112), a power supply board (power supply device 115), and a card unit connection board 116.

In the back pack unit 94, the back pack 92 forming the protective cover portion and the payout unit 93 are unitized. In addition, each control board is used for MPU as a one-chip microcomputer that controls each control, a port for contacting various devices, a random number generator used for various lottery, and for time counting and synchronization. A clock pulse generation circuit, etc., is installed as needed.

The main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114, the payout control device 111 and the launch control device 112, the power supply device 115, and the card unit connection board 116 are housed in the board boxes 100 to 104, respectively. .. The board boxes 100 to 104 include a box base and a box cover that covers an opening of the box base, and the box base and the box cover are connected to each other to house each control device and each board.

Further, in the board box 100 (main control device 110) and the board box 102 (payout control device 111 and launch control device 112), the box base and the box cover are connected by a sealing unit (not shown) so as not to be opened (caulking structure). (Consolidated by). Further, a sealing sticker (not shown) is attached to the connecting portion between the box base and the box cover over the box base and the box cover. This seal is made of a brittle material, and if you try to peel off the seal to open the board boxes 100 and 102, or if you try to forcibly open the board boxes 100 and 102, the box base side and the box cover Cut to the side. Therefore, by checking the sealing unit or the sealing seal, it is possible to know whether or not the substrate boxes 100 and 102 have been opened.

The payout unit 93 includes a tank 130 located at the uppermost portion of the back pack unit 94 and opened upward, a tank rail 131 connected below the tank 130 and gently inclined toward the downstream side, and a downstream of the tank rail 131. A case rail 132 vertically connected to the side and a payout device 133 provided at the most downstream portion of the case rail 132 and paying out balls by a predetermined electrical configuration of a payout motor 216 (see FIG. 19) are provided. ing. The tank 130 is sequentially replenished with balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and the required number of balls is appropriately paid out by the payout device 133. A vibrator 134 for adding vibration to the tank rail 131 is attached to the tank rail 131.

Further, the payout control device 111 is provided with a state return switch 120, the launch control device 112 is provided with a variable resistor operation knob 121, and the power supply device 115 is provided with a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 7, 122). ing. The state return switch 120 is operated to clear the ball clogging (return to the normal state) when a payout error occurs, such as a ball clogging of the payout motor 216 (see FIG. 12). The operation knob 121 is operated to adjust the firing force of the firing solenoid. The RAM erase switch (FIGS. 7, 122) is operated when the power is turned on when it is desired to return the pachinko machine 10 to the initial state.

<About the electrical configuration in the first embodiment>
Next, the electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the pachinko machine 10.

The main control device 110 is equipped with an MPU 201 as a one-chip microcomputer which is an arithmetic unit. The MPU 201 is a ROM 202 that stores various control programs and fixed value data executed by the MPU 201, and a memory for temporarily storing various data and the like when the control program stored in the ROM 202 is executed. A certain RAM 203 and various other circuits such as an interrupt circuit, a timer circuit, and a data transmission / reception circuit are built in. In order to instruct the operation of the sub control device such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113, various commands are transmitted from the main control device 110 to the sub control device by the data transmission / reception circuit. Such a command is transmitted from the main controller 110 to the sub controller in only one direction.

The main control device 110 executes the main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as a jackpot lottery, display setting in the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83. The RAM 203 is provided with a counter buffer (see FIG. 24) for storing various counters for controlling these processes.

Here, with reference to FIG. 24, a counter and the like provided in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110 will be described. These counters and the like use the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 to perform a jackpot lottery, setting the display of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, drawing the display result of the second symbol display device 83, and the like. Used in.

For the jackpot lottery and the display settings of the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81, the first hit random number counter C1 used for the jackpot (and small hit) lottery and the jackpot type (big hit symbol) are selected. Used to set the initial value of the first hit type counter C2 used for, the stop type counter C3 used for selecting the stop type, the fluctuation type counter CS1 used for selecting the fluctuation pattern, and the random number counter C1 per first. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is used. Further, the second random number counter C4 is used for the lottery of the ordinary symbol (second symbol display device 83), and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is used for setting the initial value of the second random number counter C4. Further, the small hit type counter C5 is used for selecting the small hit type. Each of these counters is a loop counter in which 1 is added to the previous value each time it is updated, and after reaching the maximum value, it returns to 0.

Each counter is updated, for example, at intervals of 2 milliseconds, which is the execution interval of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and some counters are updated irregularly in the main process (see FIG. 42). Then, the updated value is appropriately stored in the counter buffer set in the predetermined area of the RAM 203. Although the details will be described later, the RAM 203 stores each counter value for the winning of the first ball opening 64 and the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the winning of the second ball opening 640. A special symbol 2 holding ball storage 203b is provided. In the present embodiment, up to four reserved balls are provided in the first entrance 64 and the second entrance 640, respectively, and a total of up to eight reserved balls can be stored. Therefore, if the ball wins the first entry slot 64 during the period when the special symbol can be drawn, such as when the special symbol is not displayed in a variable manner or when the special symbol is not in the jackpot game, each counter value is changed to the special symbol. When the game ball is stored in the 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the game ball wins in the second entrance 640, each counter value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. After that, each counter value stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, and the first special symbol is variablely displayed (dynamic display). Various settings and control processes are executed. Similarly, each counter value stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is moved to the execution area provided in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, and the second special symbol is displayed in a variable manner. Various settings and control processes are executed.

On the other hand, during the period when the lottery of the special symbol is impossible, such as during the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol or during the jackpot game of the first special symbol or the second special symbol, the game ball is inserted into the first entrance 64. Alternatively, when the second ball opening 640 is won, if the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening (starting port) is less than the upper limit value (4 in the present embodiment), each counter value is acquired. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b corresponding to the winning ball opening. In addition, when the number of reserved balls for the winning ball opening is the upper limit value (4 pieces in this embodiment) or more, each counter value or the like is not acquired and the prize balls (5 pieces in this embodiment) are not acquired. Only the prize ball) is treated as an invalid ball paid out to the player.

In the present embodiment, the upper limit of the number of reserved balls is four for each of the first ball opening 64 and the second ball opening 640, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is less than four (for example). It may be (3) or more than 4 (for example, 8). Further, the configuration may not provide an upper limit value.

Each counter will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 24. The first random number counter C1 is incremented by 1 in order within a predetermined range (for example, 0 to 299), and after reaching the maximum value (for example, 299 in the case of a counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299), it is 0. It is configured to return to. In particular, when the first random number counter C1 makes one round, the value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 at that time is read as the initial value of the first random number counter C1.

Further, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is configured as a loop counter updated in the same range as the first random number counter C1. That is, for example, when the first random number counter C1 is a loop counter capable of taking a value of 0 to 299, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is also a loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. The first initial value random number counter CINI1 is updated once for each execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

The value of the first random number counter C1 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and the timing at which the ball wins the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203. The value of the random number that becomes the jackpot of the special symbol is defined in the first random number table 202a stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110, and the value of the first random number counter C1 is the first random number table. If it matches the value of the random number that is the jackpot specified in 202a, it is determined to be the jackpot of the special symbol.

Here, the first random number table 202a will be described. The first hit random number table 202a is a table in which a random number value (determination value) determined to be a hit in each game state is set in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol. Specifically, when the gaming state is a low-probability gaming state, it is determined whether or not the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery for the first special symbol or the second special symbol is "0". If it is "0", it is determined that it is a big hit. Further, when the gaming state is a high-probability gaming state, the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the lottery of the first special symbol or the second special symbol is within the range of "1 to 4". If it is within the range of "1 to 4", it is determined that it is a big hit.

Here, if the value of the first hit random number counter C1 stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the execution area of the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is a random number that is a big hit of the special symbol. For example, the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol displayed on the first symbol display device 37 is the one at the time of a big hit of the special symbol. In this case, the specific display mode at the time of the big hit is the display mode indicated by the value of the first hit type counter C2 stored in the same execution area.

The first random number counter C1 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a 2-byte loop counter in the range of 0 to 299. As described above, in the low probability state of the special symbol, there is one value of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number value "0" is the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 1 while the total number of random numbers is 300, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/300". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the special symbol, there are four values of the first random number counter C1 which is a big hit of the special symbol, and the random number values "1 to 4" are the first random number table as described above. It is stored in 202a. Since the total number of random numbers that are big hits is 4 while the total number of random numbers is 300 in this way, the probability of being a big hit of a special symbol is "1/75".

Further, the value of the first type counter C2 in the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured as a loop counter in the range of 0 to 99. Then, when the lottery result of the special symbol becomes a big hit, the big hit type is selected based on the value of the first hit type counter C2 and the first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20B). The Rukoto. Specifically, it will be described later with reference to FIG. 20 (b).

The stop type selection counter C3 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 99, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99). In the present embodiment, the stop type selection counter C3 selects the stop type at the time of disconnection displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and after the reach occurs, the symbol is different from the symbol on which the reach is applied as the final stop symbol. Two stop (effect) patterns are selected: "out of reach" where the symbol stops (for example, in the range of 90 to 99) and "completely out of reach" (for example, in the range of 0 to 89) where reach does not occur. The value of the stop type selection counter C3 is updated periodically (once for each timer interrupt process in this embodiment), and when a ball enters the first entry port 64, the value is the value of the RAM 203. The special symbol 1 is stored in the reserved ball storage area 203a. When the ball enters the second entry port 640, the value is stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b of the RAM 203.

From the value (random value) of the stop type selection counter C3, the random number value for determining the stop type of the special symbol is set by the stop type selection table (not shown), and this table is the main control. It is provided in the ROM 202 of the device 110. Further, in the present embodiment, this table is divided into a special symbol for high probability and a special symbol for low probability, and a range of random values set for each stop type of deviation according to the table. Is changing. This is because the selection ratio of the stop type is changed depending on whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the high probability state of the special symbol or the low probability state of the special symbol.

For example, in the probabilistic state of a special symbol, a jackpot is likely to occur, so the range of random values corresponding to the "completely off" stop type is wide, 0 to 89, so that the reach effect is not selected more than necessary. Table is selected, "completely out of reach" is easily selected, and "out of reach" is narrowed to 90 to 99, so that "out of reach" is difficult to be selected. Further, in the low probability state of the special symbol, the range of the random number value corresponding to the stop type of "completely off" is narrow as 0 to 79 in order to secure the ball entry time to the first entry port 64. A table for low probability is selected, and it becomes difficult to select "completely out of reach", and the range of random numbers corresponding to the stop type of "out of reach" is widened to 80 to 99. Therefore, in the low probability state, it is possible to perform a lot of reach display with a long effect time, so that the ball entry time to the first entry port 64 can be secured, and the variation display by the third symbol display device 81 continues. It will be easier to do.

The variation type counter CS1 is configured to be incremented by 1 in order within the range of 0 to 198, and return to 0 after reaching the maximum value (that is, 198). The variation type counter CS1 determines one variation pattern from the set variation pattern selection table. A fluctuation time (dynamic display period) is set in this fluctuation pattern, and the fluctuation type counter CS1 is also a counter for determining the fluctuation time. The value of the variation type counter CS1 is updated once each time the main process (see FIG. 42) described later is executed once, and is repeatedly updated even within the remaining time in the main process. The fluctuation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 21 and 22), which stores a random number value for determining one fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation from the value (random value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1, is a main control device 110. It is provided in the ROM 202.

A plurality of data tables for selecting a variation pattern are defined in the variation pattern selection table 202d (see FIGS. 21B and 22). In this fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a plurality of fluctuation pattern selection tables commonly used for the first special symbol and the second special symbol are set, and for each of them, the fluctuation pattern selection table is set according to the result of the hit / fail judgment. Is set. Details of each variation pattern selection table will be described later with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22.

The second random number counter C4 is configured as a loop counter in which, for example, 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 239, the maximum value (that is, 239) is reached, and then the counter returns to 0. Further, when the second hit random number counter C4 makes one round, the value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2 at that time is read as the initial value of the second hit random number counter C4. In the present embodiment, the value of the second random number counter C4 is updated periodically for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and the ball passes through either the left or right normal start port (through gate) 67. When it is detected, it is acquired and stored in the normal map execution area of the RAM 203.

The value of the random number that normally hits the symbol is defined in the second random number table 202c (see FIG. 20) stored in the ROM 202 of the main controller, and the value of the second random number counter C4 is the second. If it matches the value of the random number that is the hit specified in the random number table 202c, it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol (second symbol). For example, in this second hit random number table 202c, when the probability of the normal symbol is low (during the normal state of the normal symbol), there are five random numbers that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-9". ing. Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 5, the probability of hitting a normal symbol at a low probability of a normal symbol is "5". / 240 ".

On the other hand, when the probability of the normal symbol is high (during the time saving state of the normal symbol), there are 200 random values that can be hit by the normal symbol, and the range is "5-204". Since the total number of random numbers that can be taken by the second random number counter C4 is 240 and the total number of random numbers that can be hit is 200, the probability of hitting a normal symbol is "1 / 1.2". .. As described above, in the present embodiment, the random value for hitting the normal symbol is significantly different between the low probability state of the normal symbol and the high probability state of the normal symbol, so that the hit probability is significantly different. In addition, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol and the opening time of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 when the normal symbol hits are also different between the low probability time and the high probability time of the normal symbol. .. For this reason, the ease of entering the second ball opening 640 differs greatly between the low-probability state of the normal symbol and the high-probability state of the normal symbol. Therefore, in the low-probability state (normal state) of the normal symbol, The player can be made to play the game aiming at the first entrance 64.

When the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67 in the low probability state of the normal symbol, the value of the random number counter C4 per second is acquired, and the fluctuation display of the normal symbol is displayed on the second symbol display device 83. It runs for 30 seconds. Then, if the acquired value of the second random number counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 9", it is determined that the player has won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the stop symbol (second symbol) ), The symbol "○" is lit and displayed, and the second entrance 640 is opened only for "0.2 seconds x 2 times". On the other hand, in the high probability state of the normal symbol, when the ball passes through the through gate (normal entry port) 67, the second symbol display device 83 executes the variable display of the normal symbol for 1 second, and the acquired second random number is obtained. If the value of the counter C4 is in the range of "5 to 204", it is determined that the winning symbol is won, and after the variation display on the second symbol display device 83 is completed, the symbol "○" lights up as the stop symbol (second symbol). At the same time, the second entrance 640 is opened only "1 second x 2 times". In the present embodiment, the fluctuation time of the normal symbol, the opening time of the normal electric accessory, and the number of times of opening may be appropriately changed as long as the game playability is not impaired.

The normal figure variation type counter CS2 is configured as a loop counter in which 1 is added in order in the range of 0 to 99, and after reaching the maximum value (that is, 99), the counter returns to 0. When the game ball passes through the through gate 67, the fluctuation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the value of the normal symbol variation type counter CS2. Specifically, a fluctuation pattern in which the value of the normal map fluctuation type counter CS2 is in the range of 0 to 99 (that is, the entire range) and the fluctuation time is 3 seconds is selected.

The second initial value random number counter CINI2 is configured as a loop counter that is updated in the same range as the second random number counter C4 (value = 0 to 239), and is updated once for each timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33). At the same time, it is repeatedly updated within the remaining time of the main process (see FIG. 42).

As described above, the RAM 203 is provided with various counters and the like, and in the main control device 110, the jackpot lottery and the display on the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displayed according to the values of the counters and the like. The main processing of the pachinko machine 10 such as setting and lottery of display results in the second symbol display device 83 can be executed.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description continues. In addition to the various counters shown in FIG. 19, the RAM 203 includes a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 201 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 201 are stored, various flags and counters, I / O, and the like. It has a work area (work area) in which the value of is stored.

The RAM 203 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 203 is backed up. ..

When the power supply is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the stack pointer at the time of the power failure (including the time when the power failure occurs; the same applies hereinafter) and the value of each register are stored in the RAM 203. On the other hand, when the power is turned on (including power on due to power failure elimination; the same applies hereinafter), the state of the pachinko machine 10 is restored to the state before the power was cut off based on the information stored in the RAM 203. The writing to the RAM 203 is executed by the main process (see FIG. 42) when the power is cut off, and the restoration of each value written in the RAM 203 is executed in the start-up process (see FIG. 41) when the power is turned on. The NMI terminal (non-maskable interrupt terminal) of the MPU 201 is configured so that a power failure signal SG1 from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 is input when the power is cut off due to a power failure or the like, and the power failure signal SG1 is the MPU201. When input to, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

Next, the contents of the ROM 202 of the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 in the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 to 23. FIG. 20A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the ROM 202 in the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 according to the present embodiment. In the ROM 202, in addition to the first random number table 202a and the second random number table 202c already described above, the first random number selection table 202b, the variation pattern selection table 202d, the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, and the like, At least a movable valve operation scenario table 202f is provided.

First, with reference to FIG. 20B, the details of the first type selection table 202b will be described. The first hit type selection table 202b (see FIG. 20B) is a data table in which determination values for determining the jackpot type are stored for each type of special symbol, and the determination of the first hit type counter C2. The value is specified in association with each jackpot type. In the pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment, when it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired based on the start winning prize is compared with the first hit type selection table 202b, and the first hit type selection table 202b is compared. The jackpot type corresponding to the value of the hit type counter C2 is selected.

As shown in FIG. 20 (b), "big hit A" is associated with the first special symbol (special symbol 1) in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49". Is stipulated. This jackpot A has 16 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 50 are counter values that become "big hit A", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit A" is determined. The ratio is 50% (50/100). This "big hit A" is one of the big hit types with the largest number of rounds, and after the big hit is completed, the time saving state of the normal symbol is given 100 times.

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "50 to 89", "big hit B" is associated and defined. This "big hit B" is a big hit with 8 rounds. Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 40 counter values are "big hit B", so if a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit B" is determined. The ratio is 40% (40/100). This "big hit B" is set to 8 rounds, which is a smaller number of rounds than "big hit A", but since a probabilistic state is given after the big hit ends, in terms of the number of balls to be obtained by one big hit. Although it is a jackpot type that is more disadvantageous than "Big hit A", the probability change state continues until the next jackpot is won, so the player acquires it from the start of one jackpot until the game state returns to the normal state. In terms of possible payouts (expected payouts), it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit A".

Further, in the range where the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "90 to 99", "big hit C" is associated and defined. This "big hit C" is a big hit with 16 rounds, like "big hit A". Of the 100 counter values that the first hit type counter C2 can take, 10 are counter values that become "big hit C", so if a big hit is achieved in the lottery of the first special symbol, "big hit C" is determined. The ratio is 10% (10/100). This "big hit C" has a larger number of rounds than the "big hit B", and a probabilistic state is given after the big hit ends. Therefore, it is a jackpot type that is more advantageous than "big hit A" and "big hit B".

On the other hand, for the second special symbol, "big hit A" is associated with the range in which the value of the first hit type counter C2 is "0 to 49", and the value of the first hit type counter C2 is defined. However, "big hit B" is associated with the range of "50 to 59", and "big hit C" is associated with the range of the value of the first hit type counter C2 of "60 to 99". Is stipulated. That is, the 1st special symbol and the 2nd special symbol have the same ratio of benefits (normal symbol in a time-saving state or a probable change state) given after the jackpot ends (1: 1 ratio), but the number of rounds is 16. It is stipulated that the percentage of round jackpots given is higher for the second special symbol.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the case where the lottery of the first special symbol is a big hit and the case where the lottery of the second special symbol is a big hit is the most advantageous for the player, "Big hit C". Is configured to be easy to select. Therefore, once the consecutive villa mode (probability change state of the special symbol and the time saving state of the normal symbol) is set, the ball is entered into the second entrance 640 by right-handed, and the lottery of the second special symbol is drawn. It becomes easy to repeat the state where is easy to execute and the jackpot. Therefore, it is possible to have the player play the game for one purpose of shifting to the consecutive villa mode. Therefore, it is possible to improve the interest of the player in the game.

Next, the details of the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIGS. 21 and 22. As described above, in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d, a random number value for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the fluctuation display is defined from the value (random number value) of the fluctuation type counter CS1.

As shown in FIG. 21 (a), the variation pattern selection table 202d is a normal table 202d1 for determining a variation pattern (variation time) in the normal mode, a probability variation state, and a time saving state of the normal symbol (hereinafter, hereinafter, After the jackpot of "Big hit A", which is a jackpot type in which the probability variation / time saving table 202d2 for determining the fluctuation pattern in the time saving state) and the time saving state of 100 times are given after the jackpot ends, the special symbol changes. At least the chance table 202d3 for determining the fluctuation pattern (variation time) of the 90th to 110th times is included.

First, the normal table 202d1 will be described with reference to FIG. 21 (b). FIG. 21B is a schematic view schematically showing the contents of the normal table 202d1. As shown in FIG. 21 (b), the normal table 202d1 has a random number value (variation type counter value) for determining the type of fluctuation pattern (variation time) for each type of special symbol and stop type of special symbol. The counter value of CS1) is specified.

In the present embodiment, it is stipulated that a common fluctuation pattern (variation time) is selected regardless of the type of special symbol (first special symbol, second special symbol), and specifically, it is complete as a stop type. When the deviation is determined, the fluctuation pattern of the short deviation (5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the long deviation (10) is associated with the range of "99 to 198". The fluctuation pattern of (seconds) is associated. In addition, when a special symbol is drawn out and the out-of-reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 159" as the value of the variable type counter CS1. Various types of super reach (60 seconds) are associated with the range of "160 to 198". In addition, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the super reach is associated with the range of "51 to 179". Various types (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198".

Next, with reference to FIG. 22A, details of the probability variation / time saving table 202d2 included in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described. As described above, the probability change / time saving table 202d2 is a table used for determining the fluctuation pattern in the probability change state and the time saving state.

In this probability change / time saving table 202d2, the same fluctuation pattern (variation time) is determined when the first special symbol and the second special symbol have the same stop type and the same fluctuation type counter CS1 value. It is configured to be. Specifically, when the lottery of the special symbol is missed and the stop type is determined to be completely missed, a short miss (5 seconds) is associated with the range where the value of the variable type counter CS1 is "0 to 190". , "191 to 198" is associated with a long deviation (10 seconds). In this way, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state, the special symbol is drawn out, and when the stop type is determined to be completely out, the ratio of the short out is higher than in the normal mode (normal state). .. As a result, it is possible to improve the game efficiency in a probabilistic state or a slightly shorter time state, which is more advantageous to the player than in the normal mode (normal state).

In addition, when a special symbol is drawn out and the reach is determined to be out of reach as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. Are associated with each other. In addition, in the case of a small hit, which is a kind of loss, in the lottery of the first special symbol, various super reach (60 seconds) are set in the range of "0 to 198" (that is, the entire range) as the value of the variable type counter CS1. ) Is associated.

On the other hand, if a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 50" as the value of the variable type counter CS1, and the super reach is associated with the range of "51 to 179". Various types (60 seconds) are associated with each other, and various types of special reach (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198".

In this way, in the probabilistic state and the time saving state in which the probability change / time saving table 202d2 is set, unlike the normal mode (normal state), the fluctuation pattern having a short fluctuation time is easily selected as the selected fluctuation pattern. Further, the lottery of the second special symbol, which is easier to win the jackpot (for example, jackpot C) which is more advantageous to the player than the first special symbol, is easily executed. As a result, the lottery of the second special symbol can be efficiently executed by launching the ball aiming at the second entrance 640 by right-handed hitting. That is, when it becomes a big hit, it becomes an advantageous state in which a probabilistic state is easily given. Therefore, it is possible to play the game with a stronger expectation that it will be a big hit.

Next, the details of the chance table 202d3 included in the variation pattern selection table 202d will be described with reference to FIG. 22B. As described above, the chance table 202d3 is a period in which the number of fluctuations of the special symbol is a predetermined number of times (90 to 110 times after the end of the jackpot) after the end of the jackpot executed when the jackpot type is "big hit A". It is a table in which the fluctuation pattern (variation time) inside is specified. That is, in the "big hit A" in which the time saving state (the period until the special symbol fluctuates 100 times) is given after the big hit ends, the final stage of the time saving state (90 to 100 times after the big hit ends) and the time saving state change to the normal state. It is a table used in the early stage (101 to 110 times after the end of the big hit) after the game state shifts.

Specifically, when complete deviation is determined as the stop type, a variation pattern of short deviation (5 seconds) is associated with the range of "0 to 98" as the value of the variation type counter CS1, and "99 to". The range of "150" is associated with the variation pattern of long deviation (10 seconds), and the range of "151 to 198" is associated with the variation pattern of out of chance (50 seconds). In addition, when a special symbol is drawn out and the out-of-reach is determined as the stop type, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 150" as the value of the variable type counter CS1. Various chance reach (50 seconds) are associated with the range of "151 to 198". In addition, when a big hit is obtained in the special symbol lottery, various normal reach (30 seconds) are associated with the range of "0 to 10" as the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1, and the chance reach is in the range of "11 to 179". Various types (50 seconds) are associated, and various special reach types (90 seconds) are associated with the range of "180 to 198". That is, in the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referred to, when the jackpot is won, the rate at which the chance fluctuation is selected is set to be the highest. As a result, by executing the fluctuation display based on the chance fluctuation, the player can have an expectation for a big hit and an expectation for the ball to enter the specific general entrance 630.

As described above, in the chance table 202d3, the special variation type (chance variation type) having a variation time of 50 seconds can be selected regardless of the lottery result of the special symbol and the selection result of the stop type. A detailed explanation will be described later with reference to FIGS. 58 to 60, but when the sphere is stored in the storage flow path 700e with this chance variation type selected, the second frame button (release) Button) An operation effect suggesting the operation timing of 22b is executed. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the operation timing suggested in this operation effect, the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e enters the specific general entry port 630. It becomes possible to do.

With this configuration, a ball stored in the storage flow path 700e (storage device) during a game state (probability change state or time saving state) capable of providing a right-handed game advantageous to the player is usually generated. The release operation can be performed efficiently in the state. Further, in the present embodiment, the variation pattern (variation time) is selected by using the chance table 202d3 even during the period during which the right-handed game is executed (the final stage of the time-saving game). As a result, even in a state where the number of time reductions remains low and the expectation of winning a big hit during a right-handed game is low, it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general entrance 630. , The player can be enthusiastically played until the end of the time saving state.

Further, when a big hit is obtained in the lottery of the special symbol, the result of the lottery this time is notified by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b as an operation effect. With this configuration, the effect of suggesting (notifying) the lottery result of the special symbol is executed by using the operation means (second frame button (release button) 22b) for releasing the storage state of the storage device. It is possible to provide a game that gives the player unexpectedness.

In the present embodiment, the period in which the chance table 202d3 is referred to is set so as to extend from the end of the time saving state to the beginning of the normal state, but the period is not limited to this, and for example, a predetermined period of the time saving state (for example, , 20 to 10 times remaining in a short time), or when the number of lottery of special symbols exceeds a predetermined number of times (for example, 600 times) without winning a big hit, a variation pattern is set using the chance table 202d3. In addition, the chance variation type is associated with the predetermined value of the variation type counter CS1 in each variation pattern selection table used according to the gaming state without providing the chance table 202d3 as in the present embodiment. It may be specified as.

Next, the detailed contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e will be described with reference to FIG. 23 (a). FIG. 23A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e. The movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e is an area in which an operation scenario used for operation control of the movable valve 750 is stored for each scenario type, and information stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e is stored. The movable valve 750 is operated in the order of scenario setting set at the time of power supply start-up processing.

Specifically, in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e, operation scenarios 1 to 5 are defined as scenario types. The operation scenario 1 is an operation scenario of 31.5 seconds, in which "opening 2 seconds → closing 0.1 seconds (1 set) x 15 times" is set as the scenario content. That is, the movable valve 750 is movable so that the period during which the flowing ball can be guided to the specific general entry port 630 (the period during which the movable valve 750 is closed) is 0.1 seconds out of 2.1 seconds. This is a working scenario. This "closing 0.1 second" is a period during which the ball is guided to the specific general entry port 630 when the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the right time, and is a variable operation for closing the movable valve 750. Even if the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated after the player visually recognizes the ball, it is set as a period during which the ball reaches the movable valve 750. As a result, it is possible to suppress the action of the player operating the second frame button (release button) 22b while visually recognizing the operating status of the movable valve 750.

The operation scenario 2 is an operation scenario of 30.6 seconds in which "opening 5 seconds → closing 0.1 seconds (1 set) x 6 times" is set as the scenario content. This operation scenario 2 is set for a longer period in which the movable valve 750 is in the open state (open) as compared with the above-mentioned operation scenario 1, and is an operation scenario that is more disadvantageous to the player than the operation scenario 1. Further, since the period in which the movable valve 750 is closed (closed) is the same in the operation scenario 1 and the operation scenario 2, even if the player grasps the period in which the movable valve 750 is closed, the following It is possible to make it difficult to predict when the movable valve 750 closes.

In the operation scenario 3, "opening 4 seconds → ((closing 0.1 seconds → opening 0.2 seconds) × 3) (1 set) × 6 times" is set as the scenario content, and the operation is performed for 29.4 seconds. This is a scenario. In this operation scenario 3, unlike the above-mentioned operation scenario 1 and operation scenario 2, the period (0.1 seconds) in which the movable valve 750 is closed (closed) is a short period (0.9 seconds) a plurality of times (0.9 seconds). This is an operation scenario that is set (3 times), and is an operation scenario that makes it easy to guide the ball to the specific general entry port 630.

The operation scenario 4 is an operation scenario of 31.5 seconds, in which "opening 3 seconds → closing 0.5 seconds (1 set) x 9 times" is set as the scenario content. In this operation scenario 4, the period for maintaining the closed state (closed) of the movable valve 750 is set longer (0.5 seconds) than in the operation scenarios 1 to 3 described above. This makes it possible to widely set the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b for guiding the ball to the specific general entry port 630.

In this way, by storing the predetermined operation contents of the movable valve 750 separately according to the operation period that is advantageous to the player and the operation period that is disadvantageous to the player, the operation is currently executed (or is performed). It is possible to easily determine whether or not the operation of the movable valve 750 (which will be executed in the future) is advantageous to the player.

FIG. 23B is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. In the movable valve operation scenario table 202f, setting order information for operating the movable valve 750 is given to each scenario type defined in a predetermined order. In the MPU of the main control device 110, when the operation control of the movable valve 750 is executed, the information corresponding to the contents specified in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f is read from the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e and is movable. The valve 750 is movable.

In this movable valve operation scenario table 202f, when the operation based on the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order "END" is completed, the loop processing is executed so that the operation scenario corresponding to the setting order "1" is executed. .. In this embodiment, the movable valve operation scenario table 202f shows that the setting order is stored in advance, but other configurations may be used, for example, a plurality of predetermined scenario types. A means for determining any of the above as the operation start timing of the movable valve 750 is provided, the setting order "1" is set for the scenario type determined at the operation start timing, and thereafter, the setting order is given in ascending order. May be good. As a result, it is possible to make the operation scenario that is first executed different when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the operation of the movable valve 750.

In addition, a plurality of operation scenarios defined in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f in a predetermined order are configured to be read in a loop, and the operation scenario to be read first (that is, the setting order "1" is set. By making the part of the movable valve 750 different, it is possible to make the first action scenario executed when the operation of the movable valve 750 is started, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the operation of the movable valve 750. And, when viewed over a long period of time, the variable operation of the movable valve 750 can be provided fairly. In addition, it is possible to prevent the operation process of the movable valve 750 from becoming complicated.

Next, the details of the RAM 203 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 25 is a block diagram showing the configuration of the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. As shown in FIG. 25, the RAM 203 includes a special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c, a special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d, and a special symbol 2 reserved ball. Number counter 203e, normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f, probability variation flag 203g, time saving medium counter 203h, operation scenario storage area 203i, operation counter 203j, release flag 203k, remaining ball timer flag 203m, remaining ball timer 203n, other memory area 203z Have at least.

The special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a has one execution area and four hold areas (hold 1st area to hold 4th area), and each of these areas has a random number counter per first. Each value of C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 is stored.

More specifically, at the timing when the ball enters the first entry port 64 (starting winning), each value of each counter C1 to C3 is acquired, and the acquired data is stored in four holding areas (holding). Among the vacant areas (1st area to 4th reserved area), the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, the smaller the area number, the data corresponding to the time-old winning prize is stored, and the data corresponding to the time-oldest winning prize is stored in the reserved first area. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the special symbol lottery is performed in the main control device 110, each value of each counter C1 to C3 stored in the reserved first area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is transferred to the execution area. A determination such as a special symbol lottery is performed based on the respective values of the counters C1 to C3 that are shifted (moved) and stored in the execution area.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, a shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding areas (holding 2nd area to holding 4th area) is packed into the holding area (holding 1st area to holding 3rd area) having the smaller area number. Will be done. In the present embodiment, in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, the data is shifted only in the reserved area (reserved second area to reserved fourth area) in which the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b has one execution area and four reserved areas, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. In the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, each counter value acquired based on the start winning prize to the second ball entry port 640 is stored. Since the method of storing the counter value is the same as that of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a, a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

Similar to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the normal symbol reserved ball storage area 203c has one execution area and four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Area) and. A second random number counter C4 is stored in each of these areas.

More specifically, the value of the counter C4 is acquired at the timing when the sphere passes through the through gate 67, and the acquired data is vacant in four reserved areas (holding first area to holding fourth area). Among the existing areas, the areas with the smallest area numbers (1st to 4th) are stored in order. That is, similarly to the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, the data corresponding to the winning is stored while the winning order is maintained. If data is stored in all four holding areas, nothing is newly stored.

After that, when the lottery for winning the normal symbol is performed in the main control device 110, the value of the counter C4 stored in the hold first area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is shifted to the execution area ( Based on the value of the counter C4 stored in the execution area (moved), a determination such as a lottery for winning a normal symbol is performed.

When the data is shifted from the hold 1st area to the execution area, the hold 1st area becomes empty. Therefore, as in the case of the special symbol 1 hold ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b, A shift process is performed in which the winning data stored in the other holding area is packed into the holding area one smaller than the area number. Also, the data shift is performed only in the holding area where the winning data is stored.

The special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the first entry port 64. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the first entry port 64 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. They are added one by one (see S404 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S210 in FIG. 34).

The value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (holding number N1 of the variation display in the first special symbol) is notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command (S211 in FIG. 34, S405 in FIG. 36). reference). The hold ball number command is a command transmitted from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed.

The voice lamp control device 113 holds the fluctuation display held in the main control device 110 by the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110 each time the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d is changed. The value of the number of balls itself can be obtained. As a result, the number of reserved balls in the variable display managed by the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is increased by the influence of noise and the like, and the main control device. Even if there is a deviation from the actual number of reserved balls held in 110, the deviation can be corrected by the next received number of reserved balls command.

The voice lamp control device 113 manages the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command, and each time the number of reserved balls changes, the display control device 114 is notified of the number of reserved balls. Send a ball count command. The display control device 114 displays the reserved ball number symbol on the third symbol display device 81 based on the reserved ball number notified by the display reserved ball number command.

The special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is a variable display (third symbol) of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 based on the entry (starting prize) into the second entry port 640. It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the display device 81 (variable display) up to a maximum of four times. The initial value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is set to zero, and the maximum value is 4 each time a ball enters the second entry port 640 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases. They are added one by one (see S410 in FIG. 36). On the other hand, the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is decremented by 1 each time a new variation display of the special symbol is executed (see S205 in FIG. 34). The value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is also notified to the voice lamp control device 113 by the reserved ball number command, similarly to the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d.

The normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f sets the number of reserved balls (waiting number) of the variable display of the normal symbol (second symbol) performed by the second symbol display device 83 based on the passage of the balls in the through gate 67 up to four times. It is a counter that counts up to. The initial value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is set to zero, and each time a ball passes through the through gate 67 and the number of reserved balls in the variable display increases, 1 is added up to a maximum value of 4 ( See S1504 in FIG. 41). On the other hand, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is decremented by 1 each time the variation display of the normal symbol (second symbol) is newly executed (see S1405 in FIG. 40).

When the sphere passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol hold ball number counter 203f (the number of hold times M of the variation display in the normal symbol) is less than 4, the value of the second random number counter C4 is acquired. , The acquired data is stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S705 in FIG. 39). On the other hand, when the ball passes through the through gate 67, if the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f is 4, nothing is newly stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c (S703: No in FIG. 39). ).

The probability change flag 203g is a flag indicating whether or not the current gaming state is the probability change state of the special symbol (during the probability change of the special symbol). When the probability change flag 203g is set to on, it indicates that the game state is the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. In the present embodiment, the probability variation flag 203g is set to ON at the end of the jackpot game in which the jackpot type is “big hit B” or “big hit C” (see S1113 in FIG. 43). Further, the probability variation flag 203g becomes a big hit by a lottery of a special symbol, and is set to off when the start of the big hit is set (see S219 in FIG. 34). In the initialized state (that is, the power is turned on for the pachinko machine 10 while the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed), the probability change flag 203g is reset to off, and a normal power off occurs. If this happens, it is configured to back up the state immediately before the power cutoff occurs.

The time saving medium counter 203h is a counter for counting the remaining time saving period (number of fluctuations of the special symbol) in the time saving state (time saving state) of the normal symbol. At the end of the big hit game in which the big hit type is "big hit A", the time saving medium counter 203h is set to 100 (see S1112 in FIG. 43). That is, in the present embodiment, if the probabilistic state is not set after the big hit game, the time saving state of 100 times is given.

The operation scenario storage area 203i is an area for reading and storing an operation scenario from the movable valve operation scenario table 202f when the operation control of the movable valve 750 (see S1009 in FIG. 46) is started. The operation control of the movable valve 750 is performed based on the operation scenario stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i.

The operation counter 203j is a counter used when executing operation control of the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771). Every time the storage valve operation process (see S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed, 1 is added (S1302), and the operation control based on the value of the counter is executed.

The release flag 203k is a flag for determining that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated, and if it is on, the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If it is off, it means that the second frame button (release button) 22b is not operated. This release flag 203k is set to ON when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated in the storage control process (see S1008 in FIG. 44) (S1202: Yes in FIG. 44). When it is set to on, the storage valve operation process (S1206 in FIG. 45) is executed, and when the storage valve operation process (S1206 in FIG. 45) is completed, it is set to off (see S1309 in FIG. 45).

The remaining ball timer flag 203m is a flag set to be ON in the winning process (see S1010 in FIG. 47) executed to determine whether or not the ball has normally won the specific general ball entry port 630 (see S1010 in FIG. 47). (See S1504 in FIG. 47), which is used to start counting the remaining ball timer, which will be described later.

The remaining ball timer 203n is counted in order to specify a normal range in the winning process (see S1010 in FIG. 47) executed to determine whether or not the ball has normally won the specific general ball entry port 630. It is a timer. Even if the count value of the remaining ball timer 203n reaches the upper limit (value corresponding to 1 second), if the ball does not enter the specific general entry port 630, an error command is set.

The movable valve initial setting flag 203p is a flag set to be turned on in order to start the operation control of the movable valve 750, and the operation setting of the movable valve is set in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 41). It is set to on when doing so (see S914 in FIG. 41).

The other memory area 203z is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110.

Returning to FIG. 19, the description continues. An input / output port 205 is connected to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 via a bus line 204 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The input / output port 205 includes a payout control device 111, a voice lamp control device 113, a first symbol display device 37, a second symbol display device 83, a large opening solenoid for closing or opening the specific winning opening 65a, and an electric combination. A solenoid 209 including a solenoid for driving an object, a storage valve solenoid 770b for driving the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a, and a movable valve 750 are projected (allowed) or buried (regulated). A movable valve solenoid 751 for the purpose is connected, and the MPU 201 transmits various commands and control signals to these via the input / output port 205.

Further, the input / output port 205 includes various switches 208 including a switch group and a sensor group (not shown), a RAM erasing switch (FIGS. 7, 122) circuit 253 and a storage valve of the storage device provided in the power supply device 115. The second frame button (release button) 22b that is operated when releasing is connected, and the MPU 201 is connected to various switches 208, signals output from the second frame button (release button) 22b, and a RAM erase switch (FIG. 7,122) Various processes are executed based on the RAM erase signal SG2 output from the circuit 253.

The payout control device 111 drives the payout motor 216 to control the payout of prize balls and rented balls. The MPU 211, which is an arithmetic unit, has a ROM 212 that stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 211, and a RAM 213 that is used as a work memory or the like.

Like the RAM 203 of the main control device 110, the RAM 213 of the payout control device 111 has a stack area in which the contents of the internal registers of the MPU 211 and the return address of the control program executed by the MPU 211 are stored, and various flags and counters. It has a work area (work area) in which values such as I / O are stored. The RAM 213 has a configuration in which a backup voltage is supplied from the power supply device 115 to hold (back up) data even after the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off, and all the data stored in the RAM 213 is backed up. Similar to the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 is also configured so that the power failure signal SG1 is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 when the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like. When input to the MPU 211, the NMI interrupt process (see FIG. 40) as the power failure process is immediately executed.

An input / output port 215 is connected to the MPU 211 of the payout control device 111 via a bus line 214 composed of an address bus and a data bus. The main control device 110, the payout motor 216, the launch control device 112, and the like are connected to the input / output port 215, respectively. Further, although not shown, the payout control device 111 is connected to a prize ball detection switch for detecting the paid out prize balls. The prize ball detection switch is connected to the payout control device 111, but is not connected to the main control device 110.

The launch control device 112 controls the ball launch unit 112a so that when the main control device 110 gives an instruction to launch the ball, the launch strength of the ball corresponds to the amount of rotation of the operation handle 51. The ball launch unit 112a includes a launch solenoid and an electromagnet (not shown), and the launch solenoid and the electromagnet are allowed to be driven when predetermined conditions are met. Specifically, the operation handle is detected by the touch sensor 51a that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the stop switch 51b for stopping the firing of the ball is turned off (not operated). The firing solenoid is excited in response to the amount of rotation of the 51, and the ball is launched with a strength corresponding to the amount of operation of the operation handle 51.

The voice lamp control device 113 is an output of voice in a voice output device (speaker, etc. not shown) 226, an output of lighting and extinguishing in a lamp display device 227 (decorative lamp 227a, transmission lamp 227b, other lamp 227c, etc.), and fluctuation. It controls the setting of the display mode of the third symbol display device 81 performed by the display control device 114 such as the display effect (variable display). The MPU 221 which is an arithmetic unit has a ROM 222 which stores a control program and fixed value data executed by the MPU 221, and a RAM 223 which is used as a work memory or the like.

An input / output port 225 is connected to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 via a bus line 224 composed of an address bus and a data bus. A main control device 110, a display control device 114, an audio output device 226, a lamp display device 227, a first frame button (effect button) 22a, and the like are connected to the input / output port 225, respectively.

The voice lamp control device 113 monitors the input from the first frame button (effect button) 22a, and when the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 22a, the third symbol display device 81 The audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227 are controlled, and the display control device 114 is instructed so as to change the stage displayed by or change the effect content at the time of super reach. When the stage is changed, a rear image change command including information about the changed stage is transmitted to the display control device 114 in order to display the rear image corresponding to the changed stage on the third symbol display device 81. .. Here, the back image is an image displayed on the back side of the third symbol, which is a main image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The voice lamp control device 113 determines an error according to a command from the main control device 110 and the status of various devices connected to the voice lamp control device 113, and displays and controls an error command including the type of the error. It transmits to the device 114. The display control device 114 controls the third symbol display device 81 to display an error message image according to the error type (for example, vibration error) indicated by the received error command without delay.

Next, the details of the electrical configuration of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 26 to 27. FIG. 26A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of ROM 222 of the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. As shown in FIG. 26A, the ROM 222 has at least a variation pattern selection table 222a, a movable valve operation scenario 222b, a music information storage area 222c, and a ball entry timing setting table 222d.

In the fluctuation pattern selection table 222a, the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the fluctuation pattern command output from the main control device 110, and the rough fluctuation content (variation time, fluctuation type (reach, deviation, etc.) indicated by the fluctuation pattern command) ) Is used to determine more detailed fluctuations. Thereby, a wider variety of variation modes can be determined. Here, one of a plurality of types of variation mode is determined by lottery with respect to the rough variation content instructed by the main control device 110.

The movable valve operation scenario 222b is provided so that the operation status of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 can be grasped on the voice lamp control device 113 side as well, and is stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. This is an area in which information stored in the movable valve operation scenario storage area 202e and the movable valve operation scenario table 202f is stored.

Here, the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b will be described with reference to FIG. 27 (a). FIG. 27A is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the movable valve operation scenario 222b. As shown in FIG. 27 (a), in the movable valve operation scenario 222b, the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t, which will be described later, is associated with the same information as the movable valve operation scenario stored in the ROM 202 of the main control device 110. Has been done. Furthermore, scenario groups are set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types. As a result, based on the movable valve state command output from the main control device 110 side, the operating status of the movable valve (current operating status and future operating status) can be grasped on the voice lamp control device side as well. Further, the scenario group set for a plurality of consecutive scenario types is used to determine whether or not the operation status of the movable valve is an operation status advantageous to the player.

The music information storage area 222c is an area in which music information used for the operation effect is stored, and is referred to when setting the display position of the effect pointer for the music used for the operation effect.

Here, the contents of the music information storage area 222c will be described with reference to FIG. 28. FIG. 28 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the music information storage area 222c. As shown in FIG. 28, in the music information storage area 222c, music data 222c1 and range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data) set for each range type in which the range of music data 222c1 is divided by a predetermined threshold value. 222c3) and is stored.

The music data 222c1 is information (scale, tempo, etc.) related to the music executed (reproduced) by the operation effect, and the range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3) is set based on this information. Has been done.

The range type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3) is information set by dividing the music data 222c1 into a plurality of range (range 1 (high range) and range 2 (low range)). In this information, a position corresponding to the tempo of the music executed in the operation effect (the position where the note is written in the scale of the music data 222c1) is set as the effect pointer displayable area. In this way, by setting the displayable area of the effect pointer used in the operation effect in advance for the music data, when the display position of the effect pointer is changed for the operation effect, it is executed in the operation effect. The production pointer can be displayed at a timing that does not cause discomfort corresponding to the (played) music.

Further, as shown in FIG. 28, in the music executed (reproduced) by the operation effect, since the number of notes recorded is different between the range 1 and the range 2, the range 2 data is more than the range 1 data 222c2. A large area where the effect pointer can be displayed is set in 222c3. In other words, the range 1 data 222c2 has a wider interval in which the displayable area of the effect pointer can be set than the range 2 data. In this way, by making it possible to set the effect pointer displayable area for each range of the music executed (played) by the operation effect, it is possible to execute different operation effects using the same music. It becomes. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the amount of data required to provide the player with various operation effects.

Further, in the operation effect, when the configuration in which the player can select the interval for operating the operation means (first frame button 22a or second frame button 22b) is used, the range corresponding to the operation interval selected by the player is used. It is possible to execute the operation effect desired by the player only by executing the operation effect using the type data (range 1 data 222c2, range 2 data 222c3).

In this way, when a plurality of range type data is created from one music data and an operation effect corresponding to the selected range type data of each range type data is executed, the selected range type data is used. It is preferable that the corresponding sound is output when the operating means is operated. As a result, it is possible to give a sense of unity between the player's operation and the operation effect when executing the operation effect with different range types for one song. The effect can be enhanced.

As described above, in the present embodiment, a plurality of sound range type data (sound range 1 data 222c2, sound range 2 data 222c3) are stored for one music data 222c1 in the music information storage area 222c, but other than that. In addition, for example, type data may be set for each of a plurality of instruments used for one piece of music data 222c1, or type data may be set for each of a plurality of different tempos.

Next, the RAM 223 in the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 26 (b). FIG. 26B is a block diagram showing the contents of the RAM 223. The RAM 223 includes a command storage area 223a, a first special symbol holding ball number counter 223b, a second special symbol holding ball number counter 223c, a normal symbol holding ball number counter 223d, a fluctuation start flag 223e, and a stop type selection. Flag 223f, effect counter 223g, round number cumulative counter 223h, probability variation state flag 223i, time saving state counter 223j, storage state flag 223k, storage upper limit flag 223m, ball passing flag 223n, release operation flag 223p. , Release state flag 223q, effect temporary storage area 223r, movable valve state storage area 223s, movable valve operation counter 223t, movable valve initial flag 223u, closing timing storage area 223v, timing effect setting flag 223w. , The effect execution flag 223x, the pressing period information storage area 223y, the difficulty level storage area 223aa, the difficulty level selection flag 223ab, the ball passage information storage area 223ac, the ball entry timing storage area 223ad, and the other memory area 223z. And at least are provided.

The command storage area 223a is an area in which various commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 are temporarily stored until processing for the commands is executed. More specifically, it is composed of a ring buffer, and data is read and written by a FIFO (First In First Out) method. When the command determination process (see FIG. 50) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed, the command stored first among the unprocessed commands stored in the command storage area 223a is read out, and the command determination process performs the command determination process. , The command is parsed and processing is performed according to the command.

The first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are fluctuation effects (variation display) performed by the first symbol display device 37 (and the third symbol display device 81). It is a counter that counts the number of reserved balls (number of standbys) of the fluctuation effect held in the main control device 110 up to 4 times for each type of special symbol. The first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b corresponds to the number of reserved balls of the variable effect based on the lottery of the first special symbol (special symbol 1), and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c corresponds to the second special symbol (special symbol 1). Corresponds to the number of reserved balls for variable production based on the lottery of special symbol 2).

As described above, the voice lamp control device 113 directly accesses the main control device 110, and the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e stored in the RAM 203 of the main control device 110. Cannot get the value of. Therefore, the voice lamp control device 113 counts the number of reserved balls based on the reserved ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, and the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c. In, the number of reserved balls is managed for each type of special symbol.

Specifically, in the main control device 110, when the number of reserved balls in the variable display is added by entering the first ball entrance 64 and the second entry port 640, or in the main control device 110, a special symbol is used. When the fluctuation display in the above is executed and the number of reserved balls is subtracted, the number of reserved balls indicating the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d after addition or subtraction, or the value of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e. The command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113.

When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110, the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110 or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203d is used from the hold ball number command. The value of the number counter 203e is acquired and stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c (see S2211 in FIG. 50). In this way, the voice lamp control device 113 updates the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c according to the hold ball number command transmitted from the main control device 110. , The value can be updated while synchronizing with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main control device 110.

The values of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are used for displaying the reserved ball number symbol in the third symbol display device 81. That is, the voice lamp control device 113 stores the number of reserved balls indicated by the command in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c in response to the reception of the reserved ball number command. At the same time, in order to notify the display control device 114 of the values of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol hold ball number counter 223c after storage, a display hold ball number command is sent to the display control device 114. Send.

When the display control device 114 receives this display hold ball number command, the value of the hold ball number indicated by the command, that is, the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol of the voice lamp control device 113. The drawing of the image is controlled so that the reserved ball number symbol corresponding to the value of the reserved ball number counter 223c is displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81. As described above, the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b and the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c are synchronized with the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110. However, the value is changed. Therefore, the number of reserved sphere symbols displayed in the small area Ds1 of the third symbol display device 81 is also synchronized with the values of the special symbol 1 reserved sphere counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved sphere counter 203e of the main control device 110. It can be changed while making it. Therefore, the third symbol display device 81 can accurately display the number of reserved balls for which the variable display is reserved.

When the value of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f of the main control device 110 is increased or decreased, the value of the ordinary symbol reserved ball counter 223d is increased or decreased according to the content of the received command. It is a counter to be used to synchronize the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol managed by the main control device 110 side with the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol managed by the voice lamp control device 113 side. is there. The value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is used, for example, when the third symbol display device 81 displays the number of reserved balls of the normal symbol. Regarding the detailed contents when the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the case where the number of reserved balls of the special symbol described above is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is used. Since the same is true, the description thereof will be omitted.

The variation start flag 223e is turned on when a variation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110 is received (see S2202 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when the variation display is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2702 in FIG. 55). When the variation start flag 223e is turned on, the display variation pattern command is set based on the variation pattern extracted from the received variation pattern command.

The display variation pattern command set here is stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and is included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221. It is transmitted to the display control device 114. By receiving this display variation pattern command, the display control device 114 so that the third symbol display device 81 performs the variation display of the third symbol with the variation pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command. The display control of the fluctuation effect is started.

The stop type selection flag 223f is turned on when a stop type command transmitted from the main control unit 110 is received (see S2205 in FIG. 50), and is turned off when the stop type is set in the third symbol display device 81. (See S2710 in FIG. 55). When the stop type selection flag 223f is turned on, the stop type is set as it is based on the stop type extracted from the received stop type command (in the case of a big hit, the big hit type).

The effect counter 223 g is a counter used for selecting a variation pattern, selecting various effects, and the like. The effect counter 223g is composed of a 1-byte loop counter that is updated in the range of 0 to 198, and is updated by adding 1 value each time the main process (see FIG. 49) is executed. .. The effect counter 223 g has a plurality of counters (not shown), and when the effect pattern is determined by referring to the plurality of counter values in one loop processing, the counter values are different from each other. Used. As a result, when setting one effect pattern, the same counter value is not used at a plurality of places, so that the bias of the set effect pattern can be suppressed. It should be noted that the effect pattern may be set using each value calculated after performing different processing on the value acquired from the same counter. Specifically, among the effect patterns, one selection refers to the ones digit of the acquired value, the other selection refers to the tens digit of the acquired value, and the other selection refers to one of the acquired values. The ones digit of the obtained value may be referred to by multiplying the value obtained by multiplying the digit of the digit by three and the value obtained by multiplying the tens digit by five. With this configuration, it is possible to suppress the bias of the set effect pattern while reducing the number of counters used when setting the effect pattern.

The round number cumulative counter 223h is a counter for counting the number of rounds during the jackpot game, and is updated to a value corresponding to the round number command transmitted from the main controller 110 (when the round number command is received. In S2504) of FIG. 53, the value of the counter is reset to 0 in the jackpot ending effect processing (S2513 in FIG. 53). In the voice lamp control device 113, a display round number command is set based on the round number accumulation counter 223h (S2611, S2614 in FIG. 54).

The probability change state flag 223i is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the probability change state of the special symbol. When the probability change state flag 223i is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the probability change state of the special symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that the special symbol is in the low probability state. The probability change state flag 223i is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. Depending on the state of the probability change state flag 223i, it is determined whether or not the present is the probability change state of the special symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the probabilistic state of the special symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image when the right-handed game is executed in the normal state. To determine if.

The time saving state counter 223j is a flag indicating whether or not the gaming state of the pachinko machine 10 is the time saving state of the normal symbol. When the time saving state counter 223j is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol, and when it is off, it indicates that it is in the normal state (low probability state) of the normal symbol. The time saving state counter 223j is updated according to the notification content of the state command output from the main control device 110. Depending on the state of the time saving state counter 223j, it is determined whether or not the current time saving state is the normal symbol, and the corresponding effect is set. More specifically, it is determined whether or not to display the right-handed navigation image displayed in the time-saving state of the normal symbol, and whether or not to display the right-handed warning image in the normal state.

The storage state flag 223k is a flag for determining that a sphere is stored in the storage flow path 700e, and is set based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2 provided in the storage flow path 700e. Is done. When the storage state flag 223k is on, it indicates that the spheres are stored in the storage flow path 700e, and when it is off, it indicates that the spheres are not stored in the storage flow path 700e. This storage state flag 223k is set to on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57) that the storage detection sensor S2 is detecting a sphere (see S2853 in FIG. 57), and storage detection is performed. It is set to off when the sensor S2 determines that the ball is not detected (S2855 in FIG. 57). Then, in the variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55), when the variation pattern of the chance pattern is acquired (S2704: Yes in FIG. 55), it is referred to (S2705 in FIG. 55). Here, when the storage state flag 223k is set to ON (S2705: Yes in FIG. 55), an effect of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 13) is executed.

The storage upper limit flag 223m is a flag for determining that the number of spheres stored in the storage flow path 700e has reached the upper limit number (five in this embodiment), and is set in the storage flow path 700e. Settings are made based on the detection result of the provided storage upper limit sensor S1. When the storage upper limit flag 223m is on, it indicates that the upper limit number of spheres is stored in the storage flow path 700e, and when it is off, the upper limit number of spheres is not stored in the storage flow path 700e. Show that. This storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on when it is determined in the storage state monitoring process (see S2116 in FIG. 57) that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is detecting a sphere (see S2858 in FIG. 57), and the storage upper limit is set. It is set to off when the sensor S1 determines that the ball is not detected (S2862 in FIG. 57). Then, in the jackpot middle effect processing (see S2504 in FIG. 54), when a predetermined round (7 or 15 round in this embodiment) is entered (S2605: yes in FIG. 54), it is referred to (S2606 in FIG. 54). Here, when the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to ON (S2606: Yes in FIG. 54), an effect of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b (see FIG. 11) is executed.

The ball passing flag 223n is a flag for determining that the ball has passed a predetermined area (the area where the first ball passing sensor S3 is provided) in the board unit 700. When the ball passing flag 223n is on, it indicates that the ball has passed the predetermined region, and when it is off, the ball has not passed through the predetermined region (for example, a predetermined period after the ball has passed through the predetermined region (for example). 1 second) has passed). The ball passage flag 223n is set to ON when the first ball passage sensor S3 (see FIG. 3) detects the passage of a ball in the ball passage monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56) (S2804 in FIG. 56). Similarly, in the ball passage monitoring process (see S1815 in FIG. 56), when the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 within a predetermined period after the ball passage flag 223n is set to ON (SS2806 in FIG. 56: Yes), it is set to off when the second ball passing sensor S4 detects a ball (S2807: Yes in FIG. 56) or when a predetermined period has elapsed (S2808: Yes in FIG. 56). S2813).

The release operation flag 223p is a flag for determining whether or not the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated. If the release operation flag 223p is on, it indicates that the second frame button (release button) 22b has been operated, and if it is off, the second frame button (release button) 22b has not been operated. Is shown. This release operation flag 223p is set to ON when a release operation command is received (see S2218 in FIG. 50) in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 50) (see S2219 in FIG. 50). (See S2217 in FIG. 52), when a command indicating a closed (non-released) state is received (S2404: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to off (see S2406 in FIG. 52).

The release state flag 223q is a flag for determining whether or not the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) are in the open (release) state. When the release state flag 223q is on, it indicates that the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) is in the open (release) state, and when it is off, the storage device (first storage device). 770, the second storage device 771) is in a closed (non-released) state. This release state flag 223q is a storage device-related process (see S2217 in FIG. 52) that is executed when a storage device-related command is received (S2216: Yes in FIG. 50) in the command determination process (see S2113 in FIG. 50). When an open state command (storage state command corresponding to the release state) is received in (S2401: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to ON (see S2402 in FIG. 52), and a closed state command (storage corresponding to the non-release state) is set. When a status command) is received (S2404: Yes in FIG. 52), it is set to off (see S2405 in FIG. 52). When this release state flag 223q is set to ON, the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56) is executed, and the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) flow down. The situation is monitored.

The effect temporary storage area 223r is an area for temporarily storing the set effect contents until the effect is executed. For example, the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot is described. The content of the timing effect (operation effect) is temporarily stored during the period from the set timing (7th or 15th round) to the timing (8th or 16th round) when the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the jackpot. .. When it is determined in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) that the effect set this time is the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot, the effect temporary storage area 223r is determined (FIG. 62). S3210: Yes), the set effect mode is memorized (see S3214 in FIG. 62), and the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the jackpot medium effect process (see S2504 in FIG. 54) (8 or 16 rounds). ) Is executed (S2609: Yes in FIG. 54), it is read out (S2611 in FIG. 54).

The movable valve state storage area 223s is an area in which information for grasping the operating status of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) is stored on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is a value of the movable valve operation counter 223t described later. The operating status of the movable valve 750 is updated at any time in response to the above. In the movable valve state storage area 223s, when the movable valve state information including the initial information is received in the movable valve state command processing (see S2215 in FIG. 51) (S2302: Yes in FIG. 51), the movable valve operation scenario 222b Information is stored (see S2303 in FIG. 51), and the operating state of the movable valve 750 is updated based on the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t. It is determined whether the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s matches the content of the movable valve state command each time the movable valve state command is received from the main control device 110 (S2309 in FIG. 51). .. Further, the movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area based on the information stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s (see S2306 in FIG. 51).

The movable valve operation counter 223t is a counter used for grasping the operating status of the movable valve 750 (see FIG. 3) on the voice lamp control device 113 side, and is a movable valve operation stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s. It is for updating the scenario information. The movable valve operation counter 223t is set to "1" when the movable valve operation scenario is set to the movable valve state storage area 223s (see S2303 in FIG. 51) in the movable valve state command processing (see S2215 in FIG. 51). A value is set (S2304 in FIG. 51), and the value of the counter is changed each time the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112 in FIG. 64) executed in the main process (see FIG. 49) of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed. "1" is added (S3403 in FIG. 64). When the counter value has reached the upper limit, the counter value is set to "1" again (S3404 in FIG. 64). In this way, by updating the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t in the process (main process) executed periodically (1 ms), the operation status of the movable valve 750 is appropriately managed on the voice lamp control device 113 side. be able to.

The movable valve initial flag 223u is a flag for determining that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on, and is a state in which a movable valve operation scenario is initially set in the movable valve state storage area 223s. It is used to determine whether or not. If the movable valve initial flag 223u is on, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is in a state immediately after the power is turned on, and if it is off, it indicates that the pachinko machine 10 is not immediately after the power is turned on. The movable valve initial flag 223u is set to ON in the start-up process (see FIG. 48) of the voice lamp control device 113 (see S2013 in FIG. 48), and is referred to in the movable valve state command process (see FIG. 51) (see FIG. 51 S2301), the movable valve operation scenario is set to the movable valve state storage area 223s and then turned off (S2305 in FIG. 51). Further, if the movable valve state command received from the main controller 110 does not include the initial information even though the movable valve initial flag 223u is set to ON, an error command is set (FIG. 51). (See S2307).

The closing timing storage area 223v is an area for storing the closing timing of the movable valve 750, and the timing at which the movable valve 750 is closed (that is, the ball is closed) based on the information set in the movable valve state storage area 223s. The timing of entering the ball into the specific general entry port 630) is stored. In the movable valve state command processing (see S2215 in FIG. 51), the closing timing storage area 223v receives the movable valve state command including the initial information from the main control device 110 (S2302: Yes in FIG. 51), and the movable valve state. When a movable valve operation scenario is set in the storage area 223s, the closing timing of the movable valve is calculated based on the movable valve operation scenario, and the calculated closing timing is stored (S2306 in FIG. 51). The closing timing stored in the closing timing storage area 223v is referred to when setting the effect pointer in the timing effect (operation effect).

The timing effect setting flag 223w is a flag for determining whether to execute the timing effect (operation effect) for executing the effect of causing the player to operate the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). If it is on, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and if it is off, it indicates that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied. In the present embodiment, a specific fluctuation pattern (chance fluctuation type) is selected as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect), and the sphere is stored in the storage flow path 700e, or A state in which a predetermined round (8R, 16R) during the jackpot game is started is set.

The timing effect setting flag 223w is obtained in the variation display setting process (see S2114 in FIG. 55), and the acquired variation pattern is a chance pattern (variation pattern indicating the chance variation type) (S2704: Yes in FIG. 55), and the storage state. When it is determined that the flag 223k is on (S2705: Yes in FIG. 55), it is set to on. Further, in the hit-related processing (S2221 in FIG. 53), when an interval command indicating the end of 7 or 15 rounds is received (S2507: Yes in FIG. 53) and it is determined that the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (FIG. 53). S2508: Yes) is set to on.

Then, when the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON, the timing effect (operation effect) is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60) (see S3102 to S3105 in FIG. 60). Then, when the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is to be executed during the special symbol variation, after setting the display timing effect command in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62). (See S3211 in FIG. 62), when it is set to off (S3213 in FIG. 62) and the timing effect (operation effect) set this time is executed during the jackpot game, the jackpot medium effect process (FIG. In (see S2504 of FIG. 54), the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2609: Yes in FIG. 54), and after the display effect round command is set (see S2611 in FIG. 54), it is turned off. It is set (S2613 in FIG. 54).

The effect executing flag 223x is a flag for determining whether or not the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. If it is on, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed, and if it is off, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed. For example, it indicates that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed. The effect execution flag 223x is referred to when it is determined whether the operation for the operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is an operation based on the timing effect (operation effect). This effect execution flag 223x is set to on (see S3212 in FIG. 62) after setting the display timing effect command (see S3211 in FIG. 62) in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62). ). Further, in the jackpot middle effect processing (see S2504 in FIG. 54), a round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is started (S2609: Yes in FIG. 54), and after the display effect round command is set (FIG. 54). Is set to on (see S261612 in FIG. 54). Then, when the set timing effect (operation effect) is completed, it is set to off.

The pressing period information storage area 223y is an operation means (first frame button 22a or second frame) set to correspond to the display timing of the pointer (effect pointer, hit pointer) displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). This is an area for storing the operation timing of the button 22b). In the pressing period information storage area 223y, the successful pressing period is set in correspondence with the set display pointers (effect pointer, hit pointer) in the timing effect common setting process (see S3105 in FIG. 62) (FIG. 62). See S3209). The successful pressing period set here is the successful pressing period when the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is pressed in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59). (See S3005 and S3006 in FIG. 59).

The difficulty level storage area 223aa is an area for storing the difficulty level information of the timing effect (operation effect) selected by the player. In this difficulty level storage area 223aa, the difficulty level information selected in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59) is stored (see S3012 in FIG. 59). The information stored in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is referred to when setting the effect mode of the corresponding timing effect (S3133 in FIG. 61 (a)), and is cleared when the corresponding timing effect (operation effect) ends. To.

The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is a flag for determining whether or not the effect of selecting the difficulty level in the timing effect (operation effect) is being executed (whether the timing is such that the difficulty level can be selected), and whether it is on or not. If it is, it indicates that the timing is such that the difficulty level can be selected, and if it is off, it indicates that the timing is not such that the difficulty level can be selected. The difficulty level selection flag 223ab is referred to when determining whether the operation on the operating means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is an operation based on the effect of selecting the difficulty level. This difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON when it is determined that the first round has started (S2602: Yes in FIG. 54) in the jackpot medium effect processing (see S2504 in FIG. 54), and the first round ends. It is set to off when it is determined that the problem has occurred (S2602: No in FIG. 54).

The ball passage information storage area 223ac is an area for storing information indicating the passage period until the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e passes through the specific general entry port 630 or the outlet 700b of the board unit 700. Is. The position where the pointer (effect pointer) is displayed in the timing effect (operation effect) is corrected based on the information indicating the passage period stored in the ball passage information storage area 223ac. In the ball passage information storage area 223ac, information indicating the passage period calculated in the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56) is stored (S2812 in FIG. 56), and the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63). (See S3301 in FIG. 63). The ball passage information storage area 223ac is configured to be capable of storing a plurality of information indicating the passage period (for example, for 1000 times). Therefore, it is possible to correct the timing effect (operation effect) by using the passing period calculated a plurality of times. Therefore, for example, the effect content is corrected based on the occurrence of a sphere that has unexpectedly moved. It is possible to set an appropriate timing effect (operation effect) without any problem.

In the present embodiment, the ball passage information storage area 223ac is provided in the RAM 223. For example, the ball passage information storage area 223ac is provided in a recording medium capable of holding information even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off. You may.

The ball entry timing storage area 223ad stores the ball entry timing set in the timing effect correction process (see S3106 in FIG. 63) based on the passage period calculated in the ball passage monitoring process (see S2115 in FIG. 56). It is an area to do. Based on the ball entry timing stored in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad, the effect mode (effect pointer) of the timing effect (operation effect) is set.

The other memory area 223z is provided as an area for storing data other than the above-mentioned data, and is an area for temporarily storing other counter values and the like used by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113.

Next, the electrical configuration of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29 is a block diagram showing an electrical configuration of the display control device 114. The display control device 114 includes the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, the resident video RAM 235, the normal video RAM 236, the image controller 237, the input port 238, the output port 239, and the bus lines 240 and 241. have.

The output side of the voice lamp control device 113 is connected to the input side of the input port 238, and the MPU 231, the work RAM 233, the character ROM 234, and the image controller 237 are connected to the output side of the input port 238 via the bus line 240. .. A resident video RAM 235 and a normal video RAM 236 are connected to the image controller 237, and an output port 239 is connected via the bus line 241. Further, a third symbol display device 81 is connected to the output side of the output port 239.

Even if the pachinko machine 10 is a different model in which the lottery probability of winning a special symbol and the number of prize balls paid out for one special symbol jackpot are different, the symbol displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Since there are models with exactly the same configuration, the display control device 114 is made into a common component to reduce costs.

In the following, the MPU 231, the character ROM 234, the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 will be described first, and then the work RAM 233 will be described.

First, the MPU 231 controls the display content of the third symbol display device 81 based on the display variation pattern command output from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command of the main control device 110. The MPU 231 has a built-in instruction pointer 231a, reads and fetches an instruction code stored at the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a, and executes various processes according to the instruction code. Immediately after the MPU 231 is turned on (including recovery from a power failure; the same applies hereinafter), a system reset can be applied from the power supply device 115, and when the system reset is released, the instruction pointer 231a Is automatically set to "0000H" by the hardware of MPU231. Then, each time the instruction code is fetched, the value of the instruction pointer 231a is added by one. When the MPU 231 executes an instruction pointer setting instruction, the pointer value instructed by the setting instruction is set in the instruction pointer 231a.

Although the details will be described later, in the present embodiment, the control program executed by the MPU 231 and various fixed value data used in the control program are provided with a dedicated program ROM like a conventional game machine. It is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, instead of storing the data.

Although the details will be described later, the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area. As a result, not only the image data but also the control program and the like can be sufficiently stored. If the control program or the like is stored in the character ROM 234, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing the control program or the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, the NAND flash memory has a problem that the read speed becomes slow, especially when random access is performed. For example, when reading data arranged continuously on a plurality of pages, the data on the second and subsequent pages can be read at high speed, but an address is specified for reading the data on the first page. It takes a long time to output the data. Further, when reading non-continuous data, it takes a long time to read the data. As described above, since the speed of reading the NAND flash memory is slow, if the MPU 231 is configured to directly read the control program from the character ROM 234 and execute various processes, it takes time to read the instructions constituting the control program. Even if a high-performance processor is used as the MPU 231, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the system reset of the MPU 231 is released, first, the control program stored in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234 is transferred to the work RAM 233 provided for temporary storage of various data. And store. Then, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the control program stored in the work RAM 233. Since the work RAM 233 is configured by a DRAM (Dynamic RAM) as described later and data is read / written at high speed, the MPU 231 can read out the instructions constituting the control program without delay. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

The character ROM 234 is a memory that stores the control program executed in the MPU 231 and the image data displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and is connected to the MPU 231 via the bus line 240. The MPU 231 directly accesses the character ROM 234 after the system reset is released via the bus line 240, and transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the character ROM 234 to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. An image controller 237 is also connected to the bus line 240, and the image controller 237 transfers the image data stored in the character storage area 234a2 described later of the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 connected to the image controller 237. Transfer to the normal video RAM 236.

The character ROM 234 is configured by modularizing a NAND flash memory 234a, a ROM controller 234b, a buffer RAM 234c, and a NOR flash memory 234d.

The NAND flash memory 234a is a non-volatile memory provided as a main storage unit in the character ROM 234, and stores most of the control programs executed by the MPU 231 and fixed value data for driving the third symbol display device 81. It has at least a second program storage area 234a1 to be stored and a character storage area 234a2 to store data of an image (character or the like) to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the NAND flash memory has a feature that a large storage capacity can be obtained in a small area, and the character ROM 234 can be easily increased in capacity. As a result, in this pachinko machine, for example, by using a NAND flash memory 234a having a capacity of 2 gigabytes, many images can be stored in the character storage area 234a2 as images to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be diversified and complicated in order to further enhance the interest of the player.

Further, the NAND flash memory 234a can store a large amount of image data in the character storage area 234a2, and further store the control program and fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1. In this way, it is provided to store the image data to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 without storing the control program and the fixed value data by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. Since it can be stored in the character ROM 234, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

The ROM controller 234b is a controller for controlling the operation of the character ROM 234. For example, the corresponding data from the NAND flash memory 234a or the like is based on the address transmitted from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240. Is read and output to the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

Here, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, a relatively large number of error bits (bits in which incorrect data are written) occur when writing data, or a defective data block in which data cannot be written occurs. Or something. Therefore, the ROM controller 234b is known to perform known error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a, and to avoid reading and writing data to the NAND flash memory 234a while avoiding defective data blocks. Performs data address translation for.

Since the ROM controller 234b performs error correction on the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a including the error bit, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used as the character ROM 234, it is based on the incorrect data. It is possible to prevent the MPU 231 from performing processing and the image controller 237 from generating various images.

Further, since the defective data block of the NAND flash memory 234a is analyzed by the ROM controller 234b and access to the defective data block is avoided, the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 have different defective data in each NAND flash memory 234a. Access to the character ROM 234 can be easily performed without considering the address position of the block. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the complicated access control to the character ROM 234.

The buffer RAM 234c is a memory used as a buffer for temporarily storing the data read from the NAND flash memory 234a. When the address assigned to the character ROM 234 from the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 via the bus line 240 is specified, the ROM controller 234b contains one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) including the data corresponding to the specified address. It is determined whether or not the data of is set in the buffer RAM 234c. If it is not set, one page (for example, 2 kilobytes) of data including the data corresponding to the specified address is read from the NAND flash memory 234a (or NOR flash 234d) and temporarily set in the buffer RAM 234c. To do. Then, the ROM controller 234b performs known error correction processing, and then outputs the data corresponding to the designated address to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 via the bus line 240.

The buffer RAM 234c is composed of two banks, and data for one page of the NAND flash memory 234a can be set per bank. As a result, the ROM controller 234b can output the data of the NAND flash memory 234a to the outside by using the other bank while the data is set in one bank, or can be designated by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237. One page of data including the data corresponding to the assigned address is transferred from the NAND flash memory 234a to one bank and set, and the data corresponding to the address specified by the MPU 231 or the image controller 237 is transferred to the other bank. The process of reading from the bank and outputting to the MPU 231 and the image controller 237 can be processed in parallel. Therefore, it is possible to improve the responsiveness in reading the character ROM 234.

The NOR type ROM 234d is a non-volatile memory provided as a sub storage unit in the character ROM 234, and has an extremely smaller capacity (for example, 2 kilobytes) than the NAND type flash memory 234a for the purpose of complementing the NAND type flash memory 234a. ) Is configured. Among the control programs stored in the character ROM 234, the NOR type ROM 234d is the first program not stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, specifically, the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. At least a first program storage area 234d1 for storing a part of the boot program to be executed is provided.

The boot program is a control program for starting the display control device 114 so that various controls for the third symbol display device 81 can be executed, and the MPU 231 first executes this boot program after the system reset is released. As a result, various controls can be made executable in the display control device 114. The first program storage area 234d1 should be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released within the capacity range of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c (that is, one page of the NAND flash memory 234a) in this boot program. A predetermined number of instructions (for example, if the capacity of one page is 2 kilobytes, 1024 words (1 word = 2 bytes) worth of instructions) are stored. The number of boot program instructions stored in the first program storage area 234d1 may be less than or equal to the capacity of one bank of the buffer RAM 234c, and is appropriately set according to the specifications of the display control device 114. There may be.

When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the value of the instruction pointer 231a to "0000H" by hardware and specifies the address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. It is configured. On the other hand, when the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address "0000H" is specified for the bus line 240, the ROM controller 234b stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Is set to, and the corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231.

When the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234, the MPU 231 executes various processes according to the fetched instruction code, adds only one instruction pointer 231a, and sets the address indicated by the instruction pointer 231a to the bus line 240. To specify. Then, the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 is selected from the programs previously set in the buffer RAM 234c from the NOR type ROM 234d while the address specified by the bus line 240 is an address indicating the program stored in the NOR type ROM 234d. , The instruction code of the corresponding address is read from the buffer RAM 234c and output to the MPU 231.

Here, in the present embodiment, instead of storing all the control programs in the NAND flash memory 234a, among the boot programs, a predetermined number of instructions from the instructions to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are NOR type ROM 234d. It is stored in for the following reasons. That is, as described above, the NAND flash memory 234a is peculiar to the NAND flash memory in that it takes a long time from the designation of the address to the output of the data in reading the data on the first page. There's a problem.

When all the control programs are stored in such a NAND flash memory 234a, the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 in order to fetch the instruction code to be executed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. If so, the character ROM 234 must read one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" from the NAND flash memory 234a and set it in the buffer RAM 234c. Due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read. Therefore, the MPU 231 specifies the address "0000H" and then gives an instruction corresponding to the address "0000H". It consumes a lot of waiting time to receive the code. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, since the NOR type ROM is a memory capable of reading data at high speed, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d among the boot programs. By doing so, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately stores the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. The corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231 by setting to. Therefore, the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", and the MPU 231 can be started in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

The boot program includes a control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, that is, a control program excluding the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. , The fixed value data (for example, display data table, transfer data table, etc. described later) used in the control program is stored in the program storage area of the work RAM 233 by a predetermined amount (for example, the capacity of one page of the NAND flash memory 234a). It is programmed to transfer to 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, in the MPU 231, first, the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 sets the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 according to the boot program read from the first program storage area 234d1 after the system reset is released. While using a bank different from the bank of the buffer RAM 234c, a predetermined amount is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a.

Here, since the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 is configured with a capacity corresponding to one bank of the buffer RAM 234c as described above, the address of the internal bus is designated as "0000H". When the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 is set in the buffer RAM 234c in response to the above, the boot program is set in only one bank of the buffer RAM 234c. Therefore, when transferring the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a according to the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1, the first program set in one bank of the buffer RAM 234c The transfer process can be executed using the other bank while leaving the boot program in the storage area 234d1. Therefore, since it is not necessary to reset the boot program in the first program storage area 234d1 to the buffer RAM 234c after the transfer process, the time required for the boot process can be shortened.

When the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, the instruction pointer 231a is transferred to the program storage area 233a. It is programmed to set to the first predetermined address. As a result, after the system reset is released, when the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined program storage area 233a. Set to the address.

Therefore, when a predetermined amount of the control programs stored in the second program storage area 234a1 are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 reads the control program stored in the program storage area 233a and reads the control program. Various processes can be executed. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. Then, various processes will be executed. As will be described later, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instructions at high speed and execute the processing for the instructions.

Here, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. On the other hand, the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 has the remaining boot programs in the control program transferred from the second program storage area 234a1 by a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. It is programmed to be included, and the instruction pointer 231a is set with the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a as the first predetermined address.

As a result, the MPU 231 transfers the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount by the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1, and then transfers the control program. Run the remaining boot programs included in the control program.

In this remaining boot program, the remaining control program that has not been transferred to the program storage area 233a and the fixed value data (for example, the display data table and the transfer data table described later) used in the control program are all stored in the second program. A process of transferring a predetermined amount from the area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b is executed. Further, at the end of the boot program, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address in the program storage area 233a. Specifically, as this second predetermined address, the initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed after the boot process (see S5001 in FIG. 65) stored in the program storage area 233a by the boot program is completed. Set the start address of the program corresponding to.

By executing the remaining boot program, the MPU 231 transfers all the control programs and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b. Then, when the boot program is executed to the end by the MPU 231, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 is transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Various processes are executed using the control program.

Therefore, even when most of the control programs are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 after the system reset is released. As a result, the MPU 231 can read a control program from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, high processing performance can be maintained in the display control device 114, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored. Even if the program is stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

The image controller 237 is a digital signal processor (DSP) that draws an image and displays the drawn image on the third symbol display device 81 at a predetermined timing. The image controller 237 draws an image for one frame based on a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later transmitted from the MPU 231, and draws one frame of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c described later. The image drawn in the buffer is expanded, and the image information for one frame previously expanded in the other frame buffer is output to the third symbol display device 81 to display the image on the third symbol display device 81. .. The image controller 237 performs the image drawing process for one frame and the image display process for one frame in the image display time for one frame in the third symbol display device 81 (20 milliseconds in this embodiment). Process in parallel in.

The image controller 237 transmits a vertical synchronization interrupt signal (hereinafter, referred to as “V interrupt signal”) to the MPU 231 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed. Each time the MPU 231 detects this V interrupt signal, it executes a V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) and instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image for the next frame. In response to this instruction, the image controller 237 executes the drawing process of the image for the next one frame, and also executes the process of displaying the image developed by the drawing on the third symbol display device 81.

In this way, the MPU 231 executes the V interrupt process in response to the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237, and gives a drawing instruction to the image controller 237. Therefore, the image controller 237 performs the image drawing process and display. An image drawing instruction can be received from the MPU 231 at each processing interval (20 milliseconds). Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

The image controller 237 also executes a process of transferring image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the transfer instruction from the MPU 231 and the transfer data information included in the drawing list.

The drawing of the image is performed using the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236. That is, the image data required for drawing is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 based on the instruction from the MPU 231 before the drawing is performed.

Here, the NAND flash memory makes it easy to increase the capacity of the ROM, but the read speed is slower than that of other ROMs (mask ROM, EEPROM, etc.). On the other hand, in the display control device 114, the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to transfer a part of the image data stored in the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. It is configured to do. Then, as will be described later, the image data stored in the resident video RAM 235 is controlled so as to be resident without being overwritten.

As a result, after the transfer of the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is completed after the power is turned on, the image controller 237 draws the image while using the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235. Processing can be performed. Therefore, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. The time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, since the resident video RAM 235 is resident with image data of images that are frequently displayed and image data of images that should be displayed immediately after the display is determined by the main control device 110 or the display control device 114. Even if the character ROM 234 is composed of the NAND flash memory 234a, the responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained high.

Further, when drawing an image using non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 is required for drawing from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 before the drawing is performed. The MPU 231 is configured to instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the image data. As will be described later, the image data transferred to the normal video RAM 236 may be deleted by overwriting after being used for drawing the image, but at the time of drawing the image, the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed Since it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by, and the time required for reading the data can be omitted, the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can.

Further, since it is not necessary to make all the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 by storing the image data in the normal video RAM 236, it is not necessary to prepare a large-capacity resident video RAM 235. Therefore, it is possible to suppress an increase in cost due to the provision of the resident video RAM 235.

The image controller 237 has a buffer RAM 237a composed of 132 kilobytes of SRAM, which is the capacity of one block of the NAND flash memory 234a.

The image data transfer instruction given by the MPU 231 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer instruction or the transfer data information of the drawing list includes the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data to be transferred is stored. The end address (final address of the storage source), transfer destination information (information indicating whether to transfer to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236), and the beginning of the transfer destination (resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236). Contains the address. The data size of the image data to be transferred may be included instead of the final address of the storage source.

The image controller 237 reads data for one block from a predetermined address of the character ROM 234 and temporarily stores the data in the buffer RAM 237a according to various information of the transfer instruction, and when the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is not used, the buffer RAM 237a The image data stored in the resident RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is transferred. Then, the process is repeatedly executed until all the image data stored in the storage source final address is transferred from the storage source start address indicated by the transfer instruction.

As a result, the image data read from the character ROM 234 over time is temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a, and then the image data is transferred from the buffer RAM 237a to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 in a short time. Can be done. Therefore, while the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236, the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is prevented from being occupied for a long time by the transfer of the image data. be able to. Therefore, since the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 are occupied by the transfer of the image data, those video RAMs 235 and 236 cannot be used for the image drawing process, and as a result, the image can be drawn by the required time. , It is possible to prevent the display on the third symbol display device 81 from being missed.

Further, since the transfer of the image data from the buffer RAM 234c to the resident video RAM 235 or the normal video RAM 236 is performed by the image controller 237, the resident video RAM 235 and the normal video RAM 236 perform image drawing processing and display the third symbol. The period during which the display process on the device 81 is unused can be easily determined, and the process can be simplified.

The resident video RAM 235 is used so that the image data transferred from the character ROM 234 is retained without being overwritten during the power-on, and when the power is turned on, the main image area 235a, the rear image area 235c, and the character design area are used. In addition to the 235e and the error message image area 235f, at least the variable image area 235b and the third symbol area 235d when the power is turned on are provided.

The main image area 235a at power-on is used as the main image at power-on to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 between the time the power is turned on and the time when all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is stored. This is the area that stores the corresponding data. Further, in the fluctuating image area 235b when the power is turned on, the game is started by the player while the main image when the power is turned on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the first ball entry port 64 and the second ball entry are entered. This is an area for storing image data corresponding to a variable image at power-on, which displays the result of a lottery performed by the main control device 110 by a variable effect when a ball entering the mouth 640 is detected.

When the power supply is started from the power supply unit 251 of the MPU 231, the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on fluctuation image is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a. A transfer instruction is transmitted to the controller 237 (see S5003 and S5004 in FIG. 65).

Here, the fluctuation image when the power is turned on will be described. Immediately after the power is turned on, the display control device 114 transfers the image data corresponding to the power-on main image and the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the power-on main image area 235a and the power-on variable image area 235b. Subsequently, the remaining image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. While the remaining image data is being transferred, the display control device 114 uses the image data previously stored in the power-on main image area 235a to display the power-on main image as the third symbol display device. Display on 81.

At this time, when the display fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 is received based on the fluctuation pattern command from the main control device 110 which is the instruction command for starting the fluctuation, the display control device 114 displays the main image when the power is turned on. On the display screen of, the fluctuation image of the "○" symbol at the lower right position when facing the screen and the fluctuation image of the "×" symbol at the same position as the "○" symbol are displayed during the fluctuation period. Medium, alternate and repeat display. Then, from the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the variation pattern command from the main control device 110 and the stop type command, the lottery performed by the main control device 110 is performed. Judging the result, if it is a "big hit of a special symbol", the "○" symbol is displayed for a certain period of time after the variable effect is stopped, and if it is "out of the special symbol", the "x" symbol is displayed after the variable effect is stopped. Display for a certain period of time.

The MPU 231 uses the image data stored in the main image area 235a at power-on to the image controller 237 until all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235. Instructs to draw the main image when the power is turned on. As a result, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can confirm the main image at power-on displayed on the third symbol display device 81. it can. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. Further, since the player or the like can recognize that some processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, the image to be resident in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, wait until the transfer of the image data to the resident video RAM 235 is completed without worrying that the operation has stopped. Can be done.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. Further, by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, when the power is turned on, the player starts the game while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the entry into the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 is detected. In this case, the power-on fluctuation image is drawn using the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation image resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b, and the power-on fluctuation image is alternately displayed on the third symbol display device. The MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to be displayed on the 81. As a result, it is possible to perform a simple fluctuation effect using the fluctuation image when the power is turned on. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, since the image data corresponding to the power-on fluctuation effect image is already resident in the power-on fluctuation image area 235b at the stage when the power-on main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the power is turned on. If a ball is detected in the first ball entry port 64 while the time main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the corresponding variation effect is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Can be done.

Returning to FIG. 29, the description will be continued. The rear image area 235c is an area for storing image data corresponding to the rear image displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The back image is an image displayed on the back side of the main symbol (third symbol), and for example, a city, the sea, the sky, or the like is displayed. A right-handed navigation image (see FIG. 11A) and the like are also stored in the rear image area 235c as a rear image.

The third symbol area 235d is an area for resident the third symbol used in the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81. That is, in the third symbol area 235d, image data corresponding to the above-mentioned 10 types of main symbols with numbers "0" to "9", which are the third symbols, is resident. As a result, when performing a variation effect on the third symbol display device 81, it is not necessary to read the image data from the character ROM 234 one by one. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the third symbol display device 81 You can start the variable effect quickly. Therefore, after the ball enters the first ball entry port 64, the variation effect is immediately started in the third symbol display device 81 even though the variation effect is started in the first symbol display device 37. It is possible to suppress the occurrence of a state in which the display is not performed.

Further, in the third symbol area 235d, as the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", the main symbol consisting of the rear symbol such as a wooden box, the rear symbol and the character such as the furoshiki, the helmet, etc. Image data corresponding to the main symbol consisting of the attached symbol imitating the above is also resident. These image data are used for the demonstration effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has elapsed after one variation effect is stopped. Be done. As a result, when the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the main symbol without a number is displayed as the third symbol in the demo effect. Therefore, the player can easily recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is in the demo state by visually recognizing the main symbol without the number from the display image of the third symbol display device 81.

The character symbol area 235e is an area for storing image data corresponding to the character symbols used in various effects displayed on the third symbol display device 81. In this pachinko machine 10, various characters such as "boy" are displayed according to various effects, and the data corresponding to these is resident in the character symbol area 235e to control the display. When the device 114 changes the character symbol based on the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113, the device 114 does not newly read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, but instead enters the character symbol area 235e of the resident video RAM 235. By reading out the image data resident in advance, a predetermined image can be drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234, so that the character symbol can be changed immediately even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow reading speed is used for the character ROM 234.

The error message image area 235f is an area for storing image data corresponding to an error message displayed when an error occurs in the pachinko machine 10. In the pachinko machine 10, for example, when vibration is detected by the voice lamp control device 113 from the output of a vibration sensor (not shown) attached to the back surface of the game board 13, the voice lamp control device 113 causes a vibration error. Notify the display control device 114 by an error command. Further, even when the occurrence of another error is detected by the voice lamp control device 113, the voice lamp control device 113 notifies the display control device 114 of the occurrence of the error together with the error type by an error command. When the display control device 114 receives an error command, the display control device 114 is configured to display an error message corresponding to the received error on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, from the viewpoint of preventing fraud of the player and protecting the player against the error, the error message is required to be displayed almost at the same time as the occurrence of the error. In the pachinko machine 10, image data corresponding to various error messages is resident in advance in the error message image area 235f, so that the display control device 114 determines the error message of the resident video RAM 235 based on the received error command. By reading out the image data resident in the image area 235f in advance, each error message image can be immediately drawn by the image controller 237. As a result, it is not necessary to read the image data corresponding to the sequential error message from the character ROM 234. Therefore, even if the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed is used for the character ROM 234, the corresponding error message is sent after receiving the error command. It can be displayed immediately.

The normal video RAM 236 is used so that the data is overwritten and updated at any time, and at least an image storage area 236a, a first frame buffer 236b, and a second frame buffer 236c are provided.

The image storage area 236a is an area for storing image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 among the image data necessary for drawing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image storage area 236a is divided into a plurality of sub-areas, and the type of image data stored in the sub-area is predetermined for each sub-area.

Of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235, the MPU 231 collects the image data required for subsequent image drawing from the character ROM 234 to the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. , Instruct the image controller 237 to transfer the type of the image data to a predetermined sub-area to be stored. As a result, the image controller 237 reads the image data instructed by the MPU 231 from the character ROM 234, and transfers the read image data to a designated predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a via the buffer RAM 237a.

The image data transfer instruction is given by including the transfer data information in the drawing list described later, in which the MPU 231 instructs the image controller 237 to draw an image. As a result, the MPU 231 can give an image drawing instruction and an image data transfer instruction only by transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, so that the processing load can be reduced.

The first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c are buffers for developing an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The image controller 237 writes an image for one frame drawn according to the instruction from the MPU 231 to the frame buffer of either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c, thereby writing one frame in the frame buffer. While the image is expanded and the image is expanded in one frame buffer, the image information for one frame previously expanded is read from the other frame buffer, and the drive signal is transmitted to the third symbol display device 81. By transmitting the image information, the third symbol display device 81 is executed to display the image for one frame.

In this way, by providing two frame buffers, the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c, the image controller 237 expands the image for one frame drawn in one frame buffer and simultaneously expands the image. The image for one frame previously expanded can be read from the other frame buffer, and the read image for one frame can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the frame buffer that expands the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame in order to display the image on the third symbol display device 81 are used for drawing the image for one frame. Every 20 milliseconds to complete, the MPU 231 alternately specifies one of the first framebuffer 236b and the second framebuffer 236c, respectively.

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

The work RAM 233 is a memory for storing control programs and fixed value data stored in the character ROM 234, and temporarily storing work data and flags used when executing various control programs by the MPU 231. It is composed. The work RAM 233 includes a program storage area 233a, a data table storage area 233b, a simple image display flag 233c, a display data table buffer 233d, a transfer data table buffer 233e, a pointer 233f, a drawing list area 233g, a timing counter 233h, and an opening data transfer flag. It has at least 233i, a stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and a drawing target buffer flag 233j.

The program storage area 233a is an area for storing the control program executed by the MPU 231. When the system reset is released, the MPU 231 reads the control program from the character ROM 234, transfers it to the work RAM 233, and stores it in the program storage area 233a. Then, when all the control programs are stored in the program storage area 233a, the MPU 231 subsequently executes various controls using the control programs stored in the program storage area 233a. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device 81 can be maintained. Can be used to easily perform diversified and complicated productions.

The data table storage area 233b is a display data table in which display contents to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 with the passage of time are described and display data for one effect to be displayed based on a command from the main control device 110. This is an area in which the transfer data information of the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 and the transfer data table that defines the transfer timing among the image data used in one effect displayed by the table are stored.

These data tables are usually stored as a type of fixed value data in the second program storage area 234a1 provided in the NAND flash memory 234a of the character ROM 234, and according to the boot program executed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released. , These data tables are transferred from the character ROM 234 to the work RAM 233 and stored in the data table storage area 233b. Then, when all the data tables are stored in the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 subsequently controls the display of the third symbol display device 81 by using the data table stored in the data table storage area 233b. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when various data tables are stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the display control device 114 can maintain high processing performance, and the third symbol display device can be used. By using 81, it is possible to easily execute a diversified and complicated production.

Here, the details of various data tables will be described. First, one display data table is prepared for each effect mode displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command from the main control device 110. For example, a variable effect and an opening effect. , Display data tables corresponding to round production, ending production, and demo production are prepared.

The variation effect is an effect that is started by the third symbol display device 81 when a display variation pattern command is received from the voice lamp control device 113. When the display variation pattern command is received, the display stop type command indicating the stop type of the variation effect is also received. For example, when the variation effect is started, if the stop type of the variation effect is out of order, the stop symbol indicating the deviation is finally displayed as a stop, while the stop type of the variation effect is jackpot A and jackpot B. If any of the above, the stop symbol indicating each jackpot is finally displayed as a stop. The player can recognize the jackpot type by visually recognizing the stop symbol in this variation effect, and can easily determine the game value given according to the jackpot type.

The opening effect is for notifying the player that the pachinko machine 10 will shift to the special gaming state and the first specific winning opening 65a and the second specific winning opening 650a, which are normally closed, will be opened. It is a production, and the round production is a production for notifying the player of the number of rounds to be started from now on. The ending effect is an effect for notifying the player that the end of the special game state (big hit state) is notified to the player.

As described above, the demo effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the next variation effect accompanying the start winning is not started even after a predetermined time has passed since one variation effect was stopped. The third symbol, which is composed of the main symbols without the numbers "0" to "9", is stopped and displayed, and only the rear image changes. If the demonstration effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81, the player or the person involved in the hall can recognize that the pachinko machine 10 is not playing a game.

In the data table storage area 233b, one display data table corresponding to the opening effect, the round effect, the ending effect, and the demo effect is stored. Further, as the variation display data table, which is a display data table for variation effect, if there are 32 patterns of variation effect patterns to be set, one table is prepared for one variation effect pattern, for a total of 32 tables.

Here, the details of the display data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a variable display data table among the display data tables. The display data table should be displayed at the time corresponding to the address represented by the time (20 milliseconds in the present embodiment) in which the image for one frame is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 as one unit. The content (drawing content) of the image for one frame is defined in detail.

In the drawing content, the type of sprite is specified for each sprite that is a display object that constitutes an image for one frame, and the display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, and translucency are specified according to the type of sprite. Drawing information for causing the third symbol display device 81 to draw a sprite, such as a value, α blending information, color information, and filter designation information, is defined.

The sprite type is information for identifying the sprite to be displayed. The display position coordinates are information for specifying the coordinates on the third symbol display device 81 on which the sprite should be displayed. The enlargement ratio is information for designating the enlargement ratio with respect to a standard display size preset for the sprite, and the size of the sprite displayed according to the enlargement ratio is specified. If the magnification is greater than 100%, the sprite will be displayed enlarged from the standard size, and if the magnification is less than 100%, the sprite will be reduced from the standard size. Is displayed.

The rotation angle is information for specifying the rotation angle when the sprite is rotated and displayed. The translucent value is for specifying the transparency of the entire sprite, and the higher the translucent value, the more the image displayed on the back side of the sprite can be seen through. The α-blending information is information for identifying a known α-blending coefficient used when performing a superposition process with another sprite. The color information is information for designating the color tone of the sprite to be displayed. Then, the filter designation information is information for designating an image filter to be applied to the sprite when drawing the designated sprite.

In the variable display data table, one back image, nine third symbols (design 1, symbol 2, ...), and light in the image are drawn contents for one frame defined corresponding to each address. Drawing information for each sprite, such as an effect that expresses the insertion of a boy image and a character used for various effects such as boy images and characters, is defined for each address. In addition, one or a plurality of information about the effect and the character are defined according to the content to be displayed in the frame.

Here, the display position of the rear image is fixed to the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81, and the enlargement ratio, the rotation angle, the translucent value, the α blending information, the color information, and the filter designation information are displayed with respect to the passage of time. Since it is constant, only the back type, which is information for specifying the type of the back image, is specified in the variable display data table. This back type displays one of the backs A to C corresponding to the stage selected by the player (either "city stage", "sky stage", or "island stage"), or backside A to. Information that specifies whether to display a rear image different from C is described. Further, as the back surface type, when specifying to display a back image different from the back images A to C, information for specifying which back image is to be displayed is also described.

When it is specified that any of the back surfaces A to C is to be displayed by the back surface type, the MPU 231 specifies the back image of the back surfaces A to C corresponding to the stage specified by the player as the drawing target. In addition, the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame is specified according to the passage of time. On the other hand, when it is specified to display a back image different from the back images A to C, the back image to be displayed is specified from the back type.

In the present embodiment, the case where only the back type is specified as the drawing content of the back image in the display data table will be described. Instead, the back type and the range of the back image corresponding to the back type are described. May be specified as position information indicating whether or not to be displayed. This position information may be, for example, information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed. In this case, the MPU 231 specifies the range of the back image to be displayed with respect to the frame based on the elapsed time from the display of the back image in the range corresponding to the initial position indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information may be information indicating the elapsed time from the start of drawing the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) based on the display data table. In this case, the MPU 231 displayed the range of the rear image to be displayed for the frame at the stage when the drawing of the image (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) was started based on the display database. It is specified based on the position of the back image and the elapsed time from the start of drawing (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) of the image indicated by the position information.

Further, the position information is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image of the range corresponding to the initial position is displayed and the drawing of the image based on the display data table (or the third symbol display device 81) according to the back type. It may indicate any of the information indicating the elapsed time since the start of the display), and the type information of the position information (for example, the range corresponding to the initial position) together with the back type and the position information. It is information indicating the elapsed time since the back image is displayed, or information indicating the elapsed time since the drawing of the image based on the display database (or the display of the third symbol display device 81) is started. Information indicating the above) may be specified as the drawing content of the back image. In addition, the position information may not be information indicating the elapsed time, but may be information indicating an address in which the range of the rear image to be displayed is stored.

In the third symbol (design 1, symbol 2, ...), the symbol type offset information is described as the symbol type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed. This offset information is information representing the difference between the numbers attached to each third symbol. The offset information is specified instead of directly specifying the type of the third symbol. The display of the third symbol in the variation effect is the stop symbol of the variation effect that was performed immediately before and the variation effect that is performed this time. This is because it changes according to the stop symbol, and in the symbol offset information from the start of the fluctuation to the elapse of a predetermined time, the offset information from the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is described. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the offset from the stop symbol set according to the stop type command (display stop type command) received from the main control device 110 via the voice lamp control device 113. Describe the information. As a result, the variation effect can be stopped at the stop symbol corresponding to the stop type designated by the main control device 110.

Since each third symbol has a unique number, the fluctuation symbol in the previous variation effect and the stop symbol according to the stop type specified by the main control device 110 can be selected as the third symbol. By managing with the numbers attached to and expressing the offset information by the difference of the numbers attached to each third symbol, the third symbol to be easily displayed can be specified from the offset information.

Further, in the symbol offset information, the third symbol fluctuates at high speed for a predetermined time during which the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before is switched to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed this time. It is set to be the displayed time. While the third symbol is fluctuating at high speed, the third symbol is invisible to the player. During that time, the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect performed immediately before the symbol offset information is displayed. By switching from the offset information to the offset information of the stop symbol of the fluctuation effect that is being performed this time, even if the continuity of the numbers of the third symbol is interrupted, the player is prevented from recognizing the interruption of the continuity of the numbers. be able to.

The start address "0000H" of the display data table is described with "Start" information indicating the start of the data table, and the final address of the display data table ("02F0H" in the example of FIG. 30) is the data table. "End" information indicating the end of is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the drawing content corresponding to the effect mode to be specified in the display data table is obtained. Is described.

The MPU 231 selects a display data table to be used according to a command (for example, a display fluctuation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, and selects the selected display. The data table is read from the data table storage area 233b, stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and the pointer 233f is initialized. Then, the pointer 233f is added by 1 each time the drawing process for one frame is completed, and in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the pointer is then added. The image content to be drawn is specified, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. By transmitting this drawing list to the image controller 237, a drawing instruction for the image is given. As a result, the drawing contents are specified in the order specified in the display data table according to the update of the pointer 233f, so that the image as specified in the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 responds to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command from the main control device 110 or the like. Instead of changing the program to be executed by the MPU 231, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d as appropriate. ..

Here, when the program executed by the MPU 231 is started every time the effect image displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed like the conventional pachinko machine, the effect image becomes diversified. Since a large load is applied to the complicated and enormous processing of starting and executing a program, the processing capacity of the display control device 114 may be limited, and the diversification of controllable production images may be limited. there were. On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be changed by a simple operation of appropriately replacing the display data table with the display data table buffer 233d. A wide variety of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 regardless of the processing capacity of the control device 114.

Further, in this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is drawn frame by frame according to the set data table. This can be created because, in the pachinko machine 10, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined in advance based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize. On the other hand, in game machines other than game machines such as pachinko machines, the display contents change on the spot based on the user's operation, so that the display contents cannot be predicted. It is not possible to have a display data table corresponding to the effect mode. In this way, a display data table is prepared corresponding to each effect mode, a display data table buffer is set according to the effect mode to be displayed, and a drawing list is created frame by frame according to the set data table. This configuration can only be realized based on the configuration in which the pachinko machine 10 determines in advance the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on the result of the lottery performed based on the start winning prize.

Next, the details of the transfer data table will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 31 is a schematic diagram schematically showing an example of a transfer data table. The transfer data table is prepared corresponding to the display data table prepared for each effect, and as described above, is resident among the sprite image data used in the effect specified by the display data table. The transfer data information for transferring the image data not resident in the video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 and the transfer timing thereof are defined.

If all the sprite image data used in the effect specified in the display data table is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. As a result, it is possible to suppress an increase in the capacity of the data table storage area 233b.

The transfer data table corresponds to the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer data information of the sprite image data (hereinafter referred to as "transfer target image data") for which transfer should be started at the time indicated by the address. Is described (corresponding to the addresses "0001H" and "097H" in FIG. 31). Here, the transfer start timing of the transfer target image data is set so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. In the transfer data table, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is defined in correspondence with the address corresponding to the transfer start timing.

On the other hand, if there is no transfer target image data to start transfer at the time indicated by the address specified in the display data table, there is no transfer target image data to start transfer corresponding to that address. Null data is defined (corresponding to the address "0002H" in FIG. 31).

The transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and end address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored, and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). Is included.

In the "0000H" which is the start address of the transfer data table, "Start" information indicating the start of the data table is described as in the display data table, and the final address of the transfer data table (in the example of FIG. 31, in the example of FIG. 31). In "02F0H"), "End" information indicating the end of the data table is described. Then, for each address between the address "0000H" in which the "Start" information is described and the address in which the "End" information is described, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred that should be specified in the transfer data table. Is described.

When the display data table to be used is selected by the MPU 231 according to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110, the display data table is displayed. If there is a transfer data table corresponding to, the transfer data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e of the work RAM 233 described later. Then, each time the pointer 233f is updated, the drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is specified from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later is created. At the same time, the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite whose transfer should be started at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data information is created in the drawing list. to add.

For example, in the example of FIG. 31, when the pointer 233f becomes "0001H" or "097H", the MPU 231 creates the transfer data information specified at the address in the transfer data table based on the display data table. It is added to the drawing list, and the added drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237. On the other hand, when the pointer 233f is "0002H", since the Null data is specified at the address "0002H" of the transfer data table, it is determined that there is no transfer target image data to start the transfer, and the data is generated. The drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 without adding the transfer data information to the drawing list.

Then, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 transfers the transfer target image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to be performed.

Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table. When drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. Then, using the image data stored in the image storage area 236a, a predetermined sprite can be drawn based on the display data table.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the pachinko machine 10, the display control device 114 receives display data in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. As the table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. It is possible to reliably transfer data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Further, the transfer data table has the same data structure as the display data table, and is associated with the address specified in the display data table, and the transfer of the transfer target image data to be started at the time indicated by the address is transferred. Since the data information is specified, the image data of a predetermined sprite is surely stored in the normal video RAM 236 before being used based on the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d. As described above, since the transfer start timing can be instructed, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, a wide variety of effect images can be easily displayed on the third symbol display device 81. be able to.

The simple image display flag 233c is a flag indicating whether or not to display the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on fluctuation image) on the third symbol display device 81. The simple image display flag 233c is set after the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on or the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM. , MPU231 is set to on in the main process (see FIG. 65) (see S5005 in FIG. 65). Then, in order to display an image other than the image at the time of power-on on the third symbol display device 81 at the stage where all the resident target image data is stored in the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer process of the image transfer process, It is set to off (see S6605 in FIG. 76 (b)).

This simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 each time a V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 is detected (see S5301 in FIG. 67 (b)), and is simplified. When the image display flag 233c is on, the simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 67B) and the simple display setting process (see FIG. 67B) so that the image at power-on is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. 67 (b) see S5309) is executed. On the other hand, when the simple image display flag 233c is off, the command determination is made so that various images are displayed according to the command transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on the command from the main control device 110 or the like. The processing (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and the display setting processing (see FIGS. 73 to 75) are executed.

Further, the simple image display flag 233c is referred to in the transfer setting process executed by the MPU 231 in the V interrupt process (see S6501 in FIG. 76 (a)), and the simple image display flag 233c is turned on. Executes the resident image transfer setting process (see FIG. 76 (b)) for transferring the resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 because the resident image data that is not stored in the resident video RAM 235 exists. When the simple image display flag 233c is off, the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) for transferring the image data required for the drawing process from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 is executed.

The display data table buffer 233d stores a display data table corresponding to an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer to do. The MPU 231 determines an effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 based on a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113, and displays a display data table corresponding to the effect mode from the data table storage area 233b. It is selected and the selected display data table is stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f by 1, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image controller 237 is used for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 32), which will be described later, is generated, which describes the contents of instructions for drawing an image. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 displays the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d.

The MPU 231 adds the pointer 233f one by one, and based on the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the image for the image controller 237 is obtained for each frame. A drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later, which describes the drawing instructions, is generated. As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The transfer data table buffer 233e is a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command or the like transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. It is a buffer for storing. The MPU 231 selects a transfer data table corresponding to the display data table from the data table storage area 233b in accordance with storing the display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and transfers the selected transfer data table. It is stored in the data table buffer 233e. If all the sprite image data used in the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is stored in the resident video RAM 235, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is not prepared. Therefore, the MPU 231 clears the contents by writing the Full data which means that the transfer target image data does not exist in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

Then, the MPU 231 defines the transfer data information of the transfer target image data defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e while adding the pointer 233f one by one. If (that is, if Null data is not described), the transfer data information is added to a drawing list (see FIG. 32) described later, which describes the instruction content of image drawing to the image controller 237 generated for each frame. to add.

As a result, when the transfer data information is described in the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 shifts the image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information. Execute the process to transfer. Here, as described above, in the transfer data table, the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. The transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is specified for a predetermined address. Therefore, when drawing a predetermined sprite according to the display data table by transferring the image data from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information defined in the transfer data table, it is necessary to draw the sprite. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The pointer 233f is an address to acquire the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. Is for specifying. The MPU 231 temporarily initializes the pointer 233f to 0 in accordance with the display data table being stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Then, the display setting process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed (FIG. 67 (b). ), The pointer update process (see S6205 in FIG. 73) is executed, and the value of the pointer 233f is added one by one.

Each time the pointer 233f is updated, the MPU 231 specifies the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f from the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, and describes a drawing list described later. (See FIG. 32) is created, and the transfer data information of the image data of the predetermined sprite to be transferred at that time is acquired from the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e, and the transfer data is acquired. Add the information to the created drawing list.

As a result, the effect corresponding to the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Therefore, the effect to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed only by changing the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. Therefore, a wide variety of effects can be displayed regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114.

When the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e is stored, the sprite is drawn by the corresponding display data table based on the transfer data table before the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started. Image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 used for drawing can always be stored in the image storage area 236a. As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The drawing list area 233g is an image controller that draws an image for one frame generated based on the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e. This is an area for storing the drawing list instructed to 237.

Here, the details of the drawing list will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 32 is a schematic diagram schematically showing the contents of the drawing list. The drawing list is an instruction table for instructing the image controller 237 to draw an image for one frame, and as shown in FIG. 32, a back image used in the image of one frame and a third symbol (designs 1,). Symbol 2, ...), Effect (Effect 1, Effect 2, ...), Character (Character 1, Character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls Design 1, Number of reserved balls Symbol 2, ..., Error Detailed drawing information (detailed information) of the sprite is described for each sprite such as (design). In addition, transfer data information for transferring predetermined image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 to the image controller 237 is also described in the drawing list.

The detailed drawing information (detailed information) of each sprite includes information indicating the RAM type (resident video RAM 235 or normal video RAM 236) in which the image data of the corresponding sprite (display object) is stored, and the information thereof. The address is described, and the image controller 237 acquires the image data of the sprite from the memory area specified by the RAM type and the address. Further, the detailed drawing information (detailed information) includes display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information, and filter specification information, and various image controllers 237 are used. A standard image generated from the image data of the sprite read from the video RAM is subjected to enlargement / reduction processing according to the enlargement ratio, rotation processing according to the rotation angle, and translucent according to the semitransparent value. Performs conversion processing, synthesizes with other sprites according to α blending information, performs color tone correction processing according to color information, and performs filtering processing by the method specified by that information according to filter specification information. Then, the image obtained by performing various processing on the display position indicated by the display position coordinates is drawn. Then, the drawn image is expanded by the image controller 237 into either the first frame buffer 236b or the second frame buffer 236c specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j.

In the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d, the MPU 231 sets the drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f and the content of other images to be drawn (for example, a hold for displaying a hold ball number symbol). Based on the image, warning image notifying the occurrence of an error, etc.), detailed drawing information (detailed information) for all sprites used for drawing one frame of image is generated, and the detailed information is generated for each sprite. Create a drawing list by sorting.

Here, among the detailed information of each sprite, the storage RAM type and address of the sprite (display object) data are the sprite type specified in the display data table and the sprite type specified from the contents of other images. Generated accordingly. That is, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 depends on the sprite type. Therefore, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified, and such information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

Further, the MPU 231 is defined in the display data table for other information (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information, color information and filter designation information) among the detailed information of each sprite. Copy those information as it is.

Further, when generating the drawing list, the MPU 231 rearranges the sprites to be arranged on the back side to the sprites to be arranged on the front side in the image for one frame, and detailed drawing information for each sprite. Describe (detailed information). That is, in the drawing list, detailed information corresponding to the back image is first described, and then the third symbol (symbol 1, symbol 2, ...), effect (effect 1, effect 2, ...), character. Detailed information corresponding to each sprite is described in the order of (character 1, character 2, ..., Number of reserved balls symbol 1, number of reserved balls symbol 2, ..., error symbol).

The image controller 237 executes drawing processing of each sprite in the order described in the drawing list, and expands the drawn sprites by overwriting in the frame buffer. Therefore, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

Further, when the transfer data information is described in the transfer data table stored in the transfer data table buffer 233e at the address indicated by the pointer 233f, the MPU 231 describes the transfer data information (character in which the transfer target image data is stored). The storage source start address and storage source final address in ROM 234 and the storage destination start address of the sub-area provided in the image storage area 236a to store the transfer target image data) are added to the end of the drawing list. If the drawing list includes this transfer data information, the image controller 237 creates an image from a predetermined area (the area indicated by the storage source start address and the storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 based on the transfer data information. The data is read out, and the image data to be transferred is transferred to a predetermined sub-area (storage destination address) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

The timekeeping counter 233h is a counter that counts the effect time of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d. The MPU 231 stores one display data table in the display data table buffer 233d, and sets time data indicating the effect time of the effect displayed based on the display data table. This time data is a value obtained by dividing the effect time by the image display time for one frame (20 milliseconds in this embodiment) in the third symbol display device 81.

Then, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed (FIG. 67 (b). ) Is executed, the clock counter 233h is decremented by 1 (see S6207 in FIG. 73). As a result, when the value of the timekeeping counter 233h becomes 0 or less, the MPU 231 determines that the effect displayed by the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d has ended, and performs the effect in accordance with the end of the effect. Perform various processes that should be performed.

The stored image data determination flag 233i stores the image data corresponding to the sprite in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for all the sprites whose corresponding image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235. It is a flag indicating the storage state indicating whether or not it is present.

The stored image data discrimination flag 233i is generated by the initial setting process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) executed by the MPU 231 in the main process when the power is turned on. The stored image data determination flag 233i generated here is set to "off" indicating that the stored state for all sprites is not stored in the image storage area 236a.

Then, the stored image data discrimination flag 233i is updated when a transfer instruction of the transfer target image data corresponding to one sprite is set in the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) executed by the MPU 231. Will be. In this update, the storage state corresponding to one sprite for which the transfer instruction is set is set to "on" indicating that the corresponding image data is stored in the image storage area 236a. Further, the image data of the other sprites that are to be stored in the sub-area of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite is always in the unstored state by storing the image data of the one sprite. Therefore, set the storage state corresponding to other sprites to "off".

Further, the MPU 231 refers to the stored image data determination flag 233i when transferring the image data of the sprite whose image data is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, and of the sprite to be transferred. It is determined whether or not the image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 235 (see S6713 in FIG. 77). Then, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "off" and the corresponding image data is not stored in the image storage area 236a, a transfer instruction for the image data is set (see S6714 in FIG. 77). , The image controller 237 is made to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a. On the other hand, if the storage state corresponding to the sprite to be transferred is "on", the corresponding image data is already stored in the image storage area 236a, so the transfer process of the image data is stopped. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reduce the processing load in each part of the display control device 114, and reduce the traffic on the bus line 240. it can.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is a frame buffer (hereinafter referred to as “drawing target buffer”) that expands the image drawn by the image controller 237 from the two frame buffers (first frame buffer 236b and second frame buffer 236c). When the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the first frame buffer 236b is specified as the drawing target buffer, and when it is 1, the second frame buffer 236c is specified. Then, the information of the designated drawing target buffer is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list (see S6802 in FIG. 78).

As a result, the image controller 237 executes a drawing process of expanding the image drawn based on the drawing list on the designated drawing target buffer. Further, the image controller 237 reads out the previously expanded drawing image information from the frame buffer different from the drawing target buffer in parallel with the drawing process, and together with the drive signal, displays the image on the third symbol display device 81. By transferring the information, a display process for displaying an image on the third symbol display device 81 is executed.

The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated in accordance with the drawing target buffer information being transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing list. This update is performed by inverting the value of the drawing target buffer flag 233j, that is, setting it to "1" if the value is "0" and "0" if the value is "1". Is done by. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted. Further, the drawing list is transmitted by the V interrupt executed by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. Each time the drawing process of the process (see FIG. 67 (b)) is executed, it is performed (see S6802 of FIG. 78).

That is, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and the image for one frame is expanded. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the image information of the above is read. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. To.

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. As a result, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. To. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately alternating and specifying, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while drawing the image for one frame.

<Regarding the control process of the main control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowcharts of FIGS. 33 to 47. The processing of the MPU 201 is roughly divided into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on, a main process that is executed after the start-up process, and a timer that is started periodically (at intervals of 2 ms in this embodiment). There are an interrupt process and an NMI interrupt process activated by inputting a power failure signal SG1 to the NMI terminal. For convenience of explanation, the timer interrupt process and the NMI interrupt process are first described, and then the start-up process is performed. And the main process will be explained.

FIG. 33 is a flowchart showing a timer interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. The timer interrupt process is, for example, a periodic process executed every 2 milliseconds. In the timer interrupt process, first, the read process of various winning switches is executed (S101). That is, the state of various switches connected to the main control device 110 is read, the state of the switch is determined, and the detection information (winning detection information) is saved.

Next, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S102). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (300 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the updated value of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203. Similarly, the second initial value random number counter CINI2 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0 and the updated value of the second initial value random number counter CINI2. Is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Further, the first hit random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second hit random number counter C4 are updated (S103). Specifically, the first per random number counter C1, the first per type counter C2, the stop type selection counter C3, and the second per random number counter C4 are each added by 1, and their counter values are the maximum values (in the present embodiment). When they reach 300, 99, 239, 239), they clear to 0, respectively. Then, the updated values of the counters C1 to C4 are stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

Next, in addition to the process for displaying on the first symbol display device 37, the special symbol variation process for setting the variation pattern of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 is executed (S104). After that, the start winning process associated with the winning (starting winning) in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 is executed (S105). The details of the special symbol variation process and the start winning process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 34 to 37.

After the start winning process is executed, the normal symbol variation process, which is a process for displaying on the second symbol display device, is executed (S106), and the through is accompanied by the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67. The gate passage process is executed (S107). The details of the normal symbol variation processing and the through-gate passage processing will be described later with reference to FIGS. 38 and 39, respectively. After executing the through-gate passage process, the launch control process is executed (S108), and other processes to be executed periodically are executed (S109) to end the timer interrupt process. In the launch control process, the touch sensor 51a detects that the player is touching the operation handle 51, and the launch stop switch 51b for stopping the launch is not operated. It is a process to determine whether to turn on / off the firing. The main control device 110 instructs the launch control device 112 to launch the ball when the launch of the ball is on.

Next, the special symbol variation processing (S104) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. FIG. 34 is a flowchart showing this special symbol variation processing (S104). This special symbol variation processing (S104) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), and the variation display of the special symbol (first symbol) performed by the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device. This is a process for controlling the variation display of the third symbol performed in 81.

In this special symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is currently in the jackpot (S201). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. As a result of the determination, if the special symbol is a big hit (S201: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

If it is not during the big hit of the special symbol (S201: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202), and the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing. If not (S202: No), the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e (the number of hold counts N2 of the variation display in the special symbol) is acquired (S203). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is larger than 0 (S204).

If the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is not 0 (S204: Yes), the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is subtracted by 1 (S205) and changed by calculation. A hold ball number command (special figure 2 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e is set (S206). The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the values of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e from the hold ball number command, and extracts the extracted values from the RAM 223. It is stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 223b and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 223c, respectively.

After the special figure 2 reserved ball number command is set by the process of S206, the data stored in the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b is shifted (S207). In the process of S207, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the special symbol 2 hold ball storage area 203b is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the first symbol display device 37 executes a special symbol variation start process for starting the variation display (S213). The special symbol change start processing will be described later with reference to FIG. 35.

On the other hand, in the processing of S204, when it is determined that the value (N2) of the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e is 0 (S204: No), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d. (S208), and it is determined whether the value (N1) of the acquired special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is larger than 0 (S209). If it is determined by the process of S209 that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 0 (S209: No), this process is terminated.

On the other hand, when it is determined that the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is not 0 (S209: Yes), the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d is subtracted by 1 (S210). , The hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S211). After setting the special figure 1 reserved ball number command by the process of S211 (S212), the data stored in the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a is shifted (S212), and the process shifts to S213.

In the process of S202, if the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is changing (S202: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 has elapsed. (S214). The fluctuation time of the fluctuation display executed by the first symbol display device 37 is determined according to the fluctuation pattern selected by the fluctuation type counter CS1 (determined according to the fluctuation pattern command), and this fluctuation time is determined. If (S214: No) has not elapsed, this process ends as it is.

On the other hand, in the process of S214, when it is determined that the fluctuation time has elapsed (S214: Yes), the display mode corresponding to the stop symbol of the first symbol display device 37 is set (S215). The stop symbol is set in advance by the special symbol variation start process (S213) described later with reference to FIG. 35. When this special symbol change start process is executed, a lottery of special symbols is performed based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a or the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. Be told. More specifically, whether or not it is a big hit of a special symbol is determined according to the value of the random number counter C1 per first, and if it is a big hit of a special symbol, it depends on the value of the first hit type counter C2. It is determined whether the jackpot is A, the jackpot B, or the jackpot C.

In the present embodiment, when the jackpot A is reached, the blue LED is turned on in the first symbol display device 37, and when the jackpot B is reached, the red LED is turned on. If the jackpot is C, the red LED is turned on, and if it is off, the green LED is turned on. The LED display is turned off when the next fluctuation display is started, but it may be turned on only for a few seconds after the fluctuation is stopped.

After the processing of S215 is completed, when the variation display being executed by the first symbol display device 37 is started, the lottery result (current lottery result) of the special symbol performed by the special symbol variation start processing is displayed. It is determined whether it is a big hit of a special symbol (S216). If the result of this lottery is a jackpot of a special symbol (S216: Yes), an opening scenario of a specific winning opening is set (S217) based on the jackpot type, and then the start of the jackpot is set (S218). In addition, the opening scenario specifically shows the setting of the opening pattern of the specific winning opening 65a. That is, in the 1st to 11th rounds and the 13th to 15th rounds, the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened for a predetermined period (until 30 seconds elapse or until 10 balls win), and in the 12th round, It is shown that the specific winning opening 65a is set to be opened in a pattern (see FIG. 16) according to the jackpot type. When the processing of S218 is completed, the probability variation flag 203g is set to off (S219). Next, the time saving and medium counter 203h is set to 0 (S220), and the process proceeds to S221.

On the other hand, in the processing of S216, if the result of the lottery this time is out of order (S216: No), it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S222), and the value is not 1 or more (that is, 0). If it is determined (S222: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203h is 1 or more (S222: Yes), the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is subtracted by 1 (S223). Next, it is determined whether the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0 (S224), and if it is determined that the value is larger than 0 (S224: No), the process proceeds to S221. On the other hand, when it is determined that the time saving / medium counter 203h is 0 (S224: Yes), the process proceeds to S221.

In the process of S221, a stop command is set (S221). Then, this process ends.

Next, the special symbol variation start process (S213) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 35. FIG. 35 is a flowchart showing the special symbol variation start processing (S213). This special symbol variation start process (S213) is a process executed in the special symbol variation process (see FIG. 34) of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is special with the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a. Based on the values of various counters stored in the execution area common to the symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b, a lottery (win / fail judgment) of "special symbol jackpot" or "special symbol omission" is performed, and the first This is a process for determining an effect pattern (variation effect pattern) of the variation effect performed by the symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81.

In the special symbol fluctuation start processing, first, the first random number counter C1 and the first type counter C2 stored in the common execution area of the special symbol 1 reserved ball storage area 203a and the special symbol 2 reserved ball storage area 203b. , And each value of the stop type selection counter C3 is acquired (S301).

Next, it is determined whether or not the probability variation flag 203g of the RAM 203 is on (S302), and if it is on (S302: Yes), the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the value for high probability. Based on the special symbol jackpot random number table, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a jackpot is acquired from the first random number table 202a (S303). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the 10 random number values defined in the first random number table 202a one by one. As described above, 10 random numbers of "0 to 9" are set as the big hit random numbers of the special symbol, and the value of the first random number counter C1 and the random number values of these hits match. If so, it is determined that the special symbol is a big hit. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

In the present embodiment, the lottery for the special symbol 1 and the lottery for the special symbol 2 share the same judgment value as a big hit, but depending on whether the lottery for the special symbol 1 or the lottery for the special symbol 2 is used. It may be a different random value. With this configuration, the random number value determined to be out of order in the first special symbol is determined to be a hit in the second special symbol, and the bias of the jackpot can be suppressed.

Further, in the present embodiment, the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 are set to the same number of judgment values to be big hits, but the lottery of the special symbol 1 and the lottery of the special symbol 2 The number of judgment values that are big hits may be different. By configuring in this way, the probability of a big hit can be made different between the first special symbol and the second special symbol, and when the lottery is executed with the special symbol having the higher jackpot probability, the player It is possible to have expectations for a big hit.

On the other hand, in the processing of S302, when it is determined that the probability variation flag 203g is not on (that is, it is off) (S302: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state (low probability gaming state) of the special symbol. Based on the value of the first random number counter C1 acquired in the process of S301 and the first random number table 202a for low probability, the lottery result of whether or not the special symbol is a big hit is acquired (S304). Specifically, the value of the first random number counter C1 is compared with the random number value of 1 stored in the first random number table 202a for low probability. As a random number value that becomes a big hit of a special symbol, one of "200" is set, and when the value of the random number counter C1 per first and the random number value that becomes this hit match, the big hit of the special symbol Is determined to be. After obtaining the lottery result of the special symbol, the process proceeds to S305.

Then, it is determined whether the lottery result of the special symbol acquired by the processing of S303 or S304 is a jackpot of the special symbol (S305), and if it is determined to be a jackpot of the special symbol (S305: Yes). , A display mode at the time of a big hit indicating a big hit is set (S306). More specifically, the value of the first hit type counter C2 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the first hit type selection table 202b, and the jackpot of three types of special symbols (big hit). It is determined what type of jackpot is among A, jackpot B, and jackpot C).

In the process of S306, the display mode (lighting state of the LED 37a) of the first symbol display device 37 is set according to the determined jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, and jackpot C). Further, the jackpot type (big hit A, jackpot B, and jackpot C) is set as the stop type so that the stop symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of big hit is determined (S307). When the variation pattern is set in the process of S307, the variation time (display time) of the variation effect in the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the third symbol display device 81 stops at the jackpot symbol. The fluctuation time of the symbol is determined. At this time, the value of the variation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol variation such as normal reach and super reach is determined based on the value of the variation type counter CS1. As described above, the relationship between the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 and the fluctuation time is defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 20d.

The fluctuation patterns defined in the fluctuation pattern selection table 202d include, for example, "disengagement (for long time)", "disengagement (for short time)", "disappearance", and "disengagement" as fluctuation patterns for disengagement. Various types of "normal reach", various types of "outside super reach", and various types of "outside chance reach" are stipulated. In addition, various types of "shared normal reach", various "shared super reach", various "shared chance reach", and various "shared special reach" are defined as fluctuation patterns shared by jackpot A, jackpot B, and jackpot C.

On the other hand, in the process of S305, when it is determined that the special symbol is out of alignment (S305: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S308). In the process of S308, the display mode of the first symbol display device 37 is set to the display mode corresponding to the outlier symbol, and the value of the stop type selection counter C3 stored in the execution area of the special symbol hold ball storage area 203a is set. Based on this, as the stop type to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, whether it is out of reach or out of reach is set.

Here, if the pachinko machine 10 is in a probabilistic state of a special symbol, the value of the stop type selection counter C3 acquired in the process of S301 is compared with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for high probability. Then, set the stop type. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 89", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "90 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set. On the other hand, if the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the special symbol, the stop type is set by comparing the value of the stop type selection counter C3 with the random number value stored in the stop type selection table for low probability. To do. Specifically, if the value of the stop type selection counter C3 is in the range of "0 to 79", a complete deviation is set, and if it is in the range of "80 to 97", a reach other than the front and rear deviation is set, and "98". If it is ", 99", the front-back off reach is set.

Next, the fluctuation pattern at the time of disconnection is determined (S309). Here, the display time of the first symbol display device 37 is set, and the fluctuation time of the third symbol until the third symbol display device 81 stops at the off symbol is determined. At this time, similarly to the processing of S307, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 stored in the counter buffer of the RAM 203 is confirmed, and the fluctuation time of the symbol fluctuation such as normal reach and super reach is confirmed based on the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1. To determine.

When the process of S307 or the process of S309 is completed, next, a variation pattern command for notifying the display control device 114 of the variation pattern determined by the process of S307 or the process of S309 is set (S310). Next, a stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type set in the process of S306 or S308 is set (S311). These fluctuation pattern commands and stop type commands are stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 42). Will be sent. The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the stop type command as it is to the display control device 114. When the processing of S311 is completed, the process returns to the special symbol variation processing.

Next, the start winning process (S105) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 36. FIG. 36 is a flowchart showing this start winning process (S105). This start winning process (S105) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and determines whether or not there is a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 or the second ball opening 640. , This is a process for acquiring various random number counters and executing a hold process for the value when there is a start prize.

When the start winning process is executed, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has won a prize (starting prize) in the first ball opening 64 (S401). Here, the ball entering the first ball entry port 64 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has won the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes), the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d (the number of times of holding the variable display in the special symbol N1) is acquired (S402). ). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S403).

Then, whether or not there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: No), or even if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64, the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is 4. If it is not less than (S403: No), the process proceeds to S407. On the other hand, if there is a prize in the first ball opening 64 (S401: Yes) and the value (N1) of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is less than 4 (S403: Yes), the special symbol 1 is reserved. The value (N1) of the ball counter 203d is added by 1 (S404). Then, a hold ball number command (special figure 1 hold ball number command) indicating the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d changed by the calculation is set (S405).

The reserved ball count command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is executed in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) to be executed later by the MPU 201. , Is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the hold ball number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the value of the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d from the hold ball number command, and transfers the extracted value to the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223. Store.

After setting the hold ball number command by the processing of S405, each value of the first random number counter C1, the first hit type counter C2, and the stop type selection counter C3 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set. , RAM 203 is stored in the first free holding area (holding first area to holding fourth area) of the holding ball storage area 203a (S406). In the process of S406, the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, in each of the processes of S407 to S412, the same process as that of each of the processes of S401 to S406 is executed for the winning of the second entrance 640. The only difference between the processes of S407 to S412 is that the process of holding the reserved ball corresponding to the winning of the second ball opening 640 is executed, and the other processes are different from the processes of S401 to S406. Since they are the same, detailed description thereof will be omitted. When each process of S407 to S412 is completed, the look-ahead process is executed (S413), and the main process is completed.

Next, the look-ahead process (S413) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 37. FIG. 37 is a flowchart showing this look-ahead process (S413). This look-ahead process (S413) is executed in the start winning process (see FIG. 36).

In this look-ahead processing, first, it is determined whether or not there is a new prize in the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640 (S501), and any of the first entry opening 64 and the second entry opening 640. If there is no new prize (S501: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a new prize in the first entrance 64 or the second entrance 640 (S501: Yes), whether or not the game state at the start of the fluctuation is the probability change state of the special symbol. If the determination is made (S502) and the special symbol is in a probabilistic state (S502: Yes), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for high probability (S503), and the process shifts to S505.

In the process of S502, when it is determined that the game state is not the probabilistic state of the special symbol (S502: No), the lottery result is acquired based on the first random number table for the low probability time (S504), and the process is performed in S505. Move to. In the process of S505, each value of the first hit type counter C2 and the stop type selection counter C3, which are the determination results of the jackpot, is stored in the special symbol holding ball storage area (S505). Next, a winning information command including the jackpot determination result is set (S506), and this process is terminated.

Next, the normal symbol variation processing (S106) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is a flowchart showing this normal symbol variation processing (S106). This normal symbol variation process (S106) is executed in the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), and is associated with the variation display of the second symbol performed by the second symbol display device 83 and the second entry port 640. This is a process for controlling the opening time of the electric accessory.

In this normal symbol variation processing, first, it is determined whether or not the normal symbol (second symbol) is currently being hit (S601). As for the hitting of the normal symbol (second symbol), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is performed while the display indicating the hit is being made on the second symbol display device 83. Includes during and during the process. As a result of the determination, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is hit (S601: Yes), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the normal symbol (second symbol) is not hit (S601: No), it is determined whether or not the display mode of the second symbol display device 83 is changing (S602), and the second symbol display device If the display mode of is not changing (S602: No), the value of the normal symbol holding ball number counter 203f (the number of holdings of the variable display in the normal symbol M) is acquired (S603). Next, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is larger than 0 (S604), and if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is 0 (S604: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is not 0 (S604: Yes), the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball counter 203f is subtracted by 1 (S605).

Next, the data stored in the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is shifted (S606). In the process of S606, the data stored in the hold 1st area to the hold 4th area of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c is sequentially shifted to the execution area side. More specifically, within each area, such as hold 1st area → execution area, hold 2nd area → hold 1st area, hold 3rd area → hold 2nd area, hold 4th area → hold 3rd area, and so on. Shift the data. After shifting the data, the value of the second random number counter C4 stored in the execution area of the normal symbol holding ball storage area 203c is acquired (S607).

Next, it is determined whether or not the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608), and if it is determined that the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: Yes), the second acquired by the process of S607. Based on the value of the hit random number counter C4 and the second hit random number table 202c for high probability, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S609). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table 202c for high probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-204", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4,205-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c2 in FIG. 20 (c)).

In the processing of S608, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S608: No), the pachinko machine 10 is in the normal state of the normal symbol, so the value of the second random number counter C4 acquired in the processing of S607. And, based on the second hit random number table for the low probability time, the lottery result of whether or not the normal symbol is hit is acquired (S611). Specifically, the value of the second random number counter C4 is compared with the random number value stored in the second random number table for low probability. As described above, if the value of the second hit type counter C4 is in the range of "5-28", it is determined that the hit is a normal symbol, and if it is in the range of "0-4, 29-239", it is determined. It is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (see 202c1 in FIG. 20 (c)).

Next, it is determined whether the lottery result of the ordinary symbol acquired by the processing of S609 or S610 is a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611), and if it is determined to be a hit of the ordinary symbol (S611: Yes). , The display mode at the time of hit is set (S612). In the process of S612, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "○" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol).

Then, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: Yes), the electric combination attached to the second entrance 640. The opening period of the object 640a is set to 1 second, the number of times the object is opened is set to 2 (S614), and the process proceeds to S617. In the processing of S613, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S613: No), the opening period of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set to 0.2 seconds, and the opening period thereof is set to 0.2 seconds. The number of times of opening is set to 1 (S615), and the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S611, when it is determined that the normal symbol is out of alignment (S611: No), the display mode at the time of deviation is set (S616). In the process of S616, after the variation display in the second symbol display device is completed, the symbol "x" is set to be lit and displayed as the stop symbol (second symbol). When the setting of the display mode at the time of disconnection is completed, the process proceeds to S617.

In the process of S617, it is determined whether the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617), and if the pachinko machine 10 is in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: Yes), the variation display in the second symbol display device. The fluctuation time of is set to 1 second (S618), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the pachinko machine 10 is not in the time saving state of the normal symbol (S617: No), the variation time of the variation display in the second symbol display device is set to 30 seconds (S619), and this process is terminated. In this way, except during the jackpot of the special symbol, when the normal symbol has a high probability, the variable display time is very short, "30 seconds → 1 second", as compared with the low probability of the normal symbol. Since the opening period of the second entry port 640 is very long, "0.2 seconds x 1 time → 1 second x 2 times", the ball can easily enter the second entry port 640.

In the process of S602, if the display mode of the second symbol display device is changing (S602: Yes), it is determined whether or not the fluctuation time of the variation display executed in the second symbol display device has elapsed (S602: Yes). S622). The fluctuation time here is a time preset by the process of S618 or the process of S619 before the variation display is started in the second symbol display device.

In the process of S622, if the fluctuation time has not elapsed (S622: No), this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S622, if the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display being executed has elapsed (S622: Yes), the stop display of the second symbol display device is set (S623). In the process of S623, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is a win and the display mode is set by the process of S612, the "○" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted display) on the second symbol display device. ) Is set to be done. On the other hand, if the lottery of ordinary symbols is removed and the display mode is set by the process of S616, the "x" symbol as the second symbol is stopped and displayed (lighted up) on the second symbol display device. Is set. When the stop display is set by the process of S623, the variation display in the second symbol display device ends when the second symbol display update process (see S1007) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next. Then, the stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed (lighted) on the second symbol display device in the display mode set in the process of S612 or the process of S616.

Next, when the variable display being executed in the second symbol display device is started, whether the lottery result of the normal symbol (current lottery result) performed by the normal symbol variation process is a hit of the normal symbol. Judgment (S624). If the result of the lottery this time is a hit of a normal symbol (S624: Yes), the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entrance 640 is set (S625), and this process is completed. When the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory 640a is set by the process of S625, the opening / closing of the electric accessory is opened / closed when the electric accessory opening / closing process (see S1005) of the main process (see FIG. 42) is executed next. The control is started, and the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the process of S614 or the process of S615 are completed. On the other hand, in the process of S624, if the result of the lottery this time is out of the normal symbol (S624: No), the process of S625 is skipped and the present process is terminated.

Next, the through-gate passage process (S107) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 39. FIG. 39 is a flowchart showing this through gate passing process (S107). This through gate passing process (S107) is executed in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33), determines whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, and the ball has passed. In this case, it is a process for acquiring and holding the value indicated by the second random number counter C4.

In the through gate passing process, first, it is determined whether or not the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701). Here, the passage of the ball at the normal entry port (through gate) 67 is detected over three timer interrupt processes. Then, when it is determined that the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes), the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f (the number of times the variable display is held in the normal symbol M) is acquired. (S702). Then, it is determined whether or not the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than the upper limit value (4 in this embodiment) (S703).

Whether the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: No), or even if the ball has passed through the normal entry port (through gate) 67, the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f If the value (M) is not less than 4 (S703: No), this process ends. On the other hand, if the ball passes through the normal entry port (through gate) 67 (S701: Yes) and the value (M) of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is less than 4 (S703: Yes), the normal symbol The value (M) of the reserved ball number counter 203f is added by 1 (S704). Then, the value of the second random number counter C4 updated in the processing of S103 of the timer interrupt processing described above is set to the free hold area (hold 1st area to hold 4th area) of the normal symbol hold ball storage area 203c of the RAM 203. It is stored in the first area (S705), and this process is terminated. In the process of S705, the value of the normal symbol reserved ball number counter 203f is referred to, and if the value is 0, the reserved first area is set as the first area. Similarly, if the value is 1, the reserved second area is set as the first area, if the value is 2, the reserved third area is set, and if the value is 3, the held fourth area is set as the first area.

Next, the NMI interrupt process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 40. This NMI interrupt process is a process executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110 when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to a power failure or the like. By this NMI interrupt processing, the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 201 in the main control device 110. Then, the MPU 201 interrupts the control during execution and starts the NMI interrupt process, stores the power failure occurrence information in the RAM 203 (S801) as a setting of the power failure occurrence information, and ends the NMI interrupt process. To do.

The above NMI interrupt process is also executed in the payout control device 111, and the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 213 by the NMI interrupt process. That is, when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the like, the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252 to the NMI terminal of the MPU 211 in the payout control device 111, and the MPU 211 interrupts the control during execution. Then, the NMI interrupt process is started.

Next, with reference to FIG. 41, the start-up process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 when the power is turned on to the main control device 110 will be described. FIG. 41 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started by resetting when the power is turned on. In the start-up process, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S901). In this initial setting process, for example, a predetermined value set in advance is set in the stack pointer. Next, a weight process (1 second in this embodiment) is executed in order to wait for the control device on the sub side (peripheral control device such as the voice lamp control device 113 and the payout control device 111) to be in an operable state. (S902). Then, the access of the RAM 203 is permitted (S903).

After that, it is determined whether or not the RAM erase switch 122 (see FIG. 7) provided in the power supply device 115 is turned on (S904), and if it is turned on (S904: Yes), the process shifts to S910. On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), it is determined whether or not the power cutoff occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905), and if it is not stored (S905: No). Since there is a possibility that the processing at the time of the previous power cutoff did not end normally, the processing is shifted to S910 in this case as well.

If the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S905: Yes), the RAM determination value is calculated (S906), and if the calculated RAM determination value is not normal (S907: No), that is, the calculated RAM If the determination value does not match the RAM determination value saved when the power is cut off, the backed up data is destroyed, and the process is shifted to S910 even in such a case. As will be described later in the process of S1017 in FIG. 42, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value at the work area address of the RAM 203. Instead of this RAM determination value, the effectiveness of the backup may be determined based on whether or not the keyword written in the predetermined area of the RAM 203 is correctly saved.

In the process of S910, a payout initialization command is transmitted in order to initialize the payout control device 111 which is a control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side (S910). Upon receiving this payout initialization command, the payout control device 111 clears an area (work area) other than the stack area of the RAM 213, sets an initial value, and is ready to start payout control of the game ball. After transmitting the payout initialization command, the main control device 110 executes the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, when the RAM data is initialized when the power is turned on, for example, when the hall is open for business, the power is turned on while pressing the RAM erase switch 122. Therefore, if the RAM erase switch 122 is pressed during the start-up process, the RAM initialization process (S911, S912) is executed. Similarly, when the power failure occurrence information is not set, or when a backup abnormality is confirmed by the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.), the initialization process (S911, S912) of the RAM 203 is executed in the same manner. .. In the RAM initialization process (S911, S912), the used area of the RAM 203 is cleared to 0 (S911), and then the initial value of the RAM 203 is set (S912). After the initialization process of the RAM 203 is executed, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are set to be closed (S913). That is, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage device (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) is always closed (that is, the ball is in the storage flow path 700e (see FIG. 3)). It is set so that it cannot pass through). As a result, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the storage devices (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) can always be in a constant state, and the specific general entry port 630 can be used. It is possible to make it difficult for the ball to enter. Therefore, it is possible to optimize the gaming state after the RAM 203 is initialized, and it is possible to prevent the act of initializing the RAM 203 and illegally storing the balls in the specific general entrance 630.

After finishing the process of S912, the operation of the movable valve 750 is set next (S914). In the process of S914, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p for starting the operation control of the movable valve 750 is set to ON. By setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON, the operation control of the movable valve 750 can be performed in the movable valve control process (see S1009 in FIG. 42) of the main process (see FIG. 42) of the main control device 110 described later. To be started. In the present embodiment, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to on in the start-up process S914. For example, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to on every time the start-up process is executed. It may be configured so that the timing is different.

With this configuration, the timing at which the operation control of the movable valve is started can be changed each time the start-up process is executed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operating status of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed period from when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, when a configuration is used in which the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to be on is different in this way, for example, when the RAM 203 is initialized, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to on at the same timing. It is good to do so.

As a method of differently setting the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON as described above, for example, a delay timer for delaying the timing for setting the movable valve initial setting flag 203p to ON is provided, and the start-up process is delayed. The process of executing the timer may be performed. Then, as the delay period set in the delay timer, the values of various counters provided in the main control device 110 are used, the information stored in the storage area updated at any time is used, or the delay period is drawn by lottery. A lottery means for determining may be provided. When the process of S914 is completed, the process proceeds to the process of S915.

On the other hand, if the RAM erase switch 122 is not turned on (S904: No), the power failure occurrence information is stored (S905: Yes), and the RAM determination value (checksum value, etc.) is normal ( S907: Yes), the information on the occurrence of the power failure is cleared while holding the data backed up in the RAM 203 (S908). Next, a payout return command at the time of power recovery for returning the control device (peripheral control device) on the sub side to the gaming state when the drive power is cut off is transmitted (S909), and the process proceeds to S915. Upon receiving this payout return command, the payout control device 111 is in a state where the payout control of the game ball can be started while holding the data stored in the RAM 213.

In the process of S915, a command (state command) for notifying the gaming state at the time of power recovery is output to the voice lamp control device 113 (S915). This state command is a command for notifying whether or not the special symbol is in the probable change state, whether or not the normal symbol is in the time saving state, the number of times of the normal symbol is shortened, and the like. A state command is generated according to the value of the time reduction / medium counter 203h and the state of the probability change flag 203g, and is output to the voice lamp control device 113. By outputting this state command, the recognition of the game state can be matched between the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113. Therefore, the right-handed navigation (see FIG. 5A) is displayed even though the special symbol is in the low probability state, or conversely, the player is in the probabilistic state of the special symbol. It is possible to prevent (suppress) the right-handed warning image (see FIG. 5B) from being displayed when the player strikes right-handed. That is, it is possible to match the gaming state with the effect to be executed.

When the process of S915 is completed, the effect permission command is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 to allow the voice lamp control device 113 and the display control device 114 to execute various effects (S916). Next, the interrupt is permitted (S917), and the process proceeds to the main process described later.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the RAM 203 is not initialized, the data backed up in the RAM 203 is held, so that detailed description is omitted, but the storage device (first storage valve). For the 770a, the second storage valve 771a), and the movable valve 750, continuous operation control is executed from the state before the power is turned off. Therefore, when the power is temporarily turned off due to noise or the like, the game can be continuously executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player.

When the start-up process is executed, the following control different from the present embodiment is performed as the setting of the operation control for the storage device (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) and the movable valve 750. You may do it. First, the startup process is executed to determine whether or not the RAM 203 has been initialized, and if it is determined that the RAM 203 has not been initialized, whether or not the power has been turned off normally. To determine. Thereby, it is specified whether the state when the start-up process is executed is the initialization state, the normal power-on state, or the abnormal power-on state.

Then, in the abnormal power-on state, since it is a temporary power interruption state (instantaneous power state) due to noise or the like, the data backed up in the RAM 203 is used to continue the operation from the state before the power is turned off. Execute control processing. Next, in the case of the normal power-on state, the same process as that executed when the RAM 203 described above is initialized in the present embodiment is executed. Finally, in the initialized state, the storage devices (first storage valve 770a and second storage valve 771a) can pass through the closed state (that is, the storage flow path 700e (see FIG. 3)). The movable valve 750 is set to be in a non-existent state), and the movable valve 750 is set at a specific timing (for example, a delay period of 0 seconds) and at a specific location (for example, a location stored at the beginning) of the movable valve operation scenario table 202f. It is advisable to execute the process so that the operation control is started from.

As a result, in the abnormal power-on state, the game can be continuously executed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player, and in the normal power-on state, the movable valve of the movable valve is executed every time the start-up process is executed. The timing at which the operation control is started can be changed. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the operating status of the movable valve 750 from being grasped based on the elapsed period from when the power supply of the pachinko machine 10 is turned on. Further, in the initialized state, the movable valve 750 is controlled by a specific operation content, so that it can be easily set when it is desired to operate the movable valve 750 with the same content for a plurality of pachinko machines 10. it can.

Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the main process executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 after the start-up process described above will be described. FIG. 42 is a flowchart showing this main process. In this main process, the main process of the game is executed. As an outline, each process of S1001 to S1010 is executed as a periodic process having a cycle of 4 ms, and the counter update process of S1013 and S1014 is executed in the remaining time.

In the main process, first, during the execution of the timer interrupt process (see FIG. 33), the output data such as commands stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203 is sent to each control device (periphery) on the sub side. The external output process to be transmitted to the control device) is executed (S1001). Specifically, the presence or absence of the winning detection information detected by the switch reading process of S101 in the timer interrupt processing (see FIG. 33) is determined, and if the winning detection information is present, the number of acquired balls corresponds to the payout control device 111. Send a prize ball command to do. Further, the hold ball number command set in the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 34) and the start winning processing (see FIG. 36) is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, by this external output processing, the variation pattern command, the stop type command, and the like necessary for the variation display of the third symbol by the third symbol display device 81 are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. Further, the opening command, the number of rounds command, and the ending command set in the jackpot control process (see FIG. 43) are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113. In addition, when launching a ball, a ball launch signal is transmitted to the launch control device 112.

Next, the value of the fluctuation type counter CS1 is updated (S1002). Specifically, the variation type counter CS1 is added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (198 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. Then, the update value of the variation type counter CS1 is stored in the corresponding buffer area of the RAM 203.

When the update of the variable type counter CS1 is completed, the prize ball counting signal and the payout abnormality signal received from the payout control device 111 are read (S1003), and then, when the special symbol is in the jackpot state, the jackpot effect is executed or variable. A jackpot control process for opening or closing the specific winning opening 65a of the winning device 65 is executed (S1004). In the jackpot control process, the opening and closing of the specific winning opening 65a are set according to the opening scenario set by the processing of S217 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 34) for each round of the jackpot state. In the present embodiment, the jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process, but it may be executed in the timer interrupt process.

Next, the electric accessory opening / closing process for controlling the opening / closing of the electric accessory 640a attached to the second entry port 640 is executed (S1005). In the electric accessory opening / closing process, when the opening / closing control start of the electric accessory is set by the process of S625 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the opening / closing control of the electric accessory is started. The opening / closing control of the electric accessory is continued until the opening time and the number of times of opening set in the processing of S614 or the processing of S615 in the normal symbol variation processing are completed.

Next, the first symbol display update process for updating the display of the first symbol display device 37 is executed (S1006). In the first symbol display update process, when a variation pattern is set by the process of S307 or the process of S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35), the variation display according to the variation pattern is displayed on the first symbol. Start at device 37. In the present embodiment, among the LEDs of the first symbol display device 37, from the start of fluctuation until the fluctuation time elapses, for example, if the currently lit LED is red, the red LED is turned off. At the same time, turn on the green LED, if the green LED is on, turn off the green LED and turn on the blue LED, and if the blue LED is on, turn off the blue LED. At the same time, turn on the red LED.

The main process is executed every 4 milliseconds, but if the LED lighting color is changed each time the main process is executed, the player cannot confirm the change in the LED lighting color. Therefore, a counter (not shown) is counted by 1 each time the main process is executed so that the player can confirm the change in the lighting color of the LED, and when the counter reaches 100, the LED is displayed. Change the lighting color of. That is, the lighting color of the LED is changed every 0.4 s. The value of the counter is reset to 0 when the lighting color of the LED is changed.

Further, in the first symbol display update process, when the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern set by the processes of S307 and S309 of the special symbol variation start process (see FIG. 35) ends, the first symbol display device 37 The executed variation display is ended, and the stop symbol (first symbol) is stopped at the first symbol display device 37 in the display mode set by the processing of S306 and S308 of the special symbol variation start processing (see FIG. 35). Display (light up display).

Next, the second symbol display update process for updating the display of the second symbol display device is executed (S1007). In the second symbol display update process, when the variation time of the second symbol is set by the process of S618 or the process of S619 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the variation display is started on the second symbol display device 83. To do. As a result, in the second symbol display device 83, variable display is performed in which the “◯” symbol and the “x” symbol as the second symbol are alternately lit. Further, in the second symbol display update process, when the stop display of the second symbol display device 83 is set by the process of S623 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38), the second symbol display device 83 is executed. The stop symbol (second symbol) is stopped and displayed on the second symbol display device 83 in the display mode set by the process of S612 or the process of S616 of the normal symbol variation process (see FIG. 38) after ending the variable display (see FIG. 38). Lighting display).

After executing the process of S1007, the storage control process is executed (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 44 and 45, but a process for setting the opening and closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is executed.

When the process of S1008 is completed, the movable valve control process is executed (S1009). The movable valve control process (S1009) will be described later with reference to FIG. 46, but the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed or closed based on the setting state of the movable valve initial setting flag 203p. Execute the process to control the release state. Next, when the process of S1009 is completed, the winning process is executed (S1010). The winning process (S1010) will be described later with reference to FIG. 47.

When the processing of S1010 is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011), and if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: No), the power failure monitoring circuit The power failure signal SG1 is not output from 252, and the power supply is not cut off. Therefore, in such a case, it is determined whether or not the execution timing of the next main process has been reached, that is, whether or not a predetermined time (4 msec in the present embodiment) has elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1012). If the predetermined time has already passed (S1012: Yes), the process is shifted to S1001, and each process after S1001 described above is repeatedly executed.

On the other hand, if the predetermined time has not yet elapsed from the start of the main process this time (S1012: No), the first is within the period until the predetermined time is reached, that is, within the remaining time until the next main process is executed. 1 The initial value random number counter CINI1, the second initial value random number counter CINI2, and the variation type counter CS1 are repeatedly updated (S1013, S1014).

First, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are updated (S1013). Specifically, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are added by 1, and when the counter value reaches the maximum value (300, 239 in the present embodiment), it is cleared to 0. .. Then, the updated values of the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 are stored in the corresponding buffer areas of the RAM 203, respectively. Next, the variation type counter CS1 is updated by the same method as the process of S1002 (S1014).

Here, since the execution time of each process of S1001 to S1010 changes according to the state of the game, the remaining time until the execution timing of the next main process is not constant and fluctuates. Therefore, by repeatedly updating the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 using the remaining time, the first initial value random number counter CINI1 and the second initial value random number counter CINI2 (that is, , The initial value of the first random number counter C1 and the initial value of the second random number counter C4) can be randomly updated, and similarly, the variable type counter CS1 can also be updated randomly.

Further, in the process of S1011 if the power outage occurrence information is stored in the RAM 203 (S1011: Yes), the power is cut off due to the occurrence of a power failure or the power is turned off, and the power failure signal SG1 is output from the power failure monitoring circuit 252. As a result, since the NMI interrupt process shown in FIG. 40 has been executed, the process when the power is cut off after S1015 is executed. First, the occurrence of each interrupt process is prohibited (S1015), and a power off command indicating that the power is cut off is issued to other control devices (peripheral control devices such as the payout control device 111 and the voice lamp control device 113). Is transmitted (S1016). Then, the RAM determination value is calculated, the value is saved (S1017), the access of the RAM 203 is prohibited (S1018), and the infinite loop is continued until the power supply is completely shut off and the process cannot be executed. Here, the RAM determination value is, for example, a checksum value in the backed up stack area and work area of the RAM 203.

The processing of S1011 is performed at the end of a series of processing corresponding to the state change of the game performed in S1001 to S1010, or at the end of one cycle of the processing of S1013 and S1014 performed within the remaining time. It is running. Therefore, in the main process of the main control device 110, the power off occurrence information is confirmed at the timing when each setting is completed. Therefore, when returning from the power cut state, the process is performed after the start-up process is completed. It can be started from the process of S1001. That is, the process can be started from the process of S1001 as in the case of being initialized in the start-up process. Therefore, in the process when the power is cut off, the stack pointer is used in the initial setting process (S901) without saving the contents of each register used by the MPU 201 to the stack area or saving the value of the stack pointer. By setting a predetermined value (initial value), the process of S1001 can be started. Therefore, the control load of the main control device 110 can be reduced, and accurate control can be performed without the main control device 110 malfunctioning or running out of control.

Next, the jackpot control process (S1004) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a flowchart showing this jackpot control process (S1004). This jackpot control process (S1004) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and when the pachinko machine 10 is in the jackpot state of a special symbol, various effects according to the jackpot are executed and the specific winning opening 65a It is a process for opening or closing.

In the jackpot control process, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101). Specifically, if the processing of S218 of the special symbol variation processing (see FIG. 34) is executed and the start of the jackpot of the special symbol is set, it is determined that the jackpot of the special symbol is started. In the process of S1101, when the jackpot of the special symbol is started (S1101: Yes), the opening command is set (S1102), and this process is terminated.

The opening command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. Upon receiving the opening command, the voice lamp control device 113 transmits the display opening command to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display opening command, the third symbol display device 81 starts the opening effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1101, if the jackpot of the special symbol is not started (S1101: No), it is determined whether the jackpot of the special symbol is in progress (S1103). Among the special symbol jackpots, the first symbol display device 37 and the third symbol display device 81 are displaying the special symbol jackpot (including during the special symbol jackpot game), and the special symbol. This includes the middle of a predetermined time after the end of the jackpot game. In the process of S1103, if the special symbol is not a big hit (S1103: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if it is determined by the processing of S1103 that the special symbol is being hit (S1103: Yes), then it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new round (S1104). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of a new round (S1104: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is opened (S1105), and a round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is set (S1106). After setting the number of rounds command, this process ends. The round number command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is an audio lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the round number command, the voice lamp control device 113 extracts the round number from the round number command. Then, a display round number command corresponding to the extracted round number is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display control device 114 receives the display round number command, the third symbol display device 81 starts a new round effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S1104, when it is determined that it is not the start timing of a new round (S1104: No), it is determined whether the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107). Specifically, when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses after opening the specific winning opening 65a, or after opening the specific winning opening (large opening) 65a, a predetermined number of balls (for example, 10) are used. ) If the above prizes are won, it is judged that the closing conditions have been met.

If it is determined in the process of S1107 that the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is satisfied (S1107: Yes), the specific winning opening 65a is closed (S1108), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, when the closing condition of the specific winning opening 65a is not satisfied (S1107: No), it is determined whether it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109). Specifically, when the special gaming state (all 16 rounds or all 8 rounds) in which a larger amount of prize balls are paid out than in the normal state is completed, it is determined that the ending effect is started.

In the process of S1109, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the ending effect (S1109: Yes), the ending command is set (S1110). The ending command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the ending command, the voice lamp control device 113 selects the display mode of the ending effect based on the winning information stored in the command storage area 223a of the RAM 223. Then, a display ending command corresponding to the display mode of the selected ending effect is transmitted to the display control device 114. When the display ending command is received by the display control device 114, the ending effect is started in the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S1110 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the current jackpot is jackpot A (S1111), and if it is jackpot A (S1111: Yes), the time is shortened to the normal symbol after the jackpot A is completed. In order to make the transition, the value of the time saving / medium counter 203h is set to 100 (S1112), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S1111, when it is determined that the current jackpot is not the jackpot A (that is, the jackpot is B or C) (S1111: No), the special symbol is in a high probability state after the jackpot B or C ends. In order to make the transition, the probability variation flag 203g is set to on (S1113), and this process ends.

Next, the storage control process (S1008) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing this storage control process (S1008). This storage control process (S1008) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a. As described above with reference to FIG. 4, in the present embodiment, a plurality of spheres (upper limit 5) stored in the storage flow path 700e are operated on the second frame button (release button) 22b. The operations of the first storage valve 770a of the first storage device 770 and the second storage valve 771a of the second storage device 771 are controlled so as to flow down one by one. With this configuration, the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e can flow down in accordance with the timing of the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b performed by the player. Therefore, the player can enthusiastically operate the second frame button (release button) 22b. Further, in the present embodiment, as described above with reference to FIG. 6, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are different from each other by driving one electric drive source (storage valve solenoid 770b). It has a configuration in which it is opened (released) and closed (non-released) at a timing (predetermined timing). With such a configuration, the number of parts can be reduced as compared with the case where an electric drive source is provided for each storage valve, and cost reduction and space saving of the device can be achieved.

In the storage control process, first, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is on (S1201), and when it is determined that the release flag 203s is not on (that is, it is off) (S1201: No), the first storage valve Since it means that the 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed (the first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771 are set to be able to store balls), the second frame button (release) is then set. It is determined whether or not the player presses (operates) the button) 22b (S1202). That is, it is determined whether or not the pressing detection signal is detected.

In the process of S1202, when it is determined that the pressing (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b is not detected (that is, the pressing detection signal is not detected) (S1202: No), the first In order to keep the storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a in the closed state, this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the push (operation) of the second frame button (release button) 22b is detected (that is, the push detection signal is detected) (S1202: Yes), the release button operation command is set (S1203). ). Then, in order to indicate that the opening of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set, the release flag 203k is set to ON (S1204), and the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are opened. A storage state command corresponding to the open state (release state) of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set in order to notify the voice lamp control device 113 that the state has been reached (S1205). This process ends.

The storage state command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the release state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the back type corresponding to the release state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63 (b), the mode is set so that the characters "gate is open" are displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are in the open state.

On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is ON (S1201: Yes), the storage valve operation process for setting the operation of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is executed. (S1206). The details of the storage valve operation process will be described later with reference to FIG. 45. When the process of S1206 is completed, it is determined whether the release flag 203k is off (S1207), and if it is determined that the release flag 203k is not off (that is, it is on) (S1207: No), the present process is ended. To do.

On the other hand, in the process of S1207, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is on (S1207: Yes), the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are closed (first storage device 770 and second). Since the storage device 771 is set to a state in which balls can be stored), the voice lamp control device 113 is notified that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a have been closed. Therefore, a storage state command corresponding to the closed state of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set (S1208), and this process is terminated.

The storage state mand set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and the voice lamp is stored in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the control device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the storage state command corresponding to the closed state, the voice lamp control device 113 outputs a display rear image change command for setting the rear side type corresponding to the closed state to the display control device 114. The display control device 114 changes the rear image based on the display rear image change command. That is, as shown in FIG. 63A, the mode is set so that the characters "When the button is pressed, the gate is opened!" Are displayed for the small area Ds2. As a result, the player can easily recognize that the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be set to the open state by pressing the second frame button (release button) 22b.

By executing this storage control process, opening or closing of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a can be set according to the operation status of the second frame button (release button) 22b. As a result, by storing the ball in the upper part of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a at an arbitrary timing of the player, the ball enters the out port, and the first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770 and the first. 2 It is possible to switch the state in which the ball that has flowed into (entered) into the storage device 771 flows down toward the specific general entry port 630.

Here, the storage valve operation process (S1206) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 45. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing this storage valve operation process (S1206). This storage valve operation process (S1206) is executed in the storage control process (see FIG. 44), and is a process for setting the operation of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a.

In the storage valve operation process, first, the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to be turned on in the positive direction (S1301), and 1 is added to the operation counter 203j (S1302). Next, it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303). If it is determined in the process of S1303 that the value of the operation counter 203j is 250 (S1303: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to off (S1304), and this process is terminated.

On the other hand, in the process of S1303, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 250 (S1303: No), then it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305). If it is determined in the process of S1305 that the value of the operation counter 203j is 375 (S1305: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to ON in the negative direction (S1306), and this process ends.

In the process of S1305, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 375 (S1305: No), then it is determined whether the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 (S1307). When it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is 500 in the process of S1307 (S1307: Yes), the storage valve solenoid 770b is set to off (S1306). Then, the release flag 203k is set to off (S1309), the value of the operation counter 203j is set to 0 (S1310), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S1307, when it is determined that the value of the operation counter 203j is not 500 (S1307: No), this process is also terminated.

Next, the movable valve control process (S1009) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 46. FIG. 46 is a flowchart showing this movable valve control process (S1009). This movable valve control process (S1009) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for setting the opening and closing of the movable valve 750.

In the movable valve control process, first, it is determined whether or not the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is on (S1201), and when it is determined that the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is on (S1201: Yes), it is movable. The operation scenario is stored in the operation scenario storage area 203i based on the valve operation scenario table 202f (S1402). When the processing of S1403 is completed, the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is set to off (S1403), and the process proceeds to the processing of S1404. On the other hand, in the process of S1201, when it is determined that the movable valve initial setting flag 203p is not on (that is, it is off) (S1201: No), the processes of S1402 and S1403 are skipped, and the process proceeds to S1404.

In the process of S1404, the operation information of the operation scenario is acquired from the operation scenario storage area 203i (S1404), and based on the acquired operation information, it is determined whether or not it is the start timing of a new scenario type (S1405). Then, when it is determined that it is the start timing of the new scenario type (S1405: Yes), the movable valve state command indicating the start of the new scenario type is set (S1406), and the process proceeds to S1407. This movable valve state command is stored in a ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and these commands are transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113 in the process of S1001 of the main process (see FIG. 42). The voice lamp control device 113 transmits the movable valve state command as it is to the display control device 114.

On the other hand, if it is determined in the process of S1405 that it is not the start timing of the new scenario type (S1405: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1407. In the process of S1407, it is determined whether or not it is the closing timing of the movable valve 750 based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404 (S1407). In the process of S1407, if it is determined that the closing timing of the movable valve 750 is (S1407: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is set to ON (S1408), and the process proceeds to S1409.

On the other hand, in the process of S1407, if it is determined that the closing timing of the movable valve 750 is not (S1407: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1409. In the process of S1409, it is determined whether or not it is the opening timing of the movable valve 750 based on the operation information acquired in the process of S1404 (S1409). In the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is the opening timing of the movable valve 750 (S1409: Yes), the movable valve solenoid 751 is set to off (S1410), and the process proceeds to the process of S1411.

On the other hand, in the process of S1409, if it is determined that it is not the opening timing of the movable valve 750 (S1409: No), the process proceeds to the process of S1411. In the process of S1411, the operation counter 203j is added by 1, and this process is terminated.

Next, the winning process (S1010) executed by the MPU 201 in the main control device 110 will be described with reference to the flowchart of FIG. 47. FIG. 47 is a flowchart showing this winning process (S1010). This winning process (S1010) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 42), and is a process for performing control according to the winning of the specific winning opening 65a.

In the winning process, first, it is determined whether or not the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501). When it is determined that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is not on (that is, it is off) (S1501: No), it is determined whether or not the release flag 203k is on (S1502). When it is determined that the release flag 203k is on (S1502: Yes), then it is determined whether or not the first ball passage sensor S3 has detected the passage of the game ball (S1503). When it is determined that the first ball passage sensor S3 has detected the passage of the game ball (S1503: Yes), the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON (S1504), and the process proceeds to S1505. On the other hand, in the process of S1502, when it is determined that the release flag 203k is not on (that is, it is off) (S1502: No), and in the process of S1503, the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the game ball. If it is determined that the process has not been performed (S1503: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S1501 that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1505.

When it is determined in S1501 that the remaining ball timer flag 203m is on (S1501: Yes), and when the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to ON in S1504, the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve Since it means the release period (opening period) of 771a, the release period (opening period) of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is updated by adding 1 to the remaining ball timer 203n for timing (S1505). Then, it is determined whether the value of the remaining ball timer 203n after the update is the upper limit value (that is, whether one second has elapsed since the release of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is set) (S1506). ), When it is determined that the upper limit value is not reached (1 second has not passed) (S1506: No), it is determined whether or not a game ball has entered the specific general entry port 630 (S1507), and the specification is made. When it is determined that no game ball has entered the general entry port 630 (S1507: No), this process ends.

In the process of S1507, when it is determined that the game ball has entered the specific general entry port 630 (S1507: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S1508. On the other hand, in the process of S1506, when it is determined that the value of the remaining ball timer 203n is the upper limit value (S1506: Yes), an error command is set (S1510), and the process proceeds to the process of S1508. The error command set here is stored in the ring buffer for command transmission provided in the RAM 203, and is controlled by the voice lamp in the external output process (S1001) of the main process (see FIG. 42) executed by the MPU 201. It is transmitted to the device 113. When the voice lamp control device 113 receives the error command, an error display (for example, displaying characters of a winning number mismatch error) is set, and an error signal output is set for the hall computer. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the specific general entrance 630 from illegally winning a game ball.

In the process of S1508, the remaining ball timer flag 203m is set to off (S1508), and the remaining ball timer 203n is reset to the initial value 0 (S1509). After that, this process ends.

<Regarding the control process of the audio lamp control device in the first embodiment>
Next, each control process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 48 to 63. The processing of the MPU 221 is roughly classified into a start-up process that is started when the power is turned on and a main process that is executed after the start-up process.

First, the start-up process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. FIG. 48 is a flowchart showing this start-up process. This start-up process is started when the power is turned on.

When the start-up process is executed, first, the initial setting process associated with the power-on is executed (S2001). Specifically, a predetermined value is set in the stack pointer. After that, depending on whether or not the power-off processing flag is turned on, the power-off processing of S2120 (see FIG. 49) is caused by a momentary voltage drop (momentary power failure, so-called "instantaneous power failure") in this startup processing. ) Is started in the middle of execution (S2002). As will be described later with reference to FIG. 49, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the power cutoff command from the main control device 110 (see S2116 in FIG. 49), the voice lamp control device 113 executes the power cutoff process of S2120. The power off processing flag is turned on before the power off processing is executed, and the power off processing flag is turned off after the power off processing is completed. Therefore, whether or not the power off processing of S2120 is in the middle of execution can be determined by the state of the power off processing flag.

If the power off processing flag is off (S2002: No), the start-up process this time is started after the power is completely cut off, or after a momentary power failure occurs and the power of S2120 is turned off. It was started after the execution of the process was completed, or it was started by resetting only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). is there. Therefore, in these cases, it is confirmed whether or not the data in the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003).

Confirmation of data corruption in RAM 223 is performed as follows. That is, data as a keyword of "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 by the processing of S2006. Therefore, the data stored in the specific area can be checked, and if the data is "55AAh", there is no data corruption in the RAM 223, and conversely, if the data is not "55AAh", the data corruption in the RAM 223 can be confirmed. If the data corruption of the RAM 223 is confirmed (S2003: Yes), the process proceeds to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started. On the other hand, if data corruption in RAM 223 is not confirmed (S2003: No), the process proceeds to SS2008.

If the start-up process is started after the power is completely cut off, the keyword "55AAh" is not stored in the specific area of the RAM 223 (the memory of the RAM 223 is lost due to the power off). (From), it is determined that the data of RAM 223 is destroyed (S2003: Yes), and the process proceeds to S2004. On the other hand, the start-up process this time was started after the execution of the power-off process of S2120 was completed after a momentary power failure occurred, or was reset only to the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 due to noise or the like. Since the keyword "55AAh" is stored in the specific area of the RAM 223, the data of the RAM 223 is determined to be normal (S2003: No), and the process proceeds to S2008.

If the power off processing flag is on (S2002: Yes), the start-up process this time is after a momentary power failure occurs, and during the execution of the power off process of S2120, the voice lamp control device 113 The MPU 221 of the above was reset and started. In such a case, the storage state of the RAM 223 is not always correct because the power off processing is being executed. Therefore, in such a case, the control cannot be continued, so the process is shifted to S2004 and the initialization of the RAM 223 is started.

In the process of S2004, the storage area of the entire range of the RAM 223 is checked (S2004). As a check method, first, "0FFh" is written for each byte, and it is read for each byte to check whether or not it is "0FFh", and if it is "0FFh", it is determined to be normal. Such writing and confirmation for each byte are performed in the order of "0FFh", then "55h", "0AAh", and "00h". By this read / write check of RAM 223, all the storage areas of RAM 223 are cleared to 0.

If it is determined that the read / write check is normal for all the storage areas of the RAM 223 (S2005: Yes), the keyword "55AAh" is written in the specific area of the RAM 223 to set the RAM destruction check data (S2006). By confirming the keyword "55AAh" written in this specific area, it is checked whether or not the RAM 223 has data corruption. On the other hand, if an abnormality in the read / write check is detected in any storage area of the RAM 223 (S2005: No), an abnormality in the RAM 223 is notified (S2007), and an infinite loop is performed until the power is cut off. The abnormality of the RAM 223 is notified by the indicator lamp 34. The voice output device 226 may output voice to notify the abnormality of the RAM 223, or an error command may be sent to the display control device 114 to display an error message on the third symbol display device 81. It may be.

In the process of S2008, it is determined whether or not the power off flag is turned on (S2008). The power-off flag is turned on when the power-off process of S2120 is executed (see S2118 in FIG. 49). That is, since the power-off flag is turned on before the power-off process of S2120 is executed, the process of S2008 is reached with the power-off flag turned on because the start-up process is instantaneous. This is a case where the operation is started after the power failure of S2120 has been completed. Therefore, in such a case (S2008: Yes), the work area of the RAM is cleared in order to initialize each process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2009), the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010), and then an interrupt is interrupted. Set the permission (S2012) and move to the main process. The work area of the RAM 223 refers to an area other than the area for storing commands and the like received from the main control device 110.

On the other hand, the reason why the process of S2008 is reached with the power off flag turned off is that the start-up process of this time is started after the power is completely shut off, for example, so that the process of S2008 via the processes of S2004 to S2006 This is a case where the processing is reached, or only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like (without receiving the power off command from the main control device 110). Therefore, in such a case (S2008: No), S2009, which is the clearing process of the work area of the RAM 223, is skipped, the process is shifted to S2010, and the initial value of the RAM 223 is set (S2010). Next, the probability change state flag 223i is updated (S2011) according to the game state notified by the state command received from the main control device 110, interrupt permission is set (S2012), and the process proceeds to the main process. By updating the probability change state flag 223i based on the state command, the game state recognized by the main control device 110 and the game state recognized by the voice lamp control device 113 can be matched. Therefore, it is possible to appropriately execute the effect according to the game state.

The reason for skipping the clearing process of S2009 is that when the processing of S2008 is reached via the processing of S2004 to S2006, all the storage areas of the RAM 223 have already been cleared by the processing of S2004. When only the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113 is reset due to noise or the like and the start-up process is started, the data in the work area of the RAM 223 is saved without being cleared, so that the voice lamp control device 113 This is because the control of

Next, with reference to FIG. 49, the main process executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart showing this main process. When the main process is executed, it is first determined whether or not 1 msec or more has elapsed since the main process was started or since the process of S2101 this time was executed (S2101), and 1 msec or more has elapsed. If not (S2101: No), the process proceeds to S2113 without performing the processes of S2102 to S2112. In the process of S2101, it is determined whether or not 1 msec has elapsed because S2102 to S2112 are mainly processes related to display (directing), and it is not necessary to edit in a short cycle (within 1 msec). This is because it is preferable to execute the command determination process of S2113, the variation display setting process of S2114, the ball passage monitoring process of S2115, and the storage state monitoring process of S2116 in a short cycle. By executing the processing of S2113 in a short cycle, it is possible to prevent omission of reception of the command transmitted from the main control device 110, and by executing the processing of S2114 in a short cycle, the command received by the command determination process. Based on the above, settings related to variable effects can be made without delay. Further, since the processing of S2115 is executed in a short cycle, the setting related to the passing counter can be performed without delay based on the first ball passing sensor S3 and the second ball passing sensor S4, and the processing of S2116 can be performed in a short cycle. By executing the settings, the storage state flag 223k and the storage upper limit flag 223m can be set without delay based on the storage state.

If 1 msec or more has passed in the process of S2101 (S2101: Yes), first, various commands for the display control device 114 set by the processes of S2103 to S2116 are transmitted to the display control device 114 (S2102). ). Next, the output of each lamp is set so as to set the lighting mode of the indicator lamp 34 and the lighting mode of the lamp edited by the process of S2108 described later (S2103), and then the power-on notification process is executed (S2104). The power-on notification process notifies that the power has been turned on for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) when the power is turned on, and the notification is performed by the voice output device 226 or the lamp display device 227. Will be. Further, a command may be transmitted to the display control device 114 to notify that the power has been supplied on the screen of the third symbol display device 81. If the power is not turned on, the process shifts to the process of S2105 without performing the notification by the power on notification process.

In the process of S2105, the customer waiting effect process is executed, and then the hold quantity display update process is executed (S2106). In the customer waiting effect processing, when a predetermined time elapses when the pachinko machine 10 is not played by the player, a setting is made to switch the display of the third symbol display device 81 to the title screen, and the setting is displayed as a command. It is transmitted to the device 114. In the hold quantity display update process, a process of turning on the hold lamp (not shown) is performed according to the value of the first special symbol hold ball number counter 223b.

After that, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is executed (S2107). This frame button input monitoring / effect processing monitors the input of whether or not the first frame button 22a operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is pressed, and the input of the first frame button 22a is confirmed. This is a process for setting the effect corresponding to the case. In this process, when the operation of the first frame button 22a by the player is detected, a display command corresponding to the operation of the first frame button 22a is set in the display control device 114.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing is completed, the lamp editing process is executed (S2108), and then the sound editing / output processing is executed (S2109). In the lamp editing process, the lighting patterns of the illumination units 29 to 33 and the like are set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81. In the sound editing / output processing, the output pattern of the voice output device 226 is set so as to correspond to the display performed by the third symbol display device 81, and the sound is output from the voice output device 226 according to the setting.

After the process of S2109, the liquid crystal effect execution management process is executed (S2110). In the liquid crystal effect execution management process, a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81 is set based on the fluctuation pattern command transmitted from the main control device 110. The lamp editing process of S2108 is executed based on the time set in the liquid crystal effect execution monitoring process. The sound editing / output processing of S2109 is also executed at a time synchronized with the time required for the fluctuation display performed by the third symbol display device 81.

When the processing of S2110 is completed, the timing effect setting processing is performed (S2111). Details of this timing effect setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 60 to 63.

When the processing of S2111 is completed, the movable valve operation counter update processing is executed (S2112). This movable valve operation counter update process is a process for updating the movable valve operation counter based on the movable valve operation scenario. Details of this movable valve operation counter update process will be described later with reference to FIG.

After the movable valve operation counter update process, a command determination process for performing a process according to a command received from the main control device 110 is performed (S2113). Details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 50 to 54.

Next, the process proceeds to S2114. In the process of S2114, the variable display setting process is executed (S2114). In the variation display setting process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this variable display setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 55.

Next, the process proceeds to S2115. In the process of S2115, the ball passage monitoring process is executed (S2115). In the ball passage monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this ball passage monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 56.

Next, the process proceeds to S2116. In the process of S2116, the storage state monitoring process is executed (S2116). In the storage state monitoring process, a display variation pattern command is generated and set based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to execute the variation effect on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the command is transmitted to the display control device 114. The details of this storage state monitoring process will be described later with reference to FIG. 57.

Then, when the storage state monitoring process is completed, it is determined whether or not the power failure occurrence information is stored in the work RAM 233 (S2117). The power-off occurrence information is stored when a power-off command is received from the main control device 110. If the power-off occurrence information is stored in the process of S2117 (S2117: Yes), both the power-off flag and the power-off processing in-progress flag are turned on (S2119), and the power-off process is executed (S2120). After executing the power off processing, the power off processing flag is turned off (S2121), and then the processing is looped infinitely. In the power cutoff process, the occurrence of the interrupt process is prohibited, and each output port is turned off to turn off the output from the audio output device 226 and the lamp display device 227. In addition, the memory of the power failure occurrence information is also deleted.

On the other hand, if the power failure occurrence information is not stored in the process of S2117 (S2117: No), it is determined whether or not the RAM 223 is destroyed based on the keyword stored in the RAM 223 (S2118), and the RAM 223 is destroyed. If not (S2118: No), the process returns to the process of S2101, and the main process is repeatedly executed. On the other hand, if the RAM 223 is destroyed (S2118: Yes), the processing is looped infinitely in order to stop the execution of the subsequent processing. Here, if it is determined that the RAM is destroyed and an infinite loop is performed, the main process is not executed, so that the display by the third symbol display device 81 does not change thereafter. Therefore, since the player can know that the abnormality has occurred, he / she can call a clerk in the hall or the like and ask for repair of the pachinko machine 10. Further, when it is confirmed that the RAM 223 is destroyed, the audio output device 226 or the lamp display device 227 may notify the RAM destruction.

Next, the command determination process (S2113) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 50. FIG. 50 is a flowchart showing this command determination process (S2113). This command determination process (S2113) is executed in the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and determines the command received from the main control device 110 as described above. It is a process for.

In the command determination process (FIG. 50, S2113), first, from the command storage area 223a provided in the RAM 223, the first command received from the main control unit 110 among the unprocessed commands is read and analyzed, and the variation pattern command is executed. It is determined whether or not the command has been received (S2201). The variation pattern command is a command for notifying the variation pattern (fluctuation time) of the special symbol, and the variation pattern (variation time) selected from the main control device 110 is the first special symbol and the second special symbol. It is output corresponding to each pattern.

When it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has been received in the processing of S2201 (S2201: Yes), the fluctuation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2202), and the fluctuation pattern type is selected from the received fluctuation pattern command. Is extracted (S2203), and this process is terminated. The variation pattern type extracted here can be identified in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 as the variation pattern type of the special symbol for each special symbol type (corresponding first special symbol, second special symbol). When stored in a format and notified to the display control device 114 of the start of the variable display effect of the special symbol and the display mode of the variable display effect of the special symbol in the variable display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later. It is used (when setting a variation pattern command for displaying a special symbol).

On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation pattern command has not been received (S2201: No), it is determined whether or not the stop type command has been received from the main controller 110 (S2204). If it is determined that a stop type command (either the special figure 1 stop type command or the special figure 2 stop type command) has been received (S2204: Yes), the flag corresponding to the received command type is set to on. (S2205). Specifically, when the special figure 1 stop type command is received, the stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the first special symbol is set to on, and when the special figure 2 stop type command is received, the second special The stop type selection flag 223f corresponding to the symbol is set to on. Next, the stop type (any of complete loss, reach loss, small hit, and big hit A to C) is extracted from the received stop type command (S2206), and this process ends. The stop type extracted in the process of S2206 is stored in the voice lamp control device 113 in the other memory area 223z of the RAM 223 of the MPU 221. Then, it is referred to when the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) described later is executed, and is used to set a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type of the variation effect.

In the process of S2204, when it is determined that the stop type command has not been received (S2204: No), it is determined whether the stop command has been received from the main control unit 110 (S2207). When it is determined that the stop command has been received (S2207: Yes), the display stop command is set based on the received command (S2208), and this process is terminated.

Next, it is determined whether or not the reserved ball number command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2209). When it is determined that the hold ball number command has been received (S2209: Yes), the special symbol 1 hold ball number counter 203d or the special symbol 2 hold ball number counter 203e of the main controller 110 included in the received hold ball number command (That is, the number of reserved balls in the variable display of the first special symbol or the second special symbol) is extracted, and the corresponding counter value provided in the RAM 223 of the voice lamp control device 113 is matched with the extracted counter value. The counter value is updated (S2210), and this process ends. More specifically, when the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b of the RAM 223, and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e is stored. When the value of is extracted, the extracted counter value is stored in the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c.

Here, the hold ball number command is transmitted from the main control device 110 when the ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry port 640 (starting winning), so that the starting winning is won. Each time there is, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 and the second special symbol reserved ball counter 223c is set by the process of S2210, and the special symbol 1 of the main control device 110 is reserved. The values of the ball number counter 203d and the special symbol 2 reserved ball number counter 203e can be adjusted respectively. Therefore, due to the influence of noise or the like, the value of the first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c of the voice lamp control device 113 is the special symbol 1 reserved ball number counter 203d of the main control device 110. Alternatively, even if the value deviates from the value of the special symbol 2 hold ball counter 203e, if the hold ball number command is notified based on the start winning, the first special symbol hold ball counter 223b of the voice lamp control device 113 Alternatively, the value of the second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c can be modified to match the value of the special symbol 1 reserved ball counter 203d or the special symbol 2 reserved ball counter 203e of the main controller 110.

Further, in the process of S2209, when it is determined that the reserved ball number command has not been received (S2209: No), it is determined whether or not the winning information command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2212). If it is determined that the winning information command has been received in the processing of S2212 (S2212: Yes), the winning information command receiving processing is executed (S2213). In this winning information command reception process (S2213), various flags to be referred to and various counters are set in order to set various effects executed by the third symbol display device 81. As a result, based on the lottery result of the pending special symbol, the special symbol executed before the change of the pending special symbol starts (that is, before the change of the target special symbol). During the variable display), it is possible to execute an effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol for which the winning information command is transmitted, and the lottery result of one special symbol is displayed to the player using the variable display period of a plurality of special symbols. Suggestion notification can be given, and the effect of production can be enhanced.

On the other hand, in the process of S2212, when it is determined that the winning information command has not been received (S2212: No), it is determined whether the movable valve state command has been received from the main control device 110 (S2214). If it is determined that the movable valve state command has been received (S2214: Yes), the movable valve state command process is executed (S2215), and this process ends.

Here, the movable valve state command processing (S2215) will be described with reference to FIG. 51. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the movable valve state command process (S2215). This movable valve state command process (S2215) is a process executed in order for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the operating status (opening and closing status) of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110. In the present embodiment, the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113 stores the movable valve operation scenario 222b including the same information as the operation information (operation scenario) for the main control device 110 to operate the movable valve 750. By synchronizing the progress of the operation information with the operation control of the main control device 110, the voice lamp control device 113 can grasp the future operation status of the movable valve 750. As a result, the effect based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve can be set and executed on the voice lamp control device 113 side. By executing the effect based on the opening timing and closing timing of the movable valve, it is possible to suggest the timing for the player to operate (press) the second frame button 22b.

When the movable valve state command process (S2215) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the movable valve initial flag 223u is on (S2301). When it is determined that the movable valve initial flag 223u is on (S2301: Yes), then it is determined whether the movable valve state command received this time includes the initial information (S2302). That is, the movable valve state command received while the movable valve initial flag 223u, which is set to be on when the power is turned on, is set to on, is executed in the start-up process of the main controller 110 (see FIG. 41). It is determined whether the movable valve state command includes the initial information indicating that the operation control of the movable valve 750 set in the operation setting of the movable valve to be performed (see S914 in FIG. 41) is started. In the process of S2302, if it is determined that the movable valve state command received this time includes the initial information (S2302: Yes), the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is set in the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2303). ), The value of the movable valve operation counter 223t is set to 1 (S2304), and the movable valve initial flag 223u is set to off (S2305).

Then, the timing at which the movable valve 750 is closed is acquired based on the movable valve operation scenario set in the movable valve state storage area 223s and the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t. The acquired movable valve closing timing is stored in the closing timing storage area 223v (S2306), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, the voice lamp control device 113 has the same information as the information of the operation scenario used when the main control device 110 controls the operation of the movable valve 750, and the main control device 110 has the movable valve. When the operation control of the 750 is started, the information (initial information) indicating the start is transmitted to the voice lamp control device 113, and when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the first information, the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 It is configured to grasp the operating status of the movable valve 750 by using the same information as the information. The initial information set in the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 41) includes the start timing of the movable valve 750 and the type of operation scenario used. As other information, for example, when a configuration in which the operation start timing of the movable valve 750 is different (delayed) is used, it is actually movable after the start-up process (see FIG. 41) of the main control device 110 is executed. The initial information may include period information indicating the period until the valve 750 starts operating (that is, the delay period).

Further, when starting the operation of the movable valve 750 and using a configuration in which the start points of the operation scenarios are different, it is preferable to include the information indicating the start points set this time in the initial information. Further, as the initial information, period scenario information indicating operation scenario information for a predetermined period after the operation of the movable valve 750 is started may be included. As a result, when the voice lamp control device 113 receives the initial information, the content of the movable valve operation scenario 222b can be set in the movable valve state storage area 223s based on the period scenario information for a predetermined period. It is possible to easily synchronize with the operating status of the movable valve 750.

On the other hand, when it is determined in S2302 that the information received this time does not include the initial information (S2302: No), the start-up process of the main control device 110 (see FIG. 41) and the start-up of the voice lamp control device 113. It is determined that the timing at which the process (see FIG. 48) is executed is different, an error command is set (S2307), and this process is terminated. If an error command is set here, the third symbol display device 81 is notified that the power of the pachinko machine 10 is to be turned on again based on the set error command. Then, by turning on the power again, the start-up process of the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 is executed again, and the normal state can be restored. If the error command is set even if the power is turned on again and again, it is determined that the rise timing of the main control device 110 and the rise timing of the voice lamp control device 113 are not normal timings. It may be configured to change the setting contents of the error command.

In the process of S2301, when it is determined that the movable valve initial flag 223u is not on (off) (S2301: No), the operating status of the current movable valve 750, which is updated by the voice lamp control device 113 at any time. Is read from the movable valve state storage area 223s (S2308), and is compared with the movable valve state command received this time to determine whether the contents match (S2309). Here, if it is determined that the contents match (S2309: Yes), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the contents do not match (S2309: No), an error command indicating that the contents do not match is set (S2307), and this process ends.

Here, if the information indicating the operating status of the movable valve does not match the movable valve status command received from the main control device 110 and the operating status of the movable valve status storage area 223s of the voice lamp control device 113, they must match. A storage means capable of storing the determined number of times may be provided, and an error command may be set when the number of times stored in the storage means is stored a predetermined number of times, specifically, a predetermined number of times are continuously stored. As a result, it is possible to suppress the case where the discrimination result in which the contents do not match due to the suddenly generated noise is only obtained as an error.

In the present embodiment, the operation scenario used when the operation control of the movable valve 750 by the main control device 110 is configured by combining a plurality of scenario types for a predetermined period (about 30 seconds), and the scenario type. Is configured to send a movable valve status command at the timing of switching to a new scenario type. As a result, the total number of commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced. In addition to that, when the voice lamp control device 113 is in a state where there is a possibility of executing an effect based on the operating state of the movable valve 750, that is, when the main control device 110 selects a fluctuation pattern. , The movable valve state command is output when the chance table 202d3 is referred to, when the variation type for chance is actually selected from the chance table 202d3, or when the jackpot is started. As a result, the total number of commands output from the main control device 110 to the voice lamp control device 113 can be reduced, and an effect that gives the player a sense of discomfort can be suppressed.

Return to FIG. 50 and continue the description. In the process of S2214, when it is determined that the movable valve state command has not been received (S2214: No), it is determined whether or not the storage device-related command has been received (S2216). If it is determined in S2216 that the storage device-related command has been received (S2216: Yes), the storage device-related process is executed (S2217), and this process ends.

Here, the storage device-related processing (S2217) will be described with reference to FIG. 52. FIG. 52 is a flowchart showing the storage device-related processing (S2217). This storage device-related process (S2217) is an operation of the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) executed based on the player operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. This is a process for the voice lamp control device 113 to grasp the contents.

When the storage device-related process (S2217) is executed, first, the storage device-related command received this time is in the open (release) state of the storage device (the state in which the ball can flow down the storage flow path 700e (see FIG. 3)). It is determined whether the command indicates (S2401). In the process of S2401, when it is determined that the command indicates the open state (S2401: Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to ON (S2402), the display release command is set (S2403), and this process is performed. finish. The display release command set here is transmitted to the display control device 114, and when the storage device is released, a dedicated effect is executed. As this special effect, for example, the third symbol display device 81 is provided with a suggestion mode suggesting a privilege (15 prize balls) given to the player when the ball enters the specific general entrance 630. When the ball enters the specific general entry port 630, the suggestion mode is changed to the definite mode, and when the ball does not enter the specific general entry port 630, the suggestion mode is changed. The effect of disappearing is executed.

In the process of S2401, if it is determined that the storage device-related command received this time is not a command indicating the open state (S2401: No), it is determined whether the storage device-related command received this time is a command indicating the closed state. (S2404), if the command indicates a closed state (S2404; Yes), the release state flag 223q is set to off (S2405), the release operation flag 223p is set to off (S2406), and the display is not released. A command is set (S2407), and this process ends.

In the present embodiment, in the storage device (first storage device 770, second storage device 771), the non-release state in which the sphere is stored in the storage flow path 700e and the release state in which the sphere can flow down are first set. The storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are variably controlled by operating (see FIG. 9). Since this operation control is a control that changes the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a in a preset order, after receiving a command indicating a release (open) state in which the ball can flow down, The period until the command indicating the non-release (closed) state in which the sphere is stored is received is constant (1 second). Therefore, in the storage device-related processing (S2217), a measuring means for measuring the period after receiving the command indicating the open (release) state is provided, and a predetermined period (for example, 1 second) elapses by the measuring means. However, it may be configured to set an error command when a command indicating a closed (non-released) state is not received. As a result, it is possible to immediately determine that the status grasp of the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) whose operation is controlled by the main control device 110 is not normal.

Return to FIG. 50 and continue the description. In the process of S2216, when it is determined that the storage device-related command has not been received (S2216: No), then it is determined whether or not the release operation command has been received (S2218). If it is determined that the release operation command has been received in the process of S2218 (S2218: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to ON (S2219), and this process ends. This release operation command is a command output when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated. On the other hand, when it is determined that the release operation command has not been received (S2218: No), it is determined whether or not the hit-related command has been received (S2220).

If it is determined that the hit-related command has been received in the process of S2220 (S2220: Yes), the hit-related process is executed (S2221), and this process is terminated. The detailed contents of this hit-related process (S2221) will be described later with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. On the other hand, in the process of S2220, when it is determined that the hit-related command has not been received (S2220: No), the process corresponding to the other command is executed (S2222), and this process is terminated.

In the processing of S2222, if the other command is a command used by the voice lamp control device 113, the processing corresponding to the command is performed, the processing result is stored in the RAM 223, and if the command is used by the display control device 114, the command is performed. Is set to be transmitted to the display control device 114, for example, a ball entry command set based on the ball entering each entry port provided in the game board 13. Is received, a process of accumulating the number of balls entered for each type of entry port into which the ball has entered is executed.

Next, the hit-related processing (S2221) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described with reference to FIG. 53. FIG. 53 is a flowchart showing a hit-related process (S2221). This hit-related process (S2221) is a process executed in the command determination process (see S2113 of FIG. 560) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is the main control. This is a process executed when a hit-related command is received from the device 110.

When the hit-related process (S2221) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501). If it is determined that the jackpot opening command has been received (S2501: Yes), then the display opening command is set (S2502), and this process ends. On the other hand, in the process of S2501, when it is determined that the opening command has not been received (S2501: No), it is determined whether or not the round number command has been received (S2503). If it is determined that the round number command has been received in the processing of S2503 (S2503: Yes), the round number accumulation counter 223h is updated based on the received command (S2504), and then the jackpot medium effect processing is executed (S2503). S2505), this process is terminated.

Here, the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) will be described with reference to FIG. 54. FIG. 54 is a flowchart showing the jackpot medium effect processing (S2505). In this jackpot medium effect processing (S2505), as an effect to be executed during the jackpot, in addition to the jackpot game effect for blessing the big hit, an operation effect (release button) 22b for the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b. The production mode of the timing effect) and the difficulty level selection effect that allows the player to select the difficulty level of the operation effect (timing effect) is set, and each effect is executed.

When the jackpot middle effect processing (S2505) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is on. When it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is not on (off) (S2601: No), then it is determined whether the round number command received this time is the round number command indicating the first round of the jackpot. (S2602). If it is determined in the process of S2602 that the command is the number of rounds indicating the first round (S2602: Yes), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S2603), and this process is terminated. By setting the difficulty level selection flag 223ab to ON here, it is based on the operation signals of the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) operated while the first round of the jackpot is being executed. The process of selecting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed by the frame button input monitoring / effect process (S2107 in FIG. 59) described later.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2602, if it is determined that the command is not the number of rounds command indicating the first round (S2602: No), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to off (S2604), and then the number of rounds received this time. It is determined whether the command is the 7th round or the 15th round of the jackpot (S2605). In the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the command is the number of rounds indicating the 7th round or the 15th round (S2605: Yes), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2606), and the storage upper limit flag 223m. When it is determined that is on (S2606: Yes), the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, so the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to on (S2607), and the notice round command for display is set. Is set (S2608), and this process ends.

On the other hand, in the processing of S2605, when it is determined that the number of rounds command received this time is not the 7th or 15th round of the jackpot (S2605: No), or in the processing of S2606, the storage upper limit flag 223m is not turned on. If it is determined (S2606: No), the timing effect (operation effect) is not in an executable state, so the process proceeds to S2609 without setting the timing effect setting flag 223w to ON.

In the processing of S2609, it is determined whether the number of rounds command received this time is the 8th or 16th round of the jackpot (S2609), and if it is determined to be the 8th or 16th round (S2609: Yes). , It is determined whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is on (S2610). That is, in the round (7th or 15th round) immediately before the 8th or 16th round received this time, whether the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (timing effect (operation effect) can be executed). Whether the above conditions are met) is determined. In the process of S2610, when the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON (S2610: Yes), next, the timing effect information is read from the effect temporary storage area 223r, and the display effect round command is set (S2611). ). Then, the effect executing flag 223x is set to on (S2612), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to off (S2613), and this process is terminated. The timing effect information to be read in the process of S2611 is set in the timing effect setting process (see S2111 in FIG. 60) described later based on the timing effect setting flag 223w being set to ON. Yes, the detailed contents will be described later with reference to FIG. 60.

In the processing of S2609, when it is determined that the number of rounds command received this time is not the 8th or 16th round of the jackpot (S2609: No), or in the processing of S2610, the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to ON. If it is determined that the command is not set (off), a display round number command corresponding to the received round number is set (S2614), and this process ends.

The various display round number commands set here are stored in the command transmission ring buffer provided in the RAM 223, and are included in the command output process (S2102) of the main process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221. , Is transmitted to the display control device 114. Upon receiving the various display round number commands, the display control device 114 starts a new round effect on the third symbol display device 81.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the current number of rounds is determined by the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h, and the content of the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is changed. Other configurations may be used. For example, by including information indicating the current number of rounds in the number of rounds command, it is possible to eliminate the process of adding the counter value of the round number cumulative counter 223h.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the jackpot is started, an effect of selecting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot in the first round (first round) is executed. (See FIG. 17). Further, a condition (storage flow path) in which the timing effect (operation effect) can be executed at the time of the round (7 or 15 rounds) before the round (8 or 16 rounds) in which the timing effect (operation effect) is actually executed. It is determined whether the upper limit amount of spheres is stored in 700e (see FIG. 3), and if the condition is satisfied, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in the next round. (See FIG. 11A). Then, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed (see FIG. 11B).

In this way, since the advance notice effect is executed in the round before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed, the player is made to operate the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b). It is possible to inform in advance that the production will be executed. In addition, in the round in which the notice effect is executed, it is determined that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the notice effect is executed only when the condition is satisfied. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a problem that the timing effect (operation effect) is not executed even though the advance notice effect is executed.

Further, since it is set as a condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) that the upper limit number of balls is stored in the storage flow path 700e, the effect used as the timing effect (operation effect) is the storage ball. Can be fixed to an effect using 5 pieces, and the amount of data used for the effect can be reduced. The condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not limited to this, and a predetermined number (for example, one) of balls may be stored, or the balls may be stored in the storage flow path 700e. The timing effect (operation effect) may be executed regardless of whether or not the is stored. Further, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 700e may be determined, and the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) may be changed based on the determination result. Specifically, the number of times to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b that changes the storage flow path 700e to the release state corresponds to the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 700e. It may be changed, or the number of operations of a specific timing effect (operation effect), that is, the second frame button (release button) 22b is fixed regardless of the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 700e. It may be configured to execute the timing effect (operation effect).

Further, in the present embodiment, since the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) can be selected for the player, the player can adjust the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill. Can be set, so that the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

In addition, in the present embodiment, the advance notice effect is executed when the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied. That is, although it is suggested to the player based on the execution of the advance notice effect that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, other configurations may be used. For example, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 700e and the number of stored balls required to execute the timing effect (operation effect) are displayed on the third symbol display device 81 and are displayed to the player. , It is advisable to perform an effect of encouraging the storage of balls in the storage flow path 700e. As a result, the player will play a game in which the ball is stored in the storage flow path 700e in addition to the game in which the ball is won in the specific winning opening 65a during the big hit, and the interest of the game can be enhanced. Further, in order to store the ball in the storage flow path 700e, even when the variable winning device 65 during the jackpot is closed (interval state), the ball is continuously launched, so that the game is operated. Can be enhanced.

Further, in the present embodiment, the number of rounds provided as a jackpot is 8 rounds and a jackpot (big hit type is "big hit B"), and 16 rounds of jackpots (big hit types are "big hit A" and "big hit C"). It is provided. That is, in the case of an 8-round jackpot, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed up to once during the jackpot game, and in the case of a 16-round jackpot, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed during the jackpot game. The maximum number of times is set to 2. As a result, it is possible to make the benefits to be given different depending on the jackpot type, and it is possible to improve the interest of the player.

In the present embodiment, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed in a predetermined number of rounds during the jackpot, but other configurations may be used, for example, the storage flow path 700e. When it is determined that a predetermined number (for example, 3) of balls have been stored in the game, the timing effect (operation effect) may be executed in the next round. As a result, the player can more actively perform the game of storing the ball in the storage flow path 700e.

Returning to FIG. 53, the description will be continued. In the process of S2503, if it is determined that the hit-related command received this time is not a round number command (S2503: No), then it is determined whether an interval command has been received (S2506). This interval command is a command output from the main control device 110 when each round in the jackpot is completed. If it is determined that an interval command has been received in the processing of S2506 (S2506: Yes), the number of completed rounds is calculated based on the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h, and the calculated result is the 7th or 15th round. It is determined whether or not it indicates the end (S2507).

In the process of S2507, if it is determined that the interval command received this time is an interval command indicating the end of the 7th or 15th round (S2507: Yes), it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2508). If it is determined that it is on (S2508: Yes), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to on (S2509), the corresponding display interval command is set (S2509), and this process is terminated. That is, in the present embodiment, as described with reference to FIG. 54, in the round (7th or 15th round) in which the advance notice effect is executed, whether or not the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied. The process of determining and setting the timing effect setting flag 223w to ON is performed, but in addition to that, even at the timing when the round (7th or 15th round) before the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is completed. It is determined again whether or not the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the timing effect setting flag 223w can be set to be on based on the determination result.

With this configuration, it is possible to determine whether or not the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied until just before the start of the round in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed. It is possible to increase the opportunity to provide the timing effect (operation effect) to the player. In this case, the timing effect (operation effect) is executed without the advance notice effect being executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide an unexpected timing effect (operation effect) to the player who was disappointed because the advance notice effect was not executed.

Although the details are not shown, regarding the processes of S2507 to S2509, if the timing effect setting flag 223w is already set to ON in the jackpot medium effect process (see S2504 in FIG. 54), that process Is configured to be skipped. As a result, it is possible to prevent unnecessary processing from being executed.

On the other hand, in the process of S2506, when it is determined that the interval command has not been received (S2506: No), it is determined whether or not the jackpot ending command has been received (S2511). In the process of S2511, when the jackpot ending command is received (S2511: Yes), the display ending command is set (S2512), the value of the round number accumulation counter 223h is cleared (S2513), and this process is terminated. Further, in the process of S2511, when it is determined that the jackpot ending command has not been received (S2511: No), this process is also terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 55, the variation display setting process (S2114) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing this variation display setting process (S2114). This variation display setting process (S2114) is one process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113. As described above, the variation display setting process (see FIG. 55) is performed on the first special symbol based on the variation pattern command received from the main control device 110 in order to display the variation display effect on the third symbol display device 81. Alternatively, a process of generating a display variation pattern command of the second special symbol and transmitting the command to the display control device 114 is executed. Further, based on the extracted stop type (complete loss, reach loss, jackpot), a process of setting a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is executed.

In the variation display setting process (FIG. S2114), first, it is determined whether the variation start flag 223e provided in the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2701). Then, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is off (S2701: No), the fluctuation pattern command has not been received from the main control device 110, so the process proceeds to S2709. On the other hand, when it is determined that the fluctuation start flag 223e is on (S2701: Yes), the detailed mode of the fluctuation display of the special symbol this time is determined based on the fluctuation pattern command received from the main control device 110. Each process of S2702 to S2708 for the purpose is executed.

More specifically, first, the fluctuation start flag 223e is set to off (S2702), then the extracted fluctuation pattern is acquired (S2703), and it is determined whether or not the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern (S2704). ). In the process of S2704, when a variation pattern command in which "chance off" or "chance reach" is determined as the variation type of the variation pattern is received in the special symbol variation start process of the main controller 110 (see S213 in FIG. 35). In addition, it is determined that the fluctuation pattern extracted this time is a chance pattern. In the process of S2704, when it is determined that the acquired fluctuation pattern is a chance pattern (S2704: Yes), then it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is ON (S2705), and it is determined that it is ON. In this case (S2705: Yes), it is assumed that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is satisfied, and the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to on (S2706).

In the present embodiment, it is established that the spheres are stored in the storage flow path 700e when the fluctuation pattern command indicating the fluctuation type of the fluctuation pattern that can execute the chance effect (operation effect) is received as described above. As a condition, the chance effect (operation effect) is executed, but the chance effect (operation effect) may be executed without determining the presence or absence of the sphere on the storage flow path 700e. As a result, when a ball flows into the storage flow path 700e during the chance production, the ball can be easily entered into the specific general entry port 630.

Then, the display variation pattern command is set (S2707), and then 1 is subtracted from the value of the corresponding special symbol reserved ball number counter (first special symbol reserved ball number counter 223b or second special symbol reserved ball number counter 223c). Then, based on the subtracted value, the data in the winning information storage area included in the command storage area is shifted (S2709), and the process shifts to the processing of S2709. On the other hand, in the processing of S2704, the fluctuation pattern acquired this time is the chance pattern. When it is determined that it is not (S2704: No), or when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is not on (off) in the processing of S2705 (S2705: No), that is, the current variation display setting If it is determined in the process (S2114) that the condition for executing the timing effect (operation effect) is not satisfied, the process of S2706 is skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S2707.

In the process of S2709, it is determined whether or not the stop type selection flag 223f of the RAM 223 is set to ON (S2709). Then, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is off (S2709: No), the present process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S2709, when it is determined that the stop type selection flag 223f is on (S2709: Yes), the stop type selection flag 223f is set to off (S2710), and then the command determination process (FIG. 50). In the process of S2206 of (see), the extracted stop type is acquired (S2711), and the acquired stop type is set (S2712). Next, a display stop type command for notifying the display control device 114 of the stop type is set based on the set stop type (S2713), and this process is terminated.

Next, with reference to FIG. 56, the ball passage monitoring process (S2115) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113 will be described. FIG. 56 is a flowchart showing this ball passage monitoring process (S2115). This ball passage monitoring process (S2115) is one of the main processes (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a storage flow path 700e in the board unit 700 (see FIG. 3). This is a process for monitoring the passage of a ball that has flowed down (see FIG. 3).

In the ball passage monitoring process (S2115), first, it is determined whether the release state flag 223q is on (S2801). Here, when it is determined that the release state flag 223q is not on (off), the storage flow path 700e is not in the release (open) state in which the ball can flow down, and this process is terminated. In the process of S2801, when it is determined that the release state flag 223q is on (S2801: Yes), then it is determined whether the ball passage flag 223n is on (S2802). In the process of S2802, if it is determined that the ball passing flag 223n is off (S2802: No), then whether the ball has passed through the first ball passing sensor S3 based on the detection result of the first ball passing sensor S3. Is determined (S2803). In the process of S2803, when it is determined that the ball has passed (S2803: Yes), the ball pass flag 223n is set to ON (S2804), the pass counter 223ae is set to "1" (S2805), and the process of S2806. Move to.

That is, in the above-mentioned processing of S2801 to S2805, the release state flag 223q is set to ON, and the period is when the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the flow (passage) of the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e. The process of starting the measurement of is executed. On the other hand, in the process of S2802, when it is determined that the ball passage flag 223n is on (S2802: Yes), the period measurement has already started, so the processes of S2803 to S2805 are skipped. Move to S2806. Further, in the process of S2803, when it is determined that the first ball passage sensor S3 has not detected the passage of the ball (S2803), it is immediately after the storage flow path 700e is changed to the released state, and the ball is still in the released state. Since the first ball passage sensor S3 has not been reached, this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S2806, it is determined whether or not there is a ball entering the specific general entry port 630 (S2806). In the process of S2806, when it is determined that there is no ball entering the specific general entry port 630 (S2806: No), then it is determined whether the second ball passage sensor S4 has detected the passage of the ball (S2806: No). In S2807), if the passage of the ball is not detected (S2807: No), it is determined whether the value of the passage counter 223ae has reached the upper limit (value corresponding to 1 second) (S2808). If it is determined in the process of S2808 that the upper limit has not been reached (S2808: No), 1 is added to the value of the pass counter 223ae (S2809), and this process ends. In this way, when the value of the passage counter 223ae is set to "1" in the processing of S2805, the ball enters the specific general entry port 630, or the passage of the ball is detected by the second ball passage sensor S4, or , The value of the pass counter 223ae is added by "1" every time this process is executed (every 1 ms) until the value of the pass counter 223ae reaches the upper limit (addition to the value indicating 1 second).

On the other hand, in the process of S2806, when it is determined that the ball has entered the specific general entry port 630 (S2806: Yes), the passage period of the ball (the ball is the first) based on the value of the current passage counter 223ae. The period from passing through the 1-ball passage sensor S3 to entering the specific general entry port 630) is calculated (S2811), and the information indicating the calculated passage period is set in the ball passage information storage area 223ac (S2812). ), The process proceeds to S2813. Further, in the process of S2807, even when the second ball passing sensor S4 detects the passing of the ball (S2812: Yes), the passing period of the ball (the ball is the first ball passing sensor) based on the value of the current passing counter 223ae. The period from passing through S3 to passing through the second ball passing sensor S4) is calculated (S2811), the process of S2812 is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S2813.

In the process of S2808, when it is determined that the value of the passage counter 223ae is the upper limit value (value indicating 1 second) (S2808: Yes), a predetermined period after the first ball passage sensor S3 detects the passage of the ball. Since the ball did not enter the specific general entry port 630 during (1 second) and did not pass through the second ball passage sensor S4, there is a possibility of ball clogging, so an error command Is set (S2810), and the process proceeds to S2813.

In the processing of S2813, since the processing for the ball detected by the first ball passing sensor S3 is completed, the ball passing flag 223n is set to off (S2813), and the value of the passing counter 223ae is reset (S2814). , End this process.

In the present embodiment, in this ball passage monitoring process (S2115), a process of correcting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed based on the period information indicating the ball pass period stored in the ball pass information storage area 223ac. Will be done. Specifically, the player is given a second timing effect (operation effect) based on the period until the ball flowing down the storage flow path 700e passes through the specific general entry port 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4. A correction process for changing the display timing of the effect pointer, which suggests the timing for operating the frame button (release button) 22b, is executed. The detailed contents of this correction process will be described later with reference to FIG. 63, but by correcting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the passing period of the sphere, the timing effect (operation effect) can be used. It is possible to deeply relate the performance mode to be executed and the actual ball flow situation, and it is possible to provide a production that does not give the player a sense of discomfort.

In the present embodiment, the reference period required for the ball passing through the first ball passing sensor S3 to enter the specific general entry port 630 and the ball passing through the first ball passing sensor S3 are specified general. The mounting position of the second ball passing sensor S4 is determined so that the reference period required for entering the ball into the ball entry port 630 is the same. As a result, using both the passing period calculated when the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 and the passing period calculated when the ball passes through the second ball passing sensor S4, It is possible to determine whether or not the timing effect needs to be corrected.

The method for measuring the passage period is not limited to the above-mentioned contents, and the passage period is, for example, based on the case where a predetermined condition is satisfied (when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated). The passage period may be measured only when the ball enters the specific general entry port 630. Further, the arrangement position of the second ball passing sensor S4 is not limited to this embodiment, and the second ball passing sensor S4 is located at a position where the passing period is different from the passing period of the ball entering the specific general entry port 630. May be arranged.

Next, the storage condition monitoring process (S2116) will be described with reference to FIG. 57. FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing this storage state monitoring process (S2116). This storage state monitoring process (S2116) is one process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and is a storage flow path 700e in the board unit 700 (see FIG. 3). (See FIG. 3) This is a process for determining that a sphere is stored on the sphere.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 3, as storage devices capable of storing balls on the game board 13, a first storage device 770 and a second storage device 771 are provided, and a maximum of five storage devices are provided. The ball is configured to be able to be stored. Each storage device is provided with a first storage valve 770a and a second storage valve 771a, respectively, and the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a are second frame buttons (release buttons) that can be operated by the player. Based on the operation (pressing) being executed for 22b, the operation is controlled so that the stored balls flow down one by one. Further, in the present embodiment, the storage detection sensor S2 capable of detecting the presence of the first ball stored when the second storage valve 771a is closed, and the upper limit number of balls (5) in the storage flow path 700e. The storage upper limit sensor S1 capable of detecting that the spheres are stored is provided so that the storage status of the spheres on the storage flow path 700e can be discriminated.

In this storage state monitoring process (S2116), first, it is determined whether the storage detection sensor S2 is on (S2851). When it was determined that the storage detection sensor S2 was on in the processing of S2851 (S2851: Yes), it was determined whether the storage state flag 223k was on (S2852), and it was determined that the storage state flag 223k was not on. In the case (S2852: No), the storage state flag 223k is set to ON, and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is on in the processing of S2852 (S2852: Yes), the processing of S2853 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S2856.

Further, in the process of S2851 when it is determined that the storage detection sensor S2 is off (S2851: No), then it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is on (S2854), and it is determined that it is on. In this case, the storage state flag 223k is set to off (S2855), and the process proceeds to S2856. On the other hand, if it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is off in the processing of S2854 (S2854: No), the processing of S2855 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S2856. In this way, the setting of the storage state flag 223k is configured to be updated at any time based on the detection result of the storage detection sensor S2.

In the process of S2856, it is determined whether the storage upper limit sensor S1 is on (S2856). In the process of S2856, when it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is on, that is, when it is determined that the upper limit amount of spheres is stored in the storage flow path 700e (S2856: Yes), the storage upper limit flag It is determined whether 223m is set to on (S2857), and if the storage upper limit flag 223m is off (S2857: No), it is determined whether the storage state flag 223k is set to on (S2858), and storage When it is determined that the state flag 223k is on (S2858: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to on (S2859), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2858, when it is determined that the storage state flag 223k is off (S2858: No), the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects the ball even though the storage detection sensor S2 does not detect the ball. Since it is in the detected state, an error command is set (S2860), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S2857, if the storage upper limit flag 223 m is on (S2857: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

Further, in the process of S2856, when it is determined that the storage upper limit sensor S1 is off (S2856: No), then it is determined whether the storage upper limit flag 223m is on (S2861), and it is not on (off). If it is determined (S2861: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the processing is on in S2861 (S2861: Yes), the storage upper limit flag 223m is set to off (S2862), and this processing is terminated.

As described above, in the storage state monitoring process (S2116) in the present embodiment, the storage status of the spheres on the storage flow path 700e and the presence or absence of abnormalities in the sphere storage are determined, and various flags (storage state flag 223k, storage) are determined. Since the upper limit flag (223 m) and the error command can be set, the sound lamp control device 113 can execute an effect based on the storage state of the storage flow path 700e.

Next, the lamp output process (S2103) will be described with reference to FIG. 58. FIG. 58 is a flowchart showing this lamp output process (S2103). This lamp output process (S2103) is one process (see FIG. 49) executed by the MPU 221 in the voice lamp control device 113, and sets a lamp lighting command transmitted to the lamp display device 227. It is a process for. Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, as the lamp display device 227, a decorative lamp 227a used for an effect or the like provided throughout the pachinko machine 10, and a board unit 700 (FIG. 3). With respect to the cover member 710 provided so as to cover a part of (see), a transmission lamp 227b and other lamps 227c are provided to make the inside of the cover member 710 visible to the player. Has been done.

When the lamp output process (S2103) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the current time is within a predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (S2901). Here, a predetermined period is measured using a timer (not shown) timed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113. If it is determined that the time is within 30 seconds in the process of S2901 (S2901: Yes), the transmission lamp lighting command is set (S2904), and the process proceeds to the process of S2905.

Here, in the present embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided in order to prevent the player from visually recognizing the operating state of the movable valve 750 in the normal gaming state. As described above, the cover member 710 is configured to change from a shielded state in which the inside is difficult to see to a transmitted state in which the inside can be seen by irradiating a predetermined light (light of a transmission lamp) from the back surface. There is. Then, during a predetermined period (a predetermined period after the start-up process is executed) after the power is turned on to the game machine, the transmission lamp is lit regardless of the game state. As a result, the inside of the board unit 700 covered with the cover member 710 can be easily visually recognized immediately after the power is turned on to the pachinko machine 10, that is, at the timing when the clerk inspects the pachinko machine 10.

On the other hand, in the process of S2901, when it is determined that the current state is not within the predetermined period (30 seconds) after the start-up process of the voice lamp control device 113 is executed (after the predetermined period (30 seconds) has elapsed) ( S2901: No), then it is determined whether the first ball passage sensor S3 has detected the passage of the ball (S2902). In the process of S2902, when the first ball passing sensor S3 detects the passage of a ball (S2902: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command is issued so that the player can visually recognize the ball passing through the first ball passing sensor S3. Set (S2904) and proceed to the process of S2905. The transmission lamp lighting command in this case is set so that the transmission lamp 227b is lit for a sufficient time (for example, 0.7 seconds) for the ball to pass through the area covered by the cover member 710. However, for example, it is configured to turn off the transmission lamp 227b on the condition that the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4 detects the passage of the ball. You may. As a result, the period during which the cover member 710 is in the transparent state can be suppressed to the minimum necessary, and it is difficult for the player to grasp the operating state of the movable valve 750.

Here, in the present embodiment, it is difficult to visually recognize the area (the area where the specific general entry port 630 and the movable valve 750 are provided) in which the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e can flow down in the board unit 700. It is covered with a cover member 710 so as to (see FIG. 2). This makes it possible to prevent the player from seeing the operating status of the movable valve 750, but when the ball passes through the area covered by the cover member 710, the player can grasp the whereabouts of the ball. However, there was a risk of giving the player a feeling of dissatisfaction. Therefore, in the present embodiment, it is determined by detecting the sphere by the first sphere passage sensor S3 that the sphere passes through the region covered by the cover member 710, and the cover member 710 is changed to the transmission state. With this configuration, the player can be made sure to grasp the passing (flowing) situation of the ball, so that the player can play the game with peace of mind. Further, in the normal state (the state in which the transmission lamp is not lit), the cover member, which is in a state where the inside cannot be seen, is changed to a transparent state in which the inside can be seen, so that the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 It is possible to give a change and make it easier for the player to notice that the ball passes through the portion covered by the cover member 710.

In the process of S2902, if the first ball passage sensor S3 does not detect the passage of the ball (S2902: No), then it is determined whether or not the specific effect is being executed (S2903). If it is determined in the process of S2903 that the specific effect is being executed (S2903: Yes), a transmission lamp lighting command is set based on the effect mode of the specific effect (S2904), and the process proceeds to S2905. Here, the specific effect determined in the process of S2903 is a case where the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2114 in FIG. 55) is a specific effect. While the effect is being executed, the effect mode using the transmission lamp lighting command is executed. As a result, the cover member 710 can be changed to the transparent state only when a specific condition is satisfied in the variable effect showing the lottery result of the special symbol. It is possible to provide playability in which the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated by oneself. In addition, regardless of the result of the special symbol lottery, the player who has played the game in which the special symbol lottery is executed may be given a privilege (a privilege to allow the cover member 710 to pass through) that is advantageous to the player. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In the present embodiment, the transmission lamp 227b is turned on when it is determined that the specific effect is being executed. For example, the specific effect is being executed (the specific effect is set). ), It is determined whether or not the ball is stored in the storage flow path 700e, and the effect of turning on the transmission lamp 227b only when it is determined that the ball is stored is executed, and the ball is not stored. If it is determined that, instead of the transmissive lamp 227b, the effect of lighting the decorative lamp 227a provided near the cover member 710 may be executed. With this configuration, the cover member 710 is unnecessarily changed to a transparent state, so that it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily visually recognizing the operating state of the movable valve 750.

Further, in the present embodiment, the effect of turning on the transmission lamp 227b when the display variation pattern command set in the variation display setting process of the voice lamp control device 113 (S2114 in FIG. 55) is a specific effect. However, in addition to that, for example, since the end of the previous jackpot, the number of lottery (variation counts) of special symbols has exceeded a predetermined number (for example, 500 times) without winning the jackpot. The cover member 710 may be in the transmissive state on the condition that the cover member 710 is in the transmissive state, or the cover member 710 may be in the transmissive state while the predetermined period is clocked by the real-time clock (RTC). Lighting control may be executed. Further, when the cover member 710 is configured to be transparent for a long period of time (a period in which the special symbol fluctuates a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 times) or a timed period is a long period (for example, 10 minutes)). A guide display for guiding the game of launching the ball toward the storage flow path 700e may be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, it is possible to reliably notify the player of the game that is advantageous to the player.

Returning to FIG. 58, the description will be continued. In the process of S2903, when it is determined that the specific effect is not executed (S2903: No), or after the process of S2904 is completed, a decorative lamp lighting command is set according to the current state (game state). (S2905), and this process is terminated. The decorative lamp lighting command is set in various ways according to the fluctuation pattern to be executed, the current game state, and the like.

Next, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) will be described with reference to FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a flowchart showing the contents of the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107). In this frame button input monitoring / effect processing (2107), the input of whether or not the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) operated by the player in order to enhance the effect is monitored is monitored. Then, it is a process of setting to perform an effect corresponding to the case where the input of the frame button 22 is confirmed. In this process, when an operation on the frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) is detected, a frame button operation command for notifying the display control device 114 that the frame button 22 has been operated is used. Various flags are set based on the settings and the operation details.

Specifically, it is determined whether or not the operation timing of the frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) during the period in which the timing effect (operation effect) is executed is the pressing success period, and the determination result is obtained. Frame buttons (1st frame button 22a, 2nd frame) during the period for setting display commands for displaying effects (successful effects, unsuccessful effects) based on the above, and selecting the difficulty level of timing effects (operation effects). Based on the operation of the button 22b), a process of setting the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed.

When the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the effect execution flag 223x is set to ON (S3001). Then, in the process of S3001, when it is determined that the effect executing flag 223x is on (S3001: Yes), then it is determined whether the release operation flag 223p is on (S3002). If it is determined in the process of S3002 that the release operation flag 223p is on (S3002: Yes), the release operation flag 223p is set to off (S3003), and the process proceeds to the process of S3005. On the other hand, when it is determined that the release operation flag is off (S3002: No), it is then determined whether the second frame button 22a is operated (pressed) (S3004).

If it is determined in the process of S3004 that the second frame button 22a has not been operated (pressed) (S3004: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, if it is determined that the second frame button 22a has been operated (pressed) in the process of S3004 (S3004: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3005.

Here, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 19, the first frame button (effect button) 22a is configured to output an operation signal based on the operation to the voice lamp control device 113. The second frame button (release button) 22b is configured to output an operation signal based on the operation to the main control device 110. The timing effect (operation effect) in which the effect mode is set by the voice lamp control device 113 is based on the operation on the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b described above. It is configured so that the effect mode (effect result) can be changed.

Therefore, in the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (S2107) of FIG. 59, the process (S3004) of determining whether or not the first frame button (effect button) 22a is operated (pressed) and the process (S3004) are released from the main control device 110. A process (S3002) for determining whether or not an operation (press) is performed on the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed based on the setting content of the release operation flag 223p that is set to be turned on when an operation command is received. To. As a result, the operation contents for a plurality of operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) for which operation signals are output to different control means (main control device 110, voice lamp control device 113) are aggregated. Therefore, it is possible to smoothly set the effect mode corresponding to the operation of each operation means (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b), and it is possible to enhance the effect.

Further, in the present embodiment, prior to the process of determining the operation for the first frame button 22a (S3004), the process of determining the setting content of the release operation flag 223p indicating the operation status for the second frame button 22b (S3002). Is configured to be executed. This is because when both frame buttons (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) are operated at the same time, the effect is executed based on the operation for the second frame button 22b. That is, in the present embodiment, the second frame button (release button) 22b changes the state of the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) from the closed (non-release) state to the open (release) state. Since it is an operation means provided for making it variable and a privilege can be given to the player by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the first frame button provided only for the production The effect on the game is significantly different from that of the (effect button) 22a. Therefore, in the timing effect (operation effect), the presence / absence of the operation on the second frame button (release button) 22b, which may affect the result of the game, is determined rather than the presence / absence determination of the first frame button (effect button) 22a. Raising priority. With this configuration, the effect is executed by using both the operation for the operation means that can affect the result of the game and the operation for the operation means for the effect that does not affect the result of the game ( In the timing effect (operation effect), it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the result of the game.

Returning to FIG. 59, the description will be continued. In the process of S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the button type in which the pressing is detected is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y (S3005). That is, in the process of S3002, when it is determined that the release operation flag 223p is on and the process shifts to the process of S3005, the press period information corresponding to the second frame button 22b is read from the press period information storage area 223y and S3004. When it is determined that the pressing of the first frame button 22a is detected and the process shifts to the processing of S3005, the pressing period information corresponding to the first frame button 22a is read from the pressing period information storage area 223y.

Then, when the processing of S3005 is completed, it is next determined whether or not the current frame button operation was performed during the successful pressing period based on the pressing period information read by the processing of S3005 (S3006). If it is determined that the pressing success period is not in progress (S3006: No), a display failure effect command is set (S3007), and the process proceeds to S3011. Here, when the display failure effect command is set, "bad" is displayed as the result display mode 720 as shown in FIG. 11B.

On the other hand, in the process of S3006, when it is determined that the pressing success period is in progress (S3006: Yes), it is determined whether the operation determined in this process is the second frame button (release button) 22b. (S3008). If it is determined that the operation is the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b in the process of S3008 (S3008: Yes), the display release button success effect command is set (S3009), and the process proceeds to the process of S3011. .. Further, in the process of S3008, when it is determined that the operation is not the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b but the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 22a (S3008: No), the display effect The button success effect command is set (S3010), and the process proceeds to S3011.

Here, when the display release button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. 10B, "good" is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the second frame button 22b is schematically displayed. The left button display 715 shown is changed to the pressed state mode. Further, when the display effect button success effect command is set, as shown in FIG. 11A, “good” is displayed as the result display mode 720, and the first frame button 22a is schematically shown. The middle button display 716 is changed to the pressed state mode. Further, in the timing effect (operation effect) of this time, when the ball has entered the specific general entry port 630, the specific entry display mode 721 indicating that fact is the ball to the specific general entry port 630. It is displayed in an aspect (“15” indicating the number of prize balls) indicating the privilege given to the player by entering the ball.

Returning to FIG. 59, the description will be continued. In the process of S3011, it is determined whether the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to ON (S3011). In the process of S3011, if the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is off (S3011: No), this process ends as it is. On the other hand, in the process of S3011, if the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is on (S3011: Yes), it is determined whether the first frame button 22a is pressed (S3012), and if it is pressed (S3012: Yes). Next, the difficulty level information indicating the selected difficulty level is set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa (S3013), the difficulty level selection flag 223ab is set to off (S3014), and this process is terminated. If it is determined in the process of S3012 that the first frame button 22a is not pressed (S3012: No), the present process is terminated as it is.

Next, the timing effect setting process (S2111) will be described with reference to FIG. 60. FIG. 60 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timing effect setting process (S2111). This timing effect setting process (S2111) is a process for setting the content of the timing effect (operation effect) to be executed.

When the timing effect setting process (S2111) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the timing effect setting flag 223w is on (S3101). In the processing of S3101, when it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is on (S3101: Yes), then it is determined whether the current jackpot is on (S3102), and it is determined that the jackpot is on. (S3102: Yes) executes the jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) for setting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the jackpot, and shifts to the process of S3105. The jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 61 (a).

On the other hand, in the processing of S3102, when it is determined that the jackpot is not hit (S3102: No), the normal timing effect preset processing for setting the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) based on the variable display of the special symbol (S3104) is executed, and the process proceeds to the process of S3105. The normal timing effect preset processing (S3104) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 61 (b).

In the process of S3105, the timing effect common setting process that is commonly executed regardless of the timing effect (operation effect) executed at any timing (big hit, normal middle) is executed (S3105), and then this process is performed. To finish. The timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described in detail later with reference to FIG. 62.

Further, in the process of S3101, when it is determined that the timing effect setting flag 223w is off (S3101: No), the timing effect correction process (S3106) for correcting the ball entry timing in the timing effect (operation effect) is performed. Execute, and then end this process. A detailed description of this timing effect correction process (S3106) will be described later with reference to FIG. 63.

Here, the jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) will be described with reference to FIG. 61A. FIG. 61A is a flowchart showing the contents of the jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103). This jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) is a frame button (first frame button 22a, second frame button 22b) in the timing effect (operation effect) to be executed based on the difficulty level set during the jackpot. It sets the sound (sound effect) output during operation.

When the jackpot timing effect preset processing (S3103) is executed, first, the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa is read (S3131), and the pointer setting condition corresponding to the read difficulty level is acquired. (S3132). Specifically, from the difficulty level information set in the difficulty level storage area 223aa, the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 22b and the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630. The number of matches, the number of operations of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the display mode information of the effect pointer corresponding to the difficulty level are acquired.

After finishing the process of S3132, it is next determined whether the read difficulty level information is low difficulty level (S3133). In the process of S3133, when it is determined that the difficulty level information is low (S3133: No), the range 1 data 222c2 indicating the low difficulty level is read out from the music information storage area 222c (S3134), and corresponds to the range 1. A voice command is set (S3135), and this process ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 1 indicates the high range of the music information, the high sound sound (sound effect) is set so as to correspond to the high range.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3133, when it is determined that the difficulty level information is high difficulty (S3133: No), the sound range 2 data 222c3 indicating the high difficulty is read out from the music information storage area 222c (S3136), and the sound range 2 is set. The corresponding voice command is set (S3137), and this process ends. As the voice command set here, since the sound range 2 indicates the low range of the music information, the low sound (sound effect) is set so as to correspond to the low range.

Next, the normal timing effect preset processing (S3104) will be described with reference to FIG. 61 (b). FIG. 61B is a flowchart showing the contents of the normal timing effect preset processing (S3104). In this normal timing effect preset processing (S3104), when the lottery result of the target special symbol is a hit, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated during the successful pressing period. The setting is made so that the lottery result is notified.

When the normal timing effect preset processing (S3104) is executed, first, a low-difficulty pointer setting condition is acquired (S3151), and then it is determined whether or not the fluctuation of the special symbol this time is a hit fluctuation (S3104). S3152). When it is determined in the processing of S3152 that the hit is fluctuating (S3152: Yes), the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3153), and the number of pointers to be displayed is set from the pointer setting conditions acquired in the processing of S3151. Is subtracted by 1 (S3154), and this process ends.

Next, the timing effect common setting process (S3105) will be described with reference to FIG. 62. FIG. 62 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timing effect common setting process (S3105). The timing effect common setting process (S3105) includes the above-mentioned jackpot timing effect preset process (see S3103 in FIG. 61 (a)) or the normal timing effect preset process (see S3104 in FIG. 61 (b)). ) And the pointer setting condition of the timing effect (operation effect) set by) and the operation status of the movable valve 750, the process of determining the effect mode of the timing effect (operation effect) is executed.

When the timing effect common setting process (S3105) is executed, first. Based on the current movable state (movable state) of the movable valve 750 stored in the movable valve state storage area 223s, the closing timing information up to 30 seconds later is read out from the closing timing storage area 223v (S3201). Then, the ball entry timing information stored in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad is read out, and the ball entry possible timing information obtained by subtracting the ball entry timing information from the closing timing is calculated (S3202).

Then, it is determined whether or not there is a timing in which the pointer setting condition of the timing effect (operation effect) of this time and the ball entry possibility timing information calculated in the process of S3202 match (S3203). Specifically, a place where the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition and the ball entry possible timing information match is set in the pointer setting condition. Determine if there is a match for the number of matches. In this case, since the ball entry possible timing information is calculated based on the closing timing of the movable valve 750 whose operation is controlled according to a predetermined rule, the music executed in the timing effect (operation effect). While shifting the start timing of the above within a predetermined period (up to 10 seconds), it is determined whether or not there is a matching timing (see FIG. 16).

When it is determined that there is a matching timing in the processing of S3203 (S3203: Yes), the start timing of the timing effect (operation effect) is set based on the matching timing (S3204), while in the processing of S3203, If it is determined that there is no matching timing (S3203: No), a special pointer display position is set in addition to the effect pointer displayable area (see FIG. 27) corresponding to the range data of the music set as the pointer setting condition. A match timing is created (S3205). After that, the effect start timing is set based on the created match timing (S3204).

After finishing the process of S3204, it is next determined whether or not the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to ON (S3206). In the process of S3206, when it is determined that the hit pointer setting flag 223af is on (S3206: Yes), that is, the current timing effect (operation effect) is executed based on the winning special symbol variation effect. If this is the case, the second frame button (release button) is applied to the non-matching point where the pointer setting condition of the current timing effect (operation effect) and the ball-entry possible timing information calculated in the processing of S3202 do not match. One display pointer for operating 22b is set (S3207), the hit pointer setting flag 223af is set to off (S3208), and the process proceeds to S3209. On the other hand, when it is determined that the hit pointer setting flag 223af is off in the processing of S3206 (S3206: No), the processing of S3207 and S3208 is skipped and the process proceeds to the processing of S3209.

With this configuration, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed during the fluctuation of the special symbol, the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the non-matching point that does not match the ball entry possible timing information. It is possible to set a display pointer for this. As a result, even if the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, the specific general entry port 630 is used. When the ball does not enter, the player can be expected that the lottery result of the changing special symbol will be a big hit, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In addition, when using such a configuration, when it is determined that the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing with respect to the display pointer set at the non-matching point described above, the second frame button (release button) 22b is used. 3 The symbol display device 81 may be configured to notify the lottery result of the special symbol. As a result, the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b can be used as a means for notifying the lottery result of the special symbol.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display pointer is set to the above-mentioned non-matching points only when the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit, but in other cases, that is, the lottery result of the special symbol is a hit. Even if this is not the case, it may be configured to set a non-matching point.

In the process of S3209, the display pointers for the number of matches set in the pointer setting conditions are set (S3209), and the set display pointers (the display pointer set in the process of S3207 and the display pointer set in the process of S3209) are set. The successful pressing period is determined in correspondence with the display pointer), and the pressing period information storage area 223y is set (S3210). After finishing the processing of S3210, next, it is determined whether or not the current is a big hit (S3211), and if it is determined that the current is a big hit (S3211: Yes), various contents set in this processing are temporarily produced. It is stored in the storage area 223r (S3215), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3211, if it is determined that the current is not a big hit (S3211: No), a display timing effect command is set based on various contents set in this process (S3212), and the effect is being executed. The flag 223x is set to on (S3213), the timing effect setting flag 223w is set to off (S3214), and this process is terminated.

Next, the timing effect correction process (S3106) will be described with reference to FIG. 63. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the contents of the timing effect correction process (S3106). In this timing effect correction process (S3106), a process for correcting the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entry port 630 set in the timing effect (operation effect) is executed based on the actual ball passing period. .. Here, in the present embodiment, the ball entry timing (normal) in which the ball passing period is set to 0.5 seconds and the ball entry timing (early) in which the ball passing period is set to 0.4 seconds are used. And, one of the ball entry timing (late) in which the ball passing period is set to 0.6 seconds is selected, and the ball entry timing storage area 223ad can be set. Then, based on the ball entry timing information set in this process, the passing period of the ball corresponding to the ball entry timing information set in the ball entry timing storage area 223ad is subtracted from the closing timing information of the movable valve 750. Then, the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 is set.

When the timing effect correction process (S3106) is executed, first, the passage period set in the ball passage information storage area 223ac is read (S3301), the read passage period is analyzed, and the passage period (short) and the passage are passed. The number of information for the period (normal) and the transit period (long) are calculated respectively (S3302). After that, it is determined whether the calculated number of transit period information is equal to or greater than the number of transit period (long) information (S3303). In the processing of S3303, if it is determined that the number of information in the transit period (long) is less than the number of information in the transit period (short) (S3303: No), then the calculated number of transit period information is the transit period (normal). It is determined whether or not the number of information of the above is equal to or greater than the number of information of the passing period (short) (S3304). If it is determined in the process of S3304 that the number of information in the passing period (normal) is equal to or greater than the number of information in the passing period (short) (S3304: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, in the processing of S3304, when it is determined that the number of information in the passing period (short) is larger (S3304: No), it is determined whether the currently set ball entry timing information is the ball entry timing (late). Determine (S3305). In the process of S3305, if it is determined that the ball entry timing is not (late) (S3305: No), the timing (early) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630, and the entry timing is stored. It is set in the area (S3306), and then this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3305, when it is determined that the ball entry timing (late) is (S3305: Yes), the timing (normal) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630, and the ball enters. Set in the timing storage area (S3310), and then end this process.

Further, in the processing of S3303, if it is determined that the number of information in the transit period (long) is equal to or greater than the number of information in the transit period (short) (S3303: Yes), then the calculated number of transit period information is the transit period. It is determined whether the number of (normal) information is equal to or greater than the number of information during the transit period (long) (S3307). If it is determined in the process of S3307 that the number of information in the passing period (normal) is equal to or greater than the number of information in the passing period (long) (S3307: Yes), this process is terminated as it is.

In the process of S3307, if it is determined that the number of information in the passing period (normal) is less than the number of information in the passing period (long) (S3307: No), then the currently set ball entry timing information is input. It is determined whether the timing is (early) (S3308). In the processing of S3308, if it is determined that the ball entry timing is not (early) (S3308: No), the timing (late) is selected as the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630, and the entry timing is stored. Set in the area (S3309). On the other hand, in the process of S3308, when it is determined that the ball entry timing (early) is reached (S3305: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S3310 described above, and then the main process is terminated.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball passes through a predetermined section (the section from the first ball passing sensor S3 to the specific general entry port 630 or the section until passing through the second ball passing sensor S4). By changing the ball entry timing period subtracted from the closing timing of the movable valve 750 based on the passing period information obtained by measuring the period required for the ball, the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general ball entry port 630 is corrected. Although it is configured, other configurations may be used. For example, in the case where the storage device is released or in the timing effect (operation effect), the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at an appropriate timing. This may be set as a start condition, and the period from the setting of the start condition to the passage through the specific general entry port 630 or the second ball passage sensor S4 may be measured. Even with such a configuration, the same effect as that of the present embodiment can be obtained.

In addition, even if the correction process is performed so that the display pointer is displayed at an appropriate timing by changing the degree of progress of the effect executed based on the passing period information instead of changing the ball entry timing period. good.

Next, the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 64 is a flowchart showing the contents of the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112). In this movable valve operation counter update process (S2112), a process for updating the movable valve operation counter 223t for updating the operation scenario of the movable valve 750 is executed.

When the movable valve operation counter update process (S2112) is executed, it is first determined whether or not the movable valve operation scenario is set (S3401). If it is determined that there is no setting in the process of S3401 (S3401: No), this process is terminated as it is. On the other hand, when it is determined that there is a setting (S3401: Yes), then it is determined whether the value of the movable valve operation counter is the upper limit value (S3402). Here, the value of the movable valve operation counter is a value required to execute the 24 operation scenarios set in the movable valve operation scenario table 202f, and the value of the counter corresponding to 732 seconds is set as the upper limit value. Has been done.

If it is determined in the process of S3402 that it is not the upper limit value (S3402: No), 1 is added to the value of the movable valve operation counter 223t (S3403), and this process is terminated. On the other hand, in the process of S3402, when it is determined that the upper limit value is reached (S3402: Yes), the value of the movable valve operation counter is set to 1 (S3404), and this process is terminated. As a result, the operating status of the movable valve 750 can be grasped at any time on the voice lamp control device 113 side.

<Regarding the control process of the display control device in the first embodiment>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 65 to 78, each control executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described. The processing of the MPU 231 is roughly divided into a main processing that is repeatedly executed after the power is turned on, a command interrupt processing that is executed when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, and one frame of the image controller 237. There is a V interrupt process that is executed when the MPU 231 detects a V interrupt signal that is transmitted every 20 milliseconds when the image drawing process is completed. The MPU 231 normally executes the main process, and executes the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process in accordance with the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal. If the command reception and the V interrupt signal detection are performed at the same time, the command reception process is preferentially executed. As a result, the content of the command received from the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly reflected, and the V interrupt process can be executed.

First, with reference to FIG. 65, the main process executed by the MPU 231 in the display control device 114 will be described. FIG. 65 is a flowchart showing this main process. The main process is to execute the initialization process when the power is turned on.

Specifically, the activation of this main process is performed according to the following flow. When the power is turned on from the power supply device 115 to the display control device 114 and the system reset is released, the MPU 231 sets the instruction pointer 231a provided in the MPU 231 to "0000H" according to its hardware configuration. , The address "0000H" indicated by the instruction pointer 231a is specified for the bus line 240. When the ROM controller 234b of the character ROM 234 detects that the address specified in the bus line 240 is "0000H", the ROM controller 234b sets the boot program stored in the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d in the buffer RAM 234c. , The corresponding data (instruction code) is output to MPU231. Then, the MPU 231 fetches the instruction code received from the character ROM 234 and starts the execution of the process according to the fetched instruction to start the main process.

Here, if all the boot programs first processed by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a, the character ROM 234 indicates that the address specified for the bus line 240 is "0000H". When it is detected, one page of data including the data (instruction code) corresponding to the address "0000H" must be read from the NAND flash memory 234a and set in the buffer RAM 234c. Then, due to the nature of the NAND flash memory 234a, it takes a long time to set the buffer RAM 234c from its read, so the MPU 231 receives the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" after designating the address "0000H". It will consume a lot of waiting time. Therefore, it takes a long time to start the MPU 231. As a result, there is a problem that the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 may not be started immediately.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, in the boot program, a predetermined number of instructions from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released are stored in the NOR type ROM 234d, so that the NOR type ROM becomes faster. Since it is a memory capable of reading data, when the address "0000H" is specified from the MPU 231 via the bus line 240 after the system reset is released, the character ROM 234 immediately shifts to the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d. The stored boot program can be set in the buffer RAM 234c, and the corresponding data (instruction code) can be output to the MPU 231. Therefore, since the MPU 231 can receive the instruction code corresponding to the address "0000H" in a short time after designating the address "0000H", the MPU 231 can start the main process in a short time. Therefore, even if the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control of the third symbol display device 81 in the display control device 114 can be started immediately.

When the main process is executed as described above, first, the boot process executed by the boot program is executed (S5001), and the display control device 114 is capable of executing various controls on the third symbol display device 81. To start.

Here, the boot process (S5001) will be described with reference to FIG. 66. FIG. 66 is a flowchart showing a boot process (S5001) executed in the main process in the MPU 231 of the display control device 114.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the control program and the fixed value data executed by the MPU 231 are stored in the third symbol display device 81 instead of being stored by providing a dedicated program ROM as in the conventional game machine. The data of the image to be displayed is stored in the character ROM 234 provided for storing the data. Since the character ROM 234 is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a capable of increasing the capacity in a small area, it is possible to sufficiently store not only the image data but also the control program and the like, while controlling the character ROM 234. It is not necessary to provide a dedicated program ROM for storing programs and the like. Therefore, the number of parts in the display control device 114 can be reduced, the manufacturing cost can be reduced, and the increase in the failure occurrence rate due to the increase in the number of parts can be suppressed.

On the other hand, since the NAND type flash memory has a slow read speed especially when performing random access, if the MPU 231 directly reads out and processes the control program and fixed value data stored in the NAND type flash memory 234a, the MPU 231 is used. Even if a high-performance processor is used, the processing performance of the display control device 114 may be deteriorated. Therefore, in this boot process, the control program and fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table provided in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. The process of transferring to the storage area 233b and storing the data is executed.

Specifically, first, based on the above-mentioned operation by the hardware of the MPU 231 and the character ROM 234, after the system reset is released, the program is read from the first program storage area 234d1 of the NOR type ROM 234d and set in the buffer RAM 234c according to the boot program. 2 Of the control programs stored in the program storage area 234a1, only a predetermined amount is transferred to the program storage area 233a (S5101). The predetermined amount of control programs transferred here includes the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1.

Then, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the first predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, the start address of the remaining boot program stored in the program storage area 233a (S5102). As a result, the MPU 231 starts executing the remaining boot programs included in the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101.

Further, by setting the instruction pointer 231a to a predetermined address of the program storage area 233a by the process of S5102, the MPU 231 executes various processes while reading the control program stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233. become. That is, the MPU 231 does not read the control program from the NAND flash memory 234a having the second program storage area 234a1 and fetch the instruction, but reads the control program transferred to the work RAM 233 having the program storage area 233a and fetches the instruction. And execute various processes. As described above, since the work RAM 233 is composed of the DRAM, the read operation is performed at high speed. Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the MPU 231 can fetch the instruction at high speed and execute the processing for the instruction.

When the instruction pointer 231a is set by the process of S5102, it is subsequently stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a according to the remaining boot programs whose execution is started by the set instruction pointer 231a. The remaining control programs and fixed value data that have not been transferred to the program storage area 233a among the control programs are transferred to the program storage area 233a or the data table storage area 233b in predetermined amounts (S5103). Specifically, the control program and some fixed data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233, and the above-mentioned various data tables (display data table, transfer data table) among the fixed value data are stored in the data table. Transfer to storage area 233b.

Then, after executing other processing necessary for the boot processing (S5104), the instruction pointer 231a is executed at the second predetermined address of the program storage area 233a, that is, after the boot processing (see S5001 in FIG. 65) is completed. By setting the start address of the program corresponding to the power initialization process (see S5002 in FIG. 65) (S5105), the execution of the boot program is completed and the main boot process is completed.

By executing the boot process (S5001) in this way, the control program and the fixed value data stored in the second program storage area 234a1 of the NAND flash memory 234a are all stored in the work RAM 233 configured by the DRAM. It is transferred to and stored in the program storage area 233a and the data table storage area 233b. Then, at the end of the boot process, the instruction pointer 231a is set to the above-mentioned second predetermined address, and thereafter, the MPU 231 transfers the control program transferred to the program storage area 233a without referring to the NAND flash memory 234a. Use to perform various processes.

Therefore, even when the control program is stored in the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the control program and the fixed value data are stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 and the program storage area 233a after the system reset is released. By transferring to the data table storage area 233b, the MPU 231 can read a control program or fixed value data from a work RAM composed of a DRAM having a high read speed and perform various controls. Therefore, the display control device 114 High processing performance can be maintained, and diversified and complicated effects can be easily executed by using the auxiliary effect unit.

On the other hand, instead of storing all the boot programs in the NOR type ROM 234d, a predetermined number of instructions are stored from the instruction to be processed first by the MPU 231 after the system reset is released, and the remaining boot programs are stored in the NAND flash memory 234a. Even if it is stored in the second program storage area 234a1, the control program stored in the second program storage area 234a1 can be reliably transferred to the program storage area 233a. Therefore, the character ROM 234 can start the MPU 231 in a short time only by adding an extremely small capacity NOR type ROM 234d, so that the cost increase of the character ROM 234 due to the shortening of the time can be suppressed. Can be done.

In the boot process shown in FIG. 66, the predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the process of S5101 includes all the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1. Although configured, the control program is not necessarily limited to this, and a predetermined amount of control programs transferred to the program storage area 233a by the processing of S5101 is a boot program that executes a boot processing to be processed following the processing of S5102. May be part of. The boot program transferred here transfers the control program including all the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and further, the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a is indicated by an instruction pointer. The process set to 231a may be executed. Then, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed by all the remaining boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a.

Further, the boot program transferred by the process of S5101 further transfers a part of the remaining boot program to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the head of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the address to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Further, some boot programs stored in the program storage area 233a by this process further transfer a part of the remaining boot programs to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently to the program storage area 233a. The process of setting the start address of the stored boot program to the instruction pointer 231a may be executed. Then, a part of the remaining boot program is transferred to the program storage area 233a by a predetermined amount, and subsequently, the process of setting the start address of the boot program stored in the program storage area 233a to the instruction pointer 231a is performed in S5101. After repeating the process a plurality of times including the process of S5102 and S5102, the processes of S5103 to S5105 may be executed.

As a result, even if the program size of the boot program is large and the remaining boot programs that are not stored in the first program storage area 234d1 cannot be transferred to the program storage area 233a at a time, the MPU 231 is already stored in the program storage area 233a. The boot program can be used to transfer a predetermined amount to the program storage area 233a.

Further, in the present embodiment, a case has been described in which a part of the boot program executed by the MPU 231 is first stored in the first program storage area 234d1 when the system reset is released, but all the boot programs are stored in the first program storage area 234d1. It may be stored in one program storage area 234d1. In this case, when the MPU 231 starts the boot process, the processes S5103 to S5105 may be executed without performing the processes S5101 and S5102. As a result, the process of transferring the boot program to the program storage area 233a becomes unnecessary, so that the number of times the program is transferred to the character ROM 234 or the program storage area 233a is reduced, so that the processing time of the boot process can be reduced. Therefore, it is possible to start the control of the auxiliary effect unit in the MPU 231 which becomes possible after the boot process earlier.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 65. When the boot process is completed, the initial setting process is then executed according to the control program transferred and stored in the program storage area 233a of the work RAM 233 (S5002). Specifically, the value of the stack pointer is set in the MPU 231 and various settings such as the register group in the MPU 231 and the I / O device are performed. In addition, processing for clearing the storage of the work RAM 233, the resident video RAM 235, and the normal video RAM 236 is performed. Further, various flags are provided in the work RAM 233, and initial values are set for each flag. As the initial value of each flag, "off" or "0" is set unless otherwise specified.

Further, in the initial setting process, after the initial setting of the image controller 237 is performed, an image is drawn on the image controller 237 so that the image of a specific color is displayed on the entire screen on the third symbol display device 81. And instruct the execution of display processing. As a result, immediately after the power is turned on, the third symbol display device 81 first displays an image of a specific color on the entire screen. Here, the color of the image displayed on the entire screen of the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on is set to be different depending on the model of the pachinko machine. As a result, in the operation check in the factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the pachinko machine 10 is inspected whether or not the color image corresponding to the model is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 immediately after the power is turned on. It is possible to easily and immediately determine whether or not the startup can be started normally.

Next, a transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is transferred to the main image area 235a at power-on of the resident video RAM 235 (S5003). The transfer instruction includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on is stored, the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination. The start address of the main image area 235a at power-on is included, and the image controller 237 receives the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on from the character ROM 234 when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on according to this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the image area 235a.

Then, when all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction is completed, the image controller 237 transmits a transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer to the MPU 231. By receiving this transfer end signal, the MPU 231 can grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction has been completed. When the image controller 237 completes all the transfer of the image data indicated by the transfer instruction, the image controller 237 transmits the transfer end information indicating the transfer end to a register provided inside the image controller 237 or a part of the built-in memory. You may write it. Then, the MPU 231 reads the information of a part of the register or the built-in memory at any time, and detects the writing of the transfer end information by the image controller 237 to grasp that the transfer of the image data specified in the transfer instruction is completed. You may do so.

The image data transferred to the main image area 235a when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off. When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the main image at power-on to the main image area 235a at power-on is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5003, then the variable image at power-on A transfer instruction is transmitted to the image controller so as to transfer the image data corresponding to the above to the variable image area 235b when the power of the resident video RAM 235 is turned on (S5004). In this transfer instruction, the start address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data corresponding to the fluctuating image when the power is turned on, the data size of the image data, and the transfer destination information (here, the resident video RAM 235) are included. , The start address of the power-on variable image area 235b, which is the transfer destination, is included, and the image controller receives the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 in accordance with this transfer instruction. It is transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on. Then, the image data transferred to the variable image area 235b when the power is turned on is retained so as not to be overwritten until the power is turned off.

When the transfer of the image data corresponding to the power-on variable image to the power-on variable image area 235b is completed based on the transfer instruction transmitted to the image controller 237 by the processing of S5004, then the simple image display flag 233c Is turned on (S5005). As a result, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, in the transfer setting process (see FIG. 76 (a)) described later, all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. A resident image transfer setting process for instructing the image controller 237 to transfer the image is executed (see S6502 in FIG. 76 (a)).

Further, the simple image display flag 233c transfers all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 based on the transfer instruction to the image controller 237 by the resident image transfer setting process. It stays on until it finishes. As a result, during that time, a simple command determination process (FIG. 67) is performed so that the power-on image (power-on main image and power-on variable image) is drawn in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B). 67 (b) S5308) and the simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 67 (b)) are executed.

As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, all the image data to be stored in the resident video RAM 235 due to the slow read speed of the NAND flash memory 234a can be stored. It takes a lot of time to transfer from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, as in this main process, after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on are first transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, and the main image at power-on is the third. By displaying on the symbol display device 81, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the player or the person concerned with the hall can turn on the power displayed on the third symbol display device 81. You can check the main image. Therefore, the display control device 114 transfers the remaining resident image data from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 over time while displaying the main image at power-on on the third symbol display device 81. be able to. On the other hand, the player or the like can recognize that some kind of initialization processing is being performed while the main image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, so that the player or the like resides in the remaining resident video RAM 235. Until the image data to be transferred is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, it is possible to wait until the initialization is completed without worrying about whether the operation has stopped.

Further, even in the operation check in a factory or the like at the time of manufacturing, the main image at the time of turning on the power is immediately displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the operation of the third symbol display device 81 is started without any problem by turning on the power. It can be immediately confirmed that this is the case, and by using the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed for the character ROM 234, it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the operation check efficiency.

Further, in the display control device 114 of the pachinko machine 10, since the variable image at power-on is also transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 together with the main image at power-on after the power is turned on, the main image at power-on is the third symbol. Since the player started the game while it was displayed on the display device 81, the player entered the first ball entrance 64 or the second ball entrance 640 (starting prize), and the start instruction of the variable effect was given. When the main control device 110 passes through the voice lamp control device 113, that is, when the display fluctuation pattern command is received, the fluctuation image at power-on is immediately displayed during the fluctuation effect period, and the fluctuation is simple. You can produce. Therefore, the player can confirm that the lottery has been surely performed by the simple variation effect even while the main image at the time of turning on the power is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Further, as described above, while the remaining image data to be resident is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, the main image continues to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 when the power is turned on, but the character ROM 234 Is composed of a NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, so that it takes time to transfer the data. Therefore, after the power is turned on, the main image is continuously displayed at the time of turning on the power for a long time. However, in the pachinko machine 10, a simple fluctuation effect can be performed using the power-on fluctuation image transferred to the resident video RAM 235 after the power is turned on. Therefore, immediately after the power is turned on, for example, power failure recovery Immediately after, even while the main image is displayed when the power is turned on, the player can play the game with peace of mind.

After the process of S5005, the interrupt permission is set (S5006), and thereafter, the main process executes an infinite loop process until the power is turned off. As a result, after the interrupt permission is set by the process of S5006, the command interrupt process and the V interrupt process are executed according to the reception of the command and the detection of the V interrupt signal.

Next, the command interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (a). FIG. 67A is a flowchart showing the command interrupt process. As described above, when a command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the MPU 231 executes the command interrupt process.

In this command interrupt process, the received command data is extracted, the extracted command data is sequentially stored in the command buffer area provided in the work RAM 233 (S5201), and the process ends. Various commands stored in the command buffer area by this command interrupt processing are read by the command determination processing or the simple command determination processing of the V interrupt processing described later, and the processing corresponding to the command is performed.

Next, the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114 will be described with reference to FIG. 67 (b). FIG. 67B is a flowchart showing this V interrupt process. In this V interrupt process, various processes corresponding to the commands stored in the command buffer area are executed by the command interrupt process, an image to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is specified, and then the image is drawn. By creating a list (see FIG. 32) and transmitting the drawing list to the image controller 237, the image controller 237 is instructed to execute the drawing process and the display processing of the image.

As described above, the execution of this V interrupt process is started when the V interrupt signal from the image controller 237 is detected. This V interrupt signal is a signal generated by the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of an image for one frame is completed and transmitted to the MPU 231. Therefore, by executing the V interrupt process in synchronization with this V interrupt signal, a drawing instruction is given to the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process of the image for one frame is completed. become. Therefore, the image controller 237 does not receive a drawing instruction for the next image before the image drawing processing and display processing are completed. Therefore, the image controller 237 may start drawing a new image in the middle of drawing the image. It is possible to prevent the image from being expanded in accordance with a new drawing instruction in the frame buffer in which the image information being displayed is stored.

Here, first, the outline of the flow of the V interrupt processing will be described, and then the details of each processing will be described with reference to other drawings. In this V interrupt process, as shown in FIG. 67B, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301), and the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, If it is off (S5301: No), it means that the transfer of all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been completed. The command determination process (S5302) is executed so that the display device 81 can display the image, and then the display setting process (S5303) is executed.

In the command determination process (S5302), the content of the command from the voice lamp control device 113 stored in the command buffer area is analyzed by the command interrupt process, the process corresponding to the command is executed, and the display demo command and the display demo command are executed. When the display variation pattern command is stored, the demo display data table or the variation display data table according to the variation pattern type is set in the display data table buffer 233d, and the transfer data corresponding to the set display data table is set. The table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e.

In this command determination process, all commands stored in the command buffer area at that time are analyzed and the process is executed. This is because the command determination process is performed at intervals of 20 milliseconds when the V interrupt process is executed, so there is a high possibility that multiple commands are stored in the command buffer area during that 20 milliseconds. is there. In particular, when the start of the variation effect is determined in the main control device 110, there is a high possibility that the display variation pattern command, the display stop type command, and the like are simultaneously stored in the command buffer area. Therefore, by analyzing and executing these commands at once, the mode and stop type of the fluctuation effect selected by the main control device 110 and the voice lamp control device 113 can be quickly grasped, and the effect image corresponding to the mode can be obtained. The drawing of the image can be controlled so that the third symbol display device 81 displays the image. The details of this command determination process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72.

In the display setting process (S5303), an image for one frame to be displayed next on the third symbol display device 81 is based on the contents of the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the command determination process (S5302) or the like. Specifically specify the contents of. Further, the effect mode to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is determined according to the processing status and the like, and the display data table corresponding to the determined effect mode is set in the display data table buffer 233d. The details of this display setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75.

After the display setting process is executed, the task process is then executed (S5304). In this task process, the image is configured based on the content of the image for the next frame to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, which is specified by the display setting process (S5303) or the simple display setting process (S5309). In addition to specifying the type of sprite (display object) to be displayed, various parameters required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle are determined for each sprite.

Next, the transfer setting process is executed (S5305). In this transfer setting process, while the simple image display flag 233c is on, the image controller 237 transfers the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined area of the resident video RAM 235. Set instructions. Further, while the simple image display flag 233c is off, predetermined image data is normally used from the character ROM 234 to the image controller 237 based on the transfer data information of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Even when a transfer instruction to be transferred to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the video RAM 236 is set and a continuous notice command or a rear image change command is received from the voice lamp control device 113, the image controller 237 is continuously notified. A transfer instruction is set to transfer the image data of the continuous preview image used in the preview effect and the image data of the rear image after the change from the character ROM 234 to a predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236. The details of the transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77.

Next, the drawing process is executed (S5306). In this drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame, the parameters required for drawing each sprite, and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305), which are determined in the task process (S5304), are used. , The drawing list shown in FIG. 32 is generated, and the drawing list is transmitted to the image controller 237 together with the drawing target buffer information. As a result, the image controller 237 executes the image drawing process according to the drawing list. The details of the drawing process will be described later with reference to FIG. 78.

Next, update processing of various counters provided in the display control device 114 is executed (S5307). Then, the V interrupt process is terminated. As a counter updated by the process of S5307, for example, there is a stop symbol counter (not shown) for determining a stop symbol. The value of this stop symbol counter is stored in the work RAM 233, and the update process is performed every time the V interrupt process is executed. Then, when the reception of the display stop type command is detected in the command determination process, the stop type indicated by the display stop type command (big hit A, big hit B, big hit C, front / rear out reach, front / rear out reach, complete The stop type table corresponding to the missed, chance eye) is compared with the stop type counter, and the stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 is finally set.

On the other hand, when it is determined in the process of S5301 that the simple image display flag 233c is on (S5301: Yes), it means that the transfer of all the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been completed. Therefore, in order to display the power-on image on the third symbol display device 81, the simple command determination process (S5308) is executed, and then the simple display setting process (S5309) is executed to shift to the process of S5304.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 68 to 72, details of the above-mentioned command determination process (S5302), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing this command determination process.

In this command determination process, as shown in FIG. 68, first, it is determined whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area (S5401), and if there is no unprocessed new command (S5401: No), The command judgment process is terminated and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes), the new command flag that notifies the display setting process (S5403) that the new command has been processed in the ON state is set to ON (S5402), and then the command For all unprocessed commands stored in the buffer area, the command type is analyzed (S5403).

Then, first, it is determined whether or not there is a display variation pattern command among the unprocessed commands (S5404), and if there is a display variation pattern command (S5404: Yes), the variation pattern command processing is executed. (S5405), the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the variation pattern command processing (S5405) will be described with reference to FIG. 69A. FIG. 69A is a flowchart showing the variation pattern command processing. This fluctuation pattern command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display fluctuation pattern command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the variation pattern command processing, first, a variation display data table corresponding to the variation effect pattern indicated by the display variation pattern command is determined, and the determined variation display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S5501).

Here, since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is performed. When executing, it is impossible that two or more display fluctuation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command is mistakenly displayed. It may be interpreted as a variation pattern command. In the process of S5501, in preparation for such a case, when it is determined that two or more display variation pattern commands are stored in the command buffer area, the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time. Is set in the display data table buffer 233d.

If the fluctuation display data table corresponding to the fluctuation pattern having a long fluctuation time is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the fluctuation effect having a shorter fluctuation time than the set display data table is actually the main control device. When instructed by 110, the next display variation pattern command is received from the main control device 110 while the variation effect according to the set variation display data table is displayed on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, another variable display is suddenly started, which may cause the player to feel uncomfortable.

On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the variation display data table corresponding to the variation pattern having the shortest variation time in the display data table buffer 233d, the variation is actually longer than the set display data table. Even when the fluctuation effect having time is instructed by the main control device 110, as will be described later, after the variation effect according to the display data table buffer 233d is completed, the main control device 110 for the next display. Since the display of the third symbol display device 81 is controlled by the display setting process so that the demo effect is displayed until the pattern command is received, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the third symbol display device 81. 3 You can keep watching the fluctuation of the symbol.

Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in S5501 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5502). Then, among the data table discrimination flags provided for each fluctuation display data table corresponding to each fluctuation pattern, the data table discrimination flag corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set by the processing of S5501 is turned on, and other fluctuations are performed. The data table determination flag corresponding to the display data table is set to off (S5503). In the display setting process, by referring to the data table discrimination flag set by the process of S5503, it is easy to determine which variation pattern the variation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d corresponds to. You can judge.

Next, based on the fluctuation time of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501, the time data representing the fluctuation time is set in the timekeeping counter 233h (S5504), and the pointer is set. Initialize 233f to 0 (S5505). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmation display flag are set to off (S5506), the variation pattern command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this fluctuation pattern command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5505, from the fluctuation display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5501. , The drawing content defined at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S5502e. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the transfer data table set in, and the sprite image data required in the set variable display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a of the above.

Further, in the display setting process, when the time of the variation effect specified in the variation display data table is measured by using the time counting counter 233h in which the time data is set by the process of S5504, the variation effect in the variation display data table is completed. If it is determined, the stop display setting is controlled so that the stop symbol corresponding to the display stop type command from the main control device 110 is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5404, if it is determined that there is no display variation pattern command (S5404: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display stop type command among the unprocessed commands (S5406). If there is a display variable type command (S5406: Yes), the stop type command process is executed (S5407), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the stop type command processing (S5407) will be described with reference to FIG. 69 (b). FIG. 69B is a flowchart showing the stop type command processing. This stop type command processing executes the processing corresponding to the display variation type command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the stop type command processing, first, the stop type table corresponding to the stop type information (big hit A, big hit B, front / rear out reach, non-front / back out reach, complete off, or chance eye) indicated by the display stop type command. (S5601), the stop type table is compared with the value of the stop type counter that is updated every time the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67 (b)) is executed, and the third symbol display device is used. The stop symbol after the variation effect displayed on 81 is finally set (S5602).

Then, among the stop symbol discrimination flags provided for each stop symbol, the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is turned on, and the stop symbol discrimination flag corresponding to other stop symbols is turned off. Is set to (S5603), and this process ends.

Here, as described above, in the variation display data table, as the type information for specifying the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 after a lapse of a predetermined time from the start of the variation based on the data table. , Offset information (symbol offset information) from the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is described. In the above-mentioned task process (S5304), after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the fluctuation, the stop symbol set by the process of S5602 is specified from the stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S5603, and the stop symbol is specified. By adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the stopped symbol, the third symbol to be actually displayed is specified. Then, the address in which the image data corresponding to the specified third symbol is stored is specified. As described above, the image data corresponding to the third symbol is stored in the third symbol area 235d of the resident video RAM 235.

Since the determination of the start of fluctuation is always made at a distance of several seconds or more in the main control device 110, two or more display stop type commands are not received within 20 milliseconds, and therefore the command determination process is executed. In this case, it is impossible that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise, etc., and another command is mistakenly stopped for display. It may be interpreted as a type command. In the process of S5601, if it is determined that two or more display stop type commands are stored in the command buffer area in preparation for such a case, it is assumed that the stop type is completely out of order, and the stop type Determine the table. As a result, the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disconnection is set by the process of S5602.

If a stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit of the special symbol" is set, the third symbol display device 81 actually has the "special symbol" even if the "special symbol is off". The stop symbol corresponding to the "big hit" is displayed, which causes the player to misunderstand that the pachinko machine 10 has become a "special symbol jackpot", which may reduce the reliability of the pachinko machine 10. On the other hand, as in the present embodiment, by setting the stop symbol corresponding to the complete disengagement, in fact, if it is a "big hit of the special symbol", the third symbol display device 81 is completely disengaged. Even if the symbol is displayed, the pachinko machine 10 becomes a "big hit of the special symbol", so that the player can be pleased.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5406, if it is determined that there is no display stop type command (S5406: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display opening command among the unprocessed commands (S5408), and the display is displayed. If there is an opening command for (S5408: Yes), the opening command process is executed (S5409), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the opening command processing (S5409) will be described with reference to FIG. 70A. FIG. 70A is a flowchart showing the opening command processing. This opening command process executes the process corresponding to the display opening command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the opening command processing, first, the opening display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b and set in the display data table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the transfer data table corresponding to the display data table set in the process of S5701 is determined, read from the data table storage area 233b, and set in the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5702).

Then, based on the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5703). S5704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5705), the opening command processing is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination processing.

By executing this opening command processing, in the display setting processing, while updating the pointer 233f initialized by the processing of S5704, from the opening display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701 The drawing content defined by the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted, the content of the image for one frame to be displayed next is specified in the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, the transfer data table buffer 233e is processed by S5702. The transfer data information specified at the address indicated by the pointer 233f is extracted from the set transfer data table, and the sprite image data required in the set opening display data table is previously stored in the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The image controller 237 is controlled so as to be transferred to the image storage area 236a.

Further, when this opening command processing is executed, the opening transfer data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. As a result, the image data required for the round effect and the ending effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 while the opening effect is being performed on the third symbol display device 81. As described above, in the pachinko machine 10, since the NAND flash memory 234a is used for the character ROM 234, the jackpot effect (opening effect, round effect, ending effect) is produced due to the slow read speed. It takes a lot of time for the image data used for the above to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

The display round number command indicating the number of newly started rounds is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when the opening effect of the third symbol display device 81 is completed, and thus indicates the first round. If the image data required for the round effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display round number command, a lot of waiting is required from the end of the opening effect to the start of the round effect. There was a risk that time would be generated and the player would feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether the operation had stopped.

Further, the display ending command for instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 at the timing when all the round effects (for 15 rounds) in the third symbol display device 81 are completed. If the image data required for the ending effect is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 after receiving the display ending command, there is a lot of waiting time from the end of the round effect to the start of the ending effect. There is a risk that the player may feel uncomfortable or anxious about whether or not the operation has stopped.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the display opening command is received, the transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is started from there, and by the time the jackpot variation display is completed on the third symbol display device 81. , The transfer of data necessary for the round effect and the ending effect is controlled to be completed. As a result, when the opening effect is completed in the third symbol display device 81, the round effect can be immediately started in the third symbol display device 81, and all the round effects (15 rounds) are performed in the third symbol display device 81. ) When the process is completed, the ending effect can be immediately started on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player does not feel anxious or uncomfortable as to whether or not the operation has stopped. Therefore, the player can be relieved.

Returning to FIG. 68, the description will be continued. In the processing of S5408, if it is determined that there is no display opening command (S5408: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display round number command among the unprocessed commands (S5410), and the display is performed. If there is a round number command (S5410: Yes), the round number command process is executed (S5411), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the round number command processing (S5411) will be described with reference to FIG. 70 (b). FIG. 70B is a flowchart showing the round number command processing. This round number command process executes the process corresponding to the display round number command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the round number command processing, first, the round number display data table corresponding to the round number indicated by the display round number command is determined, and the determined round number display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display data. Set to the table buffer 233d (S5701). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5702).

Then, based on the round number display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5701, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5703), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0. (S5704). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5705), the round number command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5410, if it is determined that there is no display round number command (S5410: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a display ending command among the unprocessed commands (S5412), and the display is performed. If there is an ending command for (S5412: Yes), the ending command process is executed (S5413), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the ending command processing (S5413) will be described with reference to FIG. 71. FIG. 71 is a flowchart showing the ending command processing. This ending command process executes the process corresponding to the display ending command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the ending command processing, first, an ending display data table corresponding to the display mode of the ending effect indicated by the display ending command is determined, and the determined ending display data table is read from the data table storage area 233b to display the display data table. Set to buffer 233d (S5901). Next, the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S5902).

Next, based on the ending display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d by the processing of S5901, the time data representing the effect time is set in the time counter 233h (S5903), and the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S5903). S5904). Then, both the demo display flag and the confirmed display flag are set to off (S5905), the ending command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5412, if it is determined that there is no display ending command (S5412: No), then it is determined whether or not there is a rear image change command among the unprocessed commands (S5414), and the rear image is determined. If there is a change command (S5414: Yes), the rear image change command process is executed (S5415), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

Here, the details of the rear image change command processing (S5415) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (a). FIG. 72A is a flowchart showing the rear image change command process. This rear image change command process executes the process corresponding to the rear image change command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the back image change command process, first, the back image change flag for notifying the normal image transfer setting process (S6503) of the change of the back image due to the reception of the back image change command in the on state is set to on (S6001). .. Then, among the back image discrimination flags provided for each back image type, the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the back image change command is turned on, and the back image corresponding to other back image types is turned on. The determination flag is set to off (S6002), the rear image change command process is terminated, and the process returns to the command determination process.

In the normal image transfer setting process, when it is detected that the rear image change flag set by the process of S6001 is turned on, the rear image type after the change is specified from the rear image discrimination flag set by the process of S6002. .. When the specified back image type is back B or back C, as described above, a part of the image data corresponding to those back images is resident in the back image area 235c of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, the transfer instruction is set to the image controller 237 so that the image data corresponding to the back image in the predetermined range is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the predetermined sub-area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the task process, when it is specified to display any of the back images A to C according to the back image type of the back image specified in the display data table, the back image discrimination flag set by the process of S6002 is used. , The back image type to be displayed at that time is specified, and the range of the back image to be displayed is specified according to the passage of time, and the RAM type in which the image data corresponding to the range of the back image is stored. (Whether it is a resident video RAM 235 or a normal video RAM 236) and the address of the RAM are specified.

Since the player does not continuously operate the frame button 22 in 20 milliseconds or less, he / she does not receive two or more rear image change commands within 20 milliseconds, and therefore, the command determination process is executed. In that case, there should be no case where two or more back image change commands are stored in the command buffer area, but part of the command changes due to the influence of noise etc., and another command mistakenly changes the back image. It may be interpreted as a command. In the process of S5702, when it is determined that two or more rear image commands are stored in the command buffer area, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the previously received rear image command is turned on. Alternatively, the rear image discrimination flag corresponding to the rear image type indicated by the rear image command received later may be turned on. Alternatively, any one back image change command may be extracted and the back image discrimination flag corresponding to the back image type indicated by the command may be turned on. Since this change in the back image does not directly affect the gaming value of the pachinko machine 10, it is preferable to appropriately set the change according to the characteristics and operability of the pachinko machine 10.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. In the processing of S5414, if it is determined that there is no rear image change command (S5414: No), then it is determined whether or not there is an error command among the unprocessed commands (S5416), and there is an error command. If (S5416: Yes), error command processing is executed (S5417), and the process returns to S5401 processing.

Here, the details of the error command processing (S5417) will be described with reference to FIG. 72 (b). FIG. 72B is a flowchart showing error command processing. This error command processing executes the processing corresponding to the error command received from the voice lamp control device 113.

In the error command processing, first, the error occurrence flag indicating that an error has occurred in the ON state is set to ON (S6101). Then, among the error discrimination flags provided for each error type, the error discrimination flag corresponding to the error type indicated by the error command is turned on, and the other error discrimination flags are set to off (S6102). The process ends and the process returns to the command judgment process.

In the display setting process, when an error occurrence is detected based on the error occurrence flag set by the process of S6101, the error type generated from the error discrimination flag set by the process of S6102 is determined, and the error type is supported. The process is executed so that the warning image to be displayed is displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

When it is determined that two or more error commands are stored in the command buffer area, in the process of S6102, the error discrimination flags corresponding to all the error types indicated by the respective error commands are set to on. As a result, warning images corresponding to all error types are displayed on the third symbol display device 81, so that the player and the person concerned with the hall can correctly grasp the error occurrence status.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 68. If it is determined that there is no error command in the process of S5416 (S5416: No), then the process corresponding to the other unprocessed command is executed (S5418), and the process returns to the process of S5401.

In the processing of S5401 that is executed again after the processing of each command is executed, it is determined again whether or not there is an unprocessed new command in the command buffer area, and if there is an unprocessed new command (S5401: Yes). ), The processing of S5402 to S5418 is executed again. Then, the processes of S5401 to S5418 are repeatedly executed until there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, and when it is determined in the process of S5401 that there are no unprocessed new commands in the command buffer area, this command determination is made. End the process.

The simple command determination process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) is also the same as the command determination process. However, in the simple command judgment process, only the commands required to display the power-on image, that is, the display variation pattern command and the display stop type command, are sent from the unprocessed commands stored in the command buffer area. Extract and execute the variation pattern command processing (see FIG. 69 (a)) and stop type command processing (see FIG. 69 (b)), which are the processes corresponding to each command, and for other commands, Performs the process of discarding without executing the process corresponding to the command.

Here, in the fluctuation pattern command processing (see FIG. 69A) executed in this case, the display data table buffer corresponding to the display of the fluctuation image at power-on is changed to the display data table buffer 233d in the processing of S5501. The image data of the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on, which are set and required in that case, are stored in the main image area 235a at power-on and the variable image area 235b at power-on of the resident video RAM 235. Therefore, in the process of S5502, the process of writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e and clearing the contents thereof is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 73 to 75, the details of the above-mentioned display setting process (S5303), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 73 is a flowchart showing this display setting process.

In this display setting process, as shown in FIG. 73, it is determined whether or not the new command flag is on (S6201), and if the new command flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6201: No). It is determined that the new command has not been processed in the command determination process executed first, the processes of S6202 to S6204 are skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of S6205. On the other hand, if the new command flag is on (S6201: Yes), it is determined that the new command has been processed in the command determination process executed first, and after the new command flag is set to off (S6202), S6203 to S6204 Executes the process corresponding to the new command by the process of.

In the process of S6203, it is determined whether or not the error occurrence flag is on (S6203). Then, if the error occurrence flag is on (S6203: Yes), the warning image setting process is executed (S6204).

Here, the details of the warning image setting process will be described with reference to FIG. 74. FIG. 74 is a flowchart showing the warning image setting process. This process is a process for expanding the image data for displaying the warning image corresponding to the generated error on the third symbol display device 81. First, the error determination flag is referred to, and all the error determinations set to ON are performed. The warning image data for displaying the error warning image corresponding to the flag on the third symbol display device 81 is expanded (S6301).

In the task processing, based on this expanded warning image data, the type of sprite (display object) that composes the warning image is specified, and each sprite is required for drawing such as display coordinate position, enlargement ratio, and rotation angle. Various parameters are determined.

Then, in the warning image setting process, after the process of S6301, the error occurrence flag is set to off (S6302), and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the description returns to FIG. 73. After the warning image setting process (S6204) or in the process of S6203, when it is determined that the error occurrence flag is not on, that is, it is off (S6203: No), the process proceeds to the process of S6205.

In S6205, the pointer update process is executed (S6205). Here, the details of the pointer update process will be described with reference to FIG. 75. FIG. 75 is a flowchart showing the pointer update process. This pointer update process acquires the transfer data information of the corresponding drawing contents or transfer target image data from the display data table and transfer data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d and the transfer data table buffer 233e, respectively. This is a process of updating the pointer 233f that specifies the power address.

In this pointer update process, first, 1 is added to the pointer 233f (S6401). That is, in principle, the pointer 233f is updated so that only 1 is added each time the V interrupt process is executed. Further, as described above, in various data tables, Start information is described at the address "0000H", and the substance of each data is defined after the address "0001H", and the display data table is displayed. When the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 as it is stored in the data table buffer 233d, the value is updated to 1 by this pointer update process. Therefore, the respective values are updated in order from the address "0001H". Substantial data can be read from the data table.

After updating the value of the pointer 233f by the processing of S6401, then, in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d, whether or not the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is End information. Is determined (S6402). As a result, if it is End information (S6402: Yes), it means that the pointer 233f has been updated past the address in which the actual data is described in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d.

Therefore, it is determined whether or not the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is a demo display data table (S6403), and if it is a demo display data table (S6403: Yes), the display data table buffer. The time data corresponding to the production time of the demo display data table set in 233d is set in the time counting counter 233h (S6404), the pointer 233f is set to 1 and initialized (S6405), and this process is completed and displayed. Return to the setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, the drawing contents can be expanded in order from the beginning of the demo display data table, so that the demo effect can be repeatedly displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

On the other hand, in the process of S6403, when it is determined that the display data table stored in the display data table buffer 233d is not the demo display data table (S6403: No), the value of the pointer 233f is subtracted by 1 (S6406). ), Ends this process and returns to the display setting process. As a result, in the display setting process, when a display data table other than the demo display data table, for example, a variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the address of the previous address in which the End information is described is set. Since the drawn contents are always expanded, the third symbol display device 81 can display the last image defined in the display data table in a stopped state. On the other hand, in the process of S6402, if the data of the address indicated by the updated pointer 233f is not End information (S6402: No), this process ends and the process returns to the display setting process.

Here, the process returns to FIG. 73 to continue the description. After the pointer update process, the drawing content of the address indicated by the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process is expanded from the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d (S6206). In the task processing, the type of sprite (display object) constituting the image is specified based on the drawing contents developed in the processing of S6206 together with the warning image developed earlier, and the display coordinate position is specified for each sprite. Determine various parameters required for drawing, such as magnification, magnification, and rotation angle.

Next, the value of the timekeeping counter 233h is subtracted by 1 (S6207), and it is determined whether or not the value of the timekeeping counter 233h after the subtraction is 0 or less (S6208). Then, when the value of the time counter 233h is 1 or more (S6208: No), the display setting process is terminated as it is and the process returns to the V interrupt process. On the other hand, when the value of the time counter 233h is 0 or less (S6208: Yes), it means that the effect time corresponding to the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d has elapsed. At this time, if the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, it is the timing to end the variable display and perform the stop display, so it is confirmed whether or not the confirmation display flag is on. (S6209).

As a result, if the finalized display flag is on (S6209: Yes), the finalized display has not yet been produced and it is time to produce the finalized display. It is set (S6210), and then the contents are cleared by writing Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6211). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the confirmed display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6212), and the value of the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6213). Then, after setting the confirmation display flag indicating that the confirmation display effect is being performed in the ON state to ON (S6214), the content of the stop symbol determination flag is copied as it is to the previous stop symbol determination flag provided in the work RAM 233. (S6215), the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, when the variable display data table is set in the display data table buffer 233d, the final display effect of the stop symbol in the variable effect is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 at the end of the effect. The drawing contents can be set as described above. Further, the effect displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be easily changed to the final display effect by simply changing the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d to the final display data table. Then, as compared with the case where the display content is changed by starting another program as in the conventional case, the program is not complicated and bloated, and therefore, a large load is not applied to the MPU 231. Regardless of the processing capacity of the display control device 114, various types of effect images can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215 is used to specify the third symbol to be displayed on the third symbol display device 81 in the next variation effect. That is, as described above, the display of the third symbol in the variation effect changes according to the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before, and in the variation display data table, the variation based on the data table is changed. From the start to the elapse of a predetermined time, the symbol offset information from the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is described. In the task process (S5304), from the start of the variation until the predetermined time elapses, the stop symbol of the variation effect performed immediately before is specified from the previous stop symbol determination flag set by the process of S6215. , The third symbol to be actually displayed is specified by adding the symbol offset information acquired by the display setting process to the specified stop symbol. As a result, the variation effect is started from the stop symbol in the previous variation effect.

On the other hand, in the process of S6209, if the confirmation display flag is not on but off (S6209: No), it is determined whether or not the demo display flag is on (S6216). Then, if the demo display flag is off (S6216: Yes), it means that the value of the time counting counter 233h has become 0 or less with the end of the final display effect, so that the demo display data table is displayed in the display data table buffer. It is set to 233d (S6217), and then the contents are cleared by writing the Null data to the transfer data table buffer 233e (S6218). Then, the time data corresponding to the effect time of the demo display data table is set in the time counter 233h (S6219). Then, the pointer 233f is initialized to 0 (S6220), the demo display flag indicating that the demo is being produced in the ON state is set to ON (S6221), this process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process.

As a result, if the display variation pattern command indicating the start of the next variation effect or the opening command is not received after the final display effect is completed, the demo effect is automatically displayed on the third symbol display device 81. The drawing content can be set so that is displayed.

In the process of S6216, if the demo display flag is on (S6216: Yes), it means that the demo effect is performed after the final display effect is completed, and the demo effect is completed. Therefore, the display setting process is terminated as it is. Then, the process returns to the V interrupt process. Then, in this case, various settings are made so that the demo effect is started again as described above by the pointer update process executed in the next V interrupt process, so that the voice lamp control device 113 Until a new display variation pattern command is received, the demo effect can be repeated and displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

The simple display setting process (S5309) executed when the simple image display flag 233c is turned on in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67B) also performs the same process as the display setting process. However, in the simple display setting process, after the effect time of the variation effect by the variation image at power-on ends, the variation image at power-on according to the stop symbol set based on the display stop type command is stopped for a predetermined time. The process of setting the display data table specified to be displayed in the display data table buffer 233d is performed.

Next, with reference to FIGS. 76 and 77, the details of the above-mentioned transfer setting process (S5305), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. First, FIG. 76A is a flowchart showing this transfer setting process.

In this transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501). If the simple image display flag 233c is on (S6501: Yes), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has not been transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235, so that the resident image transfer setting The process is executed (S6502), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, a transfer instruction for transferring the image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 is set to the image controller 237. The details of the resident image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 76 (b).

On the other hand, as a result of the processing of S6501, if the simple image display flag 233c is not on, that is, if it is off (S6501: No), all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Has been transferred to. In this case, the normal image transfer setting process is executed (S6503), the transfer setting process is terminated, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. As a result, the transfer instruction is set so that the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236. The details of the normal image transfer setting process will be described later with reference to FIG. 77.

Next, the resident image transfer setting process (S6502), which is one of the transfer setting processes (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 76 (b). FIG. 76B is a flowchart showing this resident image transfer setting process (S6502).

In this resident image transfer setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the untransferred image data (S6601), and if the transfer instruction is transmitted (S6601: Yes). ), Further, it is determined whether or not the image data transfer process performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6602). In the process of S6602, when the image controller 237 is instructed to transfer the image data and then the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S6602 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6602: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the resident image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6602: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6603. Further, as a result of the processing of S6601, even if the transfer instruction of the untransferred image data is not transmitted to the image controller 237 (S6601: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6603.

In the process of S6603, it is determined whether or not all the resident target image data to be resident in the resident video RAM 235 has been transferred (S6603), and if there is untransferred resident target image data (S6603: No), the non-resident image data is not transferred. A transfer instruction is set for the image controller 237 so as to transfer the resident image data to be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235 (S6604), and the resident image transfer setting process is terminated.

As a result, the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process includes the transfer data information regarding the untransferred resident target image data, and the image controller 237 transfers the transfer described in the drawing list. Based on the data information, the resident target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the resident image data is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the resident video RAM 235), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the resident video RAM 235 (area provided in the resident video RAM 235) for storing the resident target image data is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, temporarily stores the image data in the buffer RAM 237a, and then during the unused period of the resident video RAM 236. Transfers to the specified address of the resident video RAM 236. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

If all the resident image data has been transferred as a result of the process of S6603 (S6603: Yes), the simple image display flag 233c is set to off (S6605), and the resident image transfer setting process ends. As a result, in the V interrupt process (see FIG. 67 (b)), the command is not a simple command determination process (see S5308 in FIG. 67 (b)) and a simple display setting process (see S5309 in FIG. 67 (b)). Since the determination process (see FIGS. 68 to 72) and the display setting process (see FIGS. 73 to 77) are executed, the drawing of the image at the normal time is set, and the third symbol display device 81 is set. The normal image is displayed. Further, the subsequent transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 is performed to the normal video RAM 236 by the normal image transfer setting process (see FIG. 77) (see S6601: No in FIG. 76 (a)).

By executing this resident image transfer setting process, the MPU 231 is resident in all resident video RAM 235 except for the main image at power-on and the variable image at power-on that have already been transferred in the main process. The target image data can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the resident video RAM 235. Then, the MPU 231 controls so that the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 is continuously held without being overwritten during the power-on. As a result, the image data transferred to the resident video RAM 235 by the resident image transfer setting process will be resident in the resident video RAM 235 while the power is turned on.

Therefore, after all the image data that should be resident in the resident video RAM 235 is transferred to the resident video RAM 235, the display control device 114 uses the image data resident in the resident video RAM 235 while using the image controller 237. The image drawing process can be performed with. As a result, if the image data used for the drawing process is resident in the resident video RAM 235, it is not necessary to read the corresponding image data from the character ROM 234 configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed at the time of image drawing. Therefore, the time required for reading the data can be omitted, and the image can be drawn immediately and the drawn image can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81.

In particular, the resident video RAM 235 includes image data of frequently displayed images such as a rear image, a third symbol, a character symbol, and an error message, a main control device 110, an audio lamp control device 113, and a display control device 114. Since the image data of the image to be displayed is resident immediately after the display is determined by the above, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a, various operations performed by the player at arbitrary timings can be performed. , The responsiveness until some image is displayed on the third symbol display device 81 can be kept high.

Next, the normal image transfer setting process (S6503), which is one process of the transfer setting process (S5305) executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described with reference to FIG. 77. FIG. 77 is a flowchart showing this normal image transfer setting process (S6503).

In this normal image transfer setting process, first, from the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e, the pointer 233f updated by the pointer update process (S6205) of the display setting process (S5303) executed earlier is used. Acquire the information described in the indicated address (S6701). Then, it is determined whether or not the acquired information is the transfer data information (S6702), and if it is the transfer data information (S6702: Yes), the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored is obtained from the transfer data information. The start address (storage source start address), the final address (storage source final address), and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted and stored in the transfer data buffer provided in the work RAM 233 ( S6703) Further, the transfer start flag provided in the work RAM 233 and indicating that there is image data to be transferred in the ON state is set to ON (S6704), and the process proceeds to S6705.

Further, in the process of S6702, if the acquired information is not the transfer data information but the Null data (S6702: No), the processes of S6703 and S6704 are skipped and the process proceeds to the process of S6705. In the process of S6705, it is determined whether or not a new image data transfer instruction has been set for the image controller 237 after the previous image data transfer is completed (S6705), and the transfer instruction is set. If so (S6705: Yes), it is further determined whether or not the image data transfer performed by the image controller 237 is completed based on the transfer instruction (S6706).

In the process of S6706, after setting the image data transfer instruction to the image controller 237, when the transfer end signal indicating the end of the transfer process is received from the image controller 237, it is determined that the transfer process is completed. .. When it is determined by the process of S6706 that the transfer process has not been completed (S6706: No), the image transfer process is continuously performed in the image controller 237, so that the normal image transfer setting process is performed. finish. On the other hand, when it is determined that the transfer process is completed (S6706: Yes), the process proceeds to the process of S6707. Further, as a result of the processing of S6705, even if the image data transfer instruction is not set for the image controller 237 after the end of the previous transfer processing (S6705: No), the process proceeds to the processing of S6707.

In the process of S6707, it is determined whether or not the transfer start flag is on (S6707), and if the transfer start flag is on (S6707: Yes), the image data to be transferred exists, so that the transfer start flag is present. Is turned off (S6708), the image data of the sprite indicated by various information stored in the transfer data buffer by the process of S6703 is set as the image data to be transferred, and then the process proceeds to the process of S6713. On the other hand, if the transfer start flag is not on but off (S6707: No), then it is determined whether or not the rear image change flag is on (S6709). If the rear image change flag is not on but off (S6709: No), the image data to be transferred does not exist, so the normal image transfer setting process is terminated as it is.

On the other hand, if the rear image change flag is on (S6709: Yes), it means that the rear image is changed. Therefore, after the rear image change flag is set to off (S6710), the rear image provided for each rear image type is provided. Among the discrimination flags, the image data of the back image corresponding to the back image discrimination flag in the on state is specified, and the image data is set as the transfer target image data (S6711). Further, the start address (storage source start address) and final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the back image indicated by the rear image discrimination flag is stored, and the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236). The start address is acquired (S6712), and the process proceeds to S6713.

In the process of S6713, it is determined whether or not the image data to be transferred is already stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6713). The discrimination in the process of S6713 is performed by referring to the stored image data discrimination flag 233i. That is, the storage state corresponding to the sprite as the transfer target image data is read from the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, and if the storage state is "on", the image data of the transfer target sprite is the normal video. It is determined that the data is stored in the RAM 236, and if the storage state is "off", it is determined that the image data of the sprite to be transferred is not stored in the normal video RAM 236.

If, as a result of the processing of S6713, the image data to be transferred is stored in the normal video RAM 236 (S6713: Yes), it is not necessary to transfer the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. , Ends the normal image transfer setting process as it is. As a result, it is possible to suppress unnecessary transfer of image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236, reducing the processing load on each part of the display control device 114 and reducing the traffic on the bus line 240. Can be planned.

On the other hand, if the transfer target image data is not stored in the normal video RAM 236 as a result of the processing of S6713 (S6713: No), the transfer instruction of the transfer target image data is set (S6714). As a result, the transfer data information of the image data to be transferred is included in the drawing list transmitted to the image controller 237 in the drawing process, and the image controller 237 displays the transfer data information described in the drawing list. Based on this, the image data of the image to be transferred can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236. The transfer data information includes the start address and end address of the character ROM 234 in which the image data of the image to be transferred is stored, the transfer destination information (in this case, the normal video RAM 236), and the transfer destination (transferred here). The start address of the sub-area) provided in the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 for storing the image data of the image to be transferred is included. The image controller 237 executes an image transfer process based on the transfer data information, reads the image data specified in the transfer process from the character ROM 234, and designates the specified video RAM (here, the normal video RAM 236). Forward to the address given. Then, when the transfer is completed, a transfer end signal is transmitted to the MPU 231.

After the process of S6714, the stored image data determination flag 233i is updated (S6715), and this normal transfer setting process is terminated. To update the stored image data discrimination flag 233i, as described above, the storage state corresponding to the sprite that is the transfer target image data is set to "on", and the sub of the same image storage area 236a as the one sprite. This is done by setting the storage state corresponding to other sprites that are supposed to be stored in the area to "off".

In this way, by executing this normal image transfer process, the process corresponding to the display stop type command is executed in the command determination process executed earlier, and as a result, the display stop type command is used. When it is determined that the stop type information shown is the stop type of the jackpot, the image data used in the opening effect can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. In addition, when the rear image is changed based on the reception of the rear image change command in the command determination process executed earlier, among the image data used in the rear image, the rear surface of the resident video RAM 235 is used. The image data not stored in the image area 235c can be transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 without delay.

Further, in the present embodiment, the display data table is displayed as the display data table buffer 233d in response to a command (for example, a display variation pattern command) transmitted from the voice lamp control device 113 based on a command or the like from the main control device 110. The transfer data table corresponding to the display data table is set in the transfer data table buffer 233e in accordance with the setting of. Then, the MPU 231 performs the normal image transfer setting process to the image controller 237 according to the transfer data information described in the area indicated by the pointer 233f of the transfer data table set in the transfer data table buffer 233e. Since the transfer instruction of the image data to be transferred is set, the image data of the sprite used in the display data table set in the display data table buffer 233d can be reliably transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 at a desired timing. Can be done.

Here, in the transfer data table, the transfer target image data is stored so that the image data corresponding to the predetermined sprite is stored in the image storage area 236a by the time the drawing of the predetermined sprite is started according to the display data table. Since the transfer data information is specified for a predetermined address, the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the image storage area 236a according to the transfer data information specified in the transfer data table, so that the transfer data information is specified according to the display data table. When drawing the sprite, the image data that is not resident in the resident video RAM 235 necessary for drawing the sprite can always be stored in the image storage area 236a.

As a result, even if the character ROM 234 is configured by the NAND flash memory 234a having a slow read speed, the image required for display can be read in advance from the character ROM 234 and transferred to the normal video RAM 236 without delay. While drawing the image of each sprite specified in the data table, the corresponding effect can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81. Further, according to the description in the transfer data table, only the non-resident image data in the resident video RAM 235 can be easily and surely transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236.

Further, in the transfer data table, the transfer data information is defined so that the image data is transferred from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 for each image data corresponding to the sprite. As a result, the transfer of the image data can be managed and controlled for each sprite, so that the processing related to the transfer can be easily performed. Then, by controlling the transfer of the image data from the character ROM 234 to the normal video RAM 236 in sprite units, it is possible to control the transfer of the image data in detail while facilitating the processing. Therefore, it is possible to efficiently suppress an increase in the load applied to the transfer.

Next, with reference to FIG. 78, the details of the above-mentioned drawing process (S5306), which is one process of the V interrupt process executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart showing this drawing process.

In the drawing process, the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task process (S5304) and the parameters required for drawing each sprite (display position coordinates, enlargement ratio, rotation angle, translucent value, α blending information). , Color information, filter designation information), and the transfer instruction set by the transfer setting process (S5305) to generate the drawing list shown in FIG. 32 (S6801). That is, in the processing of S6801, the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored are specified for each sprite from the types of various sprites constituting one frame determined in the task processing (S5304). , The specified storage RAM type and address are associated with the parameters required for the sprite determined by the task process. Then, each sprite is rearranged in the order of the sprites to be arranged on the front side from the sprites to be arranged on the back side in the image for one frame, and the details for each sprite are arranged in the order of the sprites after the rearrangement. As various drawing information (detailed information), a drawing list is generated by describing the storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored, the address, and the parameters necessary for drawing the sprite. When a transfer instruction is set by the transfer setting process (S5305), the start address (storage source start address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored as the transfer data information at the end of the drawing list. And the final address (final address of the storage source) and the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are added.

As described above, for each sprite, the area of the resident video RAM 235 in which the image data of the sprite is stored or the sub area of the image storage area 236a of the normal video RAM 236 is fixed, so that the MPU 231 has a fixed area. , The storage RAM type and address in which the image data of the sprite is stored can be immediately specified according to the sprite type, and the information can be easily included in the detailed information of the drawing list.

When the drawing list is generated, the generated drawing list and the drawing target buffer information specified by the drawing target buffer flag 233j are transmitted to the image controller (S6802). Here, when the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 0, the drawing target buffer flag 233j is 1 including the information instructing the image drawn in the first frame buffer 236b to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information. Includes information instructing the image drawn in the second frame buffer 236c to be expanded as the drawing target buffer information.

Based on the drawing list received from the MPU 231, the image controller 237 draws images in order from the sprite described at the top of the drawing list, and expands the images by overwriting the frame buffer specified by the drawing target buffer information. As a result, in the image for one frame generated by the drawing list, the sprite drawn first can be arranged on the backmost side, and the sprite drawn last can be arranged on the frontmost side.

If the drawing list contains transfer data information, the transfer data information includes the start address (storage source start address) and the final address (storage source final address) of the character ROM 234 in which the transfer target image data is stored. ) And the start address of the transfer destination (normal video RAM 236) are extracted, and the image data stored from the storage source start address to the storage source final address are read in order from the character ROM 234 and temporarily stored in the buffer RAM 237a. After that, the image data stored in the buffer RAM 237a is sequentially transferred to the area indicated by the transfer destination start address of the normal video RAM 236 in anticipation of when the normal video RAM 236 is in an unused state. Then, the image data stored in the normal video RAM 236 is used based on the drawing list subsequently transmitted from the MPU 231, and the image is drawn according to the drawing list.

The image controller 237 reads the image information of the previously expanded image from a frame buffer different from the frame buffer instructed by the drawing target buffer information, and displays the image information together with the drive signal in the third symbol display device 81. Send to. As a result, the third symbol display device 81 can display the expanded image in the frame buffer. Further, while expanding the image drawn in one frame buffer, the image expanded from one frame buffer can be displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and the drawing process and the display process are processed in parallel at the same time. be able to.

The drawing process updates the drawing target buffer flag 233j after the process of S6802 (S6803). Then, the drawing process is finished, and the process returns to the V interrupt process. The drawing target buffer flag 233j is updated by inverting its value, that is, by setting it to "1" when the value is "0" and to "0" when it is "1". Will be done. As a result, the drawing target buffer is alternately set between the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c each time the drawing list is transmitted.

Here, the drawing list is transmitted by the MPU 231 based on the V interrupt signal transmitted from the image controller 237 every 20 milliseconds when the drawing process and the display process of the image for one frame are completed. It will be performed every time the drawing process of the inclusion process (see FIG. 67B) is executed. As a result, at a certain timing, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. When the drawing process and the display process of are executed, the second frame buffer 236c is designated as a frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame 20 milliseconds after the drawing process for the image for one frame is completed, and one frame is specified. The first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer from which the minute image information is read. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the first frame buffer 236b can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the second frame buffer 236c. ..

Then, after the next 20 milliseconds, the first frame buffer 236b is designated as the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame, and the second frame buffer 236c is designated as the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. Will be done. Therefore, the image information of the image previously expanded in the second frame buffer 236c can be read out and displayed on the third symbol display device 81, and at the same time, a new image is expanded in the first frame buffer 236b. .. After that, one of the first frame buffer 236b and the second frame buffer 236c is used every 20 milliseconds for the frame buffer for expanding the image for one frame and the frame buffer for reading the image information for one frame. By alternately designating, it is possible to continuously perform the display processing of the image for one frame in units of 20 milliseconds while performing the drawing processing of the image for one frame.

As described above, in the present embodiment, the ball reaches the movable valve 750 at the timing when the movable valve 750 is in the guided state (closed state) in which the ball can be guided to the specific general entry port 630. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b that changes the storage state of the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) to the release state, the storage device (first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) The ball stored in the second storage device 771) can be put into the specific general entry port 630. Therefore, the player can be made to play the game while timing the operation of the second frame button (release button) 22b, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

Further, in the present embodiment, the movable valve 750 is set to operate in various predetermined patterns, and most of the operation contents during the period when the movable valve 750 is in the induced state (closed state). However, it is set as a period (0.1 seconds) in which only one ball can be guided. Therefore, accuracy is required for the timing at which the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be guided to the specific general entry port 630, which is more ambitious for the player. Can be made to play a game.

In the present embodiment, by operating the operating means (second frame button (release button) 22b), the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) are stored one by one. Since it is configured so that it can flow down toward the specific general entry port 630, only one ball can be guided (0.1 seconds) as the period during which the movable valve 750 is in the induction state (closed state). ) Are continuously set, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b at an appropriate timing, the storage device (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) can be used. It is possible to allow all the stored balls to enter the specific general entry port 630. Therefore, the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game in order to obtain more prize balls.

A plurality of balls may be discharged from the storage device in response to the operation of the operating means, and the number of balls discharged from the storage device may be changed based on the operation content of the player for the operating means. You may do so. As a result, a wider variety of games can be provided to the player, and the interest of the game can be improved.

In the present embodiment, in the board unit 700, the cover member 710 is placed on the portion covered by the cover member 710 (see FIG. 2) from the back surface side (the game board 13 side with respect to the cover member 710) to the cover member 710. The transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, which are light emitting means for irradiating the light, are provided. By irradiating the cover member 710 with light from the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be, the inside covered with the cover member 710 can be made visible to the player. Although the details will be described later, the transmission lamps 227ba to 227be are controlled so as to emit light when a predetermined condition is satisfied (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from performing the release operation of the storage device while grasping the operating status of the movable valve 750 during the normal game in which the predetermined condition is not satisfied. Further, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down in the vicinity of the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 becomes transparent, so that the player can visually recognize the situation in which the ball flows down in the vicinity of the movable valve 750. Can be done.

Further, in the present embodiment, since the cover member 710 is provided as a shielding means for making it difficult for the player to grasp the operating status of the movable valve 750, the second frame button is in a state where the operating status of the movable valve 750 is grasped. (Release button) The act of operating 22b can be prevented. Further, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is provided with a half mirror so as to switch to a transparent state in which the inside can be visually recognized based on the condition that a predetermined condition (for example, when the storage device is released and the ball flows down) is satisfied. Therefore, when the game ball flows down the vicinity of the movable valve 750, the cover member 710 is switched to the transmission state. Therefore, it is possible for the player to grasp the flow state of the ball flowing down near the movable valve 750.

In the present embodiment, the cover member 710, which is a shielding means, is irradiated with light (transmission lamp) to switch to the transmission state, but other configurations may be used. Often, for example, when the cover member 710 is configured to be movable so that the incident angle of the light emitted from the light emitting means (LED) that is always lit to the cover member 710 is switched, and the cover member 710 is positioned at a predetermined position. It may be configured so that the inside is visible only in the transparent state.

Further, the movable valve 750 is made of a transparent resin material (for example, polycarbonate, ABS, etc.), the cover member 710 is made of a transparent color whose inside is visible, and the surface thereof is processed to diffusely reflect the irradiated light (for example). , Texture processing) may be applied. As a result, while the game is being executed in the pachinko machine 10, the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a makes it difficult to see the inside of the cover member 710, and the pachinko machine 10 is turned off (that is, for decoration). The inside of the cover member 710 may be made visible when the lamp 227a is not lit). As a result, the clerk can easily inspect the inside of the cover member 710 even when the power of the pachinko machine 10 is turned off.

When such a configuration is used, a shielding wall is provided to shield the cover member 710 from being irradiated with the light emitted from the decorative lamp 227a, and the shielding wall is changed between a shielded state and a non-shielded state. It is advisable to provide. As a result, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized by the player even while the game is being played. Further, as in the first embodiment, the cover member 710 is provided with a dedicated light emitting means (lamp) for irradiating the cover member 710 with light, and the light emitting means is controlled to emit light. May be switched between a state in which it is difficult to see (a state in which light is irradiated) and a state in which it is visible (a state in which light is not irradiated).

Further, by providing a movable member for decoration on the cover member 710 whose inside is visible and controlling the operation of the movable member, the inside of the cover member 710 can be visually recognized (the movement of the movable member for decoration is small). The state) and the state in which the inside of the cover member 710 is difficult to see (a state in which the movable member for decoration is often operated) may be switched.

Further, in the present embodiment, the timing for operating the operating means (second frame button (release button) 22b) is set based on the operation content of the movable valve 750, and the third symbol display device 81 (see FIG. 2) is set. It is configured to display the effect. As a result, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the effect display executed by the third symbol display device 81, the player is given a privilege (a prize based on the entry into the specific general entry port 630). (Ball) can be given, and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned effect (timing effect) is configured to be executed during the jackpot game or when a specific fluctuation pattern is selected, but the above-mentioned effect is described when other predetermined conditions are satisfied. The effect (timing effect) may be configured to be executed. For example, when it is determined that the upper limit amount of spheres is stored in the storage flow path 700e, or when it is specified by a timing means (RTC or the like). Specific conditions (for example, a mission) in a production (so-called mini-game, etc.) for operating the production button (first frame button) 22a executed during a special symbol change or a jackpot game when the time is measured. It may be configured so that a predetermined condition is satisfied when "clearing, etc." is satisfied. As a result, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) at various timings, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, when a predetermined winning command (a command output when a ball enters the first entry port 64 or the second entry opening 640) is received from the main control device 110, the winning command corresponds to the winning command. The timing effect (operation effect) may be executed by using the period of the effect (so-called look-ahead effect) that is executed until the change of the special symbol is started.

In the present embodiment, by operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, one ball is configured to flow down toward the movable valve 750, and further, the second frame button (release button) is configured to flow down. ) 22b is configured to execute the release operation of the storage device only once every two seconds at the shortest. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 10, the ball cannot be inserted into the specific general entry port 630 unless the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed) at the right time, and the second frame button (release button) ( The operation accuracy of the release button) 22b is required. The pachinko machine 10 of the present embodiment is configured such that a timing effect (operation effect) suggesting the timing of operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed by the third symbol display device 81. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b according to the timing effect (operation effect), it is possible to make it easier for the ball to enter the specific general entry port 630. There is. As a result, the player can enthusiastically operate the second frame button (release button) 22b.

In the timing effect (operation effect) in the present embodiment, an effect of causing the player to operate the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. With this configuration, the number of times the player is required to operate the button can be increased and the effect of the effect is enhanced, as compared with the case where the effect of operating only the second frame button (release button) 22b is executed. Can be done.

In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect) executed when the lottery result of the special symbol is changing, at the timing when the display pointer scrolling in the sub display area Ds4 matches the bar display unit 717. By operating the second frame button (release button) 22b, as shown in FIG. 14, the lottery result of the special symbol is displayed in the sub-display area Ds2. With this configuration, the second frame button (release button) 22b for releasing the storage state of the storage device can be used to notify the lottery result of the special symbol.

In addition, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated to notify the lottery result of the special symbol, the ball flowing out of the storage device enters the specific general entry port 630 based on the operation. Difficult timing is set. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily given a privilege (a prize ball for entering the ball into the specific general entrance 630). In addition, when setting such a timing, it is advisable to give a notification suggesting that if the ball does not enter the specific general entry port 630, it is a big hit. As a result, the player is given a privilege regardless of whether the leaked ball enters the specific general entrance 630 or not, so that the player can be provided with a sense of security.

In the present embodiment, a plurality of songs can be used in the timing effect (operation effect), and a place where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (settable) is predetermined for each song. This is to operate the operation means at the timing that matches the rhythm of each song in the timing effect (operation effect), and by configuring in this way, the display pointer can be entered at the specific general entry port 630. Even if 719 is set, the operation means can be operated according to the rhythm of the music being executed in the timing effect (operation effect), and the timing effect (operation effect) can be performed without giving a sense of discomfort to the player. Can be executed.

In the present embodiment, in the timing effect (operation effect), the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b is set from a position where a display pointer preset for each song can be displayed (set). Although it is configured to be selected, the above-described configuration may be used in the operation effect in which only the first frame button (effect button) 22a is operated. As a result, various effects can be executed as operation effects for operating the first frame button (effect button) 22a.

In the present embodiment, on the jackpot confirmation display screen for notifying the third symbol display device 81 that the lottery result of the special symbol has won the jackpot, the movable valve 750 is executed during the jackpot game based on the jackpot. It is possible to determine whether or not the variable operation is performed in an operation pattern (operation scenario) that is advantageous to the player, and notify the determination result on the third symbol display device 81. As a result, the player can grasp that the movable valve 750 is executed in the operation pattern (operation scenario) advantageous to the player during the jackpot game before the jackpot game is executed, and during the jackpot game. You can make the game enthusiastic.

In the present embodiment, the player can select the difficulty level of the timing effect (operation effect) according to his / her skill, and the privilege to be given is different according to the difficulty level, so that various players can use it. On the other hand, the timing effect (operation effect) can be enthusiastically executed.

In addition, the above-mentioned contents show both the selection of the music and the selection of the difficulty level in the timing production (operation production) executed in the present embodiment, but only the music without changing the difficulty level. When selecting, since the intervals between the parts where the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) are different between the music A and the music B, the player who wants to enjoy the timing effect (operation effect) at intervals is the music. A player who wants to select A and enjoy timing effect (operation effect) at short intervals can select music B. This makes it possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and causes various players to enthusiastically execute the timing effect (operation effect). Can be done.

In this embodiment, the display pointer 719 can be displayed (set) at different intervals depending on the music, and the player selects the music to display the display pointer, which is executed in the timing effect (operation effect). A configuration is used in which the display interval is narrowed or widened, but as another configuration, a selection means for selecting the display interval of the display pointer 719 executed by the player in the timing effect (operation effect) is provided. , A setting means for setting the display location of the display pointer 719 based on the display interval of the display pointer 719 selected by the selection means may be provided, or the same music can be played by changing the playback speed of the music. It may be used to provide a setting means for setting the display interval of the display pointer 719. Even when such a configuration is used, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) desired by the player without changing the difficulty level, and enthusiastically for various players. Timing effect (operation effect) can be executed.

In the present embodiment, in order for the voice lamp control device 113 to be able to grasp the operating status of the movable valve 750, the movable valve operation scenario 222b is stored in the ROM 222 of the voice lamp control device 113, and the information of the movable valve operation scenario 222b is stored. By updating as needed, the current operating status and future operating contents of the movable valve 750 were grasped, and the timing at which the ball could enter the specific general entry port 630 was set. Based on the information in the movable valve operation scenario 222b, an execution scenario for executing the movable operation of the decorative movable member and the output of the decorative lamp, voice (sound effect), etc. is generated, and based on the generated execution scenario. Therefore, the timing at which the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630 may be indirectly set. Further, in this case, it is preferable to execute the movable operation of the decorative movable member, the output of the decorative lamp, the sound (sound effect), etc., which is executed based on the execution scenario, in a place where it is difficult for the player to grasp.

In the first embodiment, two storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) are provided in the storage flow path 700e, a maximum of five balls are stored, and the operation of the second frame button 22b is performed. The storage device was changed to the released (open) state based on the above, and the sphere was configured to flow out from the storage flow path 700e, but other configurations may be used, for example, as shown in FIG. 79. As described above, a plurality of storage channels 700e and 700g may be provided. Here, with reference to FIG. 79, a modified example of the configuration in which the ball is stored on the game board 13 will be described. In this modification, the same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

FIG. 79 is a partial front view of the game board 13 showing a modified example of the first embodiment. As shown in FIG. 79, in this modification, the second storage flow path 700g is provided above the storage flow path 700e and the storage flow path 700e is provided in the first embodiment described above. A point where the second storage valve 771a was provided in the storage flow path 700 g, and a second storage upper limit sensor S5 and a second storage detection sensor S6 for detecting a sphere stored in the storage flow path 700 g are provided. It differs in that. Further, although detailed description will be omitted, in the above-described first embodiment, the operation of the first storage valve 770a and the second storage valve 771a is controlled by using one storage valve solenoid 770b. The difference is that each storage valve is individually provided with a storage valve solenoid, and a release button is provided corresponding to each storage device (storage valve) (see, for example, FIG. 87 described later).

The second storage flow path 700g newly provided in this modification is formed so that the ball is less likely to flow in than the storage flow path 700e, and the ball that collides with the first adjusting member 701a and bounces off. It is formed so that it can flow in. Specifically, it is a sphere that flows down the distribution flow path 700d, and is formed so that about one sphere flows into 30 of the spheres that are distributed in the lower right direction (direction of the storage flow path 700e). There is. By adjusting the angle and position of the adjusting member 701a, it is possible to adjust the ratio of the spheres flowing into the second storage flow path 700g.

As shown in FIG. 79, in this modified example, five spheres can be stored in the storage flow path 700e, five spheres can be stored in the second storage flow path 700g, and a total of ten spheres can be stored. There is. Further, the ball flowing into the second storage flow path 700g, which is harder to flow in than the storage flow path 700e, flows down toward the specific general entry port 630 without being affected by the variable operation of the movable valve 750. As such, the exit is provided so as to face the specific general entrance 630. As a result, when the ball is stored in the flow path (the second storage flow path 700 g) where it is difficult to store the ball, the player is surely privileged (the ball has entered the specific general entry port 630). Based prize ball) can be given. Therefore, since the player always plays the game while expecting the ball to flow into the second storage flow path 700 g, it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Here, the flow of the game when the pachinko machine 10 shown in FIG. 87 is used in this modification will be described. First, the pachinko machine 10 of FIG. 87 will be described. FIG. 87 is a front view of the pachinko machine 10 provided with a plurality of release buttons for releasing the storage device. In this pachinko machine, the pachinko machine 10 (see FIG. 1) of the first embodiment described above is provided with a third frame button (second release button) 22c, and the first storage device 770 is released (opened). ) The control contents are different so that the control is executed based on the operation of the second frame button 22b and the release (opening) control of the second storage device 771 is executed based on the operation of the third frame button 22c. Is different. Other elements are the same, the same parts are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 87, the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a second frame button (release button) 22b on the left side of the lower plate unit 15, and a third frame button (for second release) on the right side of the lower plate unit 15. Button) 22c is provided. Since the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are arranged on the lower plate unit 15 with an interval of about 20 cm, the player Is difficult to operate with one hand at the same time. Further, between the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c, the first frame button (effect button) 22a is inserted into the second frame button (release). The button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are arranged so as to block the straight line connecting the button surfaces, and the player can simultaneously use the second frame button (for release) with one hand. It is more difficult to operate the button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c.

Further, when the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated (pressed), the control for changing the storage state of the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) to the release (open) state is controlled. When executed and the third frame button (second release button) 22c is operated (pressed), the storage state of the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is changed to the release (open) state. It is configured to perform control.

As a result, the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at a desired timing, so that the storage according to the operation content of the player The release control of the device can be executed, and the player can enthusiastically participate in the game.

Further, since it is difficult for the player to operate the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at the same time with one hand, the game is played. (That is, while operating the operation handle 51 with one hand), the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are operated at the same time, and a plurality of frames are operated. Processing load due to simultaneous execution of release control of the storage device (for example, movable valve movable control using an electric drive source), or due to simultaneous drive of an electric drive source (for example, solenoid, motor, etc.) It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in power consumption. When the player operates the second frame button (release button) 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c at the same time using both hands, the operation handle 51 is not operated. Since it is in the state, even if the release control of the plurality of storage devices is executed at the same time, the game control for the operation of the operation handle 51 (for example, the launch control using the electric drive source) is not executed. It is possible to suppress a temporary increase in power consumption due to the processing load of the entire pachinko machine 10 or the simultaneous drive of an electric drive source (for example, a solenoid, a motor, etc.).

That is, by using this configuration, the release control for the two storage devices (first storage device 770 and the second storage device 771) and the game control for the operation on the operation handle 51 (for example, launch control) are simultaneously performed. It is possible to suppress the damage, and the processing load (control processing using an electric drive source) and the power consumption (power used to drive the electric drive source) in the pachinko machine 10 temporarily increase. It is possible to suppress the storage.

Returning to FIG. 79, the description will be continued. In the modified example of the first embodiment shown in FIG. 79 (configuration provided with the storage flow path 700e and the second storage flow path 700g), the configuration of FIG. 87 described above (second frame button (release button)). When the 22b and the third frame button (second release button) 22c are provided), the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) is used based on the operation for the second frame button 22b. ) Is in the open (release) state, the ball flows out from the storage flow path 700e, and the second storage device 771 (second storage valve 771a) is in the open (release) state based on the operation for the third frame button 22c. , The ball will flow out from the storage flow path 700 g.

As shown in FIG. 79, the ball flow path is formed so that the balls flowing out from the storage flow path 700e and the second storage flow path 700g can enter the specific general entry port 630. A ball flow path is formed above the entry port 630 so that the ball flowing out from the storage flow path 700e and the ball flowing out from the second storage flow path 700g merge. As a result, it is determined whether or not the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 depending on the flow condition of the ball flowing out from each storage flow path (storage flow path 700e, second storage flow path 700g). Therefore, the player can enjoy the game by paying attention to the movement of the ball.

Further, according to the configuration shown in FIG. 87, since the second frame button 22b and the third frame button 22c are arranged at positions where it is difficult to operate at the same time with one hand, the ball is above the specific general entry port 630. It is possible to suppress a situation in which a ball cannot enter the specific general entry port 630 due to collision with each other.

The second storage upper limit sensor S5 and the second storage detection sensor S6 are provided in the second storage flow path 700 g, and when the second storage upper limit sensor S5 detects a sphere, that is, the second storage flow path. When it is detected that the upper limit amount of balls is stored in 700 g, even if the game (right-handed game) is executed in this state, the balls cannot be stored in the second storage flow path 700 g any more. , Notification prompting the player to operate the third frame button 22c (for example, display prompting the player to press the third frame button 22c on the third symbol display device 81, third frame button on the voice output device 226 A voice output urging the user to press the 22c and a voice output urging the third frame button 22c to be pressed by causing the third frame button 22c (or its surroundings) to emit light are executed. As a result, the game is continued with the storage amount of the balls in the second storage flow path 700 g, which makes it easy for the outflowing balls to enter the specific general entry port 630, to be a disadvantageous game for the player. It is possible to suppress what is done.

In the configuration of this modification, the contents described in the above description of the first embodiment may be appropriately combined, and for example, based on one operation for the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. The operation of the first storage valve 770a or the second storage valve 771a may be controlled so that only one ball flows out, or the operation of the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c may be performed once. Based on this, all stored balls may be controlled to flow out. Further, the number of balls to be discharged and the outflow timing of the balls may be different based on the operation content (for example, normal pressing or long pressing) of the operation for the second frame button 22b or the third frame button 22c. As a result, the operating means (second frame button 22b, third frame button) operated by the player to drain the balls stored in the storage devices (first storage device 770, second storage device 771) from the storage device. The operation timing and operation contents of 22c) can be diversified, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

In this modified example, the second storage flow path 700 g is configured so that the stored balls flow out to a location facing the specific general entry port 630, which is advantageous for the player. A passage (second storage flow path 700 g) and a storage flow path (first storage flow path 700e) that are more disadvantageous than the passage are provided, but one storage flow path and the other storage flow path are provided. It suffices that the advantageous and disadvantageous settings are set, and the advantageous storage flow path is configured so that the sphere is less likely to flow in than the disadvantageous storage flow path.

For example, a second movable valve is provided between the ball outlet of the second storage flow path 700 g and the specific general entry port 630, and the second movable valve makes the ball more than the movable valve 750. It may be configured so that the rate of being in an inducible state is high. Further, the upper limit of the number of balls stored in each storage flow path may be configured to be different for each storage flow path.

<Second Embodiment>
Next, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 80 to 83. In the above-described first embodiment, the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b are separately configured as the operation means that can be operated by the player. Further, as a timing effect (operation effect) for causing the player to operate the operation means, a display pointer is set for each operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b). It was configured to execute an effect display that scrolls and moves.

On the other hand, in the second embodiment, the first frame button is used instead of the operation means (first frame button (effect button) 22a and second frame button (release button) 22b) in the first embodiment. A (effect button) 1122a and a second frame button (release button) 1122b are provided. Then, in conjunction with the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 1122a, an interlocking means for pressing the second frame button (release button) 1122b is provided, and the interlocking means is used as the first frame button (1st frame button). The interlocking state in which the second frame button (release button) 1122b is operated based on the operation of the effect button) 1122a, and the second frame button (release button) based on the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 1122a. ) A variable control means for changing the 1122b to a non-operating release state is provided.

As a result, the player executes the timing effect (operation effect) of operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a, and the player operates the first frame button (effect button) 1122a. The second frame button (release button) 1122b can be operated just by executing the operation. Therefore, the storage device can be released without giving the player a sense of discomfort.

The difference in configuration between the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment and the pachinko machine 10 in the first embodiment is that the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122a are replaced with the first frame button 22a and the second frame button 22b. The point is that the frame button 1122b is provided. Regarding other configurations, other processes executed by the MPU 201 of the main control device 110, other processes executed by the MPU 221 of the voice lamp control device 113, and various processes executed by the MPU 231 of the display control device 114, the first It is the same as the pachinko machine 10 in one embodiment. Hereinafter, the same elements as those in the first embodiment are designated by the same reference numerals, and the illustration and description thereof will be omitted.

First, the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 80. As shown in FIG. 80, a first frame button 1122a and a second frame button 1122b are provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15 of the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment. Next, with reference to FIG. 81, the configurations of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b provided in the pachinko machine 10 in the second embodiment will be described. FIG. 81 (a) is a schematic view of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b in a plan view, and FIG. 81 (b) shows an interlocking operation configuration of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b. It is a schematic diagram which shows.

As shown in FIG. 81A, the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are configured to be connectable via the interlocking means 1125. Further, the second frame button 1122b is configured to be one size smaller than the first frame button 1122a, and a regulation wall 1123 is provided around the second frame button 1122b. As a result, when the player tries to operate the first frame button 1122a at an unintended timing, for example, it is possible to prevent the player from touching the second frame button 1122b and accidentally pressing the button 1122b.

Next, the detailed configuration of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described with reference to FIG. 81 (b). The first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b can be operated with a return means (for example, an elastic member using a spring member, a rubber member, or the like) for returning the pressed button to a normal position. A light emitting means or the like for notifying that the period is long is provided, but the above-mentioned returning means and the light emitting means or the like employ a commonly used known technique, and the illustration and details thereof are shown. Description will be omitted.

A detection switch S22a for detecting the pressing operation is provided below the first frame button 1122a, and a detection switch S22b for detecting the pressing operation is provided below the second frame button 1122b. Has been done. As a result, it is detected that each frame button is operated (pressed). Further, an interlocking means 1125 capable of engaging with both frame buttons is provided between the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, and when the interlocking means 1125 is projected to the engaging position. The second frame button 1122b is pressed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a. Since the interlocking means 1125 is configured not to be pressed by the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b, the first frame button 1122a may be pressed in conjunction with the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b. Absent.

Next, the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b will be described with reference to FIG. 82. FIG. 82 (a) is a schematic view showing a state in which the first frame button 1122a is pressed in the released state in which the interlocking means 1125 is buried, and FIG. 82 (b) is an interlocking with the interlocking means 1125 protruding. It is a schematic diagram which shows the state which pressed the 1st frame button 1122a in the state.

As shown in FIG. 82A, while the interlocking means 1125 is in the released state, the first frame button 1122a and the interlocking means 1125 are not engaged, so that the first frame button 1122a is pressed. The interlocking means 1125 does not move in conjunction with it. Therefore, the second frame button 1122b is not pressed. On the other hand, while the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocking state, as shown in FIG. 82B, the first frame button 1122a and the interlocking means 1125 are engaged with each other, so that the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a is performed. The interlocking means 1125 moves downward in conjunction with. Then, the second frame button 1122b engaged with the interlocking means 1125 also moves downward, and it is detected that the pressing operation is performed by the detection switch S22b.

Further, the regulation wall 1123 provided around the second frame button 1122b is located around the second frame button 1122b even when the second frame button 1122b shown in FIG. 82 (b) is pressed. , Protruding on the inner side of the lower plate unit 15. As a result, the return operation for returning the second frame button 1122b from the pressed position (position shown in FIG. 82 (b)) to the normal position (position shown in FIG. 82 (a)) can be smoothed. In addition, when the pressing operation of the first frame button 1122a is performed in conjunction with the pressing operation, the pressing operation in the one-sided gripping state can be smoothed.

In the present embodiment, each frame button (first frame button 1122a, second frame button 1122b) is operated by the player from an initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) that is not operated by the player. Although the moving distance to the detected detection position (see FIG. 82B) is configured to be the same, the frame button input monitoring / effect processing (see S2107 in FIG. 59) of the first embodiment described above will be described. As described above, since the processing based on the operation of the second frame button 1122b is preferentially executed (see S3002 in FIG. 59), the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocking state, and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button When the 1122b and the 1122b are pressed at the same time, the effect based on the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b is executed. Therefore, since the effect based on the operation of the operation means (second frame button 1122b) different from the operation means (first frame button 1122a) operated by the player is executed, the player is provided with an unexpected effect. can do.

In the present embodiment, when the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are simultaneously pressed by the control process, the effect based on the second frame button 1122b is executed. However, other configurations may be used, for example, rather than the distance for moving the first frame button 1122a from the initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82 (b)). It is preferable that the distance for moving the two-frame button 1122b from the initial position (see FIG. 81 (b)) to the detection position (see FIG. 82 (b)) is shorter. As a result, when the interlocking means 1125 is in the interlocking state and the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are pressed at the same time, the pressing operation of the second frame button 1122b is detected first. The effect based on the two-frame button 1122b can be preferentially executed.

Next, the control content for variably controlling the interlocking means 1125 in the second embodiment will be described. The interlocking means 1125 operates variably between an interlocking state (protruding state) in which each frame button (first frame button 1122a and second frame button 1122b) is engaged and a disengaging state (buried state) in which the engagement is released. The second frame button (release button) 22b set in the pressing period information storage area 223y of the first embodiment described above is set to be in an interlocking state corresponding to the successful pressing period. To. As a result, in the timing effect (operation effect) of the first embodiment described above, the operation of pressing the second frame button (release button) 1122b at the same timing as the timing for operating the second frame button (release button) 22b. Can be made to.

It should be noted that the interlocking means may be configured to be variable to the interlocking state at a timing other than the above-mentioned timing, and for example, the player may be configured to be able to set the state of the interlocking means. As a result, can the period in which the player sets the interlocking means in the interlocking state and the display period of the display pointer indicating the operation timing of the second frame button (release button) 1122b in the timing effect (operation effect) be matched? Depending on whether or not the game is played, the result of the game will be affected, so that the interest of the game can be improved.

Next, the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect) using the first frame button (effect button) 1122a in the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a schematic diagram showing the display contents of the timing effect (operation effect). The same elements as those in the first embodiment described above are designated by the same reference numerals, and the description thereof will be omitted. As described above, in the second embodiment, the middle button display mode 716 for prompting the operation of the first frame button (effect button) 1122a and the timing for operating the first frame button (effect button) 1122a are set. A sub-display area Ds5 for displaying the suggested display pointer is displayed. That is, in the first embodiment, the display pointer 719 is displayed for each of the first frame button (effect button) 22a and the second frame button (release button) 22b, and each frame button is displayed to the player. Although it was designed to be operated, in reality, only the display pointer corresponding to the second frame button (release button) 22b is operated at the timing corresponding to the bar display unit 717, and a privilege advantageous to the player is given. Therefore, there is a problem that the player who understands the mechanism does not enthusiastically participate in the game.

On the other hand, according to the timing effect (operation effect) of the second embodiment, the player executes only the effect of operating the first frame button 1122a, and a plurality of display pointers 719 displayed in the effect. Of these, the timing at which one of the display pointers 719 matches the bar display unit 717 is matched with the ball entry possible timing, and when the display pointer 719 passes near the bar display unit 717, the interlocking means 1125 is brought into the interlocking state. By operating the first frame button 1122a at the timing when the display pointer 719 coincides with the bar display unit 717, the second frame button 1122b is operated at the timing when the ball can enter the specific general entry port 630. Can be pressed. As a result, it is possible to execute the timing effect (operation effect) without grasping which of the display pointers 719 that is scroll-moved and displayed suggests the ball entry possible timing. Therefore, it is possible to operate the first frame button (effect button) 1122a in a state of matching the bar display unit 717 for all of the display pointers 719 that are scrolled and displayed in the timing effect (operation effect). The player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

As described above, in the second embodiment, the interlocking means 1125 for engaging the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b, and the interlocking means 1125 are the first frame button 1122a and the first frame button 1122a. A variable control means that can be changed between an interlocking state in which the two-frame button 1122b is engaged and a disengaged state in which the first frame button 1122a and the second frame button 1122b are disengaged is provided, and the interlocking means 1125 is interlocked. By using a configuration in which when the player operates the first frame button 1122a while the state is changed, the second frame button 1122b is pressed in conjunction with the operation (pressing operation), the game is played. Although it is possible to operate the second frame button 1122b without giving a sense of discomfort to the person, another configuration having the same effect as that of the second embodiment may be used.

For example, by configuring the interlocking means 1125 with a magnetic material and putting the interlocking means 1125 into an excited state, a plurality of operating means (first frame button 1122a and second frame button 1122b) are in an interlocking state in which they operate in conjunction with each other. By demagnetizing the interlocking means 1125, a plurality of operating means (first frame button 1122a and second frame button 1122b) may be configured to be in a disengaged state in which they do not operate in interlocking with each other. 2. A means capable of switching between the interlocking state and the releasing state using a structure different from that of the second embodiment may be used. Further, although the second embodiment described above uses a configuration in which two operating means can be interlocked, a configuration in which three or more operating means can be interlocked may be used, or among the three or more operating means. It may be configured to be controllable so that the combination of the plurality of operating means in the interlocking state is different. As a result, it is possible to execute various combinations of operation effects based on the operations performed by the player on the operation means, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected game (effect).

Further, for example, as a modification of the second embodiment, the frame button unit 1022 as shown in FIGS. 84 to 86 may be provided. The frame button unit 1022 is a unit structure including a second frame button 1022b which is a release button so as to surround the first frame button 1022a which is an effect button.

As shown in FIG. 84, in the pachinko machine 10 in this modified example, the frame button unit 1022 is provided at the center of the lower plate unit 15. In this way, by forming a plurality of frame buttons (first frame button 1022a, second frame button 1022b) into a unit configuration and arranging them in one place, the limited space of the pachinko machine 10 can be effectively used. Can be done.

Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 in this modification will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 and 86. FIG. 85A is a schematic view showing a state in which the player operates the frame button unit 1022, and FIG. 85B is a schematic view showing the configuration of the frame button unit 1022. FIG. 86A is a schematic view showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated (pressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 10222b of the frame button unit 1022 is restricted, and FIG. ) Is a schematic view showing a state in which the frame button unit 1022 is operated (pressed) in a state in which the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b of the frame button unit 1022 is released.

First, as shown in FIG. 85A, in the frame button unit 1022 of the second embodiment, when the player presses the frame button unit 1022, the player's hand touches the first frame button 1022a and the second frame button 1022b. The first frame button 1022a is formed in a circular shape having a diameter of 5 cm so as to abut on both of the above, and the second frame button 1022b is formed in an annular shape having a diameter of 7 cm in which the first frame button 1022a is contained therein. There is. That is, the frame button unit 1022 has a circular unit structure having a diameter of 7 cm as a whole.

Next, the configuration of the frame button unit 1022 will be described with reference to FIG. 85 (b). As shown in FIG. 85 (b), the frame button unit 1022 is provided so as to project toward the front surface side (upper side from the viewpoint of FIG. 85 (b)) of the pachinko machine 10 with respect to the lower plate unit 15. Further, among the frame button units 1022, the first frame button 1022a is configured to protrude toward the front surface side (upper side from the viewpoint of FIG. 85B) of the pachinko machine 10 than the second frame button 1022b. .. With this configuration, the first frame button 1022a can be operated (pressed) even when the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted.

Then, in the pressing direction of the first frame button 1022a (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85B), a detection switch S22a for detecting that the first frame button 1022a is pressed is provided, and the second frame In the pressing direction of the button 1022b (downward from the viewpoint of FIG. 85B), a detection switch S22b for detecting that the second frame button 1022b is pressed is provided. Further, a regulating member 1023a is provided as a regulating means for regulating the pressing operation in which the second frame button 1022b located in the non-pressing state (normal state) moves to the pressed state (pressed state), and is electrically operated. By the operation of the solenoid 1023 which is a target drive source, it is variably configured to be a regulated position that regulates the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b and a release position that does not regulate the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b.

FIG. 85B shows a state in which the regulating member 1023a is located at the regulated position, and the regulating member 1023a regulates the movement of the second frame button 1022b from the normal state to the pressed state. .. The restricting member 1023a is made of a material that can change elasticity (for example, rubber), and when the restricting member 1023a is located at the restricted position, compared with a state where the restricting member 1023a is located at the release position. The detection switch S22b is configured so that the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b cannot be detected unless the pressing operation is performed with a strong force. With this configuration, the second frame button 1022b can always be pressed, but the pressing force required for the pressing operation can be changed according to the state (depending on the state of the regulating member 1023a). Is possible. Further, regarding the pressing force required for pressing each frame button, the second frame button 1022b, the first frame button 1022a, and the regulating member 1023a are in the regulated position when the regulating member 1023a is located at the release position. The pressing force required for the pressing operation is increased in the order of the second frame button 1022b in the positioned state. As a result, when the second frame button 1022b is in the regulated state, only the first frame button 1022a is easily pressed, and when the second frame button 1022b is in the released state, it is based on the pressing operation on the first frame button 1022a. The second frame button 1022b can be easily pressed.

In this modification, the configuration in which the second frame button 1022b can be constantly pressed is used, but other configurations may be used, for example, a material that does not elastically change the regulating member 1023a (for example, metal or metal). It is made of a high-hardness resin (polycarbonate) or the like), and the second frame button 1022b may not be pressed when the regulation member 1023a is located at the regulation position.

Further, in this modification, as shown in FIG. 85 (b), the distance (first frame button pressing stroke) from the pressing of the first frame button 1022a to the detection by the detection switch S22a is the second frame button. It is configured to be longer than the distance (second frame button pressing stroke) until 1022b is pressed and detected by the detection switch S22b. As a result, even if the pressing operation of the second frame button 1022b is restricted, the pressing operation of the first frame button 1022a can be executed without any discomfort.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) and the second storage device (second storage valve 771a) are used as storage means for storing the spheres in the storage flow path 700e. The variable operation of the storage means was controlled so that one ball would flow out (flow down) each time the second frame button 22b was operated, but the storage for storing the balls in the storage flow path 700e was provided. As a means, only the first storage device 770 (first storage valve 770a) may be provided.

In this case, when the second frame button 22b is normally operated (normally pressed), the storage device is opened (released) for a period (for example, 0.2 seconds) of about one ball flowing out. When controlled and the second frame button 22b is pressed and held for a long time, the open (release) state may be continued until all the balls stored in the storage means flow out. Here, as a method for determining that the second frame button 22b is long-pressed, the first pressing operation executes the same process as the normal pressing, and the opening period of the first storage device 770 based on the normal pressing is set. The operation status of the second frame button 22b may be determined again at the end timing, and if the second frame button 22b is continuously pressed at that time, it may be determined as a long press operation. As a result, when it is determined that the continuous pressing for a predetermined period is executed, the first storage responds quickly to the operation of the second frame button 22b as compared with the case where the opening operation of the first storage device 770 is executed. The device 770 can be opened.

Further, by using such a configuration, in the timing effect (operation effect), in order to allow all the balls stored in the first storage device 770 to enter the specific general entry port, the second frame button 22b A player who wants to select the action of normally operating the ball and at least one of the balls stored in the first storage device 770 to enter the specific general ball entrance can select the long press operation. It becomes possible, and it is possible to execute a directing game according to the skill of the player.

Further, in the present embodiment, as an operation pattern of the movable valve 750, an operation scenario 3 (see FIG. 23A) that changes to a plurality of induction states in a short period of time is provided. Therefore, when the long press operation is selected at the timing when the movable valve 750 executes the operation scenario 3, many balls can be entered into the specific general entry port.

When the frame button 22b on which the long press operation can be executed is provided in this way, a notification effect suggesting the timing at which the operation scenario 3 is executed may be executed. As a result, the player can make a selection while guessing the normal operation or the long press operation based on the content of the notification effect, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored with the game at an early stage.

Further, when the frame button 22b is pressed and held for a long time, the first storage device 770 is controlled to be opened and closed at specific intervals instead of continuously opening (releasing) the first storage device 770. May be good. In this case, a specific interval may be set based on the operation scenario (operation pattern) of the movable valve 750. As a result, when the first ball that has flowed out based on the long press operation enters the specific general ball entry means, the remaining balls can also be discharged at a timing that facilitates entry.

In each of the above-described embodiments, storage using a storage valve that is variably operated between a storage state and a release state by an electric drive source as a configuration for storing the sphere in the storage flow path 700e or the storage flow path 700g. Although the device is provided, other configurations may be used, for example, a configuration in which spheres are stored by magnetic force may be used. In this case, a variable member that changes the storage position that brings the magnetic material with magnetic force closer to the sphere and the release position that moves it away from the sphere is used, or a member that generates magnetic force by energizing (so-called electromagnet) is used for storage. The state and the release state may be variably controlled.

In each of the above-described embodiments, the ball flowing out from the storage means (storage device) can be changed to a guidance state in which the ball can be guided to a specific entry means (specific general entry port 630) and a difficult state in which guidance is difficult. As a result, a movable valve 750 that can be variably operated between a protruding position and a buried (retracted) position in a predetermined variable pattern (operation scenario) is provided, but a sphere that has flowed out of a storage means (storage device) is specified. Any other configuration may be used as long as it can be varied between a guided state that can be guided to the ball means and a difficult state that is difficult to guide. For example, a rotating body having a plurality of openings for guiding the ball. When the ball enters a predetermined opening among the plurality of openings, the ball is guided to the specific general entry port 630, and when the ball enters the other openings, the specific general A rotating body configured so that the ball is not guided to the entry port 630 may be used.

In each of the above-described embodiments, as the operating means that can be operated by the player, a frame button that determines that the operating means has been operated by the player's pressing operation is used, but other configurations are used. It may be used, and it is possible to determine that the operating means is configured in a lever shape that can determine that the player has been operated by tilting it to the left or right or back and forth, or that the player has been operated by touching or approaching. A touch sensor type operating means, a wireless operating means capable of determining that the operation has been performed by transmitting a predetermined radio wave, or the like may be used. Further, each of the movable valve 750, the storage device (first storage device 770, the second storage device 771), the second frame button (release button) 22b (1022b, 1122b), and the third frame button (release button) 22c. A part or all of the operation control may be executed not by the main control device 110 but by the voice lamp control device 113.

In each of the above-described embodiments, among the balls launched by the right-handed game, the balls that flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 and do not enter the variable winning device 65 and the second entry port 640 are for storage. It is configured to flow into the flow path 700e, and one out of about 30 balls launched by the right-handed game is configured to flow into the storage flow path 700e, but was launched by the right-handed game. The ratio of the balls flowing into the storage flow path 700e may be appropriately determined, and the configuration of the right side region of the game board may be appropriately changed. For example, as shown in FIG. 88, the arrangement of each configuration in the board unit 700 may be different from that of each of the above-described embodiments so that the ratio of flowing into the storage flow path 700e is high.

Next, another example of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 will be described with reference to FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a front view of the game board 13 of the pachinko machine 10 in another example. The game board 13 in this alternative example and the game board 13 used in each of the above embodiments are different in the arrangement relationship of each configuration in the board surface unit 700 provided in the right side area of the game board, and other elements are different. It is the same. The same elements are designated by the same reference numerals, and detailed description thereof will be omitted.

As shown in FIG. 88, in the game board 13 of the present alternative example, the nails provided above the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700 are arranged to the right as in the game board 13 shown in FIGS. 2 and 3 described above. About 95% of the balls launched into the right game area by the game (about 95 out of 100 balls) flow into the inflow port 700a of the board unit 700, and about 93% of the balls launched into the inflow port (launched by the right-handed game). (Approximately 90% of the balls) pass through the through gate 67 and then flow down toward the variable winning device 65.

Then, when the variable winning device 65 is in the open state (open state), the ball flowing down toward the variable winning device 65 enters the variable winning device 65, and the variable winning device 65 is in the closed state (closed state). In the case of, it passes through the variable winning device 65 and flows down toward the electric accessory 640a.

The ball that has reached the electric accessory 640a at the timing when the electric accessory 640a is closed flows down on the electric accessory 640a in the closed state and flows into the distribution flow path 700d (see FIG. 3). As for the spheres that have flowed into the distribution flow path 700d, adjustment members (nails and the like) are arranged so that one sphere of about nine spheres flows into the storage flow path 700e. That is, in the configuration of the game board 13 in this alternative example, one ball out of about 10 balls launched into the right game area by the right-handed game flows into the storage flow path 700e (that is, in the board unit 700). By launching a ball number (10 balls) smaller than the prize ball number (15 balls) of the specific general entry port 630 (see FIG. 3) provided in the above, the balls flow into the storage flow path 700e). It is configured.

According to the game board 13 configured in this way, the ball hit right during the jackpot game can be efficiently entered into the variable winning device 65, and further, the variable winning device 65 is closed during the jackpot game. Since the ball that has passed without entering the variable winning device 65 at the timing (during the interval between rounds) can be efficiently flowed into the storage flow path 700e, the jackpot game is performed advantageously for the player. be able to.

However, when the game board 13 configured in this way is used, by launching a ball toward the right side area of the game board during a normal game, the ball is stored as compared with the structure of the game board 13 shown in FIG. Since the ball easily flows into the flow path 700e, there is a possibility that the ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630 during the normal game.

On the other hand, in this alternative example, as described above with reference to FIG. 2, the cover member 710 is provided so that the movable state of the movable valve 750 is difficult to see from the outside. Even if the balls flow into the storage flow path 700e during the game, the storage devices (first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770 and the first storage device 770) so that the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e enter the specific general entry port 630. 2 It is possible to make it difficult to grasp the timing of releasing the storage device 771). Therefore, it is possible to suppress the act of acquiring a large number of balls by executing the game of inserting the ball into the specific general ball entrance 630 during the normal game.

Further, as described above in each of the above embodiments, since the movable valve 750 is configured to move in various motion patterns, a game in which a ball is inserted into a specific general entrance 630 during a normal game is performed. It is possible to further suppress the act of executing and acquiring a large number of balls.

In addition, when the game board 13 configured as in this alternative example is used, the ball stored in the storage flow path 700e is a specific general entry ball when a predetermined condition is satisfied even during a normal game. The timing (timing of operating the frame button 22) for releasing the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) may be notified so that the ball enters the mouth 630. Specifically, when the lottery result of the special symbol is missed a predetermined number of times (for example, 500 times) in a row, or when a predetermined time (for example, 3 hours) has elapsed from the start of the game, or when the first 3 When a specific fluctuation pattern is selected as the fluctuation pattern executed by the symbol display device 81, or when the pachinko machine 10 is provided with a means (for example, a real-time clock) capable of determining the current time, the current time is predetermined. It is preferable that the timing notification for notifying the player of the above-mentioned timing is executed when the time (for example, noon) is reached.

As a result, it is possible to provide a player who has not won the jackpot of the special symbol with a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, so that the player can play the game without winning the hit. It is possible to prevent getting bored. Further, the timing notification continuation period from the execution of the above-mentioned timing notification to the end may be set to always be a fixed time, or a different time may be set each time. Further, as the end condition of the timing notification, not only the passage of time but also, for example, a predetermined number (for example, two) of balls have entered the specific general entry port 630 during the period during which the timing notification is being executed. It may be a condition. With this configuration, it is possible to facilitate the ball from entering the specific general ball entry port 630 during the period when the timing notification is executed.

When such timing notification is executed, the game that is advantageous to the player is the right-handed game, so that the right-handed game is guided to the sub-display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81. "Aim to the right" is displayed as a guidance display. This guidance display is set to be displayed in the sub-display area Ds3 of the third symbol display device 81 from a predetermined period (for example, 30 seconds before) before the timing notification is actually executed. This is a preparation notification for the purpose of storing the sphere in the storage flow path 700e before the timing notification is executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent a situation in which the spheres are not stored in the storage flow path 700e in the state where the timing notification is executed.

Further, whether or not to execute the above-mentioned preparation notification is based on the determination result of the determination means (storage upper limit sensor S1, storage detection sensor S2) for determining the presence or absence of the sphere stored on the storage flow path 700e. It is good to decide. Specifically, when the storage upper limit sensor S1 detects the ball, it is preferable to set so that the preparation notification is not executed. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from unnecessarily executing the right-handed game by executing the preparation notification in a state where the ball cannot newly flow into the storage flow path 700e. it can. The period during which this preparation notification is executed may be appropriately set. For example, the number of balls stored in the storage flow path 700e or a new inflow into the storage flow path 700e (storable) The length of the preparation notification period may be variably configured based on the number of balls. As a result, it is possible to suppress the occurrence of a situation in which the ball is not stored in the storage flow path 700e in the state where the timing notification is executed, and the right-handed game is unnecessarily executed for the player. It is possible to prevent it from being caused.

As described above, according to the pachinko machine 10 using the configuration of this alternative example shown in FIG. 88, the configuration of the game board 13 in which balls easily flow into the storage flow path 700e, specifically, By launching a ball with a smaller number (for example, 10 balls) than the number of balls paid out when the ball enters the specific general entry port 630 (for example, 15 balls), the ball is placed in the storage flow path 700e. Even if a configuration that allows inflow is used, since the cover member 710 is provided to make it difficult to visually recognize the operating status of the movable valve 750 from the outside, the balls stored in the storage flow path 700e are placed in the specific general entry port 630. It is possible to make it difficult to release the storage devices (first storage device 770 and second storage device 771) at the timing of entering the ball.

Further, in this alternative example, a ball is launched into the storage flow path 700e by launching a ball number (10 balls) smaller than the number of prize balls (15 balls) paid out when the ball enters the specific general entry port 630. Since the ball can flow in, the ball is stored in the storage flow path 700e during the normal game (that is, the variable winning device 65 is not in the open state and the electric accessory 640a is difficult to be in the open state). Even if the above-mentioned timing notification is executed, the ball is stored in the storage flow path 700e, and then the ball is inserted into the specific general entry port 630, the game is advantageous to the player. It is possible to provide a game in which the number of balls to be paid out is larger than the number of balls to be launched).

As a result, it is possible to provide a player who has not won the jackpot of the special symbol with a game that can be advantageous to the player for a predetermined period, so that the player can play the game without winning the hit. It is possible to prevent getting bored.

The present invention may be implemented in a pachinko machine or the like of a type different from each of the above embodiments. For example, once a jackpot is hit, a pachinko machine (commonly known as a two-time right item, a three-time right item) that raises the expected value of the jackpot until multiple times (for example, two or three times) a big hit state occurs. It may be carried out as). Further, after the jackpot symbol is displayed, it may be implemented as a pachinko machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value on the condition that a ball is won in a predetermined area. Further, it may be carried out on a pachinko machine that has a winning device having a special area such as a V zone and is in a special gaming state on the condition that a ball is won in the special area. Further, in addition to the pachinko machine, it may be implemented as various game machines such as an ale-pachi, a sparrow ball, a slot machine, a so-called pachinko machine and a slot machine.

In the slot machine, for example, the symbol is changed by operating the operation lever in a state where a coin is inserted to determine the symbol effective line, and the symbol is stopped and confirmed by operating the stop button. It is a thing. Therefore, the basic concept of the slot machine is "provided with a display device for displaying the identification information in a variable manner after displaying the identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information in a variable manner, and the operation of the starting operation means (for example, the operation lever) is caused. The variable display of the identification information is started, and the variable display of the identification information is stopped and confirmed and displayed due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed. It becomes a "slot machine that generates a special game that gives a player a predetermined game value, provided that the combination of time identification information is specific". In this case, the game medium is represented by coins, medals, etc. Take as an example.

Further, as a specific example of a gaming machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused, a display device for variably displaying a symbol sequence consisting of a plurality of symbols and then confirming the symbol is provided, and a handle for launching a ball is provided. Some are not. In this case, after a predetermined amount of balls are thrown in based on a predetermined operation (button operation), the symbol variation is started, for example, due to the operation of the operation lever, and for example, due to the operation of the stop button or a predetermined amount. As time elapses, the fluctuation of the symbol is stopped, and a special game is generated that gives the player a predetermined game value on the condition that the confirmed symbol at the time of the stop is a so-called jackpot symbol, and the player is given a predetermined game value. Is for paying out a large amount of balls to the lower saucer. If such a game machine is used instead of a slot machine, only the ball can be treated as a game value in the game hall, which is a game value seen in the current game hall where pachinko machines and slot machines are mixed. Problems such as the burden on equipment due to the separate handling of medals and balls and restrictions on the locations where game machines are installed can be solved.

The concepts of various inventions included in the above-described embodiments in addition to the gaming machine of the present invention are shown below.

<Characteristic A group> (Suggests the timing of releasing the storage device)
A game area where a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. A1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine A1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. It is structured so that it is easy to do. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine A1, a storage means in which a plurality of the variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means are stored, and a variable pattern of 1 from the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means. The gaming machine A2, characterized in that it has a variable pattern setting means for setting.

According to the game machine A2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A1, the variable means is set and changed by one variable pattern from a plurality of variable patterns, so that the variable pattern is stored in the player and the first state is set. By easily targeting the timing, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a defect that is excessively advantageous to the player.

Here, as the storage means in which a plurality of variable patterns are stored, a plurality of types of variable patterns in which a first period in which the variable means is in the first state and a second period in which the variable means is in the second state are stored are stored. It is a means to be. In this variable pattern, the minimum unit for changing the variable means may be one variable pattern, and when the same operation is performed a plurality of times in the first period and the second period, the operation may be performed a plurality of times. The operation may be one variable pattern. In the former case described above, since one variable pattern is set for one operation of the variable means, the operation of the variable means is set in detail, and the timing at which the variable means becomes the first state for the player. Can be difficult to grasp. Further, in the latter case described above, since the execution period of one variable pattern can be lengthened, the frequency of setting the variable pattern can be suppressed.

The game machine A3 is characterized in that the variable pattern setting means repeatedly sets the variable pattern in a predetermined order after the power is turned on.

According to the game machine A3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A2, the variable patterns after the power is turned on are repeatedly set in a predetermined order, so that the variable pattern of 1 is biasedly selected, which is advantageous. It has the effect of suppressing problems with biased disadvantages.

Here, after the power is turned on means after the power is turned on to the game machine and the variable operation of the variable means is executed, and the variable patterns of the variable means are set in a predetermined order. By doing so, the above-mentioned effect is produced.

In addition, a process is added to the game machine A3 to change the period from when the power is turned on to the game machine until the execution of the variable operation of the variable means is started, and the variable pattern of 1 is biasedly selected. The variable operation executed after a predetermined time after the power is turned on may be different while suppressing the trouble. That is, by making the period from when the power is turned on until the execution of the variable operation is started is different (delayed) by, for example, 3 seconds, the variable operation is executed after a predetermined time after the power is turned on for 3 seconds. It can be shifted (delayed). As a result, it is possible to measure the elapsed time since the power is turned on and prevent the variable means from being grasped when the variable means is in the first state based on the measurement result. In this case, as a method of differentiating the variable operation executed after a predetermined time after the power is turned on, in the process executed after the power is turned on, the timing to start the control for the variable operation is determined by lottery or determined in advance. A method of executing the start timings in order can be considered.

Further, when the setting order storage means in which the order for setting the variable pattern of the variable means is predetermined is provided and the variable pattern is set so as to repeatedly execute the order stored in the setting order storage means. May provide a variable pattern determining means for determining which variable pattern stored in the setting order storage means is set as the first variable pattern to be executed when the variable operation of the variable means is started. As a result, it is possible to make the variable operation executed after a predetermined time after the power is turned on differently while suppressing the problem that the variable pattern of 1 is biasedly selected.

In any of the game machines A1 to A3, the suggestion effect execution means for executing the suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player, and the mode of the suggestion effect executed by the suggestion effect execution means. The gaming machine A4 is characterized by having a suggestion effect mode setting means for setting based on a variable pattern executed by the variable control means.

According to the game machine A4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A1 to A3, the mode of the suggestion effect is set based on the variable pattern in which the variable means is changed, so that the variable can be easily executed. There is an effect that the execution of the suggestion effect can be set according to the pattern.

When using the configuration of the game machine A4, it is preferable that the player does not predict the timing at which the variable means is located in the first state. Specifically, it is preferable to provide a shielding member (blind member) for making it difficult to visually recognize the variable operation of the variable means. As a result, the player can be made to grasp the timing when the variable means becomes the first state based on the suggested effect to be executed instead of directly looking at the variable means, so that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

Further, when the configuration of the game machine A2 is provided, it can be difficult for the player to predict the timing when the variable means will be in the first state. Therefore, the player should pay attention to the suggestion effect to be executed. It is possible to prevent the player from getting tired of the game at an early stage.

The game machine A5 is characterized in that, in the game machine A4, the mode of the suggestion effect set by the suggestion effect mode setting means is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns.

According to the game machine A5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine A4, the mode of the suggestion effect is set corresponding to each of the plurality of variable patterns, so that the suggestion effect is advantageous to the player even if the variable pattern is switched. Has the effect of being easy to perform.

In addition, as a suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means, an effect of displaying a moving body on the display screen of the third symbol display device and matching the timing of the moving body at a specific position with the operation timing, or an effect It is conceivable that the timing at which the voice executed as a voice becomes a predetermined voice is matched with the operation timing. In this case, it is preferable to use a pre-effect that makes the player know that the operation timing is approaching. Specifically, it is preferable to use an effect of moving and displaying a moving body on a straight line at a constant speed toward a specific position, or an effect using a voice that counts down a number toward a specific number (for example, 0). As a result, the timing of operating the operating means can be grasped to some extent in advance, so that the operating means can be appropriately operated even when the operating timing is set only for a short period of time.

On the other hand, in order to make it difficult to operate the operation means at an operation timing that is advantageous to the player, it is preferable to execute an inhibition effect different from the above-mentioned prior effect. As this inhibition effect, it is conceivable to execute the pre-effect at different timings. This makes it difficult for the operating means to be operated at an operating timing that is advantageous to the player.

The gaming machine A4 or A5 has a discriminating means for discriminating the content of the variable pattern executed by the variable control means, and the suggestion effect executing means has a start timing based on the content discriminated by the discriminating means. The gaming machine A6, characterized in that the suggestion effect is started.

According to the game machine A6, in addition to the effect produced by the game machine A4 or A5, the suggestion effect is started at the start timing based on the variable content of the variable pattern that is actually being performed, so that the suggestion effect is started according to the progress of the variable pattern. It has the effect of being able to perform suggestive effects.

Here, as the content of the variable pattern, content information indicating whether or not the variable pattern is a variable pattern advantageous to the player, content information indicating a period during which the variable means is actually in the first state, and variable Content information or the like indicating the remaining period until the pattern is switched can be considered.

In the game machine A6, the variable means has a period determining means for determining a period in which the first state is obtained, and the suggestion effect executing means performs the suggestion effect at a timing based on the determination result of the period determination means. A game machine A7 characterized in that it is to be started.

According to the game machine A7, in addition to the effect of the game machine A6, the suggestion effect is started at the timing based on the result of determining the period of the first state, so that when the operation means is operated, the storage means There is an effect that the suggestion effect can be easily executed at the timing when the ball flowing out from the above can be moved to the variable means during the period when the ball flows out from the first state.

In any of the game machines A3 to A7, the operation timing of the operation means suggested by the suggestion effect is at least one ball that has flowed out of the storage means when the operation means is operated based on the operation timing. A8 is a gaming machine A8 characterized in that is set so as to be movable up to the variable means that has been changed to the first state.

According to the game machine A8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A3 to A7, by operating the operation means at the timing based on the suggestion effect, the game ball can be easily entered into the specific ball entry means. , There is an effect that the interest of operating the operating means can be further improved.

In any of the game machines A2 to A8, a timing specifying means for specifying the timing at which the variable means changes to the first state based on the variable pattern stored in the storage means, and an outflow from the storage means. The operating means is a period setting means for setting a period until the sphere reaches the variable means, and a timing obtained by subtracting a period set by the period setting means from the timing specified by the timing specifying means. The gaming machine A9 is characterized by having an operation timing setting means set as the operation timing of the above, and a suggestion effect execution means for executing an effect suggesting the operation timing set by the operation timing setting means.

According to the game machine A9, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines A2 to A8, the timing of changing to the first state is specified, and the ball flowing out from the storage means reaches the variable means from the specified timing. Since the value obtained by subtracting the period until the operation timing and the operation timing are set and the effect suggesting the operation timing is executed, the accuracy of the effect suggesting the operation timing can be improved, and the player enthusiastically participates in the effect. It has the effect of being able to make it.

In the game machine A9, a measuring means for measuring a period until the ball flowing out of the storage means reaches the variable means, a measuring period measured by the measuring means, and a period set by the period setting means. The gaming machine A10 is characterized by having a period determining means for discriminating the above-mentioned period and a period correcting means for correcting the setting contents of the period setting means based on the discriminating result of the period determining means.

According to the game machine A10, in addition to the effect of the game machine A9, the period until the ball actually arrives can be measured, and the set period can be corrected based on the measurement result, so that the accuracy of the suggestion effect can be improved. There is an effect that it can be further enhanced and the player can be enthusiastically participated in the production.

In any of the game machines A4 to A10, an entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determination means for executing determination when a ball enters the entry means, and a determination means thereof. It has an effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. The gaming machine A11 is characterized in that the suggestion effect is executed by the suggestion effect execution means based on the determination result by the determination means.

According to the game machine A11, since the suggestion effect is executed based on the determination result of the determination means for determining whether or not the privilege game is executed, the player is identified as a game aiming at the privilege game. It is possible to associate the ball-entry means with a game in which the ball is inserted, which has the effect of increasing the player's motivation to play.

Here, as a condition for executing the suggestion effect, for example, a case where the determination result of the determination means is a specific determination result in which the privilege game is executed, or a determination result in which the privilege game is not executed (so-called off) is predetermined. It may be the case that the number of times is continuous.

Further, the timing at which the suggestion effect is executed may be a period before the discrimination result of the discrimination means is notified to the player, a timing at which the discrimination result is notified, or the discrimination result is the specific discrimination result. In the case of, the privilege game to be executed after the determination result is notified may be in progress. If the suggestion effect is executed during the privilege game, it is possible for the player to simultaneously perform the privilege game and the game in which the ball is inserted into the specific ball entry means, which is more advantageous to the player. A gaming state can be provided.

<Feature B group> (Perform a production using the release operation)
A game area where a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. B1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine B1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. It is structured so that it is easy to do. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine B1, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a discrimination means for executing discrimination when a ball enters the ball entry means, and a discrimination result by the discrimination means. The effect executing means for executing the effect for suggesting the above, and the privilege game executing means for executing the privilege game based on the determination result by the determination means being the specific determination result. B2 is a game machine B2 for executing a specific effect suggesting that it is the operation timing of the operation means when a predetermined condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine B2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine B1, the operation is performed when a predetermined condition is satisfied as an effect for suggesting the determination result of the determination means for determining whether or not the privilege game is executed. Since the specific effect suggesting the operation timing of the means is executed, it is possible to give the player a privileged game or a specific effect based on the determination result of the determination means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

The game machine B1 or B2 has a storage determination means for determining that the storage means is storing a ball, and the storage determination means determines that the storage means is storing a ball. A game machine B3 characterized in that it is at least one of the conditions for satisfying a predetermined condition.

According to the game machine B3, in addition to the effect of the game machine B1 or B2, at least when it is determined by the storage determination means that the ball is stored in the storage means, the specific effect is executed, which is suggested by the specific effect. It is possible to suppress a situation in which the ball does not flow out from the storage means even though the operation means is operated at the operation timing to be performed. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines B1 to B3, when the effect executing means is executing the effect for suggesting the specific determination result, the effect for suggesting a determination result different from the specific determination result is performed. The gaming machine B4, characterized in that it is easier to execute the specific effect than when it is being executed.

According to the game machine B4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B1 to B3, when the discrimination result by the discrimination means is the specific discrimination result in which the privilege game is executed, the discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result is used. Since the specific effect is more likely to be executed than in a certain case, it is possible to easily give the player both the privilege game and the specific effect at the same time. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be increased.

In any of the game machines B2 to B4, the operation timing suggested by the specific effect executed by the effect executing means is at least one ball that has flowed out of the storage means when the operation is executed at the operation timing. The gaming machine B5 is set so as to be movable up to the variable means that has been changed to the second state.

According to the game machine B5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B4, the operation timing at which at least one ball discharged from the storage means reaches the variable means changed to the second state is determined by the specific effect. Therefore, when the ball stored in the storage means is discharged from the storage means while the effect suggesting the discrimination result of the discrimination means is being executed, the ball enters the specific ball entry means. It is possible to suppress the storage.

In any of the game machines B2 to B5, the effect executing means notifies information based on the discrimination result by the discriminating means based on the operation of the operating means during the period during which the specific effect is being executed. A game machine B6 characterized in that it executes a notification effect.

According to the game machine B6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines B2 to B5, information based on the discrimination result of the discrimination means is provided based on the operation of the operation means during the period when the specific effect is being executed. Since the notification effect for notifying is executed, the player can pay attention to the notification effect. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the action of causing the balls stored in the storage means to flow out from the storage means.

In the game machines B2 to B6, during the period when the privilege game is being executed by the privilege game execution means, the advantage suggestion effect execution means for executing the advantage suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player is provided. A game machine B7 characterized by having.

According to the game machine B7, in addition to the effects of the game machines B2 to B6, the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player is suggested by the advantage suggestion effect during the period when the privilege game is executed. The game value during game execution can be increased, and the player's motivation to play can be increased.

<Feature C group> (Make it difficult to see the operation of the movable valve)
A ball-entry means capable of entering a ball, a first state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball-entry means, and a second state in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball-entry means than the first state. A predetermined condition is satisfied with a variable means that can be changed, and a switching means that can switch at least a part of the variable means between a difficult state in which it is difficult to see from the outside and an easy state in which it is easier to see than the difficult state. In this case, the gaming machine C1 is characterized by having a switching control means for switching from the difficult state to the easy state by the switching means.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a variable means that can be changed between a permissible position that allows a game ball launched on a game board to enter a specific area and a regulated position that is regulated is provided, and the variable means. When the ball passes through the variable means in the allowable position, the ball passes through a specific area, and there is a case where a privilege is given to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2015-083161).

In such a conventional game machine, whether or not the ball enters a specific area is determined by the timing at which the game ball launched on the game board reaches the movable means, so that the player can see the game ball. It was possible to entertain at what timing the variable means was reached. However, since it is configured so that the player can grasp the operating state of the movable means, there is a problem that the game ball is brought to the variable means at the timing when the movable means becomes the allowable position. there were. In addition, since the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, the player's early detection that the launched game ball does not enter the specific entrance is reduced, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. There was a problem that it would end up.

According to the game machine C1, the variable is variable between a first state in which the ball is more likely to enter the ball entry means and a second state in which the ball is less likely to enter the ball entry means than the first state. Since at least a part of the variable state of the means can be switched between a difficult state where it is difficult to see from the outside and an easy state where it is easier to see than the difficult state by the switching means, the state of the variable means is not grasped by the player. You can set the state and the state to be grasped. Therefore, there is an effect that the player's motivation to play can be suppressed from being lowered by the player's early detection that the launched game ball does not enter the specific entrance. ..

In the game machine C1, the switching means includes a shielding member arranged on the front side of the variable means, and an irradiation means capable of irradiating the shielding member with light of a specific color from the back side. However, the shielding means is configured to be in the difficult state when not irradiated by the irradiation means, and to be changed to the easy state by being irradiated by the irradiation means. Characteristic gaming machine C2.

According to the game machine C2, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, it is possible to switch between a difficult state and an easy state by irradiating light by the irradiation means, so that there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed. ..

In the game machine C1, the switching means has a movable member movable between a front side position of the variable means and a retracted position retracted from the front side of the variable means, and the switching control means moves the movable member. The gaming machine C3 is characterized in that it switches to the difficult state by moving it to the front side position and switches to the easy state by moving the movable member to the retracted position.

According to the game machine C3, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, it is possible to switch between the difficult state and the easy state by moving the movable member, so that the switching means can be easily designed. is there.

In the game machine C1, the switching means is a shielding member arranged on the front side of the variable means, an irradiation means capable of irradiating the shielding member with light, and the shielding member by the irradiation means. The shielding means has a variable means for changing the incident angle of the light emitted to the light, and the shielding means can be changed to the easy state by setting the incident angle of the light to the first angle by the variable means. A game machine C4 characterized in that it is configured as such.

According to the game machine C4, in addition to the effect of the game machine C1, the shielding member can be changed to an easy state only by changing each of the incidents of light on the shielding member, so that the switching means can be easily designed. It has the effect of being able to.

In the game machine C4, the variable means is a movable means for moving the shielding member, and by moving the shielding member by the movable means, the incident angle of the light is set to the first angle. A game machine C5 characterized by this.

According to the game machine C5, in addition to the effect of the game machine C4, by moving the shielding member, each incident of light is set to the first angle, so that the shielding member can be easily moved without moving the irradiation means. Since it can be changed, there is an effect that the switching means can be easily designed.

In any of the game machines C1 to C5, a ball detecting means capable of detecting a ball flowing down toward the variable means is provided, and when the ball detecting means detects a ball, the predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine C6 characterized by being present.

According to the game machine C6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C5, when it is detected that the ball flows down toward the variable means, a predetermined condition is satisfied. It has the effect of suppressing the situation where the flow cannot be seen.

In any of the game machines C1 to C6, an entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determination means for executing determination when a ball enters the entry means, and a determination means thereof. An effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting a discrimination result by the discrimination means, a privilege game execution means for executing a privilege game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result, and the discrimination means. When the measurement means has a measuring means for measuring the number of times of discrimination, and the measuring means continuously measures the number of times of discrimination in which the discrimination result of the discrimination means is a discrimination result other than the specific discrimination result, the number of discriminations is measured. The gaming machine C7, characterized in that the predetermined conditions are satisfied.

According to the game machine C7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C1 to C6, when the discrimination result of the discrimination means is other than the specific discrimination result for a predetermined number of times in a row, the shielding member may be in an easy state. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to prevent the player from being in an extremely disadvantageous state.

In any of the game machines C2 to C7, the second irradiation means that irradiates light different from the irradiation means, and the irradiation means or the second irradiation means based on the establishment of the first condition. It has an irradiation control means for executing irradiation control and a second condition establishment determination means for determining the establishment of a second condition different from the first condition based on the establishment of the first condition. The irradiation control means executes the irradiation control on the irradiation means when the second condition is satisfied, and causes the second irradiation means when the second condition is not satisfied. On the other hand, the gaming machine C8 is characterized in that the irradiation control is executed.

According to the game machine C8, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines C2 to C7, when the first condition for executing the irradiation control is satisfied, it is based on the determination result of whether or not the second condition is satisfied. Since the target for executing the irradiation control is different, the irradiation control by the second irradiation means is executed even when the shielding member is not made easy, so that the effect of the light irradiation is reduced. It has the effect of being able to suppress.

By arranging the irradiation means and the second irradiation means in the vicinity thereof, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable with the effect of irradiating the light. Further, when the configuration of the game machine C8 is used, the content of the irradiation control by the irradiation control means is made the same, and the switching control for switching only the output destination for executing the control to the irradiation means and the second irradiation means can be executed. It is good to do. As a result, it is possible to reduce the control load of the irradiation control means and suppress the decrease in the effect of the effect.

<Feature D group> (Rhythm game is set so that the operation means is operated at a specific timing)
A game area where the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. D1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine D1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific entering means. It is easily constructed. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine D1, of the effect executing means capable of executing the operation effect whose effect mode is changed according to the operation on the operation means and the operation effect executed by the effect execution means, the operation is performed within a specific period. An effect mode variable means that changes the effect mode to a specific effect mode when the means is operated, and a specific timing setting means that sets a specific timing based on the state of the variable means that is variable by the variable control means. A gaming machine characterized by having an operation effect setting means for setting the specific period in the operation effect based on the specific timing set by the specific timing setting means when a specific condition is satisfied. D2.

According to the game machine D2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine D1, the effect execution means executes an operation effect in which the effect mode is changed according to the operation corresponding to the operation means, and the operation means is performed during the operation effect. Since the specific period in which the effect mode is changed to the specific effect mode based on the operation can be set by the specific timing set based on the state of the variable means, the operation effect and the state of the variable means can be set. It becomes possible to associate. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operating means.

In the game machine D2, the specific timing is a timing at which at least one ball flowing out of the storage means can be moved to the variable means variable to the first state when the operating means is operated. The game machine D3 characterized in that it is set in.

According to the game machine D3, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2, the timing at which at least one ball flowing out of the storage means can be moved to the variable means changed to the first state when the operating means is operated is a specific timing. Therefore, by operating the operation means so as to change the effect mode to the specific effect mode in the operation effect, it is possible to facilitate the ball stored in the storage means to enter the specific ball entry means. it can. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically participated in the operation production and the player's motivation to play can be enhanced.

In the game machine D2 or D3, an operation determining means for determining whether or not the operating means has been operated within the specific period, a storage means for storing information updated based on the determination result of the operation determining means, and a storage means thereof. The gaming machine D4 is characterized by having a frequency variable means for varying the frequency of establishment of a specific condition based on the information stored in the storage means.

According to the game machine D4, in addition to the effect of the game machine D2 or D3, the frequency of establishment of the specific condition is changed according to whether or not the operation means is operated within the specific period in the operation effect, so that the player Can be enthusiastically participated in the operation production. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of the operation effect can be enhanced.

In this case, it is desirable to increase the frequency of establishment of the specific conditions as the number of times the operation means is operated within the specific period set during the operation effect increases. With such a configuration, it is possible for the player to enthusiastically operate the operation means within a specific period, and there is an effect that the effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced.

In any of the game machines D2 to D4, a second operating means different from the operating means is provided, and the operating effect executed by the effect executing means depends on the operation on the operating means or the second operating means. The gaming machine D5, characterized in that the effect mode is variable.

According to the game machine D5, in addition to the effect of any one of the game machines D2 to D4, the operation means that can be operated can be increased by the operation effect, so that the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines D2 to D5, the operation effect executed by the effect executing means sets the specific period based on the predetermined music, and corresponds to the progress of the predetermined music. The specific period settable area storage means in which a plurality of specific period settable areas in which the specific period can be set are stored, and the plurality of specific period settable areas stored in the specific period settable area storage means. It has a matching portion determining means for determining a portion that matches the specific timing, and a specific period setting means for setting the specific period of the operation effect at the portion determined to match by the matching location determining means. A game machine D6 characterized by.

According to the game machine D6, in the operation effect in which the specific period is set based on the music, the specific period of the operation effect is set in the place where the specific period settable area corresponding to the progress of the music and the specific timing match. Therefore, it is possible to operate the operation means at a specific timing by using a specific period corresponding to the music used for the operation effect, and there is an effect that the effect of the operation effect can be further enhanced.

<Characteristic E group> (Correct the operation effect based on the ball flow situation)
A ball path through which the ball can pass, a ball passage detecting means for detecting that the ball has passed a specific position among the ball paths, and the ball passing detecting means for detecting the ball after a predetermined condition is satisfied. A period setting means for setting a first period as a period until the first period is set, a notification timing setting means for setting a notification timing for notifying a specific effect mode based on the first period set in the period setting means, and a notification timing setting means thereof. The effect notification means for notifying the specific effect mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means, and the period specifying the passage period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the ball passage detection means detects the ball. The period is based on the means, the period determining means for discriminating the passing period specified by the period specifying means, and the first period set by the period setting means, and the discriminating result by the period discriminating means. The gaming machine E1 having a period correction means for correcting the first period set in the setting means.

Here, in a game machine such as a pachinko machine, in order to notify the player of the flow state of the game ball in an easy-to-understand manner, there is one that executes an effect corresponding to the period in which the game ball flows down. A variable means that can be changed between an allowable position that allows a game ball launched on a production game board for a predetermined period at a specific timing to enter a specific entry port and a regulated position that is regulated is provided. When the ball passes through the variable means in the allowable position, the ball enters the specific entry port, and a privilege is given to the player. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-23516).

In such a conventional game machine, whether or not the ball enters the specific entry port is determined by the timing at which the game ball launched on the game board reaches the movable means. It was possible to entertain at what timing the game ball reached the movable means. However, since it is configured so that the player can grasp the operating state of the movable means, there is a problem that the game ball is brought to the variable means at the timing when the movable means becomes the allowable position. there were. In addition, since the player can grasp the operation status of the movable means, the player's early detection that the launched game ball does not enter the specific entrance is reduced, and the player's motivation to play is reduced. There was a problem that it would end up.

According to the game machine E1, the first period referred to when the notification timing for notifying the specific effect mode is set can be corrected based on the passing period during which the ball actually passes, so that the ball passes through. It is possible to easily match the situation with the execution status of the specific effect mode. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of production.

Here, when the configuration of the game machine E1 is used for a game machine in which an effect for suggesting whether or not the ball passes a specific ball path is executed as a specific effect mode, the passage status of the ball It is possible to suppress a problem that the notification timing of the specific effect mode is deviated and the effect of suggesting that the ball passes the specific ball path is executed after the ball has passed the specific ball path. Can be done.

The game machine E2 is characterized in that, in the game machine E1, the specific effect mode notified by the effect notification means suggests that the ball passes through the specific position.

According to the game machine E2, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1, the timing at which the effect suggesting that the ball passes a specific position is notified can be corrected according to the period during which the ball actually passes. , There is an effect that the effect can be further enhanced.

The game machine E1 or E2 has a ball passage determining means for determining that a ball has passed a predetermined position on the upstream side of the specific position in the ball path, and the ball passing determining means determines the predetermined position. The gaming machine E3 is characterized in that the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined that the ball has passed.

According to the game machine E3, in addition to the effect of the game machine E1 or E2, a preset notification timing is set based on the period from when the ball passes a predetermined position to when the ball passes a specific position in the ball path. Since the correction can be made based on the actual passing period of the ball, there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine E3, the case where the ball has passed the predetermined position is shown as the trigger for the establishment of the predetermined condition, but as a method for determining that the ball has passed, the passage of the ball is actually detected by a detecting means (for example, proximity). In addition to the method of detecting with a sensor), for example, a method of detecting that the regulating member that regulates the flow of the ball toward a predetermined position is changed from the regulated position to the release position that releases the regulation can be considered. In this case, even if the regulating member is changed to the release position, the ball does not always flow down to the predetermined position immediately. Therefore, for example, the ball can flow down to the predetermined position on the upstream side of the regulating member. It is preferable to use a method of providing a retaining means for retaining the ball and determining that the regulating member has changed to the release position in a state where the ball is retained in the retaining means. Even if such a method is used, it can be indirectly determined that the ball has passed the predetermined position, and the same effect as that of the game machine E3 can be obtained.

In the game machine E3, the ball path has a first ball path provided with the specific position and a second ball path branching from the first ball path in a section between the predetermined position and the specific position. A game machine E4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine E3, a ball that has passed the predetermined position may pass through the second ball path without passing through the specific position. Therefore, the player can determine which ball path the ball actually passes through. It has the effect of being able to entertain and improve the interest of the game.

In the game machine E4, the ball path is divided into a first state in which a ball passing through the ball path is more likely to pass through the first ball path and a second state in which the ball is more likely to pass through the second ball path than the first state. Based on the variable means capable of changing the path state of the ball and the path state of the ball path variable by the variable means, is the path state in which the ball passing through the predetermined position can pass through the first ball path? When the effect notification means determines that a ball that has passed the predetermined position is in a path state capable of passing through the first ball path. In addition, the gaming machine E5 is characterized in that it notifies the specific effect mode.

According to the game machine E5, when the ball is in a state where it can pass through a specific position, the specific effect mode is notified. Therefore, when the specific effect mode is notified, the ball passes through the specific position to the player. There is an effect that you can expect it and you can enhance the production effect.

Further, in this case, if the predetermined first period and the period actually spent for the ball to actually pass from the predetermined position to the specific position are different, the specific effect mode is notified even though the specific effect mode is notified. There is a problem that the ball does not pass through the first ball path frequently, but according to the game machine E5, it is based on the period required for the ball to actually pass from a predetermined position to a specific position. Since the first period can be corrected, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific effect mode can be increased and the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines E3 to E5, the second ball passage detecting means for detecting that the ball has passed the second specific position in the second ball path and the ball passing through the predetermined position. It has a second period specifying means for specifying a second passing period from to being detected by the second ball passing detecting means, and the period determining means includes a previous passing period, the second passing period, and the above. A game machine E6 characterized in that it distinguishes from the first period.

According to the game machine E6, in addition to the effects of the game machines E3 to E5, the period required to pass through the second ball passage can be used to correct the first period, so that the first ball passage can be corrected. Compared with the case where the first period is corrected based only on the ball, the information for correcting the first period can be increased, and the correction accuracy can be improved. Therefore, there is an effect that the reliability of the specific effect mode can be increased and the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the configuration of the game machine E6, it is preferable to provide the second specific position at a position that requires the same period as the period required for the ball to pass from the predetermined position to the specific position. As a result, the information on the transit period specified by the period specifying means and the information on the second transit period specified by the second period specifying means can be collected without being separated, and the control load can be reduced. It has the effect of being able to do it.

Further, in the game machine E6, the period determining means uses the passing period and the second passing period, but it may be configured to use only the second passing period.

<Feature F group> (Allows multiple operating means to be operated by the same operation)
The first operating means that can be operated by the player, the first discriminating means that determines that the first operating means has been operated, and the second operating means that is different from the first operating means that can be operated by the player. An effect of executing a predetermined effect based on the operation means, the second discriminating means for discriminating that the operation has been performed on the second operating means, and the discriminating result by the first discriminating means or the second discriminating means. In a gaming machine having an executing means, an interlocking means for causing the second operating means to variably operate in conjunction with a variable operation of the first operating means, and the interlocking means are provided to the first operating means. The variable control means has an interlocking state in which the second operation means is interlocked and a variable control means for changing the connection state to a release state, and the variable control means causes the interlocking means when a predetermined condition is satisfied. A game machine F1 characterized in that it is variable to the interlocking state.

Here, in some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, a plurality of operating means that can be operated by a player are provided, and an operation effect is executed based on the operation of each operating means. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-55481).

In such a conventional game machine, since the operation effect is executed by the player operating the operation means corresponding to the effect among the plurality of operation means, the player can perform the operation effect. Of these, it is necessary to select and operate the corresponding operating means, and there is a problem that the motivation to operate the operating means is reduced. In addition, by operating one of the plurality of operating means, an effect corresponding to the operation of one operating means is executed, so that an unexpected effect can be provided to the player. There was a problem that it could not be done.

According to the game machine F1, when the player operates the first operating means, either an effect based on the determination result of the first determination means or an effect based on the determination result of the second determination means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to perform the same effect as when a plurality of operating means are operated only by operating one operating means, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in motivation to operate the operating means. is there.

Further, when the first operating means is operated, it is possible to execute an effect based on the determination result of the second determination means, so that it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and the effect of the effect. It has the effect of being able to increase.

In the game machine F1, when the first operating means is operated in a state where the interlocking means is changed to the interlocking state by the variable control means, the effect executing means is discriminated by the second discriminating means. The gaming machine F2, characterized in that the predetermined effect is executed based on the result.

According to the game machine F2, in addition to the effect of the game machine F1, by changing the interlocking means to the interlocking state, when the first operating means is operated, an effect based on the discriminating result of the second discriminating means is executed. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In the game machine F2, the first operating means and the second operating means are configured to be movable from the first position to the second position, and the first discriminating means and the second discriminating means are It is for determining that the first operating means or the second operating means corresponding to each has moved to the second position, and the first operating means is moved from the first position to the second position. The gaming machine F3 is characterized in that the distance for moving the second operating means from the first position to the second position is shorter than the distance to be moved.

According to the game machine F3, in addition to the effect of the game machine F2, the second operating means has a shorter distance until it is determined that the operation has been performed than the first operating means. In the interlocking state, when the first operating means is operated, it is possible to reliably execute the effect based on the discrimination result of the second discriminating means. Therefore, there is an effect that an unexpected effect can be executed with a simple configuration.

In any of the game machines F1 to F3, the interlocking means is provided inside the game machine which is difficult to see from the outside.

According to the game machine F4, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines F1 to F3, since the interlocking means is provided at a position where it is difficult to see from the outside, it is difficult for the player to grasp the state of the interlocking means. Can be done. Therefore, it is possible to provide the player with an unexpected effect, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.

In any of the game machines F1 to F4, a game area in which the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area and capable of storing the ball that has entered, and a player based on the ball entering the game. The storage means is changed from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the specific ball entry means to which the advantageous privilege is given and the operation on the second operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the storage control means and the storage control means, and the specified ball that has flowed out. The gaming machine F5 is characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the ball entering means.

According to the game machine F5, in addition to the effects of the game machines F1 to F4, when the first operating means is operated, the storage control means may change from the storage state to the release state, so that the player On the other hand, there is an effect that an unexpected game can be provided and the effect of production can be enhanced.

In the game machine F5, a timing setting means for setting an operation timing of the second operation means in which a ball flowing out of the storage means easily enters the specific ball entry means, and an operation timing set by the timing setting means. The gaming machine F6 is characterized by having an operation effect executing means for executing an operation effect for operating the first operation means based on the above.

According to the game machine F6, in addition to the effect of the game machine F5, it is possible to make the ball enter the specific ball entry means by operating the first operation means according to the operation effect of operating the first operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically participate in the operation production.

In the game machine F6, the operation effect is an effect in which the operation timing for operating the first operation means is notified a plurality of times, and at least one of the operation timings notified a plurality of times is the timing setting means. The gaming machine F7, which is characterized by the operation timing set by.

According to the game machine F7, in addition to the effect of the game machine F6, one of a plurality of operation timing notifications executed during the operation effect is a second operation means that makes it easy to enter the specific ball entry means. Since it is possible to suggest the operation timing, the first operation means can be operated for all of the plurality of operation timings executed during the operation effect. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

<Characteristic G group> (Pre-read and notify the state in which the movable valve is advantageous)
A game area where a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. G1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine G1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball enters the specific ball entering means. It is structured so that it is easy to do. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine G1, the variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled by the variable control means includes at least a first period in which the variable means is likely to be in the first state and the variable means rather than the first period. Has a second period in which it is difficult to be in the first state, and a period determining means for determining the timing at which the first period is set as variable control of the variable means by the variable control means, and a period determining means thereof. The gaming machine G2 is characterized by having a specific effect executing means for executing a specific effect when the timing at which the first period is set is determined.

According to the game machine G2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine G1, the execution of the specific effect causes the player to understand that the first period in which the variable means is likely to be in the first state is set. This has the effect of allowing the player to play the game enthusiastically.

The game machine G2 has an advantageous suggestion effect executing means for executing an advantageous suggestion effect suggesting an operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player when a predetermined condition is satisfied, and the specific effect executing means is The gaming machine G3 is characterized in that the specific effect is executed during the period from the establishment of the predetermined condition to the execution of the advantageous suggestion effect.

According to the game machine G3, in addition to the effect of the game machine G2, it is possible to notify the player that the advantageous suggestion effect of this time may be executed during the first period, so that the player can be notified. It has the effect of being able to play games enthusiastically.

In the game machine G3, the specific effect executing means executes the specific effect when the first period is set within the period in which the advantageous suggestion effect is executed. Machine G4.

According to the game machine G4, in addition to the effect of the game machine G3, it is possible to notify the player that the advantageous suggestion effect of this time will be executed during the first period, so that the player can enthusiastically play the game. It has the effect of being able to do it.

In any of the game machines G2 to G4, the storage means has a storage determination means for determining that the ball is stored, and the specific effect executing means has at least the storage means for the ball by the storage determination means. The gaming machine G5 is characterized in that the specific effect can be executed when it is determined that the above-mentioned is stored.

According to the game machine G5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G2 to G4, the specific effect is executed only when the ball is stored in the storage means, so that the player positively operates the operation means. Can be operated. In addition, since it is prohibited to execute the specific effect when the ball is not stored in the storage means, the specific effect is executed unnecessarily, and the player can grasp the variable pattern of the variable member. It has the effect of being able to suppress this.

In any of the game machines G2 to G5, a ball entry means provided in the game area and capable of entering a ball, a determination means for executing discrimination when a ball enters the ball entry means, and a discrimination means thereof. It has an effect executing means for executing an effect for suggesting a discrimination result by the discrimination means, and a privilege game executing means for executing a privilege game based on the discrimination result by the discrimination means being a specific discrimination result. The game machine G6 is characterized in that, as the specific effect, the specific effect executing means executes a specific fusion effect that also notifies that the determination result is the specific determination result by the determination means.

According to the game machine G6, in addition to the effects played by the game machines G2 to G5, it is possible to execute an effect that combines the fact that the privilege game is executed and the fact that the first period is set, which is more advantageous to the player. It is possible to notify that a different gaming state is executed. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can play the game while having a sense of expectation.

In any of the game machines G2 to G6, the specific effect executing means changes the notification mode for notifying the operation timing of the operation means, which is suggested during the advantageous suggestion effect, to the specific notification mode. A game machine G7 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine G7, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines G2 to G6, it is possible to notify the player that the first period is set depending on the notification mode during the advantageous suggestion effect, so that the effect effect. Has the effect of being able to increase.

<Characteristic H group> (The difficulty level of the release suggestion effect can be selected)
A game area where a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. H1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine H1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific entering means. It is easily constructed. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine H1, the advantageous suggestion effect executing means for executing the advantageous suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player based on the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means. , A selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect execution means, and an effect of setting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means. A game machine H2 having an aspect setting means.

According to the game machine H2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H1, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantageous suggestion effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. This has the effect of enhancing the effect of production.

In the game machine H2, the advantageous suggestion effect executed by the advantageous suggestion effect executing means can suggest the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player a plurality of times, and the effect mode setting means Based on the effect mode selected by the selection means, the suggestion number setting means for setting the suggestion number of the advantageous suggestion effect, and the suggestion number of suggestion set by the suggestion number setting means, the advantageous suggestion effect The gaming machine H3, which comprises a suggestion mode setting means for setting a suggestion mode.

According to the game machine H3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H2, the number of suggestions and the suggestion mode of the advantageous suggestion effect are set based on the effect mode selected by the selection means, so that the player is ambitious. Has the effect of being able to select the selection means.

In the game machine H3, when the suggested number of times is set by the suggested number of times setting means, the suggested mode set by the suggested mode setting means can be visually recognized by the player. Also, the gaming machine H4 is characterized in that a second aspect, which is more difficult to see than the first aspect, is easily set.

According to the game machine H4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H3, when a production mode in which a large number of suggested times is set is selected by the selection means, the operation means is operated at the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player. The second aspect, which is difficult to operate, will be set. As a result, does the player select an effect mode corresponding to the number of suggestions less than a predetermined number of times, and execute an advantageous suggestion effect in which the first mode is likely to be set? It is possible to select an effect mode corresponding to a predetermined number of times or more of suggestion times, and to select whether to execute an advantageous suggestion effect in which the second mode is likely to be set. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can select an advantageous suggestion effect according to his / her skill and can enthusiastically participate in the effect.

In the game machine H3 or H4, when the suggested number of times is set by the suggested number of times setting means, the suggestion mode setting means is more than when the suggested number of times less than the predetermined number of times is set. The gaming machine H5 is characterized in that a short interval is easily set as an interval in which the suggestion mode is set.

According to the game machine H5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine H3 or H4, when a selection means selects an effect mode in which a large number of suggestions is set, an effect mode in which a suggestion number less than a predetermined number is set. Since it is easier to set a short interval as the interval for setting the suggestion mode than when is selected, the player can select an advantageous suggestion effect according to his / her skill and enthusiastically participate in the effect. It has the effect of being able to.

In any of the game machines H3 to H5, the operation content discriminating means for discriminating the operation content of the operation means and the operation content discriminated by the operation content discriminating means while the advantageous suggestion effect is being executed are The gaming machine H6 is characterized by having an effect mode variable means for changing the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect to a special effect mode that is advantageous to the player when a predetermined operation condition is satisfied.

According to the game machine H6, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines H3 to H5, the production mode of the advantage suggestion effect is a special effect mode that is advantageous to the player, based on the operation content for the operation means during the advantage suggestion effect. Since it can be changed to, there is an effect that the player can enthusiastically operate the operation means.

In the game machine H6, the operation content determination means determines the number of operations in which the operation means is operated at the operation timing of the operation means that is advantageous to the player, and the operation content determination means determines the number of operations. The gaming machine H7 is characterized in that, when the number of operations reaches the predetermined number of times, the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect is changed to the special effect mode by the effect mode variable means.

According to the game machine H7, in addition to the effect of the game machine H6, it is possible to change the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect to a special effect mode advantageous to the player based on the number of times the operating means is operated at an appropriate timing. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be made to operate the operation means more enthusiastically.

<Feature I group> (Valve operation monitoring on the sub side)
A game area where a ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. I1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235). In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine I1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific entering means. It is easily constructed. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

The game machine I1 has a main control means for executing game control and a slave control means for executing game control based on a control signal from the main control means, and the main control means is said to be said. The slave control means includes a storage control means, the variable control means, and a variable control information generation means for generating variable control information for notifying the slave control means of the control content of the variable control means. , A display means for executing a predetermined effect, a variable information storage means for storing variable information corresponding to a predetermined variable pattern in which the variable means is variably controlled, and the above-mentioned output from the main control means. Based on the variable control information, the variable control situation specifying means for specifying the variable control status of the variable means and the variable control situation specifying means for specifying the variable control status by using the variable information stored in the variable information storage means are specified. It is characterized by having an effect setting means for setting an effect to be displayed on the display means based on a variable control situation, and an effect executing means for executing the effect set by the effect setting means. Game machine I2 to play.

According to the game machine I2, in addition to the effect of the game machine I1, the slave control means is output from the main control means when the effect based on the variable state of the variable means variably controlled by the main control means is executed. Since the effect is executed based on the variable control information and the variable information stored in the variable information storage means of the slave control means, there is an effect that the control load of the main control means can be reduced. ..

In the game machine I2, the variable control information generating means includes, at least, start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means in the variable control information first generated after the power is turned on to the game machine. A game machine I3 characterized by.

According to the game machine I3, in addition to the effect of the game machine I2, the variable control information generated first after the power of the game machine is turned on includes the start timing information for starting the variable operation of the variable means. Therefore, there is an effect that the accuracy of specifying the variable control status by the slave control means can be improved.

In the game machine I3, the main control means has an operation start period setting means capable of setting a different period as an operation start period from when the power is turned on to the game machine to when the variable operation of the variable means is started. A game machine I4 characterized by being a thing.

According to the game machine I4, in addition to the effect of the game machine I3, it is possible to make the period from when the power is turned on to the game machine until the variable operation of the variable means is started. There is an effect that it is possible to suppress the player from easily grasping the variable movement of.

In the game machines I2 to I4, the main control means is a storage means in which a plurality of the variable patterns for variably controlling the variable means by the variable control means are stored, and when the power is turned on to the game machine. The variable control means has an initial variable pattern setting means for setting a variable pattern to be executed first from the plurality of variable patterns, and the variable control means previously stores the plurality of variable patterns stored in the storage means. The variable control information generation means is repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, and at least the initial variable pattern setting means is set to the variable control information that is first generated after the power is turned on to the game machine. The gaming machine I5, which includes the initial variable pattern setting information.

According to the game machine I5, in addition to the effect of any of the game machines I2 to I4, even if the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, the game machine can be used. Since the variable pattern to be executed first can be set from a plurality of variable patterns when the power is turned on, it is possible to prevent the player from easily grasping the variable operation of the variable means. It has the effect of being able to do it. Further, since the variable means is variably controlled so that a plurality of variable patterns are repeatedly executed in a predetermined order, there is an effect that the processing load of the variable control can be reduced.

<Characteristic J group> (The operation interval can be selected by the player in the operation effect of operating the operation means a predetermined number of times).
A game area where the ball can flow down, a storage means provided in the game area where the ball can be stored, and a specific entry in which a player is given a privilege based on the ball entering. Storage control that changes the storage means from the storage state in which the ball can be stored to the release state in which the storage state is released, based on the ball means, the operation means that can be operated by the player, and the operation on the operation means. A first state in which a ball that has flowed out of the storage means can easily enter the specific ball entry means by being changed to the release state by the means and the storage control means, and the outflowing ball is the specific ball entry. A gaming machine characterized by having a variable means that can be changed to a second state in which it is difficult to enter the means, and a variable control means that variably controls the variable means according to a predetermined variable pattern. J1.

Here, in a gaming machine such as a pachinko machine, a holding device capable of holding the game ball launched on the game board is provided, and the game ball held in the holding device is sent to the entrance by the player performing a release operation. Some have a structure that allows them to flow down. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-95235).

In such a conventional game machine, it is possible for the player to determine the timing at which the game ball held in the holding device is allowed to flow down, but the player is determined according to the timing at which the game ball is allowed to flow down. Since it is not possible to make different benefits given to the player, it is not possible to enthusiastically aim the timing of the release operation, and there is a problem that the motivation to play is reduced.

According to the game machine J1, when the storage means is changed to the released state by the operation of the operating means and the outflowing ball moves to the variable means changed to the first state, the ball is entered into the specific entering means. It is easily constructed. As a result, when the game ball is stored in the storage means, it is possible to provide the player with the enjoyment of operating the operation means at a timing when the variable means makes it easier to enter the specific ball entry means. Therefore, there is an effect that it is possible to suppress a problem that the motivation for playing is reduced.

As the variable means described above, in addition to a member (for example, a movable valve) capable of variable operation between a protruding position and a buried position by driving an electric drive source, the variable means can be changed to the above-mentioned first state and second state. It may be a possible rotating body or a switching member for switching the flow path of the sphere. Further, it may be a switching member that switches the flow direction of the next flowing ball by the flowing ball without using an electric drive source.

In the game machine J1, the advantageous suggestion effect executing means for executing the advantageous suggestion effect suggesting the operation timing of the operation means which is advantageous to the player based on the variable pattern of the variable means executed by the variable control means. , A selection means capable of selecting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect executed by the advantage suggestion effect execution means, and an effect of setting the effect mode of the advantage suggestion effect based on the effect mode selected by the selection means. A game machine J2 having an aspect setting means.

According to the game machine J2, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J1, the advantageous suggestion effect is executed in the effect mode selected by the player, so that the advantageous suggestion effect can be executed in the effect mode desired by the player. This has the effect of enhancing the production effect.

In the game machine J2, the advantageous suggestion effect executed by the advantageous suggestion effect executing means notifies the operation timing of the operation means at predetermined intervals, and serves as a notification interval in which the operation timing of the operation means is notified. , The first interval and the second interval which is shorter than the first interval can be set, and the selection means is at least the first as the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect. The gaming machine J3 is characterized in that the first effect mode corresponding to the interval and the second effect mode corresponding to the second interval can be selected.

According to the game machine J3, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J2, the following effects are played. That is, the length of the notification interval in which the operation timing of the operation means is notified can be changed by selecting the effect mode of the advantageous suggestion effect by the selection means. As a result, the player can select an effect mode corresponding to the operation interval according to his / her skill, and thus can actively participate in the effect using the operation means. Therefore, there is an effect that the effect of production can be enhanced.

The game machine J3 has a display means for displaying the advantageous suggestion effect and a selection display control means for displaying a plurality of the effect modes selectable by the selection means on the display means as a selection screen. The game machine J4 is characterized in that the display control means causes the display means to display the notification interval corresponding to the plurality of selectable effect modes.

According to the game machine J4, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J3, the following effects are played. That is, one effect mode can be selected by the selection means after grasping the notification interval at which the operation timing of the operation means is notified from the plurality of effect modes displayed on the display means. As a result, the player can easily select an effect mode in which the operation timing is notified at the intended notification interval, so that it is possible to provide an easy-to-understand game and enhance the interest of the game. is there.

The game machine J4 is characterized in that the selection display control means displays the number of times information indicating the number of times the operation timing of the operation means is notified corresponding to the plurality of production modes. J5.

According to the game machine J5, in addition to the effect played by the game machine J4, the following effects are played. That is, from the plurality of effect modes displayed on the display means, one effect mode can be selected by the selection means after grasping the number of times the operation means should be operated. As a result, when the number of operations is small, the notification interval for notifying the operation timing of the operation means is shortened, and when the number of operations is large, the notification interval for notifying the operation timing of the operation means is lengthened. It is possible to make it easier to select a suitable production mode. Therefore, there is an effect that the player can be enthusiastically participated in the game.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z1 is characterized in that the game machine is a slot machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the slot machine is "provided with a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming and displaying the identification information, and for operating a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). Due to this, the dynamic display of the identification information is started, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (stop button) or after a predetermined time has elapsed, and at the time of the stop. It is a game machine provided with a special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player, provided that the definite identification information of the above is the specific identification information. In this case, coins, medals, and the like are typical examples of the game medium.

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z2 is characterized in that the game machine is a pachinko game machine. Among them, the basic configuration of the pachinko gaming machine is provided with an operation handle, and the ball is launched into a predetermined game area according to the operation of the operation handle, and the ball is placed in a predetermined position in the game area. As a prerequisite for winning a prize (or passing through the operating port), the identification information dynamically displayed by the display means is fixedly stopped after a predetermined time. In addition, when a special gaming state occurs, a variable winning device (specific winning opening) arranged at a predetermined position in the gaming area is opened in a predetermined manner to enable a ball to be won, and is valuable according to the number of winnings. Some of them are given value (including not only prize balls but also data written on a magnetic card).

In any of the above-mentioned game machines, the game machine Z3 is characterized in that the game machine is a fusion of a pachinko game machine and a slot machine. Among them, as a basic configuration of the fused gaming machine, "a variable display means for dynamically displaying an identification information string composed of a plurality of identification information and then confirming the identification information is provided, and a starting operation means (for example, an operation lever). The variation of the identification information is started due to the operation of, and the dynamic display of the identification information is stopped due to the operation of the stop operation means (for example, the stop button) or after a predetermined time elapses. A special game state generating means for generating a special game state advantageous to the player is provided on the condition that the definite identification information at the time of stopping is the specific identification information, the ball is used as the game medium, and the identification information is described. A game machine that requires a predetermined number of balls to start the dynamic display of the game, and is configured to pay out a large number of balls when a special game state occurs. "
<Others>
In some gaming machines such as pachinko machines, in order to inform the player of the flow status of the game ball in an easy-to-understand manner, an effect corresponding to the period in which the game ball flows down is executed. In this conventional game machine, since the flow status of the game ball can be notified in an easy-to-understand manner, it is possible to entertain the player with the game based on the notification content (effect content). As a result, the interest was improved (for example, Patent Document 1: Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2011-23516).
However, further improvement of interest is required.
The present technical idea is made to solve the above-exemplified problems and the like, and an object thereof is to provide a gaming machine capable of improving a player's interest in playing a game.
<Means>
In order to achieve this purpose, the gaming machine of the technical idea 1 includes a ball path through which the ball can pass, a ball passage detecting means for detecting that the ball has passed a specific position among the ball paths, and a ball passage detecting means. Based on the period setting means for setting the first period as the period from the establishment of the predetermined condition to the detection of the ball by the ball passage detecting means and the first period set for the period setting means, the specific effect The notification timing setting means for setting the notification timing for notifying the mode, the effect notification means for notifying the specific effect mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means, and the ball passing after the predetermined condition is satisfied. Period determination for determining the period specifying means for specifying the passing period until the detecting means detects the ball, the passing period specified by the period specifying means, and the first period set by the period setting means. It has means and a period correction means for correcting the first period set in the period setting means based on the determination result by the period determination means.
The gaming machine of the technical idea 2 is the gaming machine described in the technical idea 1, and the specific effect mode notified by the effect notification means suggests that the ball passes through the specific position.
The game machine according to the technical idea 3 is a ball passage determining means for determining that the ball has passed a predetermined position on the upstream side of the specific position in the ball path in the game machine according to the technical idea 1 or 2. The predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined by the ball passage determining means that the ball has passed the predetermined position.
The gaming machine according to the technical idea 4 is the gaming machine according to the technical idea 3, wherein the ball path is a section between the first ball path provided with the specific position and the predetermined position and the specific position. It has a second ball path that branches off from the first ball path.
The game machine of the technical idea 5 is the first state in which the ball passing through the ball path easily passes through the first ball path in the game machine described in the technical idea 4, and the second state than the first state. A variable means that can change the path state of the ball path to a second state that easily passes through the ball path, and a ball that has passed the predetermined position based on the path state of the ball path that is variable by the variable means. It has a path state determining means for determining whether or not the path state can pass through the first ball path, and the effect notification means is such that the ball that the path state determining means has passed through the predetermined position is the first. When it is determined that the path state is such that the ball path can be passed, the specific effect mode is notified.
<Effect>
According to the game machine described in Technical Idea 1, a predetermined condition is satisfied as a ball path through which the ball can pass, a ball passage detecting means for detecting that the ball has passed a specific position among the ball paths, and The specific effect mode is notified based on the period setting means for setting the first period as the period until the ball passage detecting means detects the ball and the first period set in the period setting means. The notification timing setting means for setting the notification timing, the effect notification means for notifying the specific effect mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means, and the ball passage detecting means for the ball after the predetermined condition is satisfied. A period specifying means for specifying a passing period until the detection of the above, a period determining means for discriminating between the passing period specified by the period specifying means and the first period set by the period setting means, and a period determining means thereof. It has a period correction means for correcting the first period set in the period setting means based on the determination result by the period determination means.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 2, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1. That is, the specific effect mode notified by the effect notification means suggests that the sphere passes through the specific position.
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects of the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 1 or 2. That is, it has a ball passage determining means for determining that the ball has passed a predetermined position on the upstream side of the specific position in the ball path, and the ball has passed through the predetermined position by the ball passing determining means. When it is determined that the above-mentioned predetermined condition is satisfied.
As a result, it is possible to execute an effect corresponding to the situation of the ball passing through the ball path, and there is an effect that the effect of the effect can be enhanced.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 3. That is, the ball path has a first ball path provided with the specific position and a second ball path branching from the first ball path in a section between the predetermined position and the specific position. ..
This has the effect of improving the interest of the player in the game.
According to the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 5, the following effects are exhibited in addition to the effects produced by the gaming machine described in Technical Thought 4. That is, the path state of the ball path is divided into a first state in which a ball passing through the ball path is more likely to pass through the first ball path and a second state in which the ball is more likely to pass through the second ball path than the first state. Based on the variable means that can change and the path state of the ball path that is variable by the variable means, it is determined whether the ball that has passed the predetermined position is in the path state that can pass through the first ball path. The effect notification means includes a path state determining means, and when the path state determining means determines that a sphere that has passed the predetermined position is in a path state capable of passing through the first ball path, the above-mentioned It notifies a specific production mode.
This has the effect of enhancing the effect of production.

10 Pachinko machine (game machine )
630 Specified general entry port ( specific entry means)
770 First storage device (part of means)
771 Second storage device (part of means)
750 movable valve (variable means)
S1008 control means
S1009 Variable control means
S2111 effect execution means, suggestion effect execution means

Claims (5)

The ball path through which the ball can pass and
A ball passage detection means for detecting that a ball has passed a specific position in the ball path,
A period setting means for setting a first period as a period from the establishment of a predetermined condition to the detection of the ball by the ball passage detecting means, and a period setting means.
A notification timing setting means for setting a notification timing for notifying a specific effect mode based on the first period set in the period setting means, and a notification timing setting means.
An effect notification means that notifies the specific effect mode at the notification timing set by the notification timing setting means, and
A period specifying means for specifying the passing period from when the predetermined condition is satisfied until the ball passing detecting means detects the ball, and
A period determining means for discriminating between the passing period specified by the period specifying means and the first period set by the period setting means.
A gaming machine comprising: a period correction means for correcting the first period set in the period setting means based on a determination result by the period determination means. The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the specific effect mode notified by the effect notification means suggests that the ball passes through the specific position. It has a ball passage determining means for determining that a ball has passed a predetermined position on the upstream side of the specific position in the ball path.
The gaming machine according to claim 1 or 2, wherein the predetermined condition is satisfied when it is determined by the ball passage determining means that the ball has passed the predetermined position. The ball path is characterized by having a first ball path provided with the specific position and a second ball path branching from the first ball path in a section between the predetermined position and the specific position. The gaming machine according to claim 3. The path state of the ball path can be changed into a first state in which a ball passing through the ball path easily passes through the first ball path and a second state in which the ball passes through the second ball path more easily than the first state. Possible variable means and
Based on the path state of the ball path that is variable by the variable means, there is a path state determining means for determining whether the ball that has passed the predetermined position is in the path state that can pass through the first ball path. And
The effect notification means notifies the specific effect mode when the path state determining means determines that a ball that has passed the predetermined position is in a path state capable of passing through the first ball path. 4. The gaming machine according to claim 4.

Images